INFANTRY 

Drill  Regulations, 

United  States  Army. 


EVERY  STUDENT 

OF  THE 

NEW  DRILL  I^EQULATIONS 

Should  have  a copy  of  the  Special  Edition  of  the 
Infantry  Drill,  containing  the 

Interpretations  of  the  Drill, 

BY 

Lieut.  JOHN  T.  FRENCH,  Jr.,  4TH  Arl,  U.S.A., 
Recorder  of  the  Tactical  Board. 

Price,  bonnd  in  Bristol  Board,  50  cts.,  in  Leather,  $1. 

Sent  by  mail,  prepaid. 

A liberal  discount  is  made  on  orders  for  fifty  or  more 
We  also  furnish  the  New  Drill  Regulations  withou 
Interpretations.  Bound  in  Bristol  Board,  30  cts. ; ir 
leather,  75  cts. 

Drill  Regulations  for  Cavalry  and  Artillery,  ii 
leather,  each  $1.00. 

MANUAL  OF  "cUARD  DUTY. 

We  also  publish  the  New  Manual  of  Guard  Dut 
approved  by  the  War  Department,  and  which  supe; 
sedes  all  previous  publications. 


Bound  in  Bristol  Board 25  ct 

Bound  in  Leather 50  ct 


Sen^  by  mail^  prepaid^  on  receipt  of  price. 
Address 

ARMY  AND  NAVY  JOURNAL. 

93-101  Nassau  St..  New  York. 


INFAJVTRy 


Drill  Kegijlations, 


UNITED  STATES  ARMY. 


Adopted  Oct.  3,  1891. 


NEW  YORK : 

ARMY  AND  NAVY  JOURNAL, 

Bennett  Building,  93-101  Nassau  Street. 

B.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY. 

1896. 


Copyrighted  1891  by 

W.  C.  & F.  P.  Church,  Army  and  Navy  Journal, 
93-101  Nassau  Street,  New  York. 


, 3f,U 

Un  3i.' 

I?'/ 1 


^3 

i^-1 
' hr--4 

1^ 

‘!:^ 


War  Department, 
Washington^  October  3, 1891. 

A board  of  officers  consisting  of  Lieut.  Col.  John  C.  Bates,  Twen- 
tieth Infantry  ; Lieut.  Col.  George  B.  Sanford,  Ninth  Cavalry  ; Maj, 
Henrv  C.  Hasbrouck,  Fourth  Artillery ; Maj.  John  C.  Gilmore, 
Assistant  Adjutant-General  ; Capt.  Joseph  T.  Haskell,  Twenty-third 
Infantry  ; Capt.  Edward  S.  Godfrey,  Seventh  Cavalry  ; and  Capt. 
James  M.  Lancaster,  Third  Artillery,  with  First  Lieut.  George 
Andrews,  Twenty-fifth  Infantry,  as  recorder  at  first,  and  later,  First 
Lieut.  John  T.  French,  jr..  Fourth  Artillery,  having  prepared  a 
system  of  Drill  Regulations  for  infantry  which  has  been  approved 
by  the  President,  it  is  herewith  published  for  the  information  and 
government  of  the  Army,  and  for  the  observance  of  the  militia  of  the 
United  States. 

With  a view  to  insure  uniformity  throughout  the  Army,  all  infantry 
exercises  and  maneuvers  not  embraced  in  this  system  are  prohibited 
and  those  herein  prescribed  will  be  strictly  observed. 

Redfield  Proctor, 

Secretary  of  Wa/r, 


\n 


I 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  20iywith  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign  Alternates 


https://archive.org/details/infantrydrillregOOunit_0 


INFANTRY 

DRILL  EEGULATIOl^S. 


DEFINITIONS. 

Alignment — A straight  line,  upon  which  several  men 
or  bodies  of  troops  are  formed,  or  are  to  be  formed. 

Base — The  unit  on  which  a movement  is  regulated ; as, 
base  file,  company,  or  battalion. 

Center — The  middle  point  or  element  of  a command  ; 
a.s,  the  center  file,  company,  etc. 

Column — A formation  in  which  the  elements  are 
placed  one  behind  another,  whether  these  elements 
are  files,  fours,  platoons,  companies  or  larger  bodies. 

Deploy — To  extend  the  front ; as,  to  pass  from  column 
into  line. 

Depth — The  space  from  head  to  rear  of  any  formation, 
including  the  leading  and  rear  elements. 

The  depth  of  one  man  is  taken  as  twelve  inches. 

Disposition — The  distribution  of  the  fractions  of  a 
body  of  troops,  and  the  formations  and  duties  as- 
signed to  each,  for  the  accomplishment  of  a common 
end. 

Distance — An  open  space  in  the  direction  of  depth. 

The  distance  between  ranks  in  the  same  unit  is 
measured  from  the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear  to  the 
back  of  the  man  in’front. 

The  distance  between  two  subdivisions  in  column 
is  measured  in  like  manner  from  guide  to  guide. 

Between  two  commands  in  column,  one  in  rear  of 
the  other,  each  comprising  several  fractions,  the  dis- 
tance is  measured  from  the  rear  guide  of  the  com- 
mand  that  is  in  front  to  the  leading  guide  of  the  fol- 
lowing command. 


4 


DEFINITIONS. 


Drill — The  exercises  and  evolutions  tau>^nt  on  the  drill 
ground  and  executed  in  the  precise  and  formal  man- 
ner prescribed. 

Echelon — In  the  order  in  echelon  the  subdivisions  are 
placed  one  behind  another,  extending  beyond  and  un- 
masking one  another,  either  wholly  or  in  part. 

In  battle  formation,  this  term  is  also  employed  to 
designate  the  different  elements  or  lines  in  the  direc- 
tion of  depth.  Example  : The  first  echelon,  the  firing 
line  ; the  second  echelon,  the  support,  etc. 

Evolution — A movement  executed  by  several  battalions 
for  the  purpose  of  passing  from  one  formation  to  an- 
other. 

Facing  Distance — Sixteen  inches;  i.  e.,  the  difference 
between  the  front  of  a man  in  ranks  and  his  depth. 

File — Two  men,  a front  rank  man  and  the  correspond- 
ing man  of  the  rear  rank,  whether  placed  one  behind 
the  other  or  side  by  side.  File  Leader — The  front 
rank  man  of  a file.  A file  is  said  to  be  blank  when  it 
has  no  rear  rank  man.  When  troops  are  in  one  rank, 
the  men  are  frequently  termed  files. 

File  Closers — Officers,  or  non-commissioned  officers 
posted  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  ; it  is  their  duty 
to  rectify  mistakes  and  to  insure  steadiness  and 
promptness  in  the  ranks. 

Flank — The  right  or  left  of  a command  in  line  or  col- 
umn ; also,  the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  a line. 

In  speaking  of  the  enemy,  one  says  ‘‘his  right 
flank;”  “his  left  wing,”  etc.;  to  indicate  the  flank 
or  wing  which  the  enemy  would  so  designate. 

Flank  ^tack — A movement  made  against  the  enemy’s 
flank. 

Flankers — Men  so  posted  or  marched  as  to  protect  the 
flank  of  a column. 

Flank  March — A march,  whatever  the  formation,  by 
which  troops  move  along  the  front  of  the  enemj^’s 
position. 


DEFINITIONS. 


5 


Formation — Arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a com- 
mand. The  placing  of  all  the  fractions  in  regular 
order  in  line,  in  column  or  for  battle. 

Front — The  space  in  width  occupied  by  a command, 
either  in  line  or  column. 

In  estimating  the  extent  of  the  front,  the  space 
occupied  by  one  man  is  taken  at  twenty-eight  inches, 
which  includes  the  interval  between  files. 

Front  also  denotes  the  direction  of  the  enemy. 

Guard  Advance — A body  of  troops  marching  in  front 
of  a command  to  reconnoiter  and  to  protect  its  march. 

Guard  Rear — A body  of  t.  -oops  to  protect  the  rear  of  a 
command. 

Guide — An  officer,  non-commissioned  officer  or  private 
upon  whom  the  command  regulates  its  march. 

Head — The  leading  element  of  a column. 

Interval — An  open  space  between  elements  of  the  same 
line. 

The  interval  between  two  men  is  measured  from 
elbow  to  elbow  ; between  two  companies,  squads,  etc., 
from  the  left  elbow  of  the  left  man  or  guide  of  the 
group  on  the  right  to  the  right  elbow  of  the  right 
man  or  guide  of  the  group  on  the  left. 

Left — The  left  extremity  or  element  of  a body  of  troops. 

Line — A formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are 
abreast  of  each  other.  When  the  elements  are  in 
column  the  formation  is  called  a line  of  columns. 

Maneuver — A movement  made  according  to  the  nature 
of  the  ground  with  reference  to  the  position  and 
movements  of  the  enemy. 

Order,  Close — The  normal  formation  in  which  soldiers 
are  regularly  arranged  in  line  or  column. 

Order,  Extended — The  formation  in  which  the  soldiers, 
or  the  subdivisions,  or  both,  are  separated  by  inter- 
vals greater  than  in  close  order. 

Pace — Thirty  inches ; the  length  of  the  full  step  in 
quick  time. 


6 


DEFINITIONS. 


In  these  regulations,  intervals  and  distances  that 
can  be  verified  by  pacing,  are  given  in  paces  ; those 
less  than  one  pace,  in  inches ; considerable  distances, 
in  yards. 

Ploy — To  diminish  front ; as,  to  ploy  into  close  column. 

Point  of  Rest — The  point  at  which  a formation  begins. 

Rank — A line  of  men  placed  side  by  side. 

Right — Ti^e  right  extremity  or  element  of  a body  of 
troops. 

Scouts — Men  detailed  to  precede  a command  on  the 
march  and  forming  for  battle,  to  gather  and  report 
information  concerning  the  enemy  and  the  nature  of 
the  ground. 

Tactics — The  art  of  handling  troops  in  the  presence  of 
the  enemy,  i 6.,  applying  on  the  battle  field  the 
movements  learned  at  drill. 

Turning  Movement — An  extended  movement  around 
the  enemy’s  flank  for  the  purpose  of  threatening  or 
attacking  his  flank  or  rear. 

Wing — The  portion  of  a command  bet'wrien  the  center 
and  the  flank ; the  battalion  is  the  smallest  body 
which  is  divided  into  wings. 


SIGNALS. 


7 


SIGNALS.  ' 

The  following  signals  are  used  alone  or  in  conjunc- 
tion with  verbal  commands  or  trumpet  calls.  The 
whistle  call  to  fix  the  attention  may  precede  the  sig- 
nal. 

In  making  the  signals,  the  sword,  rifle  or  head  dress 
may  be  held  in  the  hand  ; when  the  sword  is  so  used  it 
is  in  prolongation  of  the  arm. 

Forward — Raise  the  arm  until  horizontal,  extended  to 
the  front ; at  the  same  time  move  to  the  front. 

Right  Oblique — Raise  the  arm  until  horizontal,  ex- 
tended obliquely  to  the  right ; at  the  same  time  move 
in  that  direction. 

Left  Oblique — Same  to  the  left. 

By  the  Right  Flank — Raise  the  arm  until  horizontal, 
extended  to  the  right ; at  the  same  time  move  to  the 
right. 

By  the  Left  Same  to  the  left. 

To  the  Rear — Face  to  the  rear,  raise  the  arm  until 
horizontal,  extended  to  the  rear ; at  the  same  time 
move  to  the  rear. 

Change  Direction  to  the  Right  or  Left — Raise  the  arm 
until  horizontal,  extended  toward  the  marching  flank, 
carrying  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  front  and  right ; 
at  the  same  time  facing  and  moving  in  the  direction 
to  be  taken. 

As  Skirmishers — Raise  both  arms  until  horizontal,  ex- 
tended laterally. 

Halt — Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent. 
Assemble — Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent 
and  slowly  describe  small  horizontal  circles. 

Rally — Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent  and 
circle  it  very  rapidly. 

Cease  Firing. — A whistle  call.  This  signal  is  also  used 
to  fix  the  attention. 


s 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

1.  All  details,  detachments  and  other  bodies  of  troops 
will  habitually  be  formed  in  double  rank. 

2.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either 
flank  are  explained  as  toward  but*  one  flank,  it  being 
necessary  to  substitute  the  word  “left”  for  “right,”  or 
the  reverse,  to  have  the  command  and  explanation  of 
the  corresponding  movement  toward  the  other  flank. 

3.  In  movements  where  the  guide  may  be  either  right 
or  left,  it  is  indicated  in  the  command,  thus  ; Guide 
{right  or  left). 

4.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the 
halt,  or  when  marching,  if  not  otherwise  prescribed. 

5.  All  movements,  not  specially  excepted,  may  be 
executed  in  double  time.  If  the  movement  be  from 
the  halt,  or  when  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command 
double  time  precedes  the  command  march;  if  marching 
in  double  time  the  command  double  time  is  omitted. 

6.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands  : 

HhQ  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indi- 
cates the  movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march,  halt  or 
ARMS,  causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  italics, 
those  of  execution  by  capitals. 

Where  it  is  not  mentioned  in  the  text  who  gives  the 
commands  prescribed  they  are  the  commands  of  the 
instructor. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such 
an  interval  of  time  before  the  comman  d of  execution 
as  to  admit  of  its  being  properly  understood  ; the  com- 
mand of  execution  should  be  given  at  the  instant  the 
movement  is  to  commence. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 


9 


The  tone  of  command  is  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a 
loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  under 
instruction. 

Each  preparatory  command  is  pronounced  in  an 
ascending  tone  of  voice,  but  always  in  such  a manner 
that  the  command  of  execution  may  be  more  energetic 
and  elevated. 

The  command  of  execution  is  pronounced  in  a firm 
and  brief  tone. 

When  giving  commands  to  troops  it  is  usually  best  to 
face  toward  them. 

7.  To  secure  uniformity,  officers  and  noncommis- 
sioned officers  are  practiced  in  giving  commands. 

8.  The  signal  and  trumpet  calls  should  be  frequently 
used  in  instruction,  in  order  that  the  officers  and  men 
may  readily  recognize  them. 

9.  In  the  different  schools,  the  posts  of  the  officers 
and  non-commissioned  officers  are  specified,  but  as  in- 
structors they  go  wherever  their  presence  is  necessary. 


10 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


CLOSE  ORDER. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

10.  The  object  of  this  school  is  the  instruction  of  the 
individual  recruit  and  afterward  that  of  the  squad. 

11.  Short  and  frequent  drills  are  preferable  to  long 
ones,  which  exhaust  the  attention  of  both  instructor 
and  recruit. 

12.  Generally,  sergeants  and  corporals  are  the  in- 
structors under  the  supervision  of  an  officer,  but  the 
captain  occasionally  requires  the  lieutenants  to  act  as 
instructors. 

13.  The  instructor  will  always  maintain  a military 
bearing  and  by  a quiet,  firm  demeanor  set  a proper 
•example  to  the  men. 

14.  The  instructor  explains  each  movement  in  as  few 
Words  as  possible,  at  the  same  time  executing  it  him- 
self. 

He  requires  the  recruits  to  take  by  themselves  the 
proper  positions  and  does  not  touch  them  for  the  pur- 
pose of  correcting  them,  except  when  they  are  unable 
to  correct  themselves ; he  avoids  keeping  them  too 
long  at  the  same  movement,  although  each  should  be 
understood  before  passing  to  another.  He  exacts  by 
degrees  the  desired  precision  and  uniformity. 

15.  After  the  movements  have  been  properly  executed 
in  the  order  laid  down,  the  instructor  no  longer  con- 
fines himself  to  that  order. 

16.  As  the  instruction  progresses  the  recruits  will  be 
grouped  according  to  proficiency,  in  order  that  all  may 
advance  as  rapidly  as  their  abilities  permit.  Those 
who  lack  aptitude  and  quickness  will  be  separated  from 
the  others  and  placed'under  experienced  drill  masters. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


11 


17.  When  the  execution  of  a movement  is  improperly 
begun  and  the  instructor  wishes  to  begin  it  anew  for 
the  purpose  of  correcting  it,  he  commands : jIs  you 
were,  at  which  the  movement  ceases  and  the  former 
position  is  resumed. 

INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION  Without  ARMS. 

18.  For  this  instruction  a few  recruits,  usually  not 
exceeding  four,  are  placed  in  a single  rank,  facing  to 
the  front,  and  about  six  inches  apart,  arranged  accord- 
ing to  height,  the  tallest  man  on  the  right. 

19.  To  teach  the  recruits  how  to  assemble,  the  in- 
structor requires  them  to  close  the  left  hand  and  place 
the  knuckles  against  the  waist,  above  the  hip,  wrist 
straight,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front;  he  then  places 
them  on  the  same  line  so  that  the  right  arm  of  each 
man  rests  lightly  against  the  left  elbow  of  the  man 
next  on  his  right,  and  then  directs  the  left  hands  to  be 
replaced  by  the  side.  The  men  thus  find  themselves 
with  an  interval  that  allows  for  a free  movement  of  the 
arms. 

20.  When  the  recruits  have  learned  how  to  take  their 
places,  they  are  required  to  assemble  without  assistance. 
The  instructor  commands  : fall  in. 

They  assemble  rapidly,  as  above  prescribed,  at  atten- 
tion, each  man  dropping  the  left  hand  as  soon  as  the 
man  next  on  his  left  has  his  interval. 

Position  of  the  Soldier,  or  Attention. 

21.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  and  as  near  each  other  as 
the  conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  with  each  other 
an  angle  of  about  sixty  degrees. 

Knees  straight,  without  stiffness. 

Body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a little  forward ; 
shoulders  square  and  falling  equally. 


J2 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  backs  of  the  hands 
outward ; little  fingers  opposite  the  seams  of  the  trou- 
sers ; elbows  near  the  body. 

Head  erect  and  square  to  the  front;  chin  slightly 
drawn  in,  without  constraint ; eyes  straight  to  the 
front. 


The  Rests. 

22.  Being  at  a halt,  to  rest  the  men : fall  out  ; or, 

«EST,  or  AT  EASE. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the 
ranks  but  will  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity. 

At  the  command  fall  in,  they  resume  their  former 
places. 

At  the  command  rest,  the  men  keep  one  heel  in  place, 
but  are  not  required  to  preserve  silence  nor  immobility. 

At  the  command  af  ease,  the  men  keep  one  heel  in 
place  and  preserve  silence,  but  not  immobility. 

23.  To  resume  the  attention : 1.  Squad,  2.  atten- 
tion. 

The  men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier  and  fix  their 
attention. 

24.  1.  Parade,  2.  rest. 

Carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  straight  to  the  rear, 
left  knee  slightly  bent ; clasp  the  hands  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  body,  left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb 
clasped  by  thumb  and  forefinger  of  right  hand  ; pre- 
serve silence  and  steadiness  of  position. 

To  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier  : 1.  Squad,  2, 
ATTENTION. 


To  Dismiss  the  Squad. 

25.  Being  in  line  at  a halt : dismissed. 

Eyes  Right  or  Left. 

26.  1.  Eyes,  2.  right  (or  left),  3.  front. 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  gently  so  as  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER 


13 


bring  the  left  eye  in  line  with  the  center  of  the  body, 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed 
to  be  in  the  same  rank. 

At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the 
front. 

The  instructor  sees  that  the  movement  does  not  de- 
range the  squareness  of  the  shoulders. 

Facings. 

27.  To  the  right  or  left : 1.  Right  (or  Left),  2.  face. 
Raise  slightly  the  right  heel  and  left  toe  and  face  to 

the  right,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  assisted  by  a slight 
pressure  on  the  ball  of  the  right  foot ; replace  the  right 
foot. 

The  facings  to  the  left  are  also  executed  upon  the  left 
heel. 

28.  To  the  rear.  1.  About,  2.  face. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right 

toe,  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the  right 
on  the  right  heel  and  the  ball  of  the  left 
foot;  replace  the  left  foot  beside  the  right. 

Salute  with  the  Hand. 

29.  1.  Right  (or  Left)  Hand,  2.  salute. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the 

forefinger  touches  the  lower  part  of  the 
head-dress  above  the  right  eye,  thumb 
and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to 
the  left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  forty- 
five  degrees,  hand  and  wrist  straight. 

(TWO.)  (Par.  48.)  Drop  the  arm  quietly  by 
the  side.  (See  Par.  485.) 

If  uncovered,  the  forefinger  touches  the 
forehead  above  the  eye.  1,  Par.  29. 


14 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


SETTING  UP  EXERCISES. 

30.  In  order  to  retain  a proper  set-up  and  to  keep 
the  muscles  supple,  all  soldiers  in  garrison  should  be 
frequently  practiced  in  the  following  exercises  : 

The  arm,  hand,  trunk,  leg  and  foot  exercises  should 
be  alternated,  the  drill  interrupted  by  frequent  rests 
and  varied  by  instruction  in  the  facings,  marchings,  etc. 
While  exercising  one  part  of  the  body,  care  should 
be  taken  that  the  other  parts  remain  quiet,  as  far  as 
the  conformation  of  the  body  will  allow. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  at  any  time,  the  exercise 
ceases,  and  the  position  of  the  soldier  is  resumed. 

The  recruits  being  in  single  rank  (Par.  30),  the  instruc- 
tor will  place  them  three  paces  apart. 

First  Exercise. 

1.  Arm,  2.  exercise,  3.  head,  4.  up,  5,  down,  6.  raise. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise  the  arms  laterally  un- 
til horizontal,  palms  upward.  head:  Raise  the  arms 
in  a circular  direction  over  the  head,  tips  of  fingers 
touching  top  of  cap  over  the  forehead,  backs  of  fingers 
in  contact  their  full  length,  thumbs  pointing  to  the 
rear,  elbows  pressed  back,  up  : Extend  the  arms  up- 
ward their  full  length,  palms  touching,  down:  Force 
them  obliquely  back,  and  gradually  let  them  fall  by  the 
sides.  RAISE  : Raise  the  arms  laterally  as  prescribed  for 
the  second  command.  Continue  by  repeating,  head^ 
up,  down,  raise. 

Second  Exercise. 

1.  Arm,  2.  exercise,  3.  front,  4.  rear. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise  the  arms  laterally,  as 
in  First  Exercise,  front  : Swing  the  arms,  extended 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER, 


15 


horizontally  to  the  front,  palms  touching,  heels  on  the 
ground,  rear  : Swing  the  arms  extended  well  to  the 
rear,  inclining  them  slightly  downward,  .raising  the 
body  upon  the  toes.  Continue  by  repeating,  front,  rear, 
till  the  men,  if  possible,  are  able  to  touch  the  hands  be- 
hind the  back. 

Third  Exercise. 

1.  Arm,  2.  exercise,  3.  circle. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise  the  arms  laterally,  as 
in  first  Exercise,  circle  : Slowly  describe  a small  cir- 
cle, with  each  arm  upward  and  backward,  from  front 
to  rear,  the  arms  not  passing  in  front  of  the  line  of  the 
breast.  Continue  by  repeating  circle. 

Fourth  Exercise. 

1.  Arm,  2.  exercise,  3.  shoulder,  4.  front,  5.  rear. 

At  the  command  exitrcise,  raise  the  arms  laterally,  as 
in  First  Exercise,  shoulder  : Place  the  tips  of  fingers 
lightly  on  top  of  the  shoulders,  keeping  upper  arm  hori- 
zontal. front  ; Force  the  elbows  to  the  front.  rear  : 
Force  the  elbows  back  as  far  as  possible.  Continue  by 
repeating /ron^,  rear. 

Fifth  Exercise. 

1.  Hand,  2.  exercise,  3.  close,  4.  open. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise  the  arms  laterally,  as 
in  First  Exercise,  close  : Close  the  hands  with  force. 
open  : Open  the  hands  quickly,  spreading  the  fingers 
and  thumbs  apart  as  much  as  possible.  Continue  by 
repeating  close,  open. 

Sixth  Exercise. 

1.  Forearms  vertical,  i.  raise,  3.  up,  4.  down. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  forearms  until  nearly 
vertical,  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palms  toward 


16 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


each  other,  up  : Thrust  upward  with  force,  extending 
the  arms  to  their  full  length,  down  : Force  the  arms 
obliquely  back,  and  gradually  let  them  fall  by  the  sides. 
Continue  by  repeating  raise,  up,  down. 

Seventh  Exercise. 

1.  Forearms  horizontal,  2.  raise,  3.  front,  4.  rear. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  forearms  to  the 
front,  until  horizontal,  elbows  forced  back,  hands  tight- 
ly closed,  backs  down,  front  : Thrust  the  arms  forci- 
bly to  the  front,  turning  the  backs  of  the  hands  up, 
arms  horizontal,  rear  : Bring  the  arms  back  quickly 
to  the  first  position,  forcing  elbows  and  shoulders  to  the 
rear.  Continue  by  repeating /ron^,  rear\ 

Eighth  Exercise. 

1.  Trunk,  2.  exercise,  3.  down,  4.  back. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise  the  hands  and  place 
them  on  the  hips,  fingers  to  the  rear,  thumbs  to  the 
front,  elbows  pressed  back,  down  : Bend  the  trunk 
forward  at  the  hips  as  far  as  possible,  back  : Raise 
and  bend  the  trunk  to  the  rear  as  far  as  possible.  Exe- 
cute both  motions  slowly,  without  bending  the  knees. 
Continue  by  repeating  down,  hack. 

Ninth  Exercise. 

1.  Trunk,  2.  exercise,  3.  right,  4.  left, 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the 
hips,  as  in  Eighth  Exercise,  right  : Bend  the  trunk  to 
the  right,  without  twisting  it  or  raising  either  heeL 
LEFT  : Bend  the  trunk  similarly  to  the  left.  Execute 
both  motions  slowly.  Continue  by  repeating  right, 
left. 

Tenth  Exercise. 

1.  Trunk,  2.  exercise,  3.  circle  right  (or  left). 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


17 


as  in  Eighth  Exercise,  circle  right:  Bend  the  trunk 
to  the  right  as  in  Ninth  Exercise  ; turn  the  trunk  to 
the  rear  and  bend  to  the  rear,  as  in  Eighth  Exercise ; 
turn  the  trunk  to  the  left  and  bend  to  the  left,  as  in 
Ninth  Exercise  ; turn  the  trunk  to  the  front  and  bend 
forward,  as  in  Eighth  Exercise.  Continue  by  repeating 
eircle  right. 

Eleventh  Exercise. 

1.  Arms  vertical, palms  to  the  front,  2.  raise,  3.  down, 
4.  UP. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  arms  from  the  sides, 
extended  to  their  full  length,  till  the  hands  meet  above 
the  head,  palms  to  the  front,  fingers  pointed  upward, 
thumbs  locked,  right  thumb  in  front,  shoulders  pressed 
back.  DOWN  : Bend  over  till  the  hands,  if  possible,  touch 
the  ground.  Keeping  arms  and  knees  straight,  up  : 
Straighten  the  body  and  swing  the  arms,  extended 
to  the  vertical  position.  Continue  by  reneating  down, 
up. 

Twelfth  Exercise. 

1.  Arms  forivard,  palms  down,  2.  raise,  3.  down,  4, 
UP. 

At  the  command  raise,  raise  the  arms  to  the  front, 
extended  to  their  full  length,  till  the  hands  are  in  front 
of  and  at  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  palms  down,  fin- 
gers extended  and  joined,  thumbs  under  forefingers. 
DOWN  : Bend  the  trunk  forward  at  the  hips  as  far  as 
possible,  and  swing  the  arms  backward,  knees  and  arms 
straight,  u P : Straighten  the  trunk  and  swing  the  arms 
to  the  forward  position.  Continue  by  repeating  downy 
{up. 

Thirteenth  Exercise. 

1.  Leg,  2.  exercise,  3.  Half  bend,  4:.  down,  5.  up. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the 
hips  as  in  Eighth  Exercise,  down  : Lower  the  body. 


18 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


separating  the  knees  and  bending  them  as  much  as  pos- 
sible, heels  on  the  ground,  head  and  trunk  erect,  up  : 
Raise  the  body,  straightening  and  closing  the  knees. 
Continue  by  repeating  dowUf  up. 

Fourteenth  Exercise. 

1.  Leg,  2.  exercise,  3.  Full  bend,  4.  down,  5.  up. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips 
as  in  Eighth  Exercise,  down  : Lower  the  body,  sepa- 
rating the  knees  and  bending  them  as  much  as  possible, 
head  and  trunk  erect,  heels  raised,  weight  of  body 
resting  on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  up  : Raise  the  body, 
straightening  and  closing  the  knees  and  lower  the  heels 
to  the  ground.  Continue  by  repeating  down,  up. 

Fifteenth  Exercise. 

1.  Leg,  2.  exercise,  3.  Left  (or  right),  4:.  forward,  5. 
REAR,  or  5.  GROUND. 

At  the  command  exei  tise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips 
as  in  the  Eighth  Exercise,  forward  : Move  the  left  leg 
to  the  front,  knee  straight,  so  as  to  advance  the  foot 
about  fifteen  inches,  toe  turned  out,  sole  nearly  hori- 
zontal, body  balanced  on  right  foot,  rear  : Move  the 
leg  to  the  rear,  knee  straight,  toe  on  a line  with  the 
right  heel,  sole  nearly  horizontal.  Continue  by  repeat- 
ing forward,  rear. 

When  the  recruit  has  learned  to  balance  himself,  the 
command /oTOard  is  followed  by  ground.  Throw  the 
weight  of  the  body  forward  by  rising-  on  the  ball  of  the 
right  foot,  advance  and  plant  the  left,  left  heel 
thirty  inches  from  the  right,  and  advance  the  right  leg 
quickly  to  the  position  of  forward.  Continue  by  re-| 
peating  ground  when  the  right  and  left  legs  are  alterJ 
nately  in  the  position  of  forward. 

Sixteenth  Exercise. 

1.  Leg,  2.  exercise,  3.  up. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIEk. 


19 


as  in  Eighth  Exercise,  up  : Raise  the  left  leg  to  the 
front,  bending  and  elevating  the  knee  as  much  as  pos- 
sible, leg  from  knee  to  instep  vertical,  toe  depressed. 
UP  : Replace  the  left  foot  and  raise  the  right  leg  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  left. 

Execute  slowly  at  first,  then  gradually  increase  to  the 
cadence  of  double  time.  Continue  by  repeating  up 
when  the  right  and  left  legs  are  alternately  in  position. 

Sevente\.nth  Exercise. 

1.  Foot,  2.  EXERCISE,  3.  UP,  4.  DOWN. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips 
as  in  Eighth  Exercise.  UP:  Raise  the  body  upon  the 
toes,  knees  straight,  heels  together,  down  : Lower  the 
heels  slowly  to  the  ground.  Continue  by  repeating'  up, 
down. 

As  soon  as  the  exercises  are  well  understood,  they 
may  be  executed  without  repeating  the  commands. 
For  this  purpose  the  instructor  gives  the  commands  as 
prescribed,  then  adds : Continue  the  exercise,  upon 
which  the  motions  to  be  repeated  are  continuously  exe- 
cuted until  the  command  halt. 

Whenever  there  is  a regular  system  of  g;  mnastic  in- 
struction it  may  replace  the  setting  up  exercises  for 
well  trained  soldiers. 


20 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


THE  STEPS. 

Quick  Time. 

31.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  thirty 
inches  measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is 
at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  steps  per  minute. 

32.  The  recruits  being  confirmed  in  the  position  of 
the  soldier,  the  instructor  places  himself  eight  or  ten 
paces  in  front  of  them,  and  facing  toward  them  executes 
the  step  slowly,  at  the  same  time  explaining  the  princi- 
ples ; he  then  commands  ; 1.  Forward,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  forward,  throw  the  weight  of  the 
body  upon  the  right  leg  without  bending  the  left 
knee. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  leg  smartly, 
but  without  jerk,  carry  the  foot  straight  forward  30 
inches  from  the  right,  measuring  from  heel  to  heel,  sole 
near  the  ground,  knee  straight  and  slightly  turned  out ; 
at  the  same  time  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward, 
and  plant  the  foot  without  shock,  weight  of  body  rest- 
ing upon  it ; next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right 
foo^,  and  plant  it  as  above  ; continue  the  march,  keep- 
ing the  face  to  the  front.  The  instructor  indicates  from 
time  to  time  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  calling  one,  two. 
three,  four ; or,  left,  right,  the  instant  the  left  and 
right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

The  cadence  is  at  first  given  slowly,  and  gradually 
increased  to  that  of  quick  time. 

33.  To  arrest  the  march  : 1.  Squad,  2.  halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  giyen  as  either  foot  is  coming 
to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  rear  is  brought  up  and  planted 
without  shock  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

Double  Time. 

34.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


21 


inches  ; the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per 
minute. 

35.  To  march  in  double  time  : 1.  Forward,  2.  Double 
time,  3.  march. 

At  the  command  forward,  throw  the  weight  of  the 
body  on  the  right  leg ; at  the  command  double  time, 
raise  the  hands  until  the  forearms  are  horizontal, 
fingers  closed,  nails  toward  the  body,  elbows  to  the 
rear. 

At  the  command  march,  carry  forward  the  left  foot, 
leg  slightly  bent,  knee  somewhat  raised,  and  plant  the 
foot  36  inches  from  the  right ; then  execute  the  same 
motion  with  the  right  foot;  continue  this  alternate 
movement  of  the  feet,  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body 
forward  and  allowing  a natural  swinging  motion  to 
the  arms.  The  recruits  are  also  exercised  in  running, 
the  principles  being  the  same  as  for  double  time. 

When  marching  in  double  time  e nd  in  running,  the 
men  breathe  as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose, 
keeping  the  mouth  closed. 

To  Mark  Time. 

36.  Being  in  march : 1.  Mark  Time,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  is  com- 
ing to  the  ground,  continue  the  cadence  and  make  a 
semblance  of  marching’,  without  gaining  ground,  by 
alternately  advancing  each  foot  about  half  its  length, 
and  bringing  it  back  on  a line  with  the  other. 

To  resume  the  full  step  : 1.  Forward,  2.  march. 

Short  Step. 

37.  Being  in  march  : 1.  Short  Step,  2.  march. 

Take  steps  of  fifteen  inches.  The  full  step  is  resumed 
at  the  commands  ; 1.  Forward,  2.  march. 

The  length  of  the  short  step  in  double  time  is 
eighteen  inches. 


22 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


S/cfe  Step. 

38.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  Right  (or  Left)  Step^  2.  march. 

Carry  the  right  foot  twelve  inches  to  the  right,  keep- 
ing knees  straight  and  shoulders  square  to  the  front; 
as  soon  as  the  right  foot  is  planted,  bring  the  left  foot  to 
the  side  of  it,  and  continue  the  movement,  observing 
the  cadence  for  each  foot,  as  explained  for  quick  time. 

The  side  step  is  not  executed  in  double  time. 

Back  Step. 

39.  Being  at  a halt:  1.  Backward^  2.  march. 

Step  back  with  the  left  foot  fifteen  inches  straight  to 
the  rear,  measuring  from  heel  to  heel,  then  with  the 
right,  and  so  on,  the  feet  alternating. 

At  the  command  halt,  bring  back  the  foot  in  front  to 
the  side  of  the  one  in  rear.  The  back  step  is  used  for 
short  distances  only  and  is  not  executed  in  double  time. 

40.  The  short  step,  side  step  and  hack  step  may  be 
executed  from  mark  time  and  conversely. 

Change  Step. 

41.  Being  in  march  : 1.  Change  step,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  come« 
to  the  ground,  the  left  foot  is  advanced  and  planted  ; 
the  toe  of  the  right  is  then  advanced  near  the  heel  of 
the  left,  the  recruit  again  stepping  off  with  the  left. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed, 
the  command  march  being  given  as  the  left  foot 
strikes  the  ground. 

Covering  and  Marching  on  Points. 

42.  The  instructor  selects  two  points  on  the  ground 
and  requires  the  recruits,  in  succession,  to  place  them- 
selves so  that  the  prolongation  of  the  straight  line 
through  these  points  shall  pass  between  their  heels. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


23 


The  instructor  palaces  himself  in  the  rear  of  each  re- 
cruit, points  out  the  faults  of  his  position,  and  causes 
him  to  cover  accurately. 

When  the  recruits  are  able  to  cover  the  points,  quickly 
and  accurately,  they  are  required,  after  covering,  to 
march  upon  the  points  in  quick  and  double  time.  The 
instructor  remaining  in  rear  of  the  recruit,  observes  his 
march  ; when  halted,  the  recruit  corrects  his  covering, 
if  necessary  ; at  the  command  fall  out,  he  steps  to  one 
side.  The  other  recruits  are  halted  near  the  same  point, 
and  when  all  have  arrived  the  instructor,  selecting  new 
points,  continues  the  exercise. 

Two  recruits  should  also  be  established  by  the  instruc- 
tor, one  covering  the  other,  and  the  others  required  to 
cover  them  at  considerable  distances  apart ; the  recruits 
should  then  be  faced  about  and  the  exercise  repeated 
in  the  new  direction. 

It  should  be  demonstrated  to  the  recruits  that  they 
cannot  march  in  a straight  line  without  selecting  two 
points  in  the  desired  direction  and  keeping  them  cov- 
ered while  advancing. 

43.  A distant  and  conspicuous  landmark  will  next  be 
selected  as  a point  of  direction  ; the  recruit  will  be  re- 
quired to  choose  two  intermediate  points  on  the  ground 
in  line  with  the  point  of  direction  and  to  march  upon  it 
by  covering  these  points,  new  points  being  selected  as 
he  advances. 


.INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION  with  ARMS. 

44.  The  recruit  should,  as  soon  as  possible,  be  taught 
the  use  of  his  rifle,  its  care  and  preservation. 

When  fair  progress  has  been  made  in  the  Individual 
Instruction  without  Arms,  the  recruit  will  be  taught 
the  manual  of  arms  ; instruction  without  arms  and  that 
with  arms  alternating. 


24 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


Part  of  each  drill  with  arms  should  be  devoted  to 
marching. 

45.  The  manual  of  arms  is  explained  for  double  rank, 
but  for  the  instruction  of  recruits  it  is  first  executed  in 
single  rank  ; the  instruction  is  given  as  herein  pre- 
scribed, substituting  the  word  ma?i  for^Ze  in  the  com- 
mands and  explanations,  and  omitting  reference  to  the 
rear  rank. 

At  the  command /aZZ  m,  the  recruits,  usually  not  ex- 
ceeding* four,  assemble  (Par.  20),  pieces  at  order  arms. 

46.  To  prevent  accidents,  the  chambers  will  be  opened 
(Par.  83),  whenever  the  squad  is  first  formed,  and  again 
just  before  being*  dismissed.  This  rule  is  general. 

47.  The  cadence  of  the  motionsis  thatof  quick  time; 
the  recruits  will  at  first  be  required  to  give  their  whole 
attention  to  the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being 
gradually  acquired  as  they  becr'me  accustomed  to  hand- 
ling their  arms. 

The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  men  to  execute 
the  movements  by  themselves,  without  command,  un- 
til they  understand  the  details ; after  this  he  will  require 
them  to  execute  the  movements  together  at  command. 

The  movements  relative  to  the  cartridge  fixing  and 
unfixing  bayonet,  adjusting  sight,  breaking  and  form- 
ing stack,  are  executed  with  promptness  and  regularity, 
but  not  in  cadence^ 

48.  Being  at  a halt,  the  movements  are,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and  executed 
in  detail ; in  this  case  the  command  of  execution  deter- 
mines the  prompt  execution  of  the  first  motipn  and  the 
commands,  two,  three,  etc.,  that  of  the  other  mo- 
tions. 

To  execute  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first 
cautions  : By  the  numbers,  all  movements  divided  into 
motions  are  then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he 
cautions  : Without  the  numbers,  or  commands  move- 
ments other  than  those  in  the  manual  of  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


25 


MANUAL  OF  ARMS. 

General  Rules. 

49.  1st.  In  resuming*  the  carry  from  any  position 
in  the  manual,  the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes 
with  the  left  hand  as  high  as  the  hollow  of  the  right 
shoulder,  fingers  extended  and  joined,  thumb  close  to 
forefinger,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front,  elbow  close  to 
the  body,  right  hand  embracing  the  guard  with  thumb 
and  forefinger ; the  last  motion  consists  in  dropping  the 
left  hand  by  the  side. 

2d.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance 
(center  of  gravity,  bayonet  unfixed),  the  thumb  is  ex- 
tended along  the  stock,  except  at  the  port  amd  charge 
bayonet. 

Bd.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  body,  the  barrel  is  to  the  rear  and  vertical. 
4th.  The  piece  is  habitually 
carried  with  the  hammer  at 
the  safety  notch. 

50.  The  recruit  being  in  the 
position  of  the  soldier,  the  in- 
structor will  first  cause  him  to 
place  his  piece  carefully  in  the 
following  positions  : — 

Position  of  Order  Arms. 

The  butt  rests  evenly  on  the 
ground,  arms  hanging  natur- 
ally, elbows  near  the  body,  right 
hand  holding  the  piece  between 
the  thumb  and  fingers,  first  two 
fingers  in  front,  the  others  in 
rear  and  opposite  the  seam  of 
the  trousers ; this  will  incline 
PI.  2,  Par.  50.  the  barrel  forward  and  the  toe  pi.  3,  Par.  50. 


26 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


of  the  piece  will  be  about  one  inch  to  the  right  and  two 
inches  to  the  rear  of  the  right  toe. 


Position  of  Carry  Arms, 

The  piece  is  in  the  right  hand,  thumb  and 
forefinger  embracing  the  guard,  the  re- 
I maining  fingers  closed  together  and  grasp- 
\ ing  the  stock  just  under  the  hammer,  vrhich 
Irests  on  the  little  finger ; barrel  nearly  ver- 
Jtical  and  resting  against  the  shoulder, 
/guard  to  the  front;  arm  hanging  nearly 
at  its  full  length,  near  the  body. 

The  instructor  sees  that  the  piece  at  the 
carry  is  neither  too  high  nor  too  low  ; if  too 
high  the  piece  will  be  unsteady  ; if  too  low, 
the  right  arm  will  become  fatigued  and 
the  shoulder  will  be  drawn  down. 

On  first  bearing  arms  the  recruits  are 
liable  to  derange  their  positions  by  lowering 
a shoulder  or  hif.  The  instructor  endeav- 
Pl.  4,  Par.  50.  ors  to  correct  these  faults. 

51.  Being  at  the  order  ; 1.  Carry,  2.  arms. 

Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right  hand,  grasp 
it  at  the  same  time  with  the  left,  above  the  right,  resume 
the  carry,  (two.)  Drop  the  left  hand. 

52.  Being  at  the  carry  ; 1.  Order,  2.  arms. 

Advance  the  piece,  grasp  it  with  the  left  hand,  fore- 
arm horizontal,  let  go  with  right  hand ; lower  the 
piece  quickly  with  the  left,  regrasp  it  with  the  right 
above  the  balance,  hand  near  the  thigh,  butt  about 
three  inches  from  the  ground,  left  hand  steadying  the 
piece  near  the  right,  fingers  extended  and  joined,  fore- 
arm and  wrist  straight  and  inclined  downward,  (two.) 
Lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground  with  the  right 
hand,  drop  the  left  by  the  side  and  take  the  position  of 
order  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


27 


53.  Being  at  the  carry:  1.  Present^  2.  arms. 

Carry  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  in 

front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  at  the  same 
time  grasp  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  bal- 
ance, forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against 
the  body,  (two.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the 
s^ock  with  the  right  hand  below  and  against 
the  guard. 

1.  Carry,  2.  arms. 

Resume  the  carry,  (two.)  Drop  the  left 
hand. 

54.  Being  at  the  carry  or  order  ; 1.  Right 
shoulder,  2.  arms. 

Raise  the  piece  vertically 
with  the  right  hand,  grasp  it 
with  the  left  at  the  balance, 
and  raise  this  hand  till  it  is  at 
the  height  of  the  chin ; at  the 
same  time  embrace  the  butt 
with  the  right  hand,  toe  be- 
tween the  first  two  fingers, 
the  other  fingers  under  the  plate,  barrel 
same  inclination  to  the  front  as  at  the 
order,  (two.)  Raise  the  piece  and  place  it 
on  the  right  shoulder,  lock  plate  up,  muz- 
zle elevated  and  inclined  to  the  left,  so 
that,  viewed  from  the  front,  the  line  of 
the  stock,  from  toe  to  guard,  shall  appear 
nearly  parallel  to  the  row  of  buttons  ; slip 
the  left  hand  down  to  the  lock  plate. 
(THREE.)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

55.  Being  at  the  right  shoulder:  1.  Carry, 
2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  butt  slightly  to  the  left  and 
lower  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  ; grasp 
it  with  the  left  at  the  balance,  hand  at 
the  height  of  chin,  barrel  to  the  rear,  and 


PI.  5,  Par.  53. 


28 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


at  the  same  inclination  to  the  front  as  at  the  order, 
(TWO.)  Resume  the  carry,  (three.)  Drop  the  left  hand. 

56.  Being  at  the  right  shoulder  : 1.  Order,  2.  arms. 
Take  the  first  position  of  carry  from  right  shoulder. 
(two.)  Lower  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  same 
time  regrasping  it  with  the  right  above  the  balance, 
and  take  the  first  position  of  order  from  carry,  (three.) 
Take  the  position  of  order  arms. 

57.  Being  at  the  carry  or  order : 
1.  Port,  2.  arms. 

Raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  lockplate  to  the  front; 
grasp  it  smartly  with  both  hands,  the 
right,  palm  down  at  the  small  of  stock ; 
the  left,  palm  up,  at  the  balance,  thumb 
clasping  piece  ; barrel  sloping  to  the  left 
and  crossing  opposite  the  middle  of  left 
shoulder ; right  forearm  horizontal ; 
forearms  and  piece  near  the  body. 

1.  Carry,  2.  arms. 

Resurr  e the  carry,  (two.)  Drop  the 
left  hand. 

Being  at  the  port : 1.  Order,  2.  arms. 
Take  the  second  and  third  positions 
of  order  from  right  shoulder. 

58.  Being  at  the  right  shoulder : 1. 
Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Take  the  first  position  of  carry  from 
right  shoulder,  (two.)  Take  the  position 
of  port  arms. 

1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  arms. 

Take  the  second  and  third  positions  of  right  shoulder 
from  the  carry. 

The  Rests. 

59.  Fall  out.  Rest  and  At  ease,  are  executed  as  with- 
out arms. 


PI.  7,  Par.  57 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER- 


29 


On  resuming  the  attention,  take  the  p'^ition  of  order 
arms. 

60.  Being  at  the  order : 1.  Parade, 

2.  REST. 

Carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent,  carry 
the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  left ; grasp  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  just  above  and  with 
the  right  at  the  upper  band. 

1.  Squad,  2.  attention. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting 
the  piece  opposite  the  right  breast. 

fl.  To  dismiss  the  squad,  with  arms  : 

U Port,  2.  ARMS,  3.  DISMISSED. 

62.  Being  at  the  carry : 

1.  Fix,  2.  BAYONET. 

Grasp  the  piece  with  the 

left  hand,  forearm  horizontal ; 
carry  it  to  the  left  side,  butt  p,  q p aa 
striking  the  ground  on  a line  • > ar.  . 
with  the  heels,  piece  inclined  to  the  front,, 
left  wrist  pressing  bayonet  scabbard 
against  the  thigh  ; carry  right  hand  to  the 
shank  of  the  bayonet;  draw  the  bayonet 
and  fix  it  on  the  barrel,  glancing  at  the 
muzzle  ; drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 
1.  Carry,  2.  arms. 

Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and 
resume  the  carry,  (two.)  Drop  the  left 
hand. 

63.  Being  at  the  carry : 1.  Unfix, 

2.  BAYONET. 

PI  g p^j.  Q2  Carry  the  piece  to  the  left  side  as  in  fix 
bayonet,  and  place  the  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand  against  the  clasp  of  the  bayonet;  unclasp  the 
bayonet ; grasp  it  by  the  shank,  wrest  it  from  the  bar- 


30 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


rel ; glancing  at  the  scabbard,  return  the  bayonet,  and 
drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

The  carry  arms  is  executed  as  from  fix  bayonet. 

Bayonets  are  fixed  and  unfixed  from  the  order,  by  the 
same  commands  as  from  the  carry,  the  piece  being  shift- 
ed from  the  right  to  the  left  side.  To  return  to  the  carry, 
or  order;  1.  Carry,  2.  arms;  or,  1.  Order,  2.  arms. 

In  fixing  and  unfixing  bayonet  from  the  order,  and 
in  returning  to  the  order,  the  hands  change  in  front  of 
the  center  of  the  body,  the  left  hand  grasping  the  piece 
above  the  right. 

64.  Being  at  the  port : 1.  Unfix,  2.  bayonet. 

As  from  the  carry,  quitting  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  and  lowering  it  with  the  left. 

65.  The  rod  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unfixed  from  the 
order  only  without  moving  the  piece,  grasp  the  rough- 
ened end  of  the  bayonet  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  the  left  hand,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  spring  but- 
ton, thumb  and  forefinger  resting  on  the  roughened 

ends  ; press  the  but- 
ton, draw  out  (or 
push  in),  the  bayo- 
net, at  the  same 
time  releasing  the 
pressure  on  the 
spring,  which  will 
automatically  catch 
the  bayonet ; resume  the  position  of 
order  arms. 

66.  If  marching,  the  bayonet  is  fixed 
and  unfixed  in  the  most  expeditious  and 
convenient  manner. 

67.  Being  at  the  carry : 1.  Charge^ 
2.  BAYONET. 

Half  face  to  the  right,  carrying  the 
heel  six  inches  to  the  rear  and  three 
Pi.  10,  Par.  67.  inches  to  the  right  of  the  left,  turn- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIEft. 


31 


ing  the  toes  of  both  feet  slightly  inward ; at  the  same 
time  drop  the  piece  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance, 
thumb  clasping  piece,  elbow  against  the  body,  point  of 
bayonet  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  right  hand  grasping 
small  of  stock  and  supporting  it  firmly  against  the  right 
hip,  body  inclining  slightly  forward. 

1.  Carry,  3.  arms. 

Eesume  the  carry,  at  the  same  time  racing  to  me 
front,  (two.)  Drop  the  left  hand. 

68.  Being  at  the  order ; 1.  Charge,  2.  bayonet. 

Eaise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  grasp  it  with  the 

left  at  the  balance,  and  take  the  position  of  charge 
bayonet. 

1.  Order,  2.  arms. 

Let  go  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  lower  it 
with  the  left  to  the  first  position  of  order  from  carry,  at 
the  same  time  facing  to  the  front,  (two.)  Eesume  the 
order. 

Positions  Kneeling  and  Lying  Down, 

69.  The  movements  of 

kneeling,  lying  down  and 
rising  are  first  taugbt  with- 
out arms ; they  are  exe- 
cuted as  with  arms,  except 
that  in  the  position  kneel- 
ing the  right  hand  rests  on 
the  right  thigh,  and  in 
moving  to  and  from  the  Pl.  ii,  Par.  69. 

lying  position  the  right 

hand  is  placed  on  the  ground  ; in  the  position  lying  down 
the  forearms  are  against  each  other  on  the  ground,  left 
arm  in  front. 

70.  At  the  command  Jcneel,  lie  down  or  rise,  the 
hammer  will  first  be  lowered  to  tbe  safety  notch,  if  not 
already  there.  This  rule  is  aeneral. 

71.  Being  at  the  order:  kneel. 

Each  front  rank  man  half  faces  to  the  right,  carrying 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLOIER. 


^^2 


PI.  12,  Par.  71. 


right  foot  so  that  the  toe  shall  be 
about  ten  inches  to  the  rear  and  ten 
‘ inches  to  the  left  of  left  heel;  kneel 
on  right  knee,  bending  the  left,  left 
toe  slightly  inclined  to  the  right, 
right  leg  pointing  directly  to  the 
right ; weight  of  body  resting  Oii  right 
heel ; place  left  forearm  across  left 
thigh,  hand  hanging  naturally  ; the 
piece  remains  in  the  position  of  order 
arms,  right  hand  grasping  it  above 
the  balance.  This  is  the  x^osition  of 
order  kneeling. 

Each  rear  rank  man  steps  off  ob- 
liquely to  the  right  with  the  left  foot, 
planting  the  toe  opposite  the  middle  of  the  interval  to 
his  right  and  in  line  with  the  left  heel  of  his  front  rank 
man,  at  the  same  time  placing  the  butt  of  his  piece 
against  his  left  toe ; he  then  kneels  as  prescribed  for 
the  front  rank. 

72.  Being  at  the  order  kneeling  : rise. 

Kise  and  take  the  position  of  order  arms ; the  rear 
rank  men  covering  their  file  leaders. 

73.  Being  at 
the  order 
kneeling:  lie 
DOWN. 

Each  front 
rank  man 
places  the 
right  knee 

against  the  left  heel,  (two.)  Draw  back  the  left  foot  and 
place  the  knee  on  the  ground  ; place  the  left  hand  well 
forward  on  the  ground  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  thus  in- 
clining the  body  about  thirty-five  degrees  to  the  right ; 
the  piece  is  lowered  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand, 
toe  resting  on  the  ground,  barrel  up,  left  hand  at  the  bal- 


Pl.  13.  Par. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


33 


ance,  left  elbow  on  the  ground,  right  hand  at  the  small 
of  the  stock,  opposite  the  neck.  This  is  the  pasition 
lying  down. 

The  rear  rank  men  move  back  one  pace  and  lie  down 
as  prescribed  for  the  front  rank. 

74.  Being  in  position  lying  down:  rise. 

Eeverse  the  second  motion  of  lie  down.  (Par.  73.) 
(two.)  Eise  as  from  the  order  kneeling.  (Par.  72.) 

75.  Being  at  the  order  standing  : lie  down. 

Eact^  front  rank  man  takes  the  position  of  order 
kneeling,  except  that  the  right  knee  is  placed  against 
the  left  heel,  (two.)  Execute  the  second  motion  of  lie 
down,  (Par.  73.) 

The  rear  rank  men  step  back  one  pace  and  lie  down 
as  prescribed  for  the  front  rank. 

76.  Being  in  position  lying  down  : kneel. 

Execute  the  first  motion  of 

rise  (Par.  74)  and  take  the  po- 
sition of  order  kneeling. 

To  Load, 

77.  Being  in  line,  standing 
at  the  carry  or  order  : load. 
Each  rear  rank  man  steps  off  obliquely 
to  the  right  with  the  left  foot,  planting 
the  toe  opposite  the  middle  of  the  inter- 
val to  his  right  and  in  line  with  the  left 
heel  of  his  front  rank  man  ; the  front 
rank  men  half  face  to  the  right ; both 
ranks  then  carry  the  right  heel  six  inches 
to  the  rear  and  three  inches  to  the  right 
of  the  left  heel,  turning  the  toes  of  both 
feet  slightly  inward,  at  the  same  time 
raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  drop 
it  into  the  left  at  the  balance,  muzzle  at 

PI.  14,  Par.  77.  the  height  of  the  chin,  left  elbow  against 
the  body,  small  of  the  stock  at  the  waist ; place  the 


34 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  hammer,  forefinger  on 
the  trigger,  the  other  fingers  against  the  small  of 
the  stock,  and  half  cock  the  piece,  lower  the  muzzle, 
barrel  sloping  downward  at  an  angle  of  about  twenty- 
five  degrees,  at  the  same  time  open  chamber ; look 
toward  the  chamber,  remove  the  cartridge  shell  if 
necessary;  take  a cartridge  between  the  thumb  and 
first  two  fingers,  place  it  in  the  bore,  pressing  it  home 
with  the  thumb  ; close  chamber  with  the  right  thumb, 
cast  the  eyes  to  the  front,  carry  the  right  hand*  to  the 
small  of  the  stock  and  raise  the  muzzle  to  the  height 
of  the  chin.  The  last  position  is  the  position  of  locid. 

78.  If  kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  across  the  left 
thigh.  If  lying  down  the  left  hand  steadies  the  piece, 
^e  resting  on  the  ground. 

79.  Boxes  are  closed  after  executing  the  ordei  or 
y)rder  kneeling. 

80.  Being  in  the  position  of  load:  1.  Squad,  2.  ready. 

Cock  the  piece  with  the  right  thumb,  and  return  the 

thumb  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

81.  The  piece  may  be  brought  to  a ready  from  any 
position  by  the  same  commands  ; in  executing  it,  first 
take  the  position  of  load.  (Pars.  77  and  78.) 

82.  Being  in  position  of  load  or  ready : 1 . Order,  2,  A R M s. 

Lower  the  hammer  to  the  safety  notch,  and  take  the 

order  as  from  charge  bayonet ; the  rear  rank  men  then 
step  back  and  cover  their  file  leaders.  If  kneeling,  lower 
the  hammer  to  the  safety  notch  and  take  the  order 
kneeling. 

83.  To  ascertain  if  any  of  the  pieces  are  loaded,  the 
instructor  causes  them  to  be  brought  to  the  port  and 
commands:  1.  Open,  2.  chamber. 

Half  cock  the  piece,  open  chamber,  and  return  the 
hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Each  man,  as  soon  as  his  piece  is  examined,  closes 
chamber  with  the  right  thumb,  lowers  the  hammer  to 
the  safety  notch,  and  returns  the  hand  to  the  small  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


85 


the  stock.  If  the  instructor  does  not  examine  the  pieces, 
he  commands  : 1.  Close,  2.  chamber  ; at  which  cham- 
bers are  closed,  hammers  lowered  to  safety  notch  and 
the  port  resumed. 

84.  Beinff  in  any  position,  pieces  loaded  : 1.  Draw,  2. 

CARTRIDGE. 

Executed  as  prescribed  for  loading  (Pars.  77  and  78), 
except  that  the  cartridge  is  withdrawn  and  returned  to 
the  box  or  belt,  and  the  hammer  lowered  to  the  safety 
notch. 


To  Aim  and  Fire. 

85.  Being  at  the  ready: 

AIM. 

Raise  the  piece  with 
both  hands  and  support 
the  butt  firmly  against 
the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  right 
thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  barrel 
horizontal ; slip  the  left  hand  back  to 
the  guard,  little  finger  resting  against 
the  bottom  of  the  thumb  piece  of  the 
cam  latch;  left  elbow  resting  against 
the  body  and  as  far  to  the  right  as  it 
can  be  placed  with  ease,  right  elbow  as 
high  as  the  shoulder;  incline  the  head 
slightly  forward  and  a little  to  the  right, 
cheek  resting  against  the  stock,  left 
eye  closed,  right  eye  looking  through 
the  notch  of  rear  sight,  so  as  to  perceive 
the  top  of  the  front  sight;  second  joint 
of  forefinger  resting  lightly  against  the  front  of  the 
trigger,  but  not  pressing  it. 

Each  rear  rank  man  aims  through  the  interval  at  the 
right  of  his  file  leader,  and  inclines  slightly  forward,  to 
advance  the  muzzle  of  his  piece  beyond  the  front  rank. 
When  lying  down  in  double  rank,  the  rear  rank  men  do 
not  aim  nor  fire. 


PL  15,  Par.  85. 


36 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


86.  FIRE. 

Press  the  finger  against  the  trigger;  fire  without  de- 
ranging the  aim  and  without  lowering  or  turning  the 
head. 


PI.  16,  Par.  90. 


87.  LOAD. 

Lower  the  piece  and 
load.  (Par.  77.) 

88.  The  exercise  is  con- 
tinued by  the  commands: 

Squad,  2.  ready,  3.  aim,  4.  fire, 

LOAD. 

89.  To  accustom  the  recruits  in  the 
position  of  aim,  to  wait  for  the  com- 
mand 1.  Recover,  2.  arms. 

At  the  command  recover,  withdraw 
the  finger  from  the  trigger;  at  the 
command  arms,  take  the  position  of 
ready. 

90.  In  aim- 
kneeling, 

X left  elbow 

^**“***^^rests  upon  the 
left  knee, 
PI.  17,  Par.  90.  point  of  elbow 

in  front  of 


knee  cap. 

In  aiming  lying  down,  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands  and  slip  it  through  the  left  to  the  lock  plate ; 
rest  on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt  firmly  against 
the  right  shoulder ; in  recovering  arms,  the  piece  is 
held  as  in  load. 

91.  When  the  recruits  are  thoroughly  instructed  in 
the  adjustments  of  the  sight,  and  the  principles  of  aim- 
ing as  laid  down  in  the  Firing  Regulations  for  Small 
Arms,  they  will  be  required  to  aim,  using  the  different 
lines  of  sight.  For  this  purpose  the  instructor  com- 
mands : l^At  (so  mamj)  yards,  2.  Squad,  3.  ready,  4.  aim. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


37 


At  the  first  command,  both  ranks  take  the  position 
for  loading  and  adjust  the  sight  with  the  right  hand ; 
then  raise  the  muzzle  to  the  height  of  the  chin. 

The  instructor  assures  himself  by  careful  inspection 
that  each  man  sets  his  sight  at  the  range  indicated ; 
when  satisfied  that  the  subject  is  fully  comprehended, 
he  will  exercise  the  men  in  aiming  at  a designated  ob- 
ject. For  this  purpose  he  commands  1.  At  that  tree 

{ov  At ),  2.  At  (so  many)  yards,  3.  Squad,  4. 

READY,  5.  AIM. 

At  the  first  command,  fix  the  eyes  on  the  object  in- 
dicated ; at  the  second  command,  adjust  the  sight  and 
immediately  fix  the  eyes  upon  the  object  again. 

92.  In  order  not  to  mislead  the  men,  the  distance  an- 
nounced in  the  command  should  be,  as  nearly  as  possi- 
ble, the  true  distance  of  the  objective.  By  changing 
the  objective,  all  the  different  lines  of  sight  may  be 
used  ; the  men  should  be  practiced  in  aiming  at  objects 
above  and  below  them. 

93.  The  recruits  are  at  first  taught  to  load 
and  fire  without  using  cartridges  ; after  a 
few  lessons,  they  should  use  dummy  cart- 
ridges, and  when  well  instructed  the  drill 
may  close  with  a few  rounds  of  blank 
cartridges. 

94.  No  cartridges  will  be  used,  except 
when  indicated  in  the  first  command,  thus  : 

1.  With  dummy  (blank  or  halt)  cartridges, 

2.  LOAD.  This  rule  is  general. 

Rifle  Salute. 

95.  Being  at  the  carry  ; 1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  hollow 

of  the  right  shoulder,  forearm  horizontal, 
palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  ^ 
extended  and  joined,  forefinger  against  the  __ 

piece,  (two.)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side.  pi.  is,  Par.  95 


38 


SCHOOL  '/F  THE  SOLDIER. 


Inspection  of  Cartridge  Boxes  and  Arms. 

96.  Being  at  the  order  : 1.  Open,  2.  boxes. 

Steady  the  piece  by  grasping  it  with  the  left  hand 
near  the  muzzle,  forearm  horizontal ; open  the  box  with 
the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

In  a similar  manner  each  man,  as  his  box  is  inspected, 
closes  it  and  resumes  the  order. 

97.  Being  at  the  order : 1.  Inspection,  2.  arms. 

At  the  command  arms,  bayonets  are  fixed  and  cart- 
ridge boxes  opened. 

Each  man,  as  the  inspector  approaches  him,  executes 
port  arms  and  ojyen  chamber. 

The  inspector  takes  the  piece  (the  man  dropping  the 
hands  by  the  sides),  inspects  and  hands  it  back  to  the 
man,  who  receives  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  balance, 
resumes  the  port,  closes  chamber,  brings  the  hammer  to 
the  safety  notch,unfixes bayonet  and  returns  to  the  order. 

With  the  ramrod  bayonet,  the  piece  is  brought  to 
the  order  and  the  bayonet  is  then  unfixed. 

As  the  inspector  returns  the  piece,  the  next  man 
executes  inspection  arms,  and  so  on  through  the  squad. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  the 
man  closes  chamber,  brings  the  hammer  to  the  safety 
notch,  unfixes  bayonet  and  returns  to  the  order,  when 
the  inspector  passes  to  the  next  man  who  immediately 
executes  inspection  arms. 

The  inspection  of  arms  begins  on  the  right,  after 
which  the  inspector  may  pass  in  rear  and  inspect  boxes 
from  left  to  right. 

Boxes  are  closed  as  soon  as  inspected. 


To  Un sling  and  S/ing  Knapsacks. 

98.  Arms  being  stacked  : 1.  Unsling,  2.  knapsack. 
At  the  command  unsling,  the  front  rank  moves  back 
one  step  (Par.  39)  to  clear  the  stacks,  and  faces  about; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


39 


the  rear  rank  at  the  same  time  moves  back  three  steps; 
all  the  men  unhook  the  right  hand  strap. 

At  the  command  Jcnapsack,  remove  the  knapsacks, 
the  four  men  whose  pieces  are  in  the  same  stack  lean- 
ing their  knapsacks,  flaps  outward,  one  against  another 
in  the  form  of  a square. 

The  knapsacks  of  the  guides  and  file  closers  are  placed 
each  against  the  nearest  pile. 

1.  Sling,  2.  knapsack. 

At  the  command  sling,  each  man  takes  his  knapsack 
and,  standing  erect,  holds  it  by  the  straps,  the  flap  next 
to  the  knees ; at  the  command  knapsack,  places  the 
knapsack  on  the  back,  the  front  rank  facing  about  and 
stepping  up  to  the  stacks,  the  rear  rank  closing  to  fac- 
ing distance. 

Note. — The  word  knapsack  will  be  used  in  tfie  com- 
mands for  all  patterns  of  packs. 

STACK  ARMS. 

99.  Stacks  will  not  be  made  with  the  bayonet  if  the 
rifles  have  the  stacking*  swivel. 

100.  Three  pieces  only  are  used  in  making  a stack ; 
pieces  not  so  used  are,  in  this  connection,  termed  loose 
pieces. 

Preparatory  to  stacking  arms,  the  squad  must  have 
counted  fours  (Par.  186),  and  must  be  in  line  at  the  order. 

With  the  Stacking  Swivel. 

101.  1.  Stack,  2.  ARMS. 

' At  the  command  stack,  each  even  number  of  the  front 
rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand,  grasps  it  with 
the  left  at  the  upper  band,  and  rests  the  butt  between 
his  feet,  barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclining*  slightly  to 
the  front  and  opposite  the  center  of  the  interval  on  his 
right,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking 
swivel ; each  even  number  of  the  rear  rank  then  passes 
his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  his  file  leader,  who 
grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right  hand  and 


40 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


throws  the  butt  twenty-eiglit  indies  in  advance  of  h^s 
own  and  opposite  the  middle  of  the  interval,  the  right 
hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages 
with  that  of  his  own  piece ; each  odd  number  of  the 
front  rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand,  barrel 
to  the  front,  the  left  hand  guiding  the  stacking  swivel, 
which  he  holds  near  the  stacking  swivel  of  the  other 
pieces. 

At  the  command  arms,  each  odd  number  of  the  front 
rank  engages  the  lower  hook  of  his  swivel  with  the  free 
hook  of  the  swivel  of  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank; 
he  then  turns  the  barrel  outward  and  downward,  into  the 
angle  formed  by  the  other  two  pieces,  and  rests  the  butt 
between  his  feet. 

The  stacks  being  formea,  the  pieces  of  the  odd  numbers 
in  the  rear  rank  are  passed  to  the  even  numbers  in  the 
front  rank,  who  lay  them  on  the  stacks.  The  pieces  of 
jthe  guides  and  the  file  closers  are  laid  on  the  stacks  at 
the  same  time.  ^ 

J The  men  having*  quitted  their  pieces,  take  the  position 
! of  the  soldier. 

I The  instructor  may  then  rest  or  dismiss  the  squad, 

' leaving  the  arms  stacked. 

On  assembling,  the  men  take  their  places  in  rear  of  the 
stacks. 

102.  1.  Take,  2.  arms. 

At  the  command  take,  the  loose  pieces  are  returned; ' 
each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  then  grasps  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his  rear  rank  man 
with  the  right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands ; 
each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  in 
the  same  way  with  the  right  hand. 

At  the  command  arms,  each  odd  number  of  the  front 
rank  disengages  his  own  piece  by  turning  it  to  the  right; 
each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  disengages  his 
piece  by  turning  it  to  the  left ; the  butts  are  then  raised 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER, 


41' 


from  the  ground,  each  even  number  of  the  front  i*ank 
passes  the  piece  of  his  rear  rank  man  to  him,  and  all 
resume  the  order 


With  the  Bayonet. 

103.  1.  Staclc,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  command  stack,  each  even  number  of  the  front 
rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  grasps  it 
with  the  left  between  the  bands  and  holds  the  butt  six 
inches  above  the  space  between  his  feet,  barrel  to  the 
rear,  muzzle  inclining  slightly  to  the  front  and  opposite 
the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right ; each  even  num- 
ber of  the  rear  rank  then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the 
right,  to  his  file  leader,  who  grasps  it  between  the  bands 
with  his  right  hand  and  places  the  shank  of  the  oayonet 
upon  that  of  his  own  ; each  odd  number  of  the  front 
rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand,  barrel  to  the 
front,  and  places  the  shank  of  his  bayonet  in  the  angle 
formed  by  the  bayonets  of  the  other  two  pieces  ; the 
butts  of  all  the  pieces  are  about  six  inches  from  the 
ground. 

At  the  command  arms,  each  even  number  of  the  front 
rank,  with  his  right  hand,  passes  the  butt  of  the  piece  of 
his  rear  rank  man  twenty-eight  inches  in  advance  of  his- 
own  and  opposite  the  middle  of  the  interval,  passing  it 
between  the  butts  of  the  other  pieces  ; the  stack  is  then 
lowered,  the  front  rank  men  resting  the  butts  of  their 
own  pieces  between  their  feet. 

The  stacks  being  formed,  the  pieces  of  the  odd  num- 
bers of  the  rear  rank  are  passed  to  the  even  numbers  of 
the  front  rank,  who  lay  them  on  the  stacks.  The  pieces 
of  the  guides  and  file  closers  are  laid  on  the  stacks  at 
the  same  time. 

The  men  having  quitted  their  pieces  take  the  posi- 
tion of  the  soldier. 

104.  1.  Take,  2.  arms. 

At  the  command  take,  the  loose  pieces  are  returned ; 


42 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  then  grasps  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his  rear  rank  man 
with  the  right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands ; 
each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  own  piece 
in  the  same  way  with  the  right  hand. 

At  the  command  arm,s,  raise  the  butts  from  the  ground 
and  disengage  the  pieces;  each  even  number  of  the  front 
rank  passes  the  piece  of  his  rear  rank  man  to  him,  and 
all  resume  the  order. 

105.  Being  in  single  rank,  arms  are  stacked  and  taken 
on  the  same  principles  as  in  double  rank ; at  the  pre- 
paratory command  number  three  steps  back  and  covers 
number  two  ; numbers  two  and  three  execute  what  has 
been  explained  for  the  even  numbers  of  the  front  and 
rear  rank  respectively  ; number  three  then  resumes  his 
place;  number  one  uses  his  piece  as  explained  for  the  odd 
number  of  the  front  rank.  The  piece  of  number  four  is 
passed  as  explained  for  the  odd  numbers  of  the  rear  rank. 

106.  The  following  positions  of  the  piece  are  intended 
mainly  for  use  in  extended  order  and  route  marches. 
Whenever  the  commands  for  any  of  these  positions  are 
given,  the  piece  will  be  shifted  in  the  most  convenient 
manner ; reducing  the  movements  to  regular  motions 
and  cadence  is  prohibited. 

107.  1.  Trail,  2.  arms. 

The  piece  is  grasped  with  the  right  hand,  just  above 
the  balance,  right  arm  slightly  bent,  barrel  up,  muzzle 
inclined  slightly  to  the  front. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconven- 
ience to  others,  as  on  the  firing  line,  the  piece  may  be 
grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle  lowered  until  the 
piece  is  horizontal.  A similar  position  in  the  left  hand 
may  then  be  used. 

108.  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  arms. 

The  piece  rests  on  the  left  shoulder,  barrel  up,  muzzle 
elevated  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  men  in  rear,  trig- 
ger guard  in  front  of  and  near  the  shoulder,  left  hand 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


43 


embracing  the  butt,  heel  between  the  first 
and  second  fingers,  elbow  down. 

109.  1.  Sling,  2.  arms. 

The  right  arm  is  passed  between  the  rifle 
and  the  sling  which  rests  upon  the  shoulder, 
piece  in  rear  of  the  shoulder  and  nearly 
vertical,  muzzle  up  ; right  hand  steadying 
the  piece. 

On  route  marches,  the  piece  may  be 
slung  on  the  left  shoulder.  The  gun  sling 
should  never  be  so  tight- 
ly drawn  that  it  cannot 
be  readily  adjusted. 

110. 1.  Secure,  2.  arms. 

The  piece  is  held  in 
the  right  hand  at  the 
balance,  barrel  up,  slop- 
ing downward  and  to 
the  front;  right  hand 
supported  against  the 
front  of  the  hip,  upper  arm  against 
the  stock.  A corresponding  position 
in  the  left  hand  may  be  used. 

111.  When  the  recruits  are  at  first 
exercised  in  marching  with  arms, 
the  instructor  orders  the  pieces  into 
position  before  putting  the  squad 
P3.  20,  Par.  110.  in  march  and  before  passing  from 
quick  to  double  time ; he  also  causes  the  recruits 
to  be  at  quick  time  at  the  carry  before  ordering  the 
halt. 

112.  When  the  marchings  and  manual  of  arms  are 
'horoughly  understood,  the  following  general  rules 
8 vern  : 

^"'t.  If  at  the  order,  bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
l^der  at  the  preparatory  command  for  marching  in 
TLtime. 


44 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


2d.  If  at  the  order  or  carry,  bring  the  piece  to 
the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  : Double  time. 

3d.  A disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as 
when  without  arms. 

4th.  If  at  the  right  shoulder,  left  shoulder,  or 
trail,  bring  the  piece  to  the  order  on  halting ; the  exe- 
cution of  the  order  and  halt  commence  at  the  same 
instant. 

5th.  When  the  facings,  side  step,  back  step,  align- 
ments, open  and  close  ranks,  and  loadings  are  executed 
from  the  order,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in 
motion,  and  resume  the  order  on  halting.  When  this 
rule  applies  to  other  movements,  it  is  therein 
stated. 

113.  In  the  battle  exercises,  or  whenever  circum- 
stances require,  the  regular  positions  of  the  manual 
of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without  regard 
to  the  previous  position  of  the  piece  ; such  movements 
as  are  not  in  the  manual  will  be  executed  without  re- 
gard to  motions  or  cadence.  It  is  laid  down  as  a prin- 
ciple that  the  effective  use  of  the  weapon  is  not  to  be 
impeded  by  the  formalities  of  drill. 


THE  SQUAD. 


114.  The  movements  are  explained  for  double  rank, 
with  arms  ; in  the  instruction  of  recruits,  however,  the 
movements  are  first  executed  in  single  rank,  without 
arms ; the  instruction  is  given  as  herein  prescribed  by 
substituting  the  word  man  iov  file  in  the  commands  and 
explanations,  and  omitting  reference  to  the  rear  rank 
and  the  position  of  the  piece. 

115.  The  recruits  are  divided  into  groups  of  about 
seven  men,  to  represent  squads,  each  under  the  coni- 
mand  of  a corporal,  who  is  the  instructor.  (Par.  12.7 

The  object  is  to  give  the  corporal  the  confidence^ifid 
Experience  necessary  to  qualify  him  as  .squad 


ence^acl 

d 1^^^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


45 


while  at  the  same  time  teaching  the  recruits  the  move- 
ments in  close  and  extended  order. 

The  corporal,  as  squad  leader,  is  posted  as  the  left 
nan  in  the  front  rank.  (See  Par.  9.)  The  rear  rank 
nan,  who  covers  the  corporal,  steps  into  the  front  rank 
whenever  the  latter  leaves  his  place  ; this  file  remains 
blank  until  the  corporal  resumes  his  place  in 
ranks. 

116.  When  the  guide  is  announced  in  the  command, 
the  man  on  the  designated  flank  conducts  the  march, 
but  in  no  other  respect  acts  as  guide. 

To  accustom  the  recruits  to  their  duties  in  all  posi- 
tions their  places  will  frequently  be  changed. 

117.  A double  or  single  rank  faced  to  a flank  is  called 
a column  of  files.  (See,  also.  Par.  215.) 

118.  In  line,  the  distance  between  ranks,  from  back  to 
breast,  is  facing  distance ; on  rough  ground,  and  when 
marching  in  double  time,  it  is  increased  to  36  inches ; 
the  rear  rank  clos  es  to  facing  distance  upon  halting. 

When  the  knapsack  is  worn,  the  distance  is  increased 
by  the  depth  of  the  knapsack. 


To  Size  and  Form  the  Squad. 

119.  Being  in  single  rank  at  the  order,  the  instructor 
faces  the  squad  to  the  right,  arranges  the  men*accord- 
ing  to  height,  tallest  man  in  front,  and  commands  : 1. 
In  two  ranks  form  squads  2.  march,  3.  front. 

At  the  command  march  the  first  man  faces  to  the 
left ; the  second  man  places  himself  in  the  rear  rank 
covering  the  first ; both  place  the  left  hand  above  the 
hip  (Par.  19) ; the  other  men  close  in  quick  time,  and 
form  alternately  in  front  and  rear  rank,  as  explained 
for  the  first  two,  each  man  facing  to  the  left  upon 
arriving  at  his  proper  place ; then  dressing  to  the 
right. 

All  the  men  having  formed,  the  instructor  com^ 


46 


• SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


mands : front.  The  men  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to 
the  front  and  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

The  squad  having  been  sized,  the  men  are  cautioned 
to  take  the  same  relative  positions,  when  the  squad  is 
formed  thereafter. 

120.  To  form  the  squad,  the  corporal  places  himself 
in  front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  formed,  makes  the 
signal  for  the  assembly,  or  commands  : fall  in. 

The  men  assemble  in  their  proper  places  in  double 
rank ; arms  at  the  order. 

Alignments. 

121.  The  alignments  are  first  taught  by  requiring  the 
recruits  to  align  themselves,  man  by  man,  upon  two 
files  established  as  a base. 

Being  at  the  carry  or  order  * 1.  Two  flies  from  the 
right  (or  left)  three  paces  to  tue  front,  2.  march,  3. 
NEXT,  4.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  on  the 
right  march  three  paces  to  the  front,  halt,  exe- 
cute eyes  right,  and  place  the  left  hand  above 
the  hip  (Par.  19);  the  instructor  aligns  them,  sees 
that  the  rear  rank  men  cover  their  file  lead- 
ers, and  then  causes  the  remaining  files  to  move 
up  successively  on  this  alignment,  each  by  the  com- 
mand n*ext. 

At  the  command  next,  the  next  file  marches  three 
paces  to  the  front,  each  man  shortening  the  last  step  so 
as  to  find  himself  about  six  inches  in  rear  of  the  new  align- 
ment, which  must  never  be  passed  ; he  then  executes 
eyes  right,  places  the  left  hand  above  the  hip,  and  tak- 
ing steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  moves  up,  placing  his 
arm  lightly  against  the  elbow  of  the  man  on  his  right, 
so  that  his  eyes  and  shoulders  shall  be  in  line  with 
those  of  the  men  on  his  right. 

The  instructor  sees  that  each  man  observes  the 
principles  of  the  alignment,  and  when  the  last  file  has 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


47 


arrived  on  the  line,  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks 
from  the  right  flank  and  orders  up  or  back,  such  men 
as  may  be  in  rear  or  in  advance  of  the  line  ; only  the 
men  designated  move. 

At  the  command  front,  giv'en  when  the  ranks  are 
aligned,  the  men  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front  and  drop  the 
left  hand;  all  movement  in  the  ranks  must  then  cease. 

In  dressing  to  the  left,  each  man  places  himself  so 
that  his  left  elbow  touches  lightly  the  arm  of  the  man 
on  his  left. 

122.  In  the  first  drills,  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is 
established  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  squad,  and  after- 
ward in  oblique  directions. 

In  order  to  habituate  the  recruit  to  his  interval  in 
line,  the  left  hand  is  placed  above  the  hip  in  all  align- 
ments in  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 

123.  The  recruits  having  learned  to  align  them- 
selves, man  by  man,  the  instructor  establishes  the 
base  files  and  aligns  the  squad  by  the  commands  : 
1.  Bight  {ov  left),  2.  dress,  3.  front. 

At  the  command  dress,  all  the  men  except  the  base 
files,  move  forward  and  dress  up  to  the  line,  as  pre- 
viously explained. 

The  rear  rank  men  cover  in  file,  at  facing  distance, 
and  cast  their  eyes  to  the  right. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  and  gives  the 
command  : Front,  All  the  men  then  turn  the  head 
and  eyes  to  the  front  and  drop  the  left  hand. 

124.  Alignments  to  the  rear  are  executed  on  the  same 
principles:  1.  Bight  (or  left)  backward,  2.  dress,  3.  front. 

The  men  step  back,  halt  a little  in  rear  of  the  line  of 
the  base  files,  and  immediately  dress  up  by  steps  of 
two  or  three  inches. 

125.  To  execute  the  alignments,  using  the  side  step, 
the  instructor  establishes  the  base  files  a few  paces  to 
the  right  or  left  of  the  squad  and  commands  : 1.  Bight 
(or  left)  step,  2.  Bight  (or  left),  3.  dress,  4.  front. 


48 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER. 


At  the  command  dress,  the  men  execute  the  side 
step,  close  toward  the  base  files,  and  dress  as  already 
explained. 

126.  When  the  squad  dresses  quickly  and  well,  tae 
guide  alone  is  first  established. 

In  dressing,  the  first  two  or  three  files  are  accurately 
aligned  as  quickly  as  possible,  to  afford  a base  for  the 
rest  of  the  squad. 

MARCHINGS. 

To  March  in  Line. 

127.  Being  in  line  at  a halt ; 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide 
{right  or  left),  3.  march. 

The  men  step  off,  the  guide  marching  straight  to  the 
front ; the  rear  rank  men  cover  their  file  leaders  and 
follow  them  at  facing  distance. 

The  instructor  sees  that  the  men  preserve  the  inter- 
val toward  the  side  of  the  guide ; that  they  yield  to 
pressure  from  that  side  and  resist  pressure  from  the 
opposite  direction ; that  by  slightly  shortening  or 
lengthening  the  step,  they  gradually  recover  the  align- 
ment, and  by  slightly  opening  out  or  closing  in,  they 
gradually  recover  the  interval,  if  lost;  that  while 
habitually  keeping  the  head  to  the  front,  they  may 
occasionally  glance  toward  the  side  of  the  guide  to 
assure  themselves  of  the  alignment  and  interval,  but 
that  the  head  is  turned  as  little  as  possible  for  this 
purpose. 

* To  change  the  guide  : Guide  {left  or  right). 

128.  If  the  men  lose  step,  the  instructor  commands : 
STEP. 

The  men  glance  toward  the  side  of  the  guide,  retake 
the  step  and  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

To  March  Backward. 

129.  Being  at  a halt:  1.  Backward,  2.  Guide  {right 
or  left),  3.  march. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


49 


\ 

To  March  to  the  Rear. 

130.  Bein^  in  march  ; 1.  To  the  Rear,  2.  march,  3. 
Guide  {right  or  left). 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot 
strikes  the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot ; then 
turn  on  the  balls  of  both  feet,  face  to  the  right  about 
and  immediately  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about, 
taking  four  short  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence, 
and  then  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

To  March  by  the  Flank,  in  Column  of  Files. 

131.  Being  in  line  at  a halt : 1.  Right  (or  left),  2. 
FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  march. 

If  marching  : 1.  By  the  right  (or  left)  flank,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot 
strikes  the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot, 
then  face  to  the  right  in  marching  and  step  off  in  the 
new  direction  with  the  right  foot. 

In  each  file  the  front  rank  man  is  the  guide  ; the  men 
cover  in  file  and  keep  closed  to  facing  distance. 

To  halt  the  column  of  files  : 1.  Squad,  2.  halt  ; and 
to  face  it  to  the  front ; 3.  Left  (or  right),  4.  face. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Files,  to  March  in  Line. 

132.  1.  By  the  right  (or  left)  flank,  2.  march,  3.  Guide 
(right  or  left). 

To  Change  Direction  in  Column  of  Files. 

133.  Being  in  march  : 1.  Column  right  (or  left) ; or,  1. 
Column  half  right  (or  half  left),  2.  march. 

The  leading  file  wheels  to  the  right,  the  pivot  man 
shortening  two  or  three  steps  and  moving  over  a quar- 
ter, or  an  eighth  of  a circle,  whose  radius  is  about 
eighteen  inches ; the  other  files  follow  the  first  and 
wheel  on  the  same  ground. 


50 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


If  at  a halt : 1.  Forivard,  2.  Column  right  (or  left), 
3.  MARCH  ; or,  2.  Column  half  right  (or  half  left),  3. 
MARCH. 

The  Oblique  March. 

134.  For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  the  squad  being 
correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  will  face  the  squad 
half  rig:ht  or  half  left,  point  out  to  the  men  their  rela- 
tive positions  and  explain  that  these  are  to  be  main- 
tained in  the  oblique  march. 

135.  Being  in  line  at  a halt,  or  marching  : 1.  Right 
(or  left)  oblique,  2.  march. 

Each  man  half  faces  to  the  right,  at  the  same  time 
stepping  off  in  the  new  direction.  He  preserves  his 
relative  position,  keeping  his  shoulders  parallel  to  those 
of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  and  so  regulates  his  step 
as  to  make  the  head  of  this  man  conceal  the  heads  of 
the  other  men  in  the  rank ; the  ranks  remain  parallel 
to  their  original  front. 

The  rear  rank  conforms  to  the  foregoing,  each  man 
marching  so  as  to  cover  his  file  leader  upon  resuming 
the  original  direction. 

At  the  command  halt,  the  men  halt,  faced  to  the  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction : 1.  Forward,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then 
move  straight  to  the  front. 

If  marking  time  while  obliquing,  the  oblique  march 
is  resumed  by  the  commands  : 1.  Oblique.  2.  march. 

The  short  step  will  not  be  used  in  the  oblique  march. 

136.  Id  the  oblique  march,  the  guide  is  always  with- 
out indication,  on  the  side  toward  which  the  oblique  is 
made.  On  resuming  the  direct  march  the  guide  is 
without  indication  on  the  side  it  was  previous  to  the 
oblique. 

If  the  oblique  be  executed  from  a halt,  the  guide  is 
announced  on  taking  the  direct  march  in  line. 

These  rules  are  general. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


51 


137.  The  column  of  files  obliques  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means. 

To  March  in  Double  Time. 

138.  Being  in  line  at  a halt  : 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide 
[right  or  left),  3.  Double  time,  4.  march. 

To  Pass  from  Quick  to  Double  Time  and  the  Reverse. 

139.  1.  Double  time,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  the  right  foot  in  quick  time,  and 
step  off  with  the  left  foot  in  double  time. 

To  resume  quick  time  ; 1.  Quick  time,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  is  com- 
ing to  the  ground,  the  squad  resumes  quick  time. 

TURNINOS. 

To  Turn  and  Halt. 

140.  Marching  in  line : 1.  Squad  right  (or  left),  2. 
MARCH,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  file  halts  and  the 
front  rank  man  or  pivot  faces  to  the  right ; the  other 
files  half  face  to  the  right  in  marching,  and  without 
changing  the  length  or  cadence  of  the  step  place  them- 
selves successively  upon  the  alignment  established  by 
the  right  file ; all  dress  to  the  right  without  command. 
The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  from  the  pivot 
flank  and  commands  : front. 

The  rear  rank  men  conform  to  the  movements  of 
their  file  leaders. 

If  at  a halt,  the  movement  is  executed  in  the  same 
manner ; if  at  the  order  and  the  movement  is  executed 
in  quick  time,  the  pieces  are  held  at  the  trail  while  in 
motion. 

Squad  half  right  (or  half  left)  is  executed  in  the  same 
manner,  except  that  the  pivot  makes  a half  face  to  the 
right. 


52 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


To  Turn  and  Advance. 

141.  Marching  in  line  : 1.  Right  (or  left)  turn,  2. 

MARCH,  3.  Forward,  4.  march,  5.  Guide  {right  ov  left). 

At  the  second  comniancl,  the  front  rank  man  on  the 
right,  who  is  the  guide,  marches  by  the  right  flank, 
taking  the  short  step  without  changing  the  cadence ; 
the  other  men  half  face  to  the  right  in  marching,  and 
moving  by  the  shortest  line  successively  place  them- 
selves on  the  new  line,  when  they  take  the  short  step. 

The  rear  rank  men  conform  to  the  movements  of 
their  file  leaders.  When  the  last  man  has  arrived  on 
the  new  line,  the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all 
resume  the  full  step. 

During  the  turn,  the  guide  is  without  command  on 
the  pivot  flank.  The  guide  is  announced  on  resuming 
the  full  step. 

If  at  a halt,  the  movement  is  similarly  executed,  and 
in  quick  time,  unless  the  command  double  time  be  given. 

Right  (or  left)  half  turn  is  executed  in  the  same  man- 
ner, except  that  the  guide  makes  a half  face  to  the  right. 

Should  the  command  halt  be  given  during  the  execu- 
tion of  the  movement,  those  men  on  the  new  line  halt ; 
the  others  halt  on  arriving  on  the  line  ; all  dress  to  the 
right  without  command. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  from  the  pivot 
flank  and  commands  : front. 

FIRINGS. 

142.  The  post  of  the  instructor  is  three  paces  in  rear 
of  the  squad,  but  in  actual  firing  he  places  himself 
where  he  can  best  make  himself  heard  and  at  the  same 
time  observe  the  effect  of  the  fire  ; the  objective  should 
be  in  plain  view  and  so  designated  as  to  be  easily  dis- 
tinguished by  all. 

143.  The  commands  for  firing  are  the  same  whether 
the  squad  be  standing,  kneeling  or  lying  down.  The 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


53 


commands  for  kneeling  or  lying  down  precede  the 
commands  for  firing. 

144.  At  the  preparatory  command  for  firing,  the 
squad  being  in  line  standing,  the  rear  rank  men  close, 
as  explained  for  loading  (Par.  77) ; and  the  cartridge 
box  if  worn  is  slipped  to  the  hip  and  opened ; it  is 
closed  and  replaced  after  executing  cease  firing. 

Volley  Firing. 

145.  The  squad  being  in  line  fronting  the  object  to 
be  fired  upon,  pieces  loaded : 1.  Fire  by  squad,  2.  At 
(such  an  object),  3.  At  (so  many)  yards,  4.  Squad,  5. 
READY,  6.  AIM,  7.  FIRE,  8.  LOAD. 

To  fire  another  volley  at  the  same  objective  with 
the  same  line  of  sight:  1.  Squad,  2.  ready,  3.  aim, 
4.  FIRE,  5.  LOAD. 

To  fire  another  volley  at  the  same  objective  but  with 
a new  line  of  sight : 1.  At  (so  many)  yards,  2.  Squad, 
3. ’ready,  4.  AIM,  5.  FIRE,  6.  LOAD. 

To  fire  another  volley  at  a new  ob  j ective  and  with  a new 
line  of  sight : 1.  At  (such  an  object),  2.  At  (so  many) 
yards,  3.  Squad,  4.  ready,  5.  aim,  6.  fire.  7.  load. 

146.  The  objective  and  range  will  be  indicated  in  the 
preparatory  commands  for  all  kinds  of  fire,  as  illustrated 
in  the  preceding  examples. 

If  the  objective  be  at  a considerable  angle  to  the  front 
of  the  squad  the  instructor  will  change  the  front  of  the 
squad  so  as  to  face  it. 

The  commands  are  given  at  sufficient  intervals  to 
allow  them  to  be  executed  as  already  prescribed.  The 
command  fire  is  given  when  the  pieces  appear  to  be 
steady. 

These  rules  are  general. 

To  Cease  Firing. 

147.  CEASE  FIRING. 

The  men  stop  firing,  draw  cartridge  or  eject  the  empty 


64. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


shell,  lower  the  sight  leaf  and  take  the  order,  order 
kneeling  or  the  position  lying  down,  as  the  case  may 
be.  If  standing  the  rear  rank  men  then  step  back  and 
cover  their  file  leaders. 

148.  The  command  (or  signal)  cease  firing,  is  always 
used  to  stop  the  firing  and  may  be  given  at  any  time 
after  the  first  preparatory  command  for  firing,  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not.  This  rule 
is  general. 

149.  1.  CEASE  FIRING,  2.  LOAD. 

The  firing'  will  stop  ; such  pieces  as  are  already  loaded 
will  be  brought  at  once  to  the  position  of  load  ; the 
others  will  be  loaded. 

This  is  intended  to  interrupt  the  firing,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  steadying  the  men,  or  to  change  to  another 
method  of  firing. 

To  Fire  at  Will. 

150.  1.  Fire  ai  will,  2.  (such  an  object),  3.  ^f(so 
many)  yards,  4.  Squad,  5.  ready,  6.  commence  firiisIg. 

At  the  command  commence  firing  esich.  man  independ- 
ently of  the  others  takes  careful  aim  at  the  object,  fires, 
loads  and  continues  the  fire  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent 
with  taking  careful  aim  at  each  shot.  The  men  should 
be  taught  to  load  rapidly  and  to  aim  deliberately. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


55 


BAYONET  EXERCISE. 

151.  The  object  of  this  drill  is  to  make  the  soldier 
quick  and  proficient  in  handling  his  piece. 

It  is  intended  merely  to  prescribe  the  manner  of  exe- 
cuting the  movements  laid  down,  but  not  to  restrict  the 
number  of  movements,  leaving  to  the  discretion  of 
company  commanders  and  the  ingenuity  of  instructors 
the  selection  of  such  other  exercises  as  accord  with  the 
object  of  the  drill. 

As  soon  as  the  movements  are  executed  accurately, 
the  commands  are  given  rapidly ; expertness  in  the 
bayonet  exercise  depending  mostly  on  quickness  of 
motion. 

152.  In  taking'  intervals  and  distances,  the  normal  in- 
terval and  distance  when  armed  is  four  paces  ; when 
unarmed,  two  paces. 

To  Take  Intervals. 

153.  Being  in  line  at  a halt : 1.  To  the  right  (or  left) 
take  intervals,  2.  march. 

At  the  first  command,  the  rear  rank  steps  back  four 
paces  ; at  the  command  march,  the  man  on  the  left  of 
each  rank  stands  fast ; the  other  men  face  to  the  right 
and  step  off,  each  man  halting  faced  to  the  front,  when 
he  has  the  proper  interval. 

To  Assemble. 

154.  1.  To  the  right  (or  left)  assemble,  2.  march. 

The  front  rank  man  on  the  right  stands  fast ; the 

other  men  close  to  their  proper  places. 

To  Take  Distances. 

155.  Being  in  line  at  a halt,  and  having  counted  fours  : 
1.  Front  take  distance,  2.  march. 

Number  one  of  each  four  of  the  front  rank  moves 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


5d 


straight  to  the  front;  number  two  mov’’es  off  as  soon 
as  number  one  has  advanced  the  specified  distance ; 
numbers  three  and  four  move  off  m succession  in  like 
manner.  The  rear  rank  executes  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  front  rank,  number  one  moving  off  as 
goon  as  number  four  front  rank  has  advanced  four 
paces.  The  proper  distance  being  attained  : 1.  Squad, 
2.  HALT. 

To  Assemble. 


156.  1.  Assemble,  2.  march. 

Number  one  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast ; the  other 
men  move  forward  and  close  to*their  proper  places. 

157.  Intervals  or  distances  having  been  taken  and  the 
squad  being  at  the  carry  or  order  with  bayonets  fixed  '. 
1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  guard. 

At  the  command  guard,  half  face  to  the  right,  carry 

back  and 
place  the 
right  foot 
about  twice 
itslengthto 
the  rear 
and  three 
inches  to  the  right,  the  feet  at 
little  less  than  a right  angle,  the 
right  toe  pointing  squarely  to  the 
right,  both  knees  bent  slightly, 
weight  of  the  body  held  equally 
on  both  legs  ; at  the  same  time 
throw  the  point  of  the  bayonet 
to  the  front,  at  the  height  of  the 
chin,  barrel  turned  slightly  to 
the  left,  grasping  the  piece 
lightly  with  both  hands,  the  right 
at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the 
PI.  21,  Par.  157.  left  between  lower  band  and 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


57 


lock  plate  ; the  right  hand  in  line  with  the  left  hip  and 
at  the  height  of  the  belt,  both  arms  held  free  from  the 
body  and  without  constraint. 

158.  1.  Carry,  2.  arms;  or,  1.  Order,  2.  arms. 

Resume  the  carry  or  order  as  for  charge  bayonet. 

159.  Being'  at  the  guard  : advance. 

Move  the  left  foot  quickly  forward,  twice  its  length ; 
follow  with  the  right  foot  the  same  distance. 

160.  RETIRE. 

Move  the  right  foot  quickly  to  the  rear,  twice  its 
length  ; follow  with  the  left  foot  the  same  distance. 

161.  1.  Front,  2.  pass. 

Advance  the  right  foot  quickly,  fifteen  inches  in  front 
of  the  left,  keeping  right  toe  squarely  to  the  right ; ad- 
vance the  left  foot  to  its  relative  position  in  front. 

162.  1.  Rear,  2.  pass. 

Carry  the  left  foot  quickly  fifteen  inches  to  the  rear 
of  the  right ; place  the  right  foot  in  its  relative  position 
in  rear,  keeping  right  toe  squarely  to  the  right. 

163.  1.  Right,  2.  VOLT. 

Face  to  the  right,  turning  on  the  nail  of  the  left  foot, 
at  the  same  time  carry  the  right  foot  quickly  to  its  po- 
sition in  rear. 

164.  1.  Left,  2.  VOLT. 

Face  to  the  left,  turning  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot, 
at  the  same  time  carry  the  right  foot  quickly  to  its  po- 
sition in  rear. 

Right  rear  and  left  rear  volts  are  similarly  executed 
facing  about  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot. 

The  foregoing  movements  are  first  executed  without 
arms- 


PARRIES. 

165.  1.  Right  (or  left),  2.  parry. 

Move  the  point  of  the  bayonet  about  six  inches  to  the 
right. 


58 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


GUARD. 

Bring  the  piece  back  to  the  position  of  guard. 

In  the  preliminary  drill,  after  the  parries  and 
points,  the  position  of  guard  is  resumed,  by  command, 
after  each  movement. 

When  the  men  have  become  proficient  the  instructor 
will  cause  them  to  resume  the  guard  without  com- 
mand. 

166.  1.  Right  low,  2.  parry. 

Move  the  point  of  the  bayonet  quickly  opposite  the 
left  shoulder ; describe  a semi  circle  from  left  to  right, 
bring  the  point  of  the  bayonet  to  the  height  of  and 
in  front  of  the  right  knee,  barrel  to  the  left,  butt  under 
right  forearm,  elbow  two  or  three  inches  higher  than  the 
right  shoulder. 

167.  1.  Left  low,  2.  parry. 

Lower  the  point  of  the  bayonet  and  describe  a semi- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


59 


circle  by  carrying  the  piece  to  the  left,  covering  the 
left  side  of  the  body,  barrel  down,  left  forearm  behind 
the  piece,  point  of  the  bayonet  at  the  height  of  and 
to  the  left  of  the  left  knee,  righjb  forearm  above  the  line 
of  the  eyes,  hand  well  to  the  left. 

168.  1.  Head,  2.  parry. 


Raise  the  piece  with 
.both  hands  about 
eight  inches  in  front 
of  and  four  inches 
above  the  head,  barrel  downward 
and  supported  between  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  left  hand  midway 
between  upper  and  lower  bands. 

169.  In  the  different  parries  the 
piece  should  be  lowered,  raised  or 
inclined  to  the  right  or  left  so  as  to 
cover  the  point  attacked;  the  thrusts 
and  lunges  should  be  executed  on 
the  same  principles,  taking  timely 
advantage  of  an  adversary’s  failure 
to  cover  himself  from  attack. 

When  a lunge  is  made  at  a foot 
soldier,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  is 
directed  at  his  breast.  In  the  case 
of  a horseman,  it  is  directed  against 
his  side  or  against  the  head  or  flank  of  his  horse.  The 
foot  soldier  should  endeavor  to  gain  the  horseman’s  left 
side,  as  the  latter  cannot  use  his  arms  on  that  side  to 
advantage. 


PI.  25,  Par.  168. 


POINTS. 

170.  THRUST. 

Thrust  the  piece  quickly  forward  to  the  full  length  of 
the  left  arm,  slipping  it  through  the  left  hand  to  the 
guard  ; give  it  a rotary  motion  so  to  bring  the  bar- 


60 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDiE-R 


PI.  26,  Par.  170. 


PI.  27,  Par.  171. 


rel  up,  and  direct  the  point  of 
the  bayonet  at  the  point  to  be 
attacked;  at  the  same  time 
straighten  vigorously  the 
right  leg,  throwing  the 
weight  forward  on  the  left. 

The  piece  must  be  held  so 
as  to  cover  the  point  most  ex- 
posed to  the  enemy’s  attack. 

In  the  thrust  from  the  head 
parry  and  from  the  right  and 
left  low  parries  the  piece  is 
not  rotated. 


171.  LUNGE. 

Executed  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  thrust,  ex- 
cept that  the  left  foot  is 
carried  forward  twice  its 
length. 

172.  BUTT  TO  FRONT. 
Raise  the  piece  nearly 

vertical,  and  bring  it  back, 
barrel  in  the  hollow  of 
right  shoulder,  (two.) 
Strike  quickly,  the  butt  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


61 


PI.  28,  Par.  172. 


the  front,  straight- 
en right  leg,  barrel 
resting  on  right 
shoulder. 

173.  BUTT  TO 

RIGHT  (or  LEFT). 

The  same  as  butt  to  front, 
except  that  in  executing  the 
first  motion,  the  men  make  a 
right  volt.  In  resuming  the 
guard,  the  men  make  a left 
volt. 

174.  BUTT  TO  REAR. 

Turn  to  the  right  on  both 
heels,  keeping  the  feet  nearly 
at  right  angles,  right  toe  to 
the  rear,  barrel  downward  and 
horizontal,  right  hand  oppo- 
site the  neck,  left  hand  near 


lower  band,  left  leg  straight. 
(TWO.)  Strike  to  the  rear. 

In  resuming  the  guard, 
the  men  turn  to  the  left  on 
both  heels  and  bring  the 
left  toe  to  the  front. 

175.  To  thrust  or  lunge 
from  a parry,  first  give  the 
command  for  the  parry, 
then  follow  quickly  with 
the  command  for  the  thrust 
or  lunge. 


62 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


Examples. 

1.  Right,  2.  parry,  3.  lunge,  4.  guard. 

1.  Head,  2.  parry,  3.  thrust,  4.  guard. 

176.  The  execution  of  a parry  and  a thrust  or  a lung-e 
may  be  determined  by  one  command  of  execution. 

Example. 

1.  Head,  2.  parry  and  thrust,  3.  guard. 

At  the  second  command  execute  the  parry,  then 
l^rust  quickly ; resume  the  guard  at  the  third  com- 
mand. 

177.  When  the  soldier  is  thoroughly  familiar  with 
the  different  steps,  parries  and  points,  the  instructor 
combines  several  of  them  by  giving  the  commands  in 
quick  succession,  increasing  the  rapidity  and  number  of 
movements  in  combination  as  the  men  acquire  skill. 

Examples. 

1.  ADVANCE,  head  PARRY  AND  LUNGE. 

1.  RETIRE,  LEFT  PARRY  AND  THRUST. 

1.  FRONT  PASS,  RIGHT  PARRY  AND  THRUST  ; LEFT 
VOLT,  HEAD  PARRY  AND  THRUST. 

Excute  each  in  the  order  named,  and  resume  the 
guard  without  command. 

178.  Every  movement  to  the  front  should  be  followed 
by  an  attack  (thrust  or  lunge);  every  movement  to  the 
rear  by  a parry  and  a thrust,  as  indicated  in  the  fore- 
going example. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY, 


m 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

179.  The  company  is  grouped  into  squads,  under  the 
leadership  and  immediate  control  of  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  who  are  held  responsible  for  discipline 
and  order,  in  camp  and  quarters,  and  are  trained  as 
leaders  of  groups  for  battle. 

180.  The  four  or  squad  consists  of  four  files,  a cor- 
poral and  seven  privates  ; the  corporal  is  the  squad 
leader. 

181.  The  term  four  is  used  in  the  commands  and  ex- 
planations of  the  close  order  drill ; the  term  squad  in 
the  extended  order  drill. 

182.  Two  or  three  squads  form  a section  under  a 
sergeant  as  chief  of  section  ; the  section  is  used  in  the 
extended  order  drills ; it  is  not  a subdivision  for  move- 
ments in  close  order. 

183.  The  company  is  divided  into  two  platoons,  each 
platoon  into  two  sections. 

Experienced  privates  are  assigned  as  leaders  of  such 
squads  as  have  no  corporals.  The  squad  leader  is  cov- 
ered in  the  rear  rank  by  a reliable  man  who  acts  as 
leader  in  his  absence. 

If  any  man  of  the  front  rank  be  absent  he  is  replaced 
by  his  rear  rank  man. 

If  the  company  consists  of  an  odd  number  of  fours, 
the  right  platoon  will  be  the  stronger  ; if  less  than  four 
sets  of  fours  are  present,  the  division  into  platoons  is 
omitted ; if  a platoon  consists  of  an  odd  number  of  fours, 
the  right  section  will  be  the  stronger ; if  a platoon  con- 
sists of  less  than  four  sets  of  fours,  the  division  into 
sections  is  omitted. 

The  platoons  and  sections  are  numbered  from  right 
to  left,  when  in  line,  and  from  head  to  rear  when  in 
column;  these  designations  change  when,  by  facing 


m 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


about,  the  right  becomes  the  left  of  the  line,  or  the 
head  becomes  the  rear  of  the  column. 

The  squads  are  designated  as  righiy  left  or  center 
squad  of  first  (or  such)  section. 

Posts  of  Officers,  Non-Commissioned  Officers  and  Field 
Music. 

PLATOON  PLATOON 


3‘>LT  201J  57*5  i$TLr  MU9  WS 

184.  The  captain  is  two  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  company. 

The  first  lieutenant  is  chief  of  the  first  platoon  and  is 
two  paces  in  rear  of  its  center. 

The  second  lieutenant  is  chief  of  the  second  platoon 
and  is  two  paces  in  rear  of  its  center. 

When  there  is  a third  lieutenant  he  is  posted  on  the 
left  of  the  second  lieutenant. 

The  first  sergeant  is  two  paces  in  rear  of  second  file 
from  the  right  of  the  first  platoon  ; he  is  not  attached 
to  a section. 

The  second  sergeant  is  in  the  front  rank  on  the  right 
of  the  first  platoon  ; he  is  right  guide  of  this  platoon 
and  also  of  the  company,  and  chief  of  the  first  section. 

The  third  sergeant  is  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left  of 
the  seconct  platoon ; he  is  left  guide  of  this  platoon  and 
also  of  the  company,  and  is  chief  of  the  fourth  section. 

The  fourth  sergeant  is  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  second 
file  from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  ; he  is  left  guide  of 
the  first  platoon,  and  chief  of  the  second  section. 

The  fifth  sergeant  is  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  second 
file  from  the  right  of  the  second  platoon ; he  is  right  guide 
of  the  second  platoon,  and  chief  of  the  third  section. 

The  field  music,  when  not  united  in  the  battalion,  is 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


65 


in  the  line  of  file  closers,  on  the  right  of  the  first  lieuten- 
ant and  conforms  to  the  movements  of  the  file  closers. 
On  the  march,  when  required  to  play,  it  marches  at  the 
head  of  the  column. 

Absent  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  gen- 
erally replaced  by  the  next  in  rank  or  grade. 

Instruction  or  Officers  and  Non-Commissioned  Officers. 

185.  The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and 
practical  instruction  of  his  officers  and  non-commis- 
sioned officers.  He  requires  them  to  study  and  recite 
these  regulations  so  that  they  can  explain  thoroughly 
every  movement  before  it  is  put  into  execution. 

To  Size  the  Company. 

186.  The  men  fall  in  in  a single  rank ; the  first  sergeant 
faces  them  to  the  right  and  arranges  them  according  to 
height,  tallest  man  in  front ; the  corporals  place  them- 
selves according  to  height,  the  tallest  as  the  seventh 
man,  the  others  as  every  eighth  man  in  rear.  The 
sergeant  commands  : 1.  In  two  ranks  form  company, 
2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  man  in  front  faces  to 
the  left,  the  second  man  places  himself  in  the  rear  rank 
covering  the  man  in  front ; the  remaining  men  close  and 
form  alternately  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  each  facing 
to  the  front  upon  arriving  in  his  place. 

The  sergeant  then  commands  : 1.  Count,  2.  fours. 

Beginning  on  the  right  the  men  of  each  rank  count 
one,  two,  three,  four,  and  so  on  to  the  left.  The  sei% 
geants  do  not  count. 

If  the  four  on  the  left  consist  of  less  than  four  men, 
they  are  assigned  to  other  fours  and  placed  in  the  line 
of  file  closers,  each  in  rear  of  the  four  to  which  assigned; 
if  the  left  four  consists  of  m ore  than  three  and  less  than 
six  men,  the  number  is  increased  to  six  or  seven  by 
taking  the  required  number  of  men  from  a like  number 


66 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


of  fours,  at  the  rate  of  one  from  each,  number  three  or 
numbers  two  and  three  being  blank  files. 

The  company  is  then  divided  into  platoons  and  sec- 
tions ; the  sergeants  take  their  posts. 

The  company  being  sized,  the  fours  habitually  form 
in  the  same  order. 


To  Form  the  Company. 

187.  In  all  formations  under  arms  the  men  fall  in  at 
the  order  with  bayonets  unfixed. 

Whenever  a company  falls  in  without  arms,  the  men 
form  as  when  under  arms. 

At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly,  the  first  sergeant 
takes  his  position  in  front  of  where  the  center  of  the 
company  is  to  be,  and  facing  it,  makes  the  signal  for  as- 
sembly, or  commands  : fall  in. 

The  second  sergeant  places  himself  facing  to  the 
front,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  and 
at  such  a point  that  the  center  of  the  company  will  be 
six  paces  from  and  opposite  the  first  sergeant ; the  fours 
form  in  their  proper  places  on  the  left  of  the  second 
sergeant,  superintended  by  the  other  sergeants,  who 
then  take  their  posts.  Fours  of  less  than  six  men  should 
be  increased  or  broken  up  as  provided  for  the  left  four 
(Par.  186). 

The  first  sergeant  brings  the  company  to  the  right  i 
shoulder  and  calls  the  roll ; each  man  answers  “ Here  ” 
and  comes  to  the  order  as  his  name  is  called ; the  first 
sergeant  then  faces  about,  salutes  the  captain,  reports 
the  result  of  the  roll  call,  and  without  command  takes 
his  post,  passing  around  the  right  flank. 

The  lieutenants  take  their  posts  and  draw  sword  as 
soon  as  the  first  sergeant  has  reported. 

This  formation  will  be  used  in  the  field  and  as  far 
as  practicable  in  camp  and  garrison. 

188.  When  the  company  becomes  reduced  in  number 
and  the  fours  broken  up,  the  men  fall  in  without  regard 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


67 


to  fours,  but  in  their  relative  order,  closing-  to  the  right 
so  as  to  leave  no  blank  files,  the  corporals  placing  them- 
selves as  number  four,  front  rank.  The  sergeants  su- 
perintend the  formation  and  take  their  posts ; the  first 
sergeant  calls  the  roll,  has  the  company  count  fours, 
forms  the  left  four  according  to  Par.  186,  and,  if  the 
company  be  large  enough,  he  divides  it  into  platoons  and 
sections  ; he  then  reports  and  takes  his  post  as  explained. 

Alignments. 

189.  The  alignments  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Soldier. 

At  each  alignment  the  captain  steps  back  two  paces 
in  prolongation  of  the  line  before  giving  his  commands. 
This  rule  applies  also  to  chiefs  of  subdivisions  in  col- 
umn, in  company  and  battalion  drill. 

At  the  command  front,  guides  take  their  posts  if  not 
already  there.  This  applies  also  to  guides  of  platoons 
in  company  drill,  and,  in  battalion,  to  guides  of  subdi- 
visions in  column. 

To  Open  Ranks. 

190.  Being  at  a halt,  at  the  carry  or  order  : 1.  Open 
ranks,  2.  march,  3.  front. 

At  the  first  command,  the  right  and  left  guides  step 
three  paces  to  the  rear  to  mark  the  new  alignment  of 
the  rear  rank ; the  first  and  second  lieutenants  place 
themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank  ; the 
third  lieutenant  covers  the  second,  in  the  rear  rank ; 
the  other  file-closers  step  back  three  paces  in  rear  of 
the  line  of  the  guides ; the  captain  goes  to  the  right 
flank,  and  sees  that  the  guides  are  on  a line  parallel  to 
the  front  rank ; then  places  himself  facing  to  the  left, 
three  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  company  and 
commands:  march.  At  this  command  the  lieutenants 
take  post  three  paces  in  front  of  the  company,  opposite 
their  posts  in  line.  Should  a non-commissioned  officer 
be  chief  of  platoon,  he  remains  in  the  line  of  file-closers 


58 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


.opposite  the  center  of  his  platoon ; the  front  rank 
presses  to  the  right ; the  rear  rank  men  step  backward, 
halt  a little  in  rear  of  the  line  established  by  the  guides, 
and  then  dress  to  the  right  on  that  line  ; the  file-closers 
dress  to  the  right. 

The  captain  aligns  the  officers  and  the  front  rank ; 
the  right  guide,  the  rear  rank  ; the  captain  verifies  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank  and  of  the  file-closers ; the 
officers  and  file-closers  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front  as 
soon  as  their  alignment  is  verified. 

At  the  command  front,  the  men  cast  their  eyes  to 
the  front,  the  guides  resume  their  posts  in  the  front 
rank,  and  the  captain  takes  post  facing  to  the  front, 
three  paces  in  front  of  the  right  guide. 

To  Close  Ranks. 

191.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  Close  ranks,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  the  lieutenants  face  about 
and  resume  their  posts  in  line  ; the  rear  rank  closes  to 
facing  distance,  each  man  covering  his  file  leader  ; the 
file-closers  close  to  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank ; the 
captain  takes  his  post. 

192.  The  company  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings, 
settings  up,  steps,  marchings,  turnings,  manual  of 
arms,  firings,  resumes  attention,  kneels,  lies  down 
and  rises,  as  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 
substituting  in  the  commands,  company  for  squad. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  platoons,  detachments,  de- 
tails, etc. , substituting  their  designation  for  squad  in 
the  commands. 

While  marching,  the  arms  swing  naturally,  the  hands 
moving  about  three  inches  in  front  and  rear  of  the  seam 
of  the  trousers. 

In  executing  the  turn  and  halt,  the  captain  goes  to 
the  pivot  flank  of  his  company  ; the  guide  at  the  pivot 
halts  or  stands  fast  and  resumes  his  place  at  the  com- 
mand front. 


SCHOOL  OF  the  COMPANY. 


69 


193.  In  the  different  firings,  at  the  first  command  for 
loading  or  firing,  the  captain  piaces  himself  three  paces 
in  rear  of  the  file-closers,  opposite  the  center  of  the 
company.  After  the  command  cease  firing,  the  cap- 
tain returns  to  his  place  in  line. 

Enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  do  not  execute 
the  loadings  and  firings. 

Guides  and  enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  exe- 
cute the  manual  of  arms  during  the  drill  unless  spe- 
cially excused,  when  they  remain  at  the  order.  During 
ceremonies  they  execute  all  movements. 

Guides  in  front  marking  the  line  stand  at  the  order. 

A non-commissioned  officer  as  guide,  or  in  command 
of  a subdivision  or  detachment,  carries  his  rifle  as  the 
men  do. 

These  rules  are  general. 

To  Dismiss  the  Company. 

194.  Being  in  line  at  a halt,  the  captain  directs  the 
first  sergeant ; Dismiss  the  company.  The  officers  fall 
out,  the  first  sergeant  salutes,  steps  in  front  of  the  com- 
pany and  commands  : 1.  Port,  2.  arms,  3.  dismissed. 

Marching  m Line  to  Effect  a Slight  Change  of  Direction. 

195.  The  captain  commands  : Incline  to  the  right  (or 
left). 

The  guide  advances  gradually  the  left  shoulder  and 
marches  in  the  new  direction  ; all  the  files  advance , 
the  left  shoulder  and  conform  to  the  movements  of  the 
guide,  lengthening  or  shortening  the  step,  according  as 
the  change  is  toward  the  side  of  the  guide,  or  the  side 
opposite. 


Being  in  Line  to  March  by  the  Flank. 

196.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march. 

The  front  rank  of  each  four  wheels  ninety  degrees  to 


70 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


0 


7^s  B B B H 


PI.  31,  Par.  196. 

the  right  on  a fixed  pivot,  the  pivot  man  turning  strictly 
in  his  place  ; the  man  on  the  marching  flank  maintains 
the  full  step,  moving  on  the  arc  of  a circle  wuih  the 
pivot  man  as  the  center;  the  men  dress  on  the  marching 
flank,  shorten  their  steps  according  to  their  distance 
from  it,  and  keep  their  intervals  from  the  pivot. 

The  rear  rank  men  cover  their  file  leaders  and  con- 
form to  their  movements.  Upon  the  completion  of  the 
wheel,  the  front  rank  of  each  four  takes  the  full  step, 
marching  in  a direction  parallel  to  the  former  front  of 
the  company;  the  rear  rank  shortens  the  step  until  it 
gains  the  distance  of  forty-four  inches ; the  front  rank 
of  the  second  four  is  forty-four  inches  from  the  rear 
rank  of  the  first  four,  and  so  on  to  the  rear  of  the 
column ; the  right  and  left  guides  place  themselves 
forty-four  inches  in  front  and  rear  respectively  of  the 
left  file  of  the  leading  and  rear  fours  ; the  file  closers 
face  to  the  right  and  maintain  their  relative  posi- 
tions. 

197.  The  captain  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  and  files  is 
by  the  side  of  the  leading  guide  on  the  flank  opposite 
the  file  closers  ; he  takes  this  position  at  the  command 
march. 

The  leading  and  rear  guides  in  column  of  fours,  twos, 
and  files  are  in  front  and  rear  respectively  of  the  leading 
or  rear  file  on  the  side  opposite  the  file  closers. 

The  file  ciosers  march  two  paces  trom  me  flank  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


71 


the  column  and  see  that  all  the  fours  maintain  accurately 
their  distances. 

In  all  changes  by  fours  from  line  into  column  and 
column  into  line,  or  from  column  of  fours  to  twos,  files 
or  the  reverse,  and  in  all  wheels  about  by  fours,  either 
in  line  or  column,  the  captain  and  guides  take  their 
proper  places  in  the  most  convenient  way  as  soon  as 
practicable. 

All  wheels  by  fours,  except  in  changing  direction,  are 
executed  on  a fixed  pivot. 

These  rules  are  general. 

Being  in  Line  to  Form  Column  of  Fours  and  Halt. 

198.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Company, 
4.  HALT. 

The  command  halt  is  given  as  the  front  ranks  com- 
plete the  wheel ; the  rear  ranks  fall  back  to  forty-four 
inches,  and  all  dress  toward  the  marching  flank. 

199.  In  column  of  fours,  the  ranks  dress  toward  the 
side  of  the  guide. 

In  all  wheelings  by  fours,  the  forward  march  is  taken 
upon  the  completion  of  the  movement,  unless  the  com- 
mand halt  be  given. 

These  rules  are  general. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Fours  to  Change  Direction. 

200.  1.  Column  right  {pv  left),  2.  march. 

The  leading  rank  of  four  wheels  on  a movable  pivot, 
executed  as  prescribed  in  Par.  196,  except  that  the 
pivot  man  takes  steps  of  ten  inches  in  quick  time  and 
twelve  inches  in  double  time,  gaining  ground  forward 
so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling  point ; the  wheel  completed, 
the  leading  rank  takes  the  full  step,  the  man  on  the  side 
of  the  guide  follows  forty-four  inches  in  rear  of  the 
guide,  the  other  ranks  move  forward  and  wheel  on  the 
same  ground.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  toward  the 
side  of  the  guide,  he  shortens  his  step  and  wheels  to 


7? 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY. 


the  right  as  if  on  the  pivot  flank  of  a rank  of  four  ; if 
the  change  be  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  he  wheels 
as  if  on  the  marching  flank  of  a rank  of  four. 

Column  half  right  {ov  half  left),  is  similarly  executed, 
each  rank  of  four  wheeling  forty -five  degrees. 


To  Put  the  Column  of  Fours  in  March  and  Change  Direction 
at  the  Same  Time. 

201.  1.  Forward,  2.  Column  right  (or  left) ; or,  3. 
Column  half  right  {oY  half  left),  3.  march. 

Being  in  Line  to  Form  Column  of  Fours  and  Change  Direction. 

202. 1 . Fours  right 
(or  left),  2.  Column 
right  (or  lefty, or,  2. 
Column  half  right 
(or  half  left),  3. 
MARCH. 

Execute  fours 
right  and  then 
change  direction. 
(Par.  200). 


MUS 


7‘^LT  At  us 


Being  in  Line,  to 
March  in  Columns 
of  Fours  to 
the  Front. 

203.  1.  Right  (or 
left)  forward,  2. 
Fours  right  (or 

PJ.  32,  ¥aT.*m.  ~~  . left),  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  left  file  of  the  right  four ; the  right 
four  moves  straight  to  the  front,  shortening  the  first 
three  or  four  steps,  the  rear  rank  falls  back  to  forty- 
four  inches  ; the  other  fours  wheel  to  the  right  each  on 
a fixed  pivot  (Par.  196) ; the  second  four  when  its  wheel 
is  two-thirds  completed,  wheels  to  the  left  on  a mov- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


73 


able  pivot  (Par.  200),  and  follows  the  first ; the  other 
fours,  having  wheeled  to  the  right,  move  forward  and 
each  wheels  to  the  left  on  a movable  pivot,  so  as  to* 
follow  the  second. 


k2PS 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Change  the  File  Closers  from  On& 
Flank  of  the  Column  to  the  Other. 

204.  1.  File  closers  on  left  (or  right)  flank,  2.  march. 
At  the  first  command,  the  file  closers  close  into 
the  fiank  of  the  column, 
and  at  the  command 
march,  dart  through  the 
column.  The  captain  and 
guides  change  to  their 
proper  positions. 

To  Oblique  m Column  of  Fours,  y 
and  to  Resume  the  Direct 
March. 


// 


CAPT.  ^ 


205.  1.  Right  (or  left) 
oblique,  2.  march. 

Each  four  obliques  as 
prescribed  for  the  squad 
(Par.  135). 

The  leading  guide  is  the 
guide  of  the  column  when 
the  oblique  is  toward  his 
flank ; when  the  oblique  is 
toward  the  opposite  flank 
the  guide  of  the  front  rank 
of  the  leading  four  is  the 
guide  of  the  column. 

To  resume  the  direct 
march : 1,  Forward,  2. 
MARCH. 


MUS 

cm 


PI.  33,  Par.  £05, 


74 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


To  March  the  Column  of  Fours  to  the  Rear, 

206.  Fours  right  {ov  left)  about,  2.  march. 

Each  four  wheels  180  degrees  to  the  right  (Par.  196). 

The  man  on  the  marching  flank  of  the  rear  rank  of 
each  four  preserves  his  distance  ; the  man  on  the  pivot 
flank  closes  up  to  his  file  leader,  covers  him  during  the 
wheel,  and  on  its  completion  falls  back  to  his  proper 
distance. 

The  file  closers  do  not  pass  through  the  column,  but 
gain  the  space  to  the  right  or  left  necessary  to  preserve 
their  interval  from  the  flank. 

To  Form  Line  from  Column  of  Fours . 

207.  To  the  right  or  left : 1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2. 
march,  3.  Guide  {right  or  lefty,  or,  3.  Company,  4. 

HALT. 

At  the  command  march,  the  fours  wheel  to  the  right. 
The  rear  rank  of  each  four  closes  to  facing  distance 
during  the  wheel,  and,  if  in  double  time,  takes  the  dis- 
tance of  36  inches,  should  the  line  advance  on  the  com- 
pletion of  the  wheel. 

The  guide  is  announced,  or  the  command  halt  is 
given,  the  instant  the  fours  unite  in  line. 

If  the  line  be  formed  toward  the  side  of  the  file  closers, 
they  close  in  to  the  flank  of  the  column  at  the  first! com- 
mand, and  at  the  command  march  dart  through  the 
column,  between  the  rear  rank  of  one  four  and  the  front 
rank  of  the  succeeding  four. 

208.  On  right  or  left : 1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line,  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  halt,  5.  front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  four  wheels  to 
the  right  on  a movable  pivot  and  moves  forward,  dress- 
ing to  the  right,  the  guide  places  himself  on  its  right; 
each  of  the  other  fours  marches  a distance  equal  to  its 
front,  beyond  the  wheeling  point  of  tiie  four  next  pre- 
ceding, wheels  to  the  right  and  advances  as  explained  for 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COIVIPANY. 


75 


the  first  four ; the  rear  guide  places  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  rear  four  after  it  halts.  The  rear  rank  of  each 
four  closes  to  facing  distance  as  the  front  rank  com- 
mences to  wheel. 


a 7^ 


PI.  34,  Par.  208. 


At  the  command  halt,  given  when  the  leading  four 
has  advanced  company  distance  in  the  new  direction, 


76 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


it  halts  and  dresses  to  the  right ; the  other  fours  sua 
cessively  halt  and  dress  upon  arriving  in  line. 

The  command  front  is  given  w^hen  the  left  four  com. 
pletes  its  dressing. 

If  the  movement  be  executed  toward  the  side  opposite 
the  file  closers,  each  follows  the  four  nearest  him,  pass- 
ing in  front  of  the  following  four. 

209.  In  movements  where  it  is  prescribed  that  the  lead- 
ing four,  or  subdivision,  moves  company  or  subdivision 
distance  to  the  front  and  then  halts,  it  maybe  haltec  at 
a less  distance  when  necessary.  This  ride  is  general. 

210.  To  the  front : 1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Comxmny,  4.  halt,  5.  front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  four  mo^es 
straight  to  the  front,  dressing  to  the  left ; the  guide  in 
front  places  himself  on  its  left ; the  other  fours  oblique 
to  the  right  till  opposite  their  places  in  line,  when  each 
marches  to  the  front. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  the  leading  four 
has  advanced  company  distance,  it  halts  and  dresses  to 
the  left;  the  other  fours  halt  and  dress  to  the  left  upon 
arriving  in  line ; the  rear  ranks  close  to  facing  distance 
upon  halting ; the  guide  in  rear  places  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  upon  the  arrival  of  the  last  four 
in  line ; the  command  front  is  given  when  the  last  four 
completes  its  dressing'. 

If  the  movement  be  made  toward  the  side  of  the  file 
closers,  they  dart  through  the  column  as  the  oblique 
commences. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  or  in  quick  time,  and 
the  command  be  double  time,  the  captain  commands. 
Guide  left,  immediately  after  the  command  march ; the 
leading  four  moves  to  the  front  in  quick  time,  its  rear 
rank  closing  to  facing  distance  ; the  other  fours  oblique 
in  double  time,  each  taking  the  quick  time  and  dressing 
to  the  left  upon  arriving  in  line  ; the  rear  rank  on  ar- 
riving in  line  closes  to  facing  distance. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


77 


CAPT 


PL  35.  Par.  210, 


78 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY, 


BeJng  in  Line,  to  Face  to  the  Rear  and  to  March  to  the  Rear. 

211.  1.  F ours  right  {ov  left)  about,  2.  march,  3.  Com. 
party,  4.  halt  ; or,  3.  Guide  {right  or  left). 

The  fours  wheel  about  (Par.  206);  the  file  closers  dart 
through  the  nearest  intervals. 

212.  The  company  at  a halt,  may  be  marched  a few 
paces  to  the  rear  by  the  commands  : 1.  Company,  2. 
About,  3.  FACE,  4.  Forward,  5.  Guide  {right  or  left), 
6.  MARCH  ; or,  if  in. march,  by  the  commands:  1.  To 
the  rear,  2.  march,  3.  Guide  {right  or  left). 

The  guides  step  into  the  rear  rank  now  become  the 
front  rank  ; the  file  closers  on  facing  ab<^ut  maintain 
their  relative  positions. 

Obstacles. 

213.  Marching  in  line,  to  pass  obstacles  : 1.  (So  many) 
fours  from  right  (or  left)  to  rear,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  the  designated  fours  execute 
left  forward,  foursleft,on  the  four  that  remains  in  line 
next  on  their  left. 

The  guide  closes  on  the  fours  that  remain  in  line. 

The  fours  that  have  broken  to  the  rear  are  formed  in 
line  at  the  commands : 1.  Rear  fours  right  (or  left) 
front  into  line,  2.  Double  time,  3.  march. 

The  guide,  at  the  command  march,  hastens  to  the 
point  where  the  flank  of  the  company  will  be  when  the 
movement  is  completed. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Column  of  Twos  or  Files. 

214.  This  movement  is  always  executed  toward  the 
file  closers ; it  is  used  only  for  the  purpose  of  reducing 
the  front  of  the  column  to  enable  it  to  pass  a defile  or 
other  narrow  place,  immediately  after  which  the  col- 
umn of  fours  should  be  reformed. 

1.  Right  (or  left)  by  ticos,  2.  march. 

the  first  command  the  rear  rank  of  each  four  closes 
to  ^ .Cing  distance. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


79 


At  the  command  march,  the  two 
files  on  the  right  of  each  four  move 
forward;  the  two  files  on  the  left  mark 
time  till  disengaged,  when  they 
oblique  to  the  right  and  follow  the 
right  files. 

The  distance  between  ranks  in  col- 
umn of  twos  is  facing  distance  ; the 
guides  take  the  same  distance  in 
front  and  rear  of  the  column. 


CApr  ggg 


CAPT  


PI.  36,  Par.  214. 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours  at  a Halt,  to  Form  Column  of  Files. 

215.  Right  (or  left)  hy  file,  2.  march. 

At  the  first  command  the  rear  rank  of  each  four 
closes  to  facing  distance. 

At  the  command  ywarcA,  the  right  file  of  the  leading 
four  moves  forward,  followed  in  succession  by  the  files 
on  its  left ; when  the  left  file  of  the  leading  four  is  about 
to  commence  to  oblique  the  right  file  of  the  second 
four  moves  to  the  front,  and  so  on  to  the  rear  of  the 
column,  the  men  keeping  closed  as  nearly  as  possible 
to  facing  distance ; the  guides  take  the  same  distance. 

If  marching,  the  leading  file  continues  the  march,  the 
others  halt  without  coming  to  the  order,  and  resume 
the  march  at  the  proper  time. 

Column  of  files  from  column  of  twos  is  similarly  ex- 
ecuted. 

216.  A column  of  twos  or  files  changes  direction,  is 
halted,  and  put  in  march  by  the  same  commands  as  a 
column  of  fours. 

The  march  in  column  of  twos  or  files  is  always  in 
quick  time. 

217.  A column  of  fours,  twos,  or  files  may  be  faced  to 
the  rear,  or  to  a fiank,  and  marched  a short  distance, 
but  no  other  movements  should  be  executed  until  the 
column  is  again  faced  to  the  original  front.  The  offi- 
cers and  non-commissioned  officers  face  with  the  col- 
umn and  retain  their  positions. 


80 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


Being  in  Column  of  Twos  or  Files,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours, 


CART  2'>S 


218.  This  movement  is  always  ex^ 
edited  away  from  the  file  closers. 
Marching  in  column  of  twos:  1. 
firs  Form  fours,  2.  Left  (or  right)  oblique, 

^ 3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading 
two  of  each  four  take  the  short  step  ; 
j»r5  the  rear  two  oblique  to  the  left  until 
^ they  uncover  the  leading  two,  when 
they  move  to  the  front ; the  fours 
T>i  or.  r»  010  having  united,  the  rear  ranks  fall 

F . 37,  Far.  218.  back  to  forty-four  inches,  and  all 

resume  the  full  step. 

Having  Formed  Column  of  Files  from  Column  of  Twos  or  Fours, 
to  Form  Column  of  Fours. 

219.  1.  Form  fours,  2.  Left  (or  right)  oblique,  3. 


MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  file  of  the  first  four 
halts,  the  rear  rank  man  falling  back  to  forty-four 
inches  as  soon  as  the  file  in  rear  has  obliqued  ; the 
other  files  of  the  first  four  oblique  to  the  left  and  place 
themselves  successively  on  the  left  of  the  leading  file, 
the  rear  rank  taking  the  distance  of  forty-four  inches 
from  the  front  rank ; the  other  fours  success’vely  form 
as  explained  for  the  first,  the  leading  file  of  each 
halting  at  forty-four  inches  from  the  corresponding  file 
of  the  four  next  in  front. 

Column  of  twos  is  formed  from  column  of  files  on  the 
same  principles. 


MOVEMENTS  BY  PLATOONS. 

220..  In  movements  by  platoons  each  chief  repeats 
such  commands  as  are  to  be  immediately  executed 
by  his  platoon.  Each  chief  gives  the  commands  pre- 
scribed so  as  to  insure  the  execution  of  movements  by 
his  platoon  at  the  proper  time. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


81 


In  column  whenever  a subdivision  is  dressed  its  chief, 
after  commanding  front,  places  himself  two  paces  in 
front  of  its  center;  in  movements  where  the  subdivi- 
sions are  not  dressed,  he  takes  this  position  as  soon  as 
the  column  is  formed. 

These  rules  are  general, 

3eing  in  Line,  to  Form  Column  of  Platoons  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

221.  1.  Platoons  right  (or  left),  2.  march. 

Executed  by  each  platoon.  (Par.  140.) 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  caution  ; 
Platoon  right;  and  at  the  command  march,  take  their 
places  two  paces  from  the  pivots  of  their  platoons, 
verify  the  alignment,  and  command  : front. 


222.  Whenever  a company  is  formed  in  column  of 
platoons  or  line  of  platoons  in  columns  of  fours,  the 
fourth  and  fifth  sergeants  place  themselves  as  guides  of 


82 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


their  platoons  as  soon  as  practicable ; they  return  to 
their  posts  in  the  line  of  file  closers  when  the  company 
unites  in  line  or  column  of  fours,  unless  they  mark 
an  alignment. 

223.  The  position  of  the  captain  in  column  of  platoons 
is  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  three  paces  from  the 
flank  of  the  column,  abreast  of  the  leading  platoon. 

224.  The  column  of  platoons  is  put  in  march,  halted, 
obliques,  and  resumes  the  direct  march  by  the  same 
commands  as  the  company  in  line. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Form  Column  of  Platoons,  and  Move  Forward 
Without  Halting. 

225.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Right  (or  left)  turn,  3.  march, 
4.  Forward,  5.  march,  6.  Guide  {right  or  left). 

Executed  by  each  platoon  (Par.  141).  The  fifth  com- 
mand is  given  when  both  platoons  have  completed  the 
turn. 

226.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  preserves  the 
trace,  step  and  a distance  equal  to  the  front  of  the 
platoon.  This  rule  is  general. 

Being  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Change  Direction. 

227.  Being  in  march  : 1.  Column  right  (or  left),  2, 

MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands : Right  turn. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  turns  to  the 
right  (Par.  141),  its  chief  adding  : 1.  Forward,  2. 
MARCH,  on  the  completion  of  the  turn. 

The  second  platoon  marches  squarely  up  to  the  turn« 
ing  point  and  then  changes  direction  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  the  first. 

Column  half  right  (or  half  left)  is  similarly  executed ; 
each  chief  gives  the  preparatory  command  : Right  (or 
left)  half  turn. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


83 


228.  In  changing  direction  in  column  of  subdivisions, 
each  chief,  on  the  completion  of  the  movement  by  his 
subdivision,  announces  the  guide  on  the  side  it  was  pre- 
vious to  the  turn.  This  rule  is  general. 

To  Put  the  Column  of  Platoons  in  March  and  Change  Direction 
at  the  Same  Time. 

229.  1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  right  {ov  left),  3.  Column 
right  (or  left) ; or,  3.  Column  half  right  (or  half  left),  4. 

MARCH. 

Being  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Face  to  the  Rear  and  to  March 
to  the  Rear. 

230.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left)  about,  2.  march,  3. 
Company,  4.  halt  ; or,  3.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

If  one  platoon  be  smaller  than  the  other,  the  guide 
of  the  second  platoon  regains  the  trace  and  distance  on 
the  march. 

To  Form  Line  from  Column  of  Platoons. 

231.  Before  forming  line  to,  or  on  the  right  or  left,  the 
captain  requires  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  on  the 
flank  toward  which  the  movement  is  to  be  executed  to 
cover ; if  marching,  he  announces  the  guide  on  that 
flank,  if  not  already  there. 

232.  To  the  right  or  left : 1.  Platoons  right  (or  left), 
2.  MARCH,  3.  FRONT. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  (Par.  140). 

Each  chief  of  platoon  obliques  to  the  left  until  he 
clears  the  marching  flank,  and  takes  his  post. 

The  captain  verifies  the  alignment  and  commands  ? 
FRONT. 

233.  To  the  right  or  left  and  continue  the  march:  ^ 
Platoons,  2.  Right  (or  left)  turn,  3.  march,  4.  Guide 
{right  or  left),  5.  Forward,  6.  march. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  (Par.  141).  The  sixth  com- 
mand is  given  when  both  platoons  have  completed  the 
turn. 


84 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


CAPl 


Each  chief  of  platoon  obliques  to  the  left  until  he  clears 
the  marching  flank,  and  takes  his  post. 

234.  On  right  or  left  : 1.  On  right  (or  left)  into 
line,  2,  march,  3.  front. 

The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  commands  : Right  turn. 
The  first  platoon  turns  to  the  right ; when  the  guide 
has  advanced  platoon  distance,  the  platoon  is  halted  by 
its  chief,  who  passes  around  the  right  flank  to  his  post. 

The  second  platoon  marches  straight  to  the  fronfc ; 
its  chief  commands  : 1.  Right  turn,  2.  march,  when  his 
platoon  is  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line ; the 
platoon  turns  to  the  right  and  when  the  right  file  has 
arrived  on  the  line  the  platoon  is  halted  by  its  chief, 
who  passes  around  the  left  flank  to  his  post. 

The  captain  verifies  the  alignment  and  commands : 
FRONT. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


85 


aSJr  • 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

A 


MUS  l^S 

PI.  40,  Par.  234. 


CAPT 


86 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY, 


Being  in  Line,  to  Form  Column  of  Platoons  to  the  Front. 

235.  Being  at  a halt:  1.  Right  (or  left)  by  platoons. 
2.  MARCH,  3.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

l^LJ 


PI.  41,  Par.  235. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  pass  in 
double  time  to  their  places  in  front  of  their  platoons, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


87 


the  chief  of  the  right  platoon  commands  ; Forward; 
the  chief  of  the  left  ; Right  oblique. 

At  the  command  march,  the  right  platoon  moves  for- 
ward. The  chief  of  the  left  platoon  commands  : march, 
when  his  platoon  is  disengaged  ; the  platoon  obliques 
to  the  right,  the  chief  commanding  : 1.  Forward,  2. 
MARCH,  8.  Guide  left,  when  the  left  guide  arrives  in 
the  trace  of  the  guide  of  the  leading  platoon. 

If  marching,  the  chief  of  the  left  platoon  commands  : 
1.  Second  platoon,  2.  Mark  time,  3.  march,  adding  •. 
1,  Right  oblique,  2.  march,  when  his  platoon  is  dis- 
engaged ; the  movement  is  completed  as  from  a halt. 

Being  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Form  Company  to  the  Front 

236.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  Form  company,  2.  Right  (or 
left)  oblique,  3.  march,  4.  front. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
commands  : 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  left ; the  chief  of 
the  second  commands  : Right  oblique. 

The  first  platoon  advances  platoon  distance,  when  its 
chief  commands  : 1.  Platoon,  2.  halt,  3.  Left,  4:.  dress, 
and  passes  around  the  left  flank  to  his  post.  The  second 
platoon  obliques  to  the  right,  its  chief  commanding : 
1.  Forward,  2.  march,  8.  Guide  left,  when  the  platoon 
is  opposite  its  place  in  line  ; on  arriving  near  the  line,  j 
the  chief  halts  the  platoon,  commands;  1.  Left,  2. 
DRESS,  and  passes  around  the  right  flank  to  his  post. 

The  captain  superintends  the  alignment  from  the  left 
flank. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  the  chief  of  the  leading 
platoon  commands  ; Guide  left,  and  the  movement  is 
completed  as  just  explained. 

If  marching  in  quick  time  and  the  command  be  double 
time,  the  captain  commands  : Guide  left  (or  right)  im- 
mediately after  the  command  march  ; the  chief  of  the 
leading  platoon  cautions  it  to  advance  in  quick  time  and 


88 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


commands  : Guide  left ; the  chief  of  the  second  platoon 
commands : Double  time,  and  when  the  platoon  is 
abreast  of  the  leading  platoon  commands  : 1.  Quick 
time,  2.  march  ; the  platoons  having  united,  the  chiefs 
pass  around  the  flanks  to  their  posts. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  the  chief  of  the  first 
platoon,  at  the  first  command  of  the  captain,  commands: 
Quick  time. 

Being  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  March  by  the  Flank. 

237.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Guide 
{right  or  left). 

The  right  and  left  guides  of  each  platoon  place  them- 
selves as  in  Par.  196,  each  chief  of  platoon  on  the  left 
of  his  leading  guide  ; the  leading  guide  of  the  platoon 
on  the  flank  announced  is  the  guide  of  the  com- 
pany ; the  leading  guide  of  the  other  platoon  marches 
abreast  of  him  and  preserves  the  interval  necessary  to 
form  front  into  line. 

The  position  of  the  captain  is  on  the  side  opposite  the 
file  closers,  three  paces  from  the  flank  and  abreast  of  the 
chiefs  of  platoons. 

Marching  by  the  flank  of  platoons,  the  right  platoon 
is  the  first,  the  left  the  second. 

To  March  Again  in  Column  of  Platoons. 

1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Guide  {right  or 
left). 

Being  in  Line,  to  Advance  in  Line  of  Platoons  in  Columns  of 
Fours. 

238.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Right  (or  left)  forward,  3.  Fours 
^ight  (or  left),  4.  march,  Guide  {right  or  left). 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  pass  quickly  around 
the  flanks  and  place  themselves  in  front  of  their  pla- 
toons. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes  the 
movement  as  prescribed  for  a company  (Par.  203). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


To  form  again  in  line:  1.  Platoons^  2.  Right  (or  left) 
frontinto  line^  3.  march,  4.  Company,  5.  halt,  6.  front. 


CAPT  2‘>LT 


5«S 


t^LT 


Z^S 


-y  TTorri  ~T“1  ' ' ' * 

9^.L..L..L..L.\....L,.L..L...L.,L ' 


2«5 


3017  20LT 


5THS  4^s 


ysTS 


PI.  42,  Par.  238. 

Each  platoon  forms  front  into  line;  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons return  to  their  posts  by  dropping  to  the  rear  or  by 
passing  around  the  heads  of  their  platoons,  according 
as  the  front  into  line  is  executed  toward  the  side  of  the 
tile  closers  or  toward  the  side  opposite. 

The  command  halt  is  given  when  the  leading  fours 
have  advanced  platoon  distance. 

If  the  movement  be  executed  in  double  time,  the 
captain  commands;  Guide  left  (or  right)  after  the  com- 
mand march. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  of  Platoons 
in  Columns  of  Fours. 

289.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of  platoons  in 
columns  of  fours,  2.  march. 


90 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


The  first  platoon  is  marched  platoon  distance  to  the 
front  and  halted;  the  second  executes  column  half  rights 
and  having  gained  its  interval  (Par.  237),  column  half 
left,  and  is  halted  abreast  of  the  first  platoon. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left  into  Line  of 
Platoons  in  Columns  of  Fours. 

240.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  platoons  in 
columns  of  fours,  2.  march. 

The  first  platoon  executes  column  right,  advances 
platoon  distance  and  twelve  paces  in  the  new  direction 
and  is  halted;  the  second  is  marched  be3"ond  the  first 
and  when  opposite  its  place  executes  column  right  and 
is  halted  abreast  of  the  first  platoon. 

Marching  in  Line  of  Platoons  in  Columns  of  Fours,  to  Form 
Column  of  Fours  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

241.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Column  right  (or  left),  3,  march. 
The  chiefs  pass  around  the  heads  of  their  platoons  as 

they  are  about  to  unite  in  column  of  fours. 

Being  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours. 

242.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Right  (or  left)  forward,  3.  Fours 
right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  chiefs  pass  around  the  heads  of  their  platoons  as 
they  are  about  to  unite  in  column  of  fours. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Column  of  Platoons. 

243.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  3. 
MARCH,  4.  Company,  5.  halt. 

At  the  second  command,  each  chief  places  himself 
near  the  head  of  his  platoon. 

At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  executes  right 
front  into  line,  (Pars.  210  and  189.) 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


91 


The  command  halt  is  given  when  the  leading  four 
has  advanced  platoon  distance. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  or  in  5t«s 
quick  time,  and  the  command  be  double 
time,  the  captain  commands:  Guide  left  isizca 
(or  right)  after  the  command  march,  cimzi 


Marching  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  March  in 
Line  of  Platoons  in  Columns  of  Fours 
to  the  Right  or  Left. 

244.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Column  right  (or 
left),  3.  MARCH,  4.  Guide  {right  or  left). 

Each  platoon  changes  direction  to 
the  right,  and  each  chief  takes  his 
place  by  the  side  of  his  leading  guide. 

Route  Step. 

245.  The  column  ^ 

of  fours  is  the  hab-  3®s ' 
itual  column  of 
route.  The  rate  is 
three  to  three  and 
a half  miles  per 
hour. 

Marching  in 
quick  time : 1 . Route 
. step,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  carry 
their  pieces  at  will, 
keepingthe  muzzle 
elevated;  they  are 


20LT 


CAPT 


/ / / IsrlT  / ! / '^rs 


not  required  to  pre-  47^ i 
serve  silence  nor  ^ 
keep  the  step.  The 

ranks  cover  and  Pi.  43,  Par.  24^ . 

preserve  their  distance. 

If  from  a halt:  1.  Forward,  2.  Route  step,  3.  march. 


92 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


To  resume  the  cadenced  step:  1 Company ^ 2.  atten- 
tion. 

At  the  command  attention,  the  pieces  are  brought  to 
the  right  shoulder  and  the  cadenced  step  in  quick  time 
is  resumed. 

The  company  marching  in  line  or  in  column  of  pla- 
toons may  also  march  in  the  route  step,  the  rear  rank' 
falling  back  to  thirty-six  inches. 

The  company  in  route  step  changes  direction  by  the 
same  commands  as  in  the  cadenced  step. 

Upon  halting  while  marching  in  route  step,  the  men 
come  to  the  rest  at  the  order. 

246.  To  march  at  ease:  1.  At  ease,  2.  march. 

The  company  marches  as  in  the  route  step,  except 
that  silence  is  preserved. 

The  march  at  ease  will  be  frequently  used  in  the  fore- 
going movements. 

To  resume  the  cadenced  step:  1.  Company,  2.  atten- 
tion. 

If  halted  while  marching  at  ease,  the  men  remain  at 
ease  at  the  order. 

At  ease,  either  marching  or  at  a halt,  and  at  the  rest, 
officers  carry  the  sword  at  will;  marching  at  route 
step,  at  will  or  in  the  scabbard. 

247.  The  company  having  been  formed,  the  right  may 
become  the  left;  the  flanks  the  center,  and  the  reverse. 

Whenever  the  flanks  become  the  center,  the  second 
and  third  sergeants  take  the  posts  in  the  line  of  file 
closers  prescribed  for  the  fifth  and  fourth  sergeants, 
each  with  his  own  platoon;  the  fourth  and  fifth  ser- 
geants take  the  posts  prescribed  for  the  third  and 
second  sergeants.  The  first  sergeant  always  remains  with 
the  original  first  platoon  ; when  in  line,  in  rear  of  the 
second  file  from  the  outer  flank,  taking  the  correspond- 
ing position  when  the  platoons  unite  in  column  of  fours. 

248.  The  captain  holds  the  file  closers  responsible  for 
the  fours  near  them  and  requires  them  to  correct  errors. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


93 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

249.  In  this  school  the  senior  officer  present  is  the 
instructor  ; in  the  text  he  is  designated  as  major. 

250.  Captains  repeat  such  of  the  commands  as  are  to 
be  immediately  executed  by  their  companies  ; as,  for- 
ward,  fours  right,  march,  halt,  etc.;  they  do  not  repeat 
the  major’s  commands  in  executing  the  manual,  nor 
those  commands  which  are  not  essential  to  the  execu- 
tion of  a movement  by  their  companies ; as,  deploy 
column,  etc. 

In  any  movement,  each  captain  gives  his  command 
so  as  to  insure  its  execution  by  his  company  at  the 
proper  time. 

251.  When  the  formation  will  admit  of  the  simulta- 
neous execution  of  movements  by  the  companies,  the 
major  may  have  them  execute  mo vements  in  the  School 
of  the  Company  by  prefixing,  when  necessary,  the  com- 
mand : Companies  (or  platoons)  to  the  "commands 
therein  prescribed  ; e.  g.,  1.  Companies,  2.  Right  for- 
ivard,  3.  Fours  right,  4.  march.  1.  Companies,  2. 
Right  hy  platoons,  3.  march.  1.  Companies,  2.  Right 
front  into  line,  3.  march,  etc. 

When  line,  line  of  columns,  or  column  of  subdivisions 
is  formed,  the  major  announces  the  guide,  ff  the  march 
is  to  be  continued. 

Instruction  of  Officers, 

252.  The  major  is  responsible  for  the  instruction  of 
his  battalion. 

The  officers  are  assembled  for  theoretical  and  prac- 
tical instruction. 

The  instruction  of  officers  embraces  the  Drill  Regula- 
tions and  such  other  instruction  as  pertains  to  their  du- 
ties in  peace  and  war. 

Each  captain  should  be  required  to  drill  the  battalion. 


94 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

253.  The  battalion  is  composed  of  two  or  more  com- 
panies, not  exceeding  six ; the  movements  explained 
herein  are  on  the  basis  of  a battalion  of  four  compa- 
nies. 

For  drill  and  ceremonies  the  companies  may  be  equal- 
ized by  transferring  the  men  from  the  larger  to  the 
smaller.  The  companies  are  arranged  according  to  the 
rank  of  captains,  the  senior  commanding  the  right 
company,  the  second  in  rank  the  left,  and  the  third  the 
center  or  right  center. 

The  following  table  shows  the  order  of  companies  iq 
line  from  right  to  left. 


Companies  whose  captains  are  absent  are  posted  ii 
line  according  to  the  relative  rank  of  the  officers  pres.^ 
ent  in  command  of  them. 

A company  whose  captain  is  absent  for  a few  days 
only,  or  is  in  command  of  the  battalion,  retains  its  place 
according  to  his  rank  unless  otherwise  directed. 

After  the  battalion  is  formed  no  cognizance  is  taken 
of  the  relative  order  of  the  companies. 

In  whatever  direction  the  battalion  faces,  the  com- 
panies are  designated  numerically  from  right  to  left  in 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


95 


line,  and  in  line  of  columns,  and  from  head  to  rear  in 
column,  first  company,  second  company,  etc. 

In  like  manner  the  companies  to  the  right  of  the  cen- 
ter in  line  constitute  the  right  wing;  those  to  the  left, 
the  left  wing;  when  the  number  of  companies  is  un- 
even, the  original  right  wing  contains  the  odd  com- 
pany. The  left  company  right  wing  and  right  company 
left-wing  are  designated  respectively  right  and  left 
center  companies. 

When  a new  formation  necessitates  a change  of  des- 
ignation the  change  takes  effect  upon  the  completion 
of  the  movement. 

In  designating  their  companies  the  captains  use  the 
letter  designation  : as  Company  “ ” etc. 

When  a battalion  is  composed  of  fractions  of  several 
regiments,  the  companies  of  each  regiment  are  arranged 
as  already  explained  ; the  fractions  are  then  arranged 
in  line  from  right  to  left,  according  to  the  rank  of  the 
senior  officer  present  in  each,  the  senior  on  the  right. 

Color  Guard.  , 

254.  If  the  color  be  with  the  battalion,  the  original 
right  center  company  is  the  color  company  ; the  color 
guard  remains  with  it  unless  otherwise  directed  ; it  is 
posted  as  follows  : 

In  line,  the  color  bearer  is  between  the  guides  of  the 
right  and  left  center  companies  ; the  other  members  of 
the  guard  are  in  his  rear,  in  the  line  of  file  closers.  The 
color  guard  takes  the  same  position  relative  to  the  color 
company  when  in  column  at  full  distance  or  in  mass. 

In  column  of  fours,  the  color  bearer  is  between  the 
wings,  abreast  of  the  guide  of  the  color  company,  in 
front  or  in  rear  of  the  file  next  the  file  closers;  the 
other  members  of  the  guard  retain  their  places  in  the 
line  of  file  closers.  The  color  guard  retains  the  same 
relative  position,  both  in  line  and  in  column  of  fours, 
when  marching  with  the  color  company  only. 


9g 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Ih  formin"*  line  of  columns  the  color  guard  remains 
with  the  flank  of  the  company  it  was  with  before  the 
movement  commenced. 

If  by  movements  of  the  battalion  the  original  left  of 
the  color  company  is  changed  so  as  not  to  be  the  center 
of  the  battalion,  the  color  bearer  and  guard  will  take 
post  between  the  wings,  whether  on  the  left  or  right  of 
the  color  company,  or  at  its  head  or  rear  in  column 
of  fours. 

Posts  of  Field  and  Staff. 

255.  In  line,  the  major  is  posted  twenty  paces  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  battalion  ; the  adjutant  and 
sergeant  major  are  opposite  the  right  and  left  of  the 
battalion,  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers.  The  staff 
officers,  except  the  adjutant,  in  the  order  of  rank,  the 
senior  on  the  right,  take  post  at  one  pace  apart,  six 
paces  to  the  right  and  in  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the 
battalion.  The  non-commissioned  staff  officers,  except 
the  sergeant  major,  take  post  similarly  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank. 

In  column,  the  major  is  on  the  side  of  the  guide, 
twenty  paces  from  and  opposite  the  center. 

MAJOR 

9 

I 


si 


jr^CAPT  . SKAPT 

colorWard' 
PI.  44,  Par.  255. 


I^^CAPT 


staff 


The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  are  on  the  side  of 
the  guide,  opposite  and  six  paces  from  the  head  and 
rear  of  the  column,  each  in  his  own  wing.  The  other 
staff  and  non-commissioned  staff  officers  take  post,  in 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


97 


column  of  subdivisions,  in  their  respective  wings,  on  a 
line  equal  to  the  front  of  the  column,  in  order  of  rank, 
senior  on  the  right,  six  paces  in  front  of  the  captain  of 
the  leading  company  or  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers  of  the  rear  company.  In  column  of  fours  the^^ 
take  post  similarly  in  front  of  the  leading  or  in  rear  of 
the  rear  company.  "When  the  column  faces  to  the  rear 
the  staff  and  non-commissioned  staff  officers  face  about 
individually  and  maintain  their  relative  positions. 

in  line  of  columns,  the  major  is  twenty  paces  in  front 
of  the  center;  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  are 
abreast  of  and  six  paces  outside  of  the  leading  guides. 
The  other  staff  and  non-commissioned  staff  officers  are 
in  the  same  relative  order  as  in  line,  one  pace  to  the 
right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  adjutant  and  sergeant 
major.  If  the  line  or  line  of  columns  face  to  the  rear, 
the  staff  and  non-commissioned  staff  officers  face  about 
individually  and  move  up  abreast  of  the  front  rank  or 
leading  guides,  keeping  their  relative  positions,  except 
that  in  line  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  take  the 
corresponding  positions  as  when  facing*  to  the  former 
front,  each  in  his  own  wing. 

The  field  and  staff  officers  are  mounted. 

In  making  the  about,  an  officer,  mounted,  habitually 
turns  to  the  left  about. 

Post  of  the  Band  and  Field  Music. 

256.  The  band  is  posted  with  the  left  of  its  front  rank, 
twenty-four  paces  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
battalion. 

In  column,  it  marches  with  its  rear  rank  twenty-four 
paces  in  front  of  the  leading  company,  or  its  front  rank 
twenty-four  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear  company, 
according  as  the  battalion  is  facing.  In  line  of  columns, 
the  band  retains  its  line  position,  marching  abreast  of 
the  leading  guides. 

4 


98 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


To  Form  the  Battalion. 

257.  The  companies  having  been  formed  on  their  pa- 
rade grounds,  adjutant's  call  is  sounded,  at  which  the 
adjutant  proceeds  to  the  point  where  the  base  company 
is  to  form  ; the  sergeant  major  reports  to  him  and  is 
posted  on  the  line  facing  the  adjutant  at  nearly  com- 
pany distance ; the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  then 
draw  swords. 

The  right  center  or  center  company  is  the  first  estab- 
lished, and  is  conducted  by  its  captain  so  as  to  arrive  from 
the  rear,  parallel  to  the  line  ; the  right  and  left  guides  of 
the  company  precede  it  on  the  line  by  about  twenty 
paces,  taking  post  facing  each  other,  at  order  arms, 
under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major. 

The  line  is  prolonged  in  the  right  wing  by  the  right 
and  left  guides,  who  precede  their  companies  on  the 
line  b}’'  about  twenty  paces  and  establish  themselves 
facing  the  guides  first  posted,  at  a little  less  than  com- 
pany distance  apart,  the  one  nearest  the  guide  of  the 
preceding  company  being  about  five  paces  in  his  rear ; 
the  adjutant  assures  the  position  of  the  guides,  placing 
himself  in  rear  of  the  right  guides  as  they  successively 
arrive.  The  line  is  similarly  prolonged  in  the  left  wing  by 
the  company  guides,  the  sergeant  major  assuring  them  in 
their  positions,  placing  himself  in  rear  of  the  left  guides. 

When  the  right  center  company  arrives  near  the  line 
the  captain  halts  it,  places  himself  facing  to  the  front 
near  the  left  guide,  and  dresses  the  company  to  the  left; 
the  breasts  of  the  men  opposite  the  right  and  left  guides 
rest  respectively  against  their  left  and  right  arms ; the 
companies  of  the  right  wing  successively  form  from  left 
to  right  with  an  interval  of  three  paces  between  guides 
when  in  line,  each  company  being  halted  near  the  line 
and  dressed  to  the  left,  as  explained  for  the  center  com- 
pany ; the  companies  of  the  left  wing  form  successively) 
from  right  to  left  and  are  dressed  to  the  right. 

258.  Captains,  when  dressing  their  companies  in  line 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALI  'iN. 


99 


place  themselves  on  the  line,  on  the  flank  toward  which 
they  dress,  facing  to  the  front. 

Each  captain  after  dressing  his  compftiy,  commands  : 
FRONT,  and  takes  his  post. 

These  rules  are  general, 

259.  At  all  formations  of  the  battalion  a non-comis- 
sioned  officer  in  command  of  his  company  takes  his  post 
on  the  right  of  the  right  guide,  at  the  command  guides 
posts,  and,  except  in  formations  for  ceremonies,  when 
the  major  commands  carry  arms  after  receiving  the  re- 
port of  the  adjutant,  he  takes  the  post  prescribed  for 
the  captain. 

260.  Before  sounding  the  adjutant's  call  the  band  takes 
a position  designated  by  the  adjutant, and  marches  at  the 
same  time  as  the  companies  to  take  its  position  in 
line. 

The  major  takes  post  facing  the  line,  at  a distance  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  battalion  about  equal  to  half 
its  front. 

The  adjutant,  having  assured  the  position  of  the  guides 
of  the  right  company,  places  himself  two  paces  to  the  front, 
facing  to  the  left,  and  when  the  last  company  arriving 
on  the  line  is  dressed,  commands  : 1.  Guides,  2.  posts. 

At  the  command  guides  posts,  the  sergeant  major  and 
guides  take  their  posts  in  line,  and  the  staff  and  non- 
commissioned staff  draw  sword  and  take  their  posts. 

The  adjutant  moves  at  a trot  or  gallop  (if  dismounted, 
in  quick  time)  by  the  shortest  line  to  a point  midway 
between  the  major  and  the  center  of  the  battalion,  faces 
the  latter  and  halts ; then  brings  the  battalion  to  the 
carry  and  present,  faces  about,  salutes  the  major,  and 
reports  : Sir,  the  battalion  is  formed. 

The  major  returns  the  salute  with  the  right  hand,  di- 
rects the  adjutant.  Take  your  post,  sir  ; draws  sword, 
and  brings  the  battalion  to  the  order  or  carry. 

The  adjutant  faces  about  and  returns  around  the  right 
of  the  battalion  to  his  post. 


100 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


261.  The  battalion  maybe  formed  in  line  on  the  right 
or  left  company  on  the  same  principles,  the  guides  be- 
ing posted  as  in  the  left  or  i-ight  wing. 

The  battalion  may  also  be  assembled  in  column  of 
fours. 

In  both  cases  the  companies  are  arranged  in  the  same 
relative  order  as  when  the  formation  is  on  the  center 
company.  When  assembled  in  column  the  adjutant  re- 
ports to  the  major  as  soon  as  the  last  company  has 
taken  its  place. 


Equalizing  the  Battalion. 

262.  The  companies  are  usually  equalized  by  trans- 
fers before  the  battalion  is  formed,  but  when  this  is  not 
done  the  major  may  form  column  of  companies  and 
direct  the  adjutant,  first,  to  equalize  the  companies  by 
transferring  men  from  the  larger  to  the  smaller  com- 
panies ; second,  to  break  up  one  company  and  equalize 
by  transferring  the  men  to  other  companies  ; third,  to 
form  an  additional  company  and  equalize  by  taking  men 
from  the  other  companies  ; also,  to  make  the  necessary 
assignment  of  officers  and  guides. 

To  Open  Banks. 

263.  Being  at  a halt:  1.  Open  ranks,  2.  march,  3. 

FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  major  goes  to  the  right  of 
the  battalion.  The  adjutant  places  himself  facing  to 
the  left  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  opposite 
the  right  of  the  battalion.  The  right  guides  of  each 
company  and  the  guide  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  place 
themselves  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  op- 
posite their  places  in  line,  in  order  to  mark  the  new 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank ; they  are  aligned  by  the  ad- 
jutant on  the  left  guide  of  the  battalion. 

The  lieutenants  and  the  other  file  closers  take  post  as 
in  open  ranks  in  the  company  (Par.  190). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


101 


At  the  command  march^  the  company  and  staff  of- 
ficers place  themselves  opposite  their  posts  in  line, 
three  paces  in  advance  of  the  front  rank,  dress  to  the 
right  and  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front  as  soon  as  their 
alignment  is  verified.  The  front  rank  dresses  to  the 
right;  the  men  in  the  rear  rank  step  back  a little  in  rear 
of  the  line  traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward 
on  the  right  guides,  who  verify  the  alignment  of  the  men 
in  their  respective  companies. 

The  adjutant  verifies  the  alignment  of  the  file  closers 
on  the  left  file  closer,  who  posts  himself  accurately 
three  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  guides. 

The  color  bearer  remains  in  his  place  ; the  other  mem- 
bers of  the  color  guard  step  back  with  the  file  closers. 

The  sergeant  major  takes  post  one  pace  to  the  left  of 
and  in  line  with  the  front  rank. 

The  major  verifies  the  alignment  of  the  officers  and 
the  ranks. 

The  band  takes  three  paces  between  ranks,  the  align- 
ment being  verified  by  the  drum  major. 

At  the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are 
aligned,  the  adjutant  takes  post  three  paces  to  the 
right  of  the  battalion,  in  line  with  the  company  officers; 
the  guides  and  drum  major  return  to  their  places  in 
line  ; and  the  major  takes  post  facing  to  the  front, 
twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  battalion. 

Should  the  battalion  have  wheeled  about  by  fours, 
the  sergeant  major  performs  the  duties  of  adjutant. 

To  Close  Ranks. 

264.  1.  Close  ranks,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  all  the  officers  face  about, 
and  return  to  their  places  in  line  ; the  rear  rank  closes 
to  facing  distance  from  the  front  rank  ; the  file  closers 
and  the  two  members  of  the  color  guard  close  to  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank,  and  the  band  closes  its 
ranks. 


102 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Manual  of  Arms. 

265.  The  manual  of  arms  is  executed  in  the  bat. 
talion  with  closed  or  open  ranks. 

The  color  guard  do  not  execute  the  loadings  and 
firings  ; in  rendering  honors  they  execute  all  the  move- 
ments in  the  manual,  and  on  drill,  except  when  spe- 
cially excused. 

In  the  loadings  and  firings,  the  post  of  the  major  is 
twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the  battalion. 

266.  At  the  first  command  for  loading  or  firing  the 
captains  take  place  as  prescribed  (Par.  193).  After 
firing  ceases  the  major  commands  : posts,  the  captains 
return  to  their  posts  in  line. 

These  rules  are  general. 

To  Fire  by  Company. 

267.  The  major  designates  the  objective  and  com- 
mands : 1.  Fire  by  company,  2.  One  {two  or  three) 
volley,  3.  commence  firing. 

At  the  third  command,  the  captains  of  the  odd-num- 
bered companies  command  : 1.  (Such)  company,  2.  At 
(such  an  object),  3.  At  (so  many)  yards,  4.  Company, 
5.  READY,  6.  AIM,  7.  FIRE,  8.  LOAD. 

When  the  captain  of  each  even-numbered  company 
sees  the  pieces  in  the  company  on  his  right  in  the  posi- 
tion of  load,  he  gives  the  same  commands.  The  cap- 
tains of  the  odd-numbered  companies  conform  to  the 
same  rule  with  regard  to  the  even-numbered  companies 
on  their  left. 

268.  The  fire  by  battalion  and  the  fire  at  will  are 
executed  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  in  the 
squad,  substituting  in  the  commands  battalion  for 
squad  (Pars.  144  to  150). 

269.  The  rests,  resuming  attention,  stacking  and 
taking  arms,  are  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  com- 
pany, substituting  in  the  commands  battalion  for  com- 
pany. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


103 


To  Dismiss  the  Battalion. 

270.  Dismiss  your  companies. 

Each  captain  conducts  his  company  to  its  parade 
ground,  where  it  is  dismissed  as  prescribed. 

To  March  in  Line. 

271.  Being  at  a halt ; 1.  Forward^  2.  Guide  center, 

3.  MARCH. 

The  left  guide  of  the  right  center  company  is  the 
center  guide  and  regulates  the  step  and  direction,  the 
guides  maintaining  the  interval  of  three  paces  between 
companies ; the  captains  in  front  of  the  center  of  their 
companies  see  that  they  preserve  a general  alignment 
without  abruptly  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step  ; 
the  major  superintends  the  march  of  the  battalion. 

272.  At  the  command  guide  center,  captains  caution  : 
Guide  left  (or  right),  according  as  they  are  in  the  right 
or  left  wing.  This  rule  is  general. 

273.  To  make  a slight  change  of  direction,  the  major 
commands  : Incline  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  indicates 
the  new  line  of  direction.  The  guide  gradually  ad- 
vances his  left  shoulder,  giving  time  for  the  alignment 
to  conform  to  his  movement. 

274.  If  the  battalion  loses  step,  the  major  commands: 
STEP  ; captains  and  their  companies  immediately  take 
the  proper  step. 

275.  Marching  considerable  distances,  the  line  forma- 
tion that  the  battalion  habitually  takes  is  the'  line  of 
columns  of  fours. 

To  Face  the  Battalion  to  the  Rear,  and  to  March  it  to  the  Rear, 

276.  Being  in  line  : 1.  Fours  right  (or  left)  about, 
2.  MARCH,  3.  Battalion,  4.  halt  ; or,  3.  Guide  center 

The  battalion  wheels  about  by  fours  (Par.  211) ; the 
color  bearer  turns  about  and  takes  his  place  in  the 


104 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


front  rank  ; the  other  members  of  the  color  guard  dart 
through  to  their  places  in  the  line  of  file  closers  ; the 
command  halt  is  given  as  the  fours  unite  in  line. 

In  wheeling  by  fours,  if  the  pivots  cover  and  the 
fours  wheel  properly,  no  dressing  is  needed  ; the  major 
will  direct  a captain  to  dress  his  company  when  neces- 
sary. 

If  the  battalion  be  not  halted,  the  major  commands  : 
Guide  center  as  the  fours  unite  in  line. 

Whenever  a battalion  in  line  wheels  about  by  fours, 
the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  pass  around  the  flanks. 
The  battalion  is  drilled  by  the  same  commands  as 
Then  facing  in  the  opposite  direction. 

277.  The  battalion  may  be  marched  a few  paces  to 
the  rear  by  the  commands:  1.  Battalion,  2.  About,  3. 
FACE,  4.  Forward,  5.  Guide  center,  6.  march  ; or,  if  in 
march,  by  the  commands  ; 1.  To  the  rear,  2.  march,  3. 
Guide  center.  The  officers,  sergeant  major,  and  file 
closers,  upon  facing  about,  remain  in  their  relative 
positions ; the  guides  step  into  the  rear,  now  become 
the  front  rank,  until  the  battalion  is  again  faced  to  the 
front. 

To  Oblique  m Line. 

278.  1.  Right  {oY  left)  oblique,  2.  march. 

The  major  sees  that  the  battalion  continues  parallel 
to  its  original  line. 

To  resume  the  direct  march  : 1.  Forward,  2.  march. 

Alignments. 

279.  Being  at  a halt,  to  rectify  the  alignment : Cap- 
tains rectify  the  alignment. 

The  captains  in  the  right  wing  dress  their  companies 
successively  to  the  left,  each  as  soon  as  the  captain 
next  on  his  left  commands /ron^;  the  captains  in  the 
left  wing  dress  their  companies  similarly  to  the  right. 
The  center  companies  are  dressed  first  without  waiting 
for  each  other. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


m 


280.  To  give  the  battalion  a general  alignment : 1. 
Guides  (such)  company  on  the  line,  2.  Guides  on  the 
line,  3.  On  the  center  {right  or  left),  4.  dress,  5.  Guides, 
6.  POSTS. 

At  the  first  command  the  designated  guides  place 
themselves  on  the  line  facing  the  major,  who  estab^ 
lishes  them  in  the  direction  he  wishes  to  give  the  bat- 
talion. 

At  the  second  command  the  guides  of  the  other  com- 
panies are  posted  as  in  forming  the  battalion  (Par.  257). 

At  the  command  dress  the  base  company,  if  an  interi- 
or company,  dresses  to  the  left  or  right  according  as  it 
is  in  the  rig*ht  or  left  wing;  if  on  a tiank,  toward  its 
outer  flank;  the  others  toward  the  base  company. 

If  the  new  line  be  oblique  to  or  at  considerable  dis- 
tance from  the  battalion,  the  captains  conduct  their 
companies  so  as  to  arrive  parallel  to  the  line,  halt,  and 
dress  them  as  explained. 

At  the  command  posts  the  guides  return  to  their  posts. 

If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  be  such  that  one  or 
more  companies  find  themselves  in  advance  of  it,  the 
major,  before  establishing  the  guides,  causes  such  com- 
panies to  be  moved  to  the  rear. 

To  Pass  Obstacles. 

281.  When  marching  in  line  or  in  column,  captains 
will,  without  the  command  of  the  major,  so  conduct 
their  companies  as  to  pass  obstacles  with  the  greatest 
facility,  and  then  resume  the  original  formation. 

Being  in  Line,  to  March  by  the  Flank. 

282.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march. 

The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  pass  around  the 
flanks  to  their  posts  in  column. 

In  column  of  fours  the  leading  guide  of  each  com- 
pany, except  the  first,  marches  in  the  trace  of  the  rear 
guide  of  the  preceding  company  and  maintains  the 
distance  of  seventy-two  inches  from  him. 


106 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


283.  A battalion  at  a halt  may  be  marched  a short 
distance  to  the  ri^ht  or  left  in  column  of  files  by  the 
commands:  1.  Right  (or  left),  2.  face,  3.  Forward, 
4.  march. 

If  tlie  battalion  be  in  march:  1.  By  the  right  (or  left) 
flank,  2.  march. 

All  face  individually,  and  maintain  their  relative  posi- 
tions. 

To  halt  the  battalion  and  face  it  to  the  front:  1.  Bat^ 
talion,  2.  halt,  3.  left  (or  right),  4.  face. 

To  resume  the  march  in  line:  1.  By  the  left  (or  right) 
flank,  2.  march,  3.  Guide  center. 

To  Break  into  Column  of  Fours  from  the  Right  or  Left,  ta 
March  to  the  Left  or  Right. 

284.  Being  in  line  at  a halt:  1.  Column  of  fours,  2. 
Break  from  the  right  (or  left)  to  march  to  the  left  (or 
right),  3.  march. 

The  captain  of  the  right  company  commands:  1. 
Right  forward,  2.  Fours  right. 

The  company  moves  in  column  of  fours  to  the  front ; 
the  captain  commands : 1.  Column  left,  2.  march, 
when  the  leading  four  has  advanced  company  distance; 
the  guide  then  directs  his  march  parallel  to  the  front  of 
the  battalion.  Each  of  the  other  companies  executes 
the  same  movements  in  time  to  follow  at  proper  dis- 
tance in  rear  of  the  preceding  company. 

285.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  at  the  commands  : 1. 
File  closers  on  the  left  (or  right)  flank,  2.  march,  the 
captains,  guides,  adjutant,  sergeant  major,  and  file 
closers  change  to  the  opposite  flank. 

286.  The  battalion  being  in  column  of  fours,  halts, 
advances,  obliques,  changes  direction,  marches  by  the 
flank  and  to  the  rear,  forms  column  of  twos  and  files, 
and  reforms  in  column  of  twos  and  fours,  the  same  as 
a company,  substituting  in  the  commands  battalion  foi 
company. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


lor 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

281.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Battalion, 

HALT. 

The  command  halt  is  given  as  the  fours  unite  in  line. 

If  the  battalion  be  not  halted,  the  major  commands  : 

Guide  center,  as  the  fours  unite  in  line. 

Genera!  Rules  for  Successive  Formations. 

288.  Successive  formations  include  formations,  either 
into  line  or  column,  in  which  the  several  subdivisions 
arrive  in  their  places  successively. 

(a)  In  all  successive  formations  into  line,  except  for- 
mations by  two  movements,  the  adjutant  or  sergeant- 
major  at  the  head  of  the  column  or  nearest  the  point  of 
rest  posts  on  the  line  opposite  its  right  and  left  files,  the- 
two  guides  of  the  company  first  to  arrive.  The  guides^ 
face  toward  the  point  of  rest ; if  the  formation  be  cen- 
tral, they  are  posted  on  the  line,  in  front  of  the  leading 
company,  facing  each  other. 

(b)  In  all  formations  from  a halt,  the  guides  are  posted 
at  the  preparatory  command  indicating  the  direction  in 
which  the  line  is  to  extend  ; if  marching,  they  hasten 
toward  the  point  of  rest  at  the  preparatory  command, 
and  are  posted  at  the  command  march. 

(c)  In  the  formations  on  right  (or  left)  into  line,  the 
first  guide  is  posted  company  distance  to  the  right  (or 
left)  of  the  head  of  the  column. 

(d)  In  thf:  formations  front  into  line,  the  guides  are 
posted  company  distance  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column. 

(e)  In  the  deployments,  they  are  posted  against  the 
leading  company,  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column. 

(/)  In  changes  of  front,  the  first  guide  is  posted  com- 
pany distance  to  the  right  of  the  first  or  left  of  the 
fourth  company , according  as  the  change  of  front  is 
to  the  right  or  left. 


108 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


(0  In  any  formation  where  it  is  prescribed  that  the 
g*uides  are  to  be  posted  company  distance  from  the  coJ- 
nmn  or  line,  they  may  be  posted  at  a less  distance 
when  necessary. 

(/i)  The  line  is  prolonged  as  in  forming  the  battalion  ; 
the  guides  are  assured  by  the  adjutant  or  sergeant 
major  nearest  the  point  of  rest,  or  by  both,  if  the  for- 
mation be  central ; the  companies  are  halted  near  the 
line  and  dressed  up  to  the  guides  toward  the  point  of  rest. 

{{)  When  the  line  is  to  be  formed  facing  to  the  rear, 
the  guides  are  so  posted  as  to  permit  the  leading  com- 
pany to  pass  between  them,  after  which  the  second 
guide  closes  to  a little  less  than  company  distance  from 
the  first.  The  guides  of  the  other  companies  follow 
the  same  rule. 

(Jc)  When  the  principles  of  successive  formations  are 
well  understood  the  guides  may  be  required  to  post 
themselves. 

(Z)  The  major  commands  : 1.  Guides,  2.  posts,  at  the 
completion  of  all  successive  formations  into  line. 

(m)  In  successive  formations,  should  the  major  de- 
sire to  commence  firing,  pending  the  completion  of  the 
movement,  he  instructs  the  captains  as  to  the  kind  of 
fire  ; the  adjutant  or  sergeant  major  at  the  head  of  the 
column  cautions  the  guides  not  to  take  post  marking  the 
line. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left,  into  Line. 

289.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line^ 
2.  IVtARCH. 

The  captains  of  companies  in  rear  of  the  first  com- 
mand : Forward. 

The  first  company  executes  on  right  into  line  (Par. 
208). 

Each  of  the  other  captains  commands  : 1.  On  right 
into  line,  2.  march,  when  his  leading  four  is  nearly  op- 
posite its  place  in  line. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


109 


If  marching,  the  captains  of  companies  in  rear  of  the 
first  omit  the  command  forward. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line. 

390.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line^ 
2.  MARCH. 

h At  the  first  com- 

mand the  captain 
of  the  first  com- 
pany commands  : 
1.  Right  front  into 
line,  2.  Double 
time;  the  captain 
of  the  second  com- 
pany commands : 
1.  Forward,  2.  Col- 
umn right ; the 
other  captains : 1. 
Forward,  2.  Col- 
umn half  right. 

The  first  com- 
pany executes 


f ! 

S 1 

1 \ 

1 

i i 

1 « 

i i 

1 

1 

PI.  45,  Par.  290. 


/ right  front  into  line  in  double  time  (Par. 
210).  The  captain  of  the  second  company 
conducts  it  opposite  the  left  of  its  place  in 
line,  changes  direction  to  the  left,  and 
commands:  1.  Right  front  into  line,  2. 
Double  time,  3.  march,  when  at  company 
distance  from  the  line. 

The  other  captains  conduct  their  com- 
panies to  a point  at  twice  company  distance  in  rear  of 
the  left  of  their  places  in  line,  change  direction  half 
left,  and  when  at  company  distance  from  the  line 
conform  to  what  is  explained  for  the  captain  of  the 
second  company. 

If  marching,  the  captains  of  companies  in  rear  of  the 
first  omit  the  command /oricard. 


110 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Front  into  line  may  be  executed  in  a direction  oblique 
to  that  of  the  column  by  first  causing  the  leading  com- 
pany to  execute  a partial  change  of  direction.  The  line 
is  formed  at  right  angles  to  the  new  direction  of  the 
leading  company.  The  other  companies  are,  if  possi- 
ble, so  conducted  as  to  arrive  opposite  their  places,  at 
twice  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  line. 


To  Form  Front  into  Line  Faced  to  the  Rear. 


291.  1.  Right  {or  left)  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear, 

2.  MARCH. 

Executed  as  ex- 
plained, except 
that  each  captain 
halts  his  company 
just  beyond  the 
line ; all  the  fours 
having  arrived  in 
line,  the  captain 
wheels  his  com- 
pany to  the  left 
about  by  fours, 
halts  it,  and  dress- 
es it  to  the  right. 

292.  In  forming 
line  faced  to  the 
rear  the  fours 
This 


wheel  about  toward  the  point  of  rest. 
rule  is  general. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  by  Two 
Movements. 


293.  In  forming  line  by  two  movements 
the  command  march  is  given  as  the  head 
r of  a company  is  about  to  change  direction. 

The  adjutant  or  sergeant  major  at  the 
PI.  46,  Par.  291.  column  assures  the  positions 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Ill 


of  the  guides  of  the  rear  companies,  in  prolongation  of 
the  line  of  the  leading  companies. 

4 Part  of  the  Column  Having  Changed  Direction  to  the  Right,  to 
Form  Line  to  the  Left. 

294.  1.  Fours  left,  2.  Rear  companies  left  front  into 
line,  3.  march. 

The  companies  that  have  changed  direction  wheel  by 
fours  to  the  left ; each  captain  halts  his  company  as 
the  fours  unite  in  line. 

The  rear  companies  execute  left  front  Hnto  line,  as 
prescribed. 


To  Form  Line  Faced  to  the  Right. 

295.  1.  Fours  right,  2.  Rear  companies  left  front  into 
line,  faced  to  the  rear,  3.  march 

The  companies  that  have  changed  direction  wheel  by 
fours  to  the  right  and  halt. 

The  rear  companies  execute  left  front  into  line,  faced 
to  the  rear. 

296.  If  the  column  has  changed  direction  to  the  left, 
to  form  line  to  the  right : 1.  Fours  right,  2.  Rear  com- 
panies right  front  into  line,  3.  march. 

To  Form  Line  to  the  Left. 

297.  1.  Fours  left,  2.  Rear  companies  right  front  into 
line,  faced  to  the  rear,  3.  march. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Form  Column  of  Companies  to  the  Right  or 
Left  and  Halt. 

298.  1.  Companies  right  {ov  left),  2.  march. 

Each  company  executes  the  turn  and  halt  (Par.  192). 

Full  distance  in  column  of  subdivisions  is  such  that 
in  forming  line  to  the  right  or  left  the  subdivisions  will 


112 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


have  their  proper  intervals ; in 
column  of  companies  it  is  company 
distance  and  three  paces. 

Being  in  line,  to  form  Column  of  Com- 
ponies  without  Halting, 

299.  1.  Companies,  2.  Right  (or 
left)  turn,  3.  march,  4.  Forward, 
5.  MARCH,  6.  Guide  {right  or  left). 
Each  company  executes  the  turn 
and  advance.  The  fifth  command 
is  given  when  all  the  companies 
have  completed  the  turn. 

800.  In  column  of  subdivisions  the 
guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  is 
charged  with  the  step  and  direction; 
the  guides  in  rear  pre-  ^ojr_ 
serve  the  trace,  step, 
and  distance. 

Whenever  a guide  is 
forced  out  of  the  direc- 
tion, he  recovers  it  gradually;  the  guides  in 
rear  conform  successively  to  his  move- 
ments. 

Whenever  the  guide  in  column  is 
changed,  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major, 
unless  otherwise  directed,  pass  by  the  most 
convenient  line  to  the  opposite  flank. 

These  rules  are  general. 

Being  in  Line,  to  break  by  the  Right  or  Left  of 

Companies  to  the  R^ar  into  Column.  ‘‘(J 

301.  1.  Right  (or  left)  of  companies  rear 
into  column,  2.  march. 

Each  captain  commands:  1.  Fours  right, 

2.  Column  right. 

Each  captain  halts  on  the  line  lately  oc-  Pi-  48,  Par.  301. 


PI.  47,  Par.  298. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


113 


cupied  by  the  front  rank  and  as  his  rear 
four  passes  him,  forms  line  to  the  left, 
halts  his  company,  and  dresses  it  to  the 
left. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Com- 
panies Successively  to  the  Right  or  Left  into 
column  at  full  distance. 


302.  1.  Column  of  companies ^ 2.  First 
company,  d.  Fours  right  (or  left),  4. 
MARCH,  5.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

The  leading  company  executes  fours 
right. 

The  other  companies  continue  the 
march  in  col- 
umn of  fours 

^and  success! ve- 

fly  form  line  to 


PI.  49,  Par.  302. 


the  right  and  move  forward  on  the  same 
. ground  as  the  leading  company. 

^ Marching  in  Column  of  Companies  at  Full  Dis- 
tance,to  Form  the  Companies  Successively 
to  the  Right  or  Left  into  Column  of  Fours. 
303.  1.  Column  of  fours,  2.  First  com- 

a pany,  3.  Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  leading  company  executes  fours 
right. 

The  other  companies  continue  the 
march  in  column  of  companies  and  suc- 
^ cessively  form  column  of  fours  to  the 
PI.  50,  Par.  303.  right,  on  the  same  ground  as  the  leading 
company. 


114 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Being  in  Line,  io  Break  by  Companies  from  the  Right  or  Left  to 
March  to  the  Left  or  Right. 

304.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  Companies  break  from  the 
right  (or  left)  to  march  to  the  left  (or  right),  2.  march. 

The  captain 
of  the  first 
company  com- 
mands: l.jFor- 
ward,2.  Guide 
left. 

The  right 
company 
moves  for- 
ward, thecap- 


MARCH,  when  the 


PI.  51,  Par.  304. 

tain  commanding ; 1.  Left  turn, 
guide  has  advanced  company  distance ; the  left  guide 
then  directs  his  march  parallel  to  the  front  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

Each  of  the  other  companies  executes  the  same  move- 
ments in  time  to  follow  the  preceding  company  at  full 
distance. 

To  March  in  Column  at  Full  Distance. 


305.  1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  {right  or  left),  3.  march. 

To  make  a slight  change  of  direction,  the  major  com- 
mands : Incline  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  indicates  the 
now  line  of  direction  ; the  leading  guide  gradually  ad- 
vances the  left  shoulder,  his  subdivision  conforming  to 
his  movements.  The  rear  subdivisions  execute  the 
change  of  direction  on  the  same  ground  and  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  leading  one. 


To  Halt  the  Column. 

306.  1.  Battalion,  2.  halt. 

The  column  halts,  and  the  guides  stand  fast,  although 
they  may  have  lost  distance  and  be  out  of  the  direction 
of  the  guides  in  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


115 


To  Face  the  Column  to  the  Rear,  and  to  March  it  to  the  Rear. 


807.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left)  about,  2.  march,  3.  Bat- 
talion, 4.  HALT  ; or,  8.  Guide  {right  or  left). 

If  the  companies  are  unequal  in  size,  each  captain 
assists  his  guide  to  gain  the  trace  and  distance  by  ob- 
liquing his  company  when  necessary,  causing  it  to 
lengthen  or  shorten  the  step. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Change  Direction. 

308.  Being  in  march  : 1.  Column  right  (or  left),  or,  1. 

V Column  half  right  (or  half  left), 
2.  MARCH. 

The  chief  of  the  first  subdivi- 
sion commands  : Right  turn. 

The  leading  subdivision  turns  to 
the  right,  the  chief  adding  : 1. 
Forward,  2.  march,  upon  its 
completion  (see  Par.  228). 

The  other  subdivisions  march 
squarely  up  to  the  turning  point 
and  each  changes  direction  by 
the  same  commands  and  means 
PI.  52,  Par.  308.  as  the  first. 


t 


To  Put  the  Column  in  March  and  Change  Direction  at  the  Same 
Time. 

809.  1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  right  (or  left),  8.  Column 
right  {or  left) ; or,  8.  Column  half  right  {or  half  left), 

4.  MARCH. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  Line  to  the  Right  or 
Left. 

310.  The  guides  on  the  side  toward  which  the  move- 
ment is  to  be  made  covering  at  full  distance,  to  form 
line  and  halt : 1.  Companies  right  (or  left),  2.  march, 
3.  Guides,  4.  posts. 

At  the  first  command  the  left  guide  of  the  leading 
company  places  himself  facing  the  leading  guide  of  the 
column,  nearly  company  distance  in  front  of  him,  so  as 


116 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


to  be  opposite  one  of  the  left  files  of  his  company  when 
the  movement  is  completed  ; the  guide  is  assured  in  his 
position  by  the  adjutant  or  sergeant  major ; each  cap- 
tain places  himself  facing  to  the  front,  on  the  right  of 
his  company,  and  verifies  the  alignment. 

At  the  command  posts,  the  guides  return  to  their 
posts  in  line. 

To  form  line  and  advance  : 1.  Companies,  2.  Right 
(or  left)  turn,  3.  march,  4.  Guide  center,  5.  Forward^ 

6.  MARCH. 

The  sixth  command  is  given  when  all  the  companies 
have  completed  the  turn. 

311.  Being  in  column  at  full  distance  at  a halt,  if  the 
guides  do  not  cover  or  have  not  their  proper  distances, 
to  correct  them  the  major  establishes  the  guide  of  the 
leading'  company  and  the  guide  next  in  rear  in  the 
desired  direction,  and  commands  : 1.  Right  (or  left) 
guides,  2.  cover.  The  right  guides  place  themselves 
covering  the  first  two,  each  at  full  distance  from  the 
guide  next  in  front ; the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major 
assure  their  positions  ; the  major  then  commands  : 1. 
Right  (or  left),  2.  dress. 

Each  captain  aligns  his  company  on  the  guide  and 
commands  : front. 

Should  any  company  be  at  a considerable  distance 
from  its  guide,  the  captain  gives  the  preparatory  com- 
mands for  moving  it  into  place,  adding  : march,  at  the 
command  dress  from  the  major. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left  nfo 
Line. 

812.  Being  in  march  : 1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line, 

2.  MARCH. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  commands  : Right 
turn,  and  when  the  company  has  advanced  to  the 
guides  halts  it. 

The  other  companies  continue  the  march,  each  captain 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


117 


giving  the  commands  : 1.  Right  turn,  2.  march,  upon 
arriving  opposite  the  right  of  his  place  in  line. 

Being  at  a halt  at  the  first  command,  captains  of 


companies  in  rear  of  the  first  command  : 1 . Forivard, 
2.  Guide  right. 


Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  Front  Into  Line. 

313.  Being  at  a 
halt;  1,  Right  {or 
left)  front  into 
line,  2.  march. 

The  captain  of 
the  first  com- 
pany  com- 
mands; 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide 
left,  the  captain  of  the  sec- 
ond ; 1.  Right  forward,  2. 
Fours  right,  the  other  cap- 
tains; 1.  Fours  right,  2.  CoU 
umn  half  left. 

The  first  company  advances 
to  the  guides,  is  halted  and 
dressed  to  the  left.  The  sec- 
ond company, vs^hen  near  the 
line,  executes  column  right, 
and  w^hen  opposite  its  place, 
fours  left;  is  halted  and 
dressed  to  the  left. 


PI.  54,  Par.  313. 


118 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


The  other  companies  on  nearing  the  line  change 
direction  half  right  and  complete  the  movement  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  second  company. 

If  marching,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  omits  the 
command  forward^  and  changes  the  guide  if  necessary. 

314.  To  form  faced  to  the  rear,  the  major  adds /aced  to 
the  rear  after  front  into  line. 

Executed  as  above,  except  that  the  companies  march 
just  beyond  the  line,  halt  and  wheel  about  by  fours, 
halt,  and  dress  toward  the  point  of  rest. 


To  Change  Front. 

315.  Being  in 
line : 1.  Change 
front  on  first  (or 
fourth)  company^ 

2.  Companies,  3.  _ 

Right  {pv  left)  half  \ 
turn,  4.  MARCH, 

5.  Guide  right  (or  \ V 

left). 

The  first  com- 
pany  executes  \ 

right  turn.  'v 

The  other  com-  \ 

panics  execute 
right  half  turn  ; each  cap- 
tain again  commands:  Right 
half  tur7i,  2.  march,  when 
the  right  of  his  company  is 
opposite  its  place  in  line. 

316.  The  change  of  front 
effected  by  wheeling  by  fours 
forming  front  into  line. 

317.  To  change  front  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  major  adds  faced  to  the  rear  to  the 
command  change  front  on  first  (or 


may  be 
and 


PL  55,  Par.  315. 


SCHOOL  OF  the  BATTALION. 


119 


fourth)  company.  The  movement  is  executed  as  just 
explained,  except  that  the  companies  are  marched 
across  the  line,  halted  just  beyond  it,  wheeled  about  by 
fours,  halted,  and  dressed  as  before. 

318.  The  major  may  direct  the  guides  to  be  posted  in 
an  oblique  direction  ; the  movement  will  be  executed  in 
the  same  manner,  the  designated  company  conforming 
to  the  line  established  by  the  guides. 

To  March  in  Route  Step  and  at  Ease. 

319.  To  march  in  the  route  step  and  at  ease  and  to  re- 
sume the  attention  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Company.  When  marching  in  column  of 
subdivisions  the  guides  maintain  the  trace  and  distance. 

In  route  marches  the  major,  adjutant,  and  sergeant 
major  march  at  the  head  of  the  column;  the  surgeon  and 
hospital  steward  at  the  rear  of  the  column  ; the  other 
staff  and  non-commissioned  staff  officers,  wherever  the 
major  directs  ; the  band  in  front  of  the  leading  com- 
pany ; the  captains  at  the  head  or  rear  of  their  com- 
panies, as  directed  by  the  major. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Advance  in  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns  of 
Fours. 

320.  1.  Companies,  2.  Bight  (or  left)  forward,  3. 
Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march,  5.  Guide  {right,  left  or 
tenter). 

Each  company  executes  right  forward,  fours  right; 
the  guides  preserve  the  interval  necessary  to  form 
front  into  line,  and  march  abreast  of  the  guide  indicated. 

321.  The  line  of  columns  of  fours  is  put  in  march, 
halted,  marched  to  the  rear,  and  at  the  oblique  by  the 
same  commands  and  means  as  the  battalion  in  line. 

Marching  in  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns  of  Fours,  to  Gain 
Ground  to  the  Right  or  Left  and  Front. 

322.  1.  Companies,  2.  Column  half  right  (ov  half  left), 
3.  MARCH. 


120 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


/■ 


To  resume  the  original  direction : 1.  Companies,  2, 
Column  half  left  (or  half  right),  3.  march. 

The  companies 
regulate  their 
movements  by 
those  of  the  com- 
pany toward  which 
the  movement  is 
made,  as  when  ob- 
liquing. On  resum- 
ing the  direct 
march  the  guide  is 
again  announced. 
Marching  in  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns  of  Fours,  h Change 
Direction. 


PL  56,  Par.  322. 


823.  1.  Change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left),  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Battalion,  4.  halt;  or,  3.  Guide  (right,  left, 
or  center). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


121 


The  first  company  changes  direction  to  the  right;  the 
other  companies  are  conducted  by  the  shortest  line  to 
their  places  abreast  of  the  first. 

If  marching  in  double  time  or  in  quick  time  and 
the  command  be  double  time,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  cautions  : Quick  time  ; the  other  companies 
execute  the  movement  in  double  time,  and  on  arriving 
abreast  of  the  first  company  their  captains  command  : 
1.  Quick  time,  2.  march.  During  the  movement  the 
guide  is  on  the  side  toward  which  the  change  is  made ; 
on  its  completion  the  major  announces  the  guide.  If 
the  command  halt  be  given  during  the  execution  of  the 
movement,  only  those  companies  halt  that  have  arrived 
in  place  ; the  others  successively  halt  upon  arriving  on 
the  line. 

Marching  in  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns  of  Fours,  to  Form 
Line. 

324.  1.  Companies,  2.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line, 
3.  MARCH.  4.  Battalion,  5.  halt. 

Each  company  executes  right  front  into  line. 

The  command  halt  is  given  when  the  leading  fours 
have  advanced  company  distance. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  major  announces  the 
guide  immediately  after  the  command  march. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  of  Com- 
panies  in  Columns  of  Fours. 

325.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of  companies  in 
columns  of  fours,  2.  march. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  cautions  : Continue 
the  march  ; the  other  captains"  command  : Column 
half  right ; the  first  company  having  advanced  com- 
pany distance  is  halted ; when  the  other  companies 
have  gained  full  intervals  they  execute  column  half  left, 


122 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


.^7 


and  halt  abreast  of  the  first  company.  If  at  a halt,  each 
captain  gives  the  commands  necessary  for  pitting  his 
company  in  march. 

In  advancing  in  line 
of  columns  of  fours  the 
intervals  between  guides 
at  full  and  close  interval 
are  the  same  as  the  full 
and  close  distance  in  col- 
umn. 

To  form  at  close  inter- 
y'/  y/  val  the  major  adds  at 

/\/  //  close  interval  to  the  first 

command ; the  movement  is 
executed  in  the  same  manner, 
except  that  the  interval  is  eight 
paces. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  on  Right 
or  Left  into  Line  of  Companies  in 
Columns  of  Fours. 


y/ 


4'' 


ri"  326.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  com- 

panies in  columns  of  fours,  2.  march. 

The  first  company  executes  column  right, 
J advances  company  distance  and  twelve 

paces  in  the  new  direction  and  is  halted;  each 
P . 8,  ar.  3 5.  other  companies  marches  beyond  the 

preceding  company,  executes  column  right  when  oppo- 
site its  place,  and  is  halted  abreast  of  the  first  company. 
If  at  a halt,  captains  give  the  commands  necessary  for 
putting  their  companies  in  march. 


Marching  in  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns  of  Fours,  to  March 
in  Column  of  Companies  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

327.  1.  Fours  right  {prleff),  2.  Guide  {right 

nr  left). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


123 


Being  in  Column  of  Companies,  to  March  in  Line  of  Companies 
in  Columns  of  Fours  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

328.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left)^  2.  march,  3.  Guide 
{right,  left,  or  center). 

Marching  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  March  in  Line  of  Companies 
in  Columns  of  Fours  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

329.  1.  Companies,  2.  Column,  right  (or  left),  3. 
MARCH,  4.  Guide  {right,  left,  or  center). 

To  march  again  in  column  of  fours  : 1.  Companies, 
2.  Column  right  (or  left),  3.  march. 

Being  in  Column  of  Companies,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours  and 
to  Form  Again  in  Column  of  Companies. 

330.  1.  Companies,  2.  Right  (or  left)  forward,  3. 
Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

To  form  again  in  column  : 1.  Companies,  2.  Right  (or 
left)  front  into  line,  3.  march,  4.  Battalion  ,5.  halt; 
or,  if  executed  in  double  time,  4.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

The  companies  execute  these  movements  simultane- 
ously. 

331.  All  the  movements  prescribed  in  Pars.  319  to 
330  may  be  executed  by  platoons,  substituting  pZafooTis 
for  companies  in  the  commands  and  explanations. 

Advancing  in  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns  of  Fours,  to  Close 
and  Extend  Intervals. 

382.  To  close  intervals  : 1.  On  (such)  company  close 
intervals,  2.  Battalion,  4.  halt,  or,  3.  Guide 

{right,  left,  or  center). 

The  captain  of  the  designated  company  cautions  : 
Continue  the  march,  the  captains  to  the  right  command: 
Column  half  left;  those  to  the  left : Column  half  right. 

The  designated  company  halts  at  the  fourth  com- 
mand ; the  other  companies  incline  toward  it  until  they 


124 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


g-ain  the  close  interval,  when  by  command  of  their  cap- 
taiiw  they  change  direction,  half  ricrht  or  half  left, 

march  to  the  front  and 
halt  on  arriving  abreast 
of  the  one  designated. 

If  marching  in  double 
time  or  in  quick  time 
and  the  command  be 
double  time,  the  captain 
of  the  designated  com- 
pany cautions  : Quick 
time ; the  other  com- 
panies move  in  double 
time,  and  when  they 
arrive  abreast  o f t he  des- 
ignated company  take 
quick  time. 

liitervals  are  extended,  gaining  ground  to  the  front, 
on  the  isame  principles:  1.  On  company  extend  in- 
tervals, 2.  MARCH,  3.  Battalion,  4.  halt,  or,  3.  Guide 
{right,  left,  or  center). 

To  Close  Intervals  without  Gaining  Ground  to  the  Front. 

333.  The  major  wheels  the  battalion  by  fours  into- 
column  of  companies,  the  column  is  then  closed,  as  in 
Par.  335,  after  which  the  battalion  is  wheeled  by  fours 
into  line  of  columns  of  fours. 

Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  same  principles. 

The  battalion  is  wheeled  by  fours  into  close  column, 
and  full  distance  taken  as  in  Par.  336,  after  which  the 
battalion  is  wheeled  by  fours  into  line  of  columns  of 
fours. 

Close  Column  or  in  Mass. 

334.  The  distance  between  companies  in  close  column 
is  eight  paces. 

Whenever  a subdivision  takes  its  place  in  close 
column,  the  file  closers  close  to  one  pace  from  the  rear 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


1^5 


rank,  falling  back  to  two  paces  whenever  the  full  dis- 
tance is  again  taken. 

These  rules  are  general, 

in  Column  of  Companies  at  Full  Distance,  and  at  a Halt, 
to  Form  Close  Column. 

335.  1.  Close  in  mass,  2,  Guide  right  (or  left),  3.  march. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  cautions:  Stand 
fast,  the  other  captains  command:  1.  Forward,  2. 
Guide  right. 

The  rear  companies  move  forward;  each  is  halted 
when  it  arrives  at  eight  paces  from  the  one  that  pre- 
cedes it;  each  captain  establishes  his  guide  and  dresses 
his  company  to  the  right. 

If  marching,  the  major  omits  the  com- 
mand  for  the  guide  and  the  captains  of  the  ^ ^ 

rear  companies  omit  the  conimands  for  put-  

ting  them  in  march.  — — ‘ 

At  the  command  march,t\\e.  first  company  --w 

is  halted. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  and  the  com- 
mand be  double  time,  the  captain  of  the 
first  company  cautions  it  to  advance  in 
quick  time;  each  of  the  other  captains  com-  t:—  - ' 
mands:  1.  Quick  time.  2.  march,  upon 
closing  to  eight  paces. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  the  move- 
ment is  executed  in  the  same  manner ; the 

captain  of  the  first  company  commands : ^ 

Quick  time,  at  the  first  command  of  the  Pi.  60,  Par.  335. 
major. 

To  arrest  the  march  during  the  execution  of  the 
movement:  1.  Battalion,  2.  halt. 

Only  those  companies  halt  that  have  closed  to  eight 
paces ; the  other  companies  halt  successively  at  the 
commands  of  their  captains,  upon  closing  to  eight  paces. 

To  close  the  column  on  the  rearmost  company,  the 
major  wheels  the  battalion  about  by  fours;  the  column 


126 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


IS  then  closed  as  before;  when  closed,  the  battalion  w 
a^ain  wheeled  about  by  fours. 

Being  in  Close  Column,  to  Take  Full  Distance. 

336.  Being  at  a halt:  1.  Take  full  distance,  2.  Guide 
riaht  (ov  left),  d.  march.  ,, 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  commands:  i.  k or- 

ward,  2.  Guide  right.  _ rnrwnrd 

Each  of  the  other  captains  commands  . 1.  Forwara, 
2.  Guide  right,  3.  march,  when  his  company  is  at  lull 

^‘ifTarehing,  the  major  omits  the  command  for  the/ 

^'if^marching  in  quick  time  the  captain?  of  the  com- 
panies in  rear  of  the  first  haltthern  at  the  command 
marcA,  and  put  them  in  march  as  abo^  explained. 

If  marching  in  quick  time  and  the  command  be 
double  time,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  corn- 
mands  double  time,  the  other  captains  caution  their 
rmpaniesto  continue  the  quick  time,  and  successively 
command:  1.  Double  tMe  2.  march,  when  at  full  dis- 

marching  in  double  time,  the  first  compny  ad- 
va^esln  double  time;  the  captains  of  the  other  com- 
panies command:  Quick  time,  at  the  first  f 

the  major,  and  successively  command:  1.  Double  nme, 
2 MARCH  when  at  full  distance.  ,-,11  * • 

To  form  line  to  or  on  the  right  or  left,  the  majo. 
first  causes  the  column  to  take  full  distance. 

To  Ploy  into  Close  Column. 

337  Close  column  is  always  ployed  with  the  desig 
“ nearest  the  desig- 

„a«  cSw  place. 

guide  and  assures  the  position  of  the  other  ^uides. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 
Being  in  Line,  to  Ploy  into  Close  Column. 


127 


PI.  61,  Par.  338. 


tvlri  T^GuidJ company  commands  : 1.  For- 

and^dressed  halted 

fours  Tight.  ’ <^«'“Panies  execute 

The  captain  of 
the  second  com- 
pany halts  in  rear 
of  the  left  of  the 
first, and  when  his 
rear  four  passes 
him,  forms  line 

company,  establishes  his  left  e-uide 
eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  left  guide  of  the  first  and 
dresses  his  company  to  the  lett.  ’ 

The  other  companies  incline  to  the  right  and  each 
marches  by  the  shortest  line  to  a point  eight  paces  in 
guide  of  the  preceding  company  mclines 
to  the  left  and  executes  '.vhat  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  second  company.  ^ scuoeu  roi 

The  closed  column  is  ployed  on  the  fourth  company 

£ tS"t " ““ 

captain  of  the  designated  company  ' 

S"L'4Sed.'  is  ex^ 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Ploy  into  Close  Column,  Faced  to 
the  Front 

Colu„n 

first  company  executes  column  right  and  the 
eading  guide  having  advanced  twelve  paces  in  the  new 


125 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


direction,  the  captain  halts  and  as  his  rear  four  passes 
him,  forms  line  to  the  left,  halts  the  company,  and 
dresses  it  to  the  left. 

Each  of  the  other  companies  moves 
forward  and  executes  column  right,  so 
as  to  enter  the  column  eight  paces  in 
rear  of  the  preceding  company,  forms 
line  to  the  left  and  is  dressed  to  the  left. 

If  at  a halt,  each  captain  gives  the 
commands  necessary  to  put  his  com- 
pany in  march. 

Close  column  may  be  formed  in  an 
^ oblique  direction  on  the  same  principles 

y by  substituting  the  command  : 3.  CoZ- 

umn  half  inght  (or  half  left),  for  3.  CoU 
PL  62,  Par.  339.  umn  right  (or  left). 

340.  To  form  the  close  column  faced  to  the  rear,  the 
major  adds  : Faced  to  the  rear  after  close  column,  in  his 
commands. 


The  movement  is  executed  as  just 
explained,  except  that  the  companies 
in  rear  of  the  first  successively  enter 
the  column  beyond  the  point  where  the 
first  changed  direction,  and  each  cap- 
tain forms  his  company  in  line  to  the 
right  or  left  and  dresses  it  to  the  right 
or  left  according  as  the  company 
changed  direction  to  the  right  or  left. 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Ploy  into  Close 
Column,  Faced  to  the  Right  or  Left. 


341.  1.  Close  column,  2.  First  com^ 
pany,  3.  Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  first  company  executes  fours 
right,  the  captain  commands  : Guide 
PL  63,  Par.  340.  right,  and  the  company  having  ad- 
vanced eight  paces  in  the  new  direction  is  halted  an^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


121) 


dressed  to  the  ti 
right ; the  other  t 
companies  form 
close  column  as 
prescribed  in  Par. 

338.  PI.  64,  Par.  341. 

If  at  a halt,  captains  give  tne  commands  necessary  for 
putting  their  companies  in  march. 


Being  in  Close  Column,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours. 

342.  Being  at  a halt : 1.  Column  of  fours,  2.  First 
company,  3.  Bight  (or  left)  forivard,  4.  Fours  right  (ol 
left),  5.  MARCH. 

The  first  company  executes  right  forward,  fours 
right. 

Each  of  the  other  companies  executes  the  same  move 
ment  in  time  to  follow  the  one  preceding. 

The  major  may  command : 1.  Columns  of  fours,  % 
First  (or  Fourth)  company,  3.  Fours  right  (or  left),  4. 

MARCH. 

The  designated  company  executes  fours  right. 

Each  of  the  other  companies  executes  fours  right,  or 
right  forward,  fours  right,  in  time  to  follow  the  one 
preceding. 

Movements  in  Close  Column. 


343.  A Ciose  column  advances,  halts,  obliques,  marches 
by  the  flank  and  resumes  the  march  in  column,  faces  to 
the  rear,  marches  to  the  rear,  changes  direction,  gains 
ground  to  the  right  or  left  when  marching  by  the  flank 
and  resumes  the  original  direction  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  a column  at  full  distance. 


Being  in  Close  Column,  to  Change  Direction  by  the  Flank. 

344.  1.  Change  direction  by  the  right  {or  left)  flank, 
2.  Fours  right  (or  left),  3.  march. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  commands ; 1. 
Bight  forward,  2.  Fours  right. 


130 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


The  first  company  executes  right 
forte ard,  fours  right ; the  captain, 
as  the  rear  four  completes  its  wheel 
to  the  front,  forms  the  company  in 
line  to  the  left,  halts  it  and  dresses 
it  to  the  left. 

The  other  companies  execute 
fours  right  and  direct  their  march 
so  as  to  enter  the  new  column  eight 
paces  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the 
first  company  ; each  captain  halts 
when  opposite  the  left  guide  of  the  preceding  company 
and  allows  his  company  to  march  past  him,  forms  it  in 
line  to  the  left  and  dresses  it  to  the  left. 

The  first  company  may,  by  order  of  the  major,  be  in- 
clined at  any  angle  to  the  original  front.  By  this 
method  any  direction  may  be  given  to  a close  column. 

345.  The  close  column  marching  by  the  flank  changes 
direction  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  when 
at  full  intervals  (Par.  323). 


To  Deploy  the  Close  Column. 

346.  Being  at  a halt:  1.  Deploy  column,  2.  Foursright 
(or  left),  8,  MARCH. 

. H k . The  captain  of 

^ ^ ^ I j i I the  first  company 

1 j I I cautions  : Stand 

xT*  ^ j I fast. 

~ ^ The  first  com- 
pany is  dressed  to 
PI.  66,  Par.  346.  the  left:  the  other 

companies  execute  fours  right;  each  captain  halts 
when  three  paces  beyond  the  right  of  the  preceding 
company,  and  as  the  rear  of  his  company  passes  him, 
wheels  it  by  fours  to  the  left,  halts  it  near  the  line  and 
dresses  it  to  the  left. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


131 


If  marching,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  halts  it 
at  the  command  march;  the  movement  is  executed  as 
before. 

347.  To  deploy  the  column  faced  to  the  rear  without 
first  causing  it  to  wheel  about  by  fours,  the  major  adds 
the  command:  Faced  to  the  rear,  after  deploy  column. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  already  explained, 
except  that  each  company  marches  just  beyond  the  line, 
halts,  and  then  wheels  about  by  fours,  after  which  it  is 
dressed  toward  the  point  of  rest. 

Movements  by  Platoons. 

348.  The  major  may  form  the  battalion  in  column  of 
platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  form  line  from  column  of 
platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  form  column  of  fours  from 
column  of  platoons,  and  the  reverse,  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

Being  m Column  of  Companies,  at  Full  Distance,  to  Break  into 
Column  of  Platoons. 

349.  1.  Righi  (or  left)  hy  platoons,  2.  march,  3.  Guide 
left  (or  right). 

Executed  by  each  company  as  in  Par.  235. 

350.  To  reform  the  companies:  1.  Form  companies, 
2.  Right  (or  left)  oblique,  3.  march,  4.  Battalion,  5. 
halt;  or,  4.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

Executed  by  each  company,  as  in  Par.  236,  except  that 
when  executed  in  quick  time  the  chiefs  of  the  leading 
platoons  do  not  halt  them  till  the  command  halt  from 
the  major. 

351.  Distances  are  taken  and  closed  in  column  of  pla- 
toons as  in  column  of  companies. 

Being  in  March  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left 
into  Line. 

352.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line,  2.  march. 


132 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


The  first  company  executes  on  right  into  line  (Par. 
234),  halting  at  the  guides  (Par.  288,  a and  c) ; the  other 
companies  marcli  beyond  the  first,  each  captain  com- 
manding: 1,  On  right  into  liney  2.  march,  upon  arriving 
opposite  his  place  in  line. 

If  executed  from  a halt,  the  captains  of  companies  in 
rear  of  the  first  command  : 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  right. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Form  Front  into  Line. 

353.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  2.  march. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  commands  : 1.  Form 
company,  2.  Right  oblique  ; the  other  captains  com- 
mand : Column  half  right.  The  first  company  is  halted 
and  dressed  to  the  left  against  the  guides ; each  of  the 
other  companies  executes  column  half  right,  advances 
in  the  new  direction  until  the  left  of  its  first  platoon  is 
opposite  its  place  in  line,  when  the  company  changes 
direction  half  left,  and  when  at  platoon  distance  from 
the  line  forms  company  as  prescribed  for  the  first  com- 
pany. 

If  executed  from  a halt,  the  captains  of  companies  in 
rear  of  the  first  command:  1.  Forward,  2.  Guideleft, 
8.  Column  half  right. 

To  Form  Line  of  Platoon  Columns. 

354.  A platoon  column  is  a company  in  column  of 
platoons. 

The  full  interval  between  companies  in  line  of  platoon 
columns  is  platoon  front  and  three  paces ; the  close  in- 
terval is  eight  paces  ; full  interval  is  taken  unless  close 
is  specified  in  the  commands. 

355.  Advancing  in  line  of  platoon  columns,  intervals 
are  closed  and  extended  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  in  Par.  332. 

To  close  intervals  without  gaining  ground  to  the 

Vont:  1.  On  (such)  company,  close  intervals,  2.  march. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


133 


The  designated  company  stands  fast. 

Each  of  the  other  companies  moves  by  the  flank  to- 
ward the  designated  company,  inclining  slightly  to  the 
rear,  and  when  at  twelve  paces  from  the  preceding 
company  is  wheeled  by  fours  to  the  front  and  halted  and 
dressed  on  the  line  of  the  designated  company. 

Intervals  are  extended  on  the  same  principles. 

Being  in  Line  to  Advance  in  Line  of  Platoon  Columns  with  Full 
Intervals. 

356.  1.  Companies,  2.  Right  (or  left)  by  platoons,  3. 
MARCH,  4.  Guide  {right,  left,  or  center). 

The  captains 
^ g announce  the 
guide  on  the 
flank  toward 
the  base  com- 
pany ; if  the 
guide  be  cen- 
ter, the  captain 
PI.  67,  Par.  356.  of  the  right 

center  company  cautions  : Guide  left. 

357.  The  line  of  platoon  columns  advances,  halts, 
faces  to  the  rear,  marches  to  the  rear,  and  changes 
direction  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  pre- 
scribed for  a line  of  columns  of  fours. 

Being  in  Line  of  Platoon  Columns,  to  Form  Line. 

358.  1.  Form  companies,  2.  Right  (or  left)  oblique,  3. 
MARCH,  4.  Battalion,  5.  halt,  or  4.  Guide  center. 

Executed  by  each  company  as  in  Par.  236. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  major  commands  : 
Guide  center,  as  soon  as  the  rear  platoons  arrive  on  the 
line. 

Being  in  Line  of  Platoon  Columns,  to  Form  Column  of  Com-- 
panies  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

359.  1.  Platoons  {right  ov  left),  2.  march. 


134 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Being  in  Column  of  Companies  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  Line 
of  Platoon  Columns  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

360.  1.  Platoons  right  (or  left),  2.  march. 

M archin'*  in  Line  of  Platoon  Columns,  to  Form  Column  of  Pla- 
toons to  the  Right  or  Left. 

361.  1.  Companies,  2.  Column  right  (or  left),  3. 
MARCH,  4.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

To  march  ag-ain  in  line  of  platoon  columns  : 1.  Com- 
panies, 2.  Column  right  (or  left),  3.  march,  4.  Guide 
(right,  left,  or  center). 

Being  in  Column  of  Platoons  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left  into  Line 
of  Platoon  Columns. 

362.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  platoon  columns, 

2.  MARCH. 

The  first  company  changes  direction  to  the  right,  and 
when  the  leading  platoon  has  advanced  company  dis- 
tance, the  captain  commands : 1.  Company,  2.  HALT. 


riTTi' 


PI.  68,  Par.  362. 


Each  of  the  other  companies  marches  beyond  the 
preceding  company,  changes  direction,  and  forms  on  its 
[^ft  at  the  proper  interval. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


135 


Being  in  Column  of  Platoons,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  of 
Platoon  Columns. 


PI.  69,  Par.  363. 


; ■ • n r I 363. 1.  Right  (or 
j ; ! j left)  front  into 

p I platoon 

I ! i 1 columns.  2. 

I I I I ’ 

/ I / I MARCH. 

/ / / The  first  com^ 

/ y'  / pany  advances 
/ / company  dis- 

/ / / tance,  is  halted 

' / / and  dressed  to 

/ the  left ; each 

/ of  the  other  com- 

/ panies  execute? 

y column  half 

right,  advances  in  the  new  direc' 
tion  until  the  left  of  its  first  pla- 
toon is  opposite  its  place  in  line, 
when  the  company  changes  direc- 
tion half  left,  and  when  abreast  of 
the  first  company  is  halted  and 
dressed  to  the  left. 

To  March  the  Line  of  Platoon  Columns 
by  the  Flank. 


364.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

To  march  again  in  line  of  platoon  columns  : 1.  Fours 
'tight  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Guide  right  {left,  or  center). 


Marching  by  the  Flank,  to  Form  Line  of  Companies  in  Columns 
of  Fours. 

365.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Column  right  (or  left),  3.  march* 
4.  Guide  {right,  left  or  center). 


1S6 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Being  in  Corumn  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  of  Platoon 
Columns. 


366.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front 
columns,  2.  march 


into  line  of  platoon 


4:-"’ 


i/ 


/ 


PI.  70,  Par.  366. 


The  first  com- 
pany executes  pla- 
toons right  front 
into  Zmc  (Par.243). 
The  second  com- 
pany executes  col- 
I ^ j z'  umn  right ; when 

its  leading- guide  is 
opposite  his  place 
in  line,  column 
left ; and  when  at 
platoon  distance 
from  the  line,  pZa- 
toons  right  front 
into  line. 

The  other  companies  execute  column 
half  right,  move  by  the  shortest  line  to  a 
point  company  plus  platoon  distance  in 
rear  of  the  left  of  their  places  in  line, 
where  they  change  direction  half  left,  and 
at  platoon  distance  from  the  line  execute 
platoons  right  front  into  line. 


To  Form  Street  Column. 

367.  Being  in  column  of  companies  at  full  distance : 
1.  Street  column,  2.  march.  The  first  company  halts 
and  stands  fast ; the  second  forms  in  column  of  fours, 
four  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  four  of  the  first  com- 
pany; the  third  forms  similarly  in  rear  of  the  left  four  of 
the  fiTst  company  ; the  fourth  company  closes  upon  the 
second  and  third  ; all  the  officers,  the  color  guard,  non- 
commissioned staff,  guides,  and  file  closers  take  post 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


13^/ 


within  the  column,  captains  opposite  the  centers  of 
their  companies,  the  others  near  their  posts  in  line  or 
column. 

Being  in  column  of  fours  : 1.  Street  column,  2.  Right 
(or  left)  front  into  line,  3.  march.  The  first  and  fourth 
companies  execute  right  front  into  line,  and  the  forma- 
tion is  completed  as  prescribed. 

The  numbers  of  the  companies  remain  unchanged 
till  column  of  companies  or  fours  is  again  formed. 

If  there  be  but  three  companies  in  the  battalion,  the 
first  and  second  platoons  of  the  second  company  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  for  the  second  and  third  com- 
panies, and  the  third  company  closes  upon  the  second. 

With  five  companies,  the  platoons  of  the  fourth 
company  form  in  rear  of  the  second  and  third  com- 
panies, as  above  prescribed  for  the  platoons  of  the 
second  company,  and  the  fifth  company  closes  upon 
the  fourth. 

With  six  companies,  the  fourth  company  forms  col- 
umn of  fours  and  follows  the  second,  the  fifth  follows 
the  third,  and  the  sixth  closes  upon  the  fourth  and  fifth. 

The  street  column  advances,  obliques,  changes  direc- 
tion, halts,  and  marches  by  the  flank  and  to  the  rear  by 
the  same  commands  and  means  as  a column  at  full  dis- 
tance ; in  marching  by  the  flank  the  flank  companies 
oblique  sufficiently  to  follow  in  rear  of  the  flank  fours 
of  the  leading  company,  the  right  or  left  front  rank 
man  of  the  leading  company  acts  as  guide,  and  in 
changing  direction  the  rear  company  regulates  its 
movements  on  the  companies  in  columns  of  fours. 

To  Form  Square. 

Being  in  street  column  : 1.  Form  square,  2.  march. 
The  leading  company  halts  or  stands  fast ; the  right 
and  left  flank  companies  wheel  by  fours  to  the  right 
and  left,  respectively,  and  halt ; the  rear  company  ex- 
ecutes about  face. 


138 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


To  form  again  in  street  column:  1.  Street  column y 

2.  MARCH. 

The  company  that  was  leading  when  the  square  was 
formed  stands  fast ; the  rear  company  executes  about 
face  ; the  right  and  left  flank  companies  wheel  by  fours 
to  the  left  and  right,  and  halt ; they  regain  their  posi- 
tions when  the  column  marches. 

Being  in  street  column,  to  form  column  of  companies 
at  full  distance  : 1.  Column  of  comimnies,  2.  march,  3. 
Guide  right  (or  left).  The  first  company  advances,  the 
flank  companies  execute  front  into  line  in  double  time, 
each  when  at  full  distance  from  the  preceding  company, 
and  the  rear  company  advances  when  at  full  distance. 
Officers,  guides,  etc.,  return  to  their  posts. 

The  street  column  forms  column  of  fours  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed  in  Par.  342.  The  designated  com- 
pany executes  the  movement,  the  other  companies  take 
their  proper  places  in  column  of  fours,  with  file  closers 
on  the  same  flank  as  in  the  designated  company. 
Officers,  guides,  etc.,  resume  their  posts  in  column. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


139 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 

368.  The  regiment  is  supposed  to  consist  of  three 
battalions,  but  the  rules  prescribed  are  applicable  to  a 
less  or  greater  number. 

The  colonel  is  the  instructor. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers,  Regimental  Staff,  Non-commissioned 
Staff,  and  Band. 

369.  In  line,  and  in  line  of  columns,  the  colonel  is 
posted  sixty  paces  in  front  of  the  line,  opposite  its  cen- 
ter ; in  line  of  masses,  this  distance  is  reduced  to  thirty 
paces  ; in  column,  he  habitually  marches  at  the  head  of 
the  regiment. 


2°MAJ  LT^COL 


« 

— 


PI.  71,  Par.  369. 


In  line,  in  line  of  columns,  or  in  line  of  masses,  the 
lieutenant-colonel  is  posted  on  a Ime  with  the  majors, 
opposite  the  right  of  the  first  battalion  ; in  column,  he 
is  on  the  side  of  the  guide,  abreast  of  and  twenty  paces 
from  the  head  ; during  field  movements  and  on  the 
march,  he  is  not  restricted  to  any  particular  post ; he 
acts  as  an  assistant  to  the  colonel  as  the  latter  may 
direct. 

The  adjutant  rides  on  the  left  of  the  colonel ; the 
other  staff  officers  ride  six  paces  in  rear  of  the  colonel, 
in  the  order  of  rank,  the  senior  on  the  right. 

Mounted  trumpeters  and  orderlies  ride  three  paces  in 
rear  of  the  staff. 


140 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


In  line,  the  band  is  posted  with  the  left  of  its  front 
rank  twenty-four  paces  to  the  right  of  the  first  battalion. 
In  the  evolutions,  it  takes,  as  far  as  practicable,  the 
positions  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion,  un- 
less excused  or  a position  is  assigned  to  it  by  the  colonel. 

In  line,  the  non-commissioned  staff,  the  sergeant 
major  on  the  light,  form  at  one  pace  apart,  abreast  of 
the  front  rank  of  the  band,  the  sergeant  major  six 
paces  from  its  left. 

In  route  marches,  the  colonel  and  staff  march  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  the  non-commissioned  staff  in  their 
rear,  or  in  rear  of  the  mounted  trumpeters  and  order- 
lies ; the  band  in  rear  of  the  non-commissioned  staff. 

The  colonel  ma3^  direct  a surgeon  to  march  in  rear  of 
the  regiment,  or  if  there  be  a sufficient  number,  one  in 
rear  of  each  battalion.  The  quartermaster  and  quarter- 
master sergeant  are  usually  with  the  train  ; the  hos- 
pital stewards  with  the  ambulances  in  rear  of  the  regi- 
ment. 

General  Rules  for  Commands. 

370.  The  colonel’s  commands  are  given  orally,  by  the 
trumpet,  or  communicated  by  staff  officers  or  orderlies. 
The  majors,  unless  otherwise  directed,  repeat  the  com- 
mands of  the  colonel  as  soon  as  given  ; and  add  such 
commands  and  cause  their  battalions  to  execute  such 
movements  as  may  be  necessary  before  the  general 
movement. 

Each  major  gives  the  commands  necessary  to  insure 
the  execution  of  the  movements  by  his  battalion  at  the 
proper  time. 

After  the  general  movement,  each  major  adds  such 
commands  as  may  be  necessary  to  complete  the  move- 
ment in  his  battalion,  such  as  guides  posts,  etc. 

The  colonel  may  preface  his  commands  by  : 1.  Battal- 
ions, 2.  ATTENTION.  He  ma.y  permit  battalions  to 
stand  at  ease,  while  awaiting  the  completion  of  the  gen- 
eral  movement  by  other  battalions. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


141 


When  the  regiment  is  in  more  than  one  line,  if  a 
movement  is  to  be  executed  by  one  of  the  lines,  first 
line,  second  line,  or  third  line,  is  specified  in  the  prepara- 
tory command  of  the  colonel;  the  battalion  commanders 
in  the  designated  line  repeat  the  commands  of  the  colonel. 

When  the  formation  will  admit  of  the  simultaneous 
execution  of  movements  by  battalions,  the  colonel  may 
have  them  execute  the  movements  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Battalion  by  prefixing  the  command  Bat- 
talions to  the  commands  therein  prescribed. 

When  the  formation  will  admit  of  the  simultaneous 
execution  of  movements  by  companies  or  platoons,  the 
movements  are  executed  as  in  the  School  of  the  Bat- 
talion, thv,  colonel  giving  the  commands  prescribed  for 
the  major,  except  that  in  announcing  the  guide,  in  line 
and  in  line  of  columns,  he  commands  : (Such)  the  base 
battalion. 

The  colonel  maj^  designate  a battalion  to  execute  a 
separate  movement  by  prefixing  the  command  : (Such) 
battalion  to  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  School  of 
the  Battalion. 

Formation  of  the  Regiment. 

371.  The  regiment  is  formed  by  battalions,  in  line,  in 
line  of  platoon  columns,  or  in  line  of  masses,  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  colonel. 

It  may  also  be  formed  in  separate  lines  in  any  of  the 
above  formations. 

At  reviews  and  other  forms  of  ceremony,  the  battal- 
ions are  posted  from  right  to  left,  according  to  the  rank 
of  battalion  commanders  present,  the  senior  on  the 
right.  A battalion  whose  major  is  in  command  of  the 
regiment,  retains  its  place.  On  other  occasions  the  bat- 
talions are  posted  at  the  discretion  of  the  colonel. 

The  interval  between  battalions  in  line  or  in  line  of 
masses  is  twenty-four  paces. 

In  whatever  direction  the  regiment  faces,  the  battal- 
ions are  designated  from  the  right  when  in  line,  and 


U2 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


tlie  head  when  in  column,  first  battalion,  second  hat 
talion,  and  so  on.  If  in  two  lines,  the  battalions  in 
the  first  line  are  desig'nated  from  the  right,  first  and 
second  ; in  the  second  line,  third,  and  so  on. 

To  receive  the  regiment,  the  colonel  takes  post,  fac- 
ing the  line. 

The  adjutant  indicates  to  the  adjutant  of  the  base 
battalion  the  point  of  rest  and  the  direction  of  the  line, 
then  takes  post  facing  the  line,  about  thirty  paces  in 
front  of  the  center. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  and  non-commissioned  staff 
take  post  as  the  last  battalion  is  formed.  The  formation 
completed,  the  adjutant  commands : 1.  Battalions,  2. 
ATTENTION,  presents  the  regiment  to  the  colonel  as  ex- 
plained for  presenting  a battalion,  and  takes  post  with 
the  colonel,  passing  by  his  right. 

To  Open  and  Close  Ranks. 

372.  Being  m line,  at  a halt:  1.  Open  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 
To  close  ranks  : 1.  Close  ranks,  2.  march.  Executed  in 
each  battalion  (Pars.  263  and  264),  regulating  on  the 
first  battalion . 

Firings. 

373.  The  firings  are  conducted  by  the  battalion  com- 
manders (Pars.  265  to  268)  under  the  direction  of  the 
colonel. 

The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  staff  pass  to  the 
rear  of  the  line. 

Rests. 

374.  Executed  as  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion 
(Par.  269). 

To  resume  attention : 1.  Battalions,  2.  attention. 

375.  To  dismiss  the  regiment : 1.  Dismiss  your  baU 
talions. 

Each  major  conducts  his  battalion  to  its  parade 
ground,  where  it  is  dismissed  as  prescribed. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


143 


To  Advance. 

376.  Being  in  line,  the  colonel  gives  the  commands 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion  for  advanc- 
ing in  line  of  columns. 

The  major  of  the  base  battalion  adds  : Guide  center; 
the  other  majors  announce  the  guide  toward  the  base  bat- 
talion, and  regulate  the  march  of  their  battalions  upon  it. 

To  reform  the  line,  the  colonel  gives  the  same  com- 
mands as  a battalion  commander,  substituting  hattah 
ions,  halt,  for  battalion,  halt. 

To  advance  a short  distance  in  line  : 1.  (Such)  the 
base  battalion,  2.  Forivard,  3.  march. 

At  the  command  forward,  each  major  adds  : Guide 
center. 

The  majors  regulate  the  march  of  their  battalions 
upon  the  base  battalion. 

To  Face  the  Line  to  the  Rear. 

377.  1.  Face  to  the  rear,  2.  Fours  right  (or  left) 
about,  3 MARCH. 

Each  major  halts  his  battalion  as  the  fours  unite  in 
line. 

To  March  the  Line  to  the  Rear. 

378.  \.  Fours  right  {ov  left)  about,  2.  march,  3.  (Such) 
the  base  battalion. 

The  majors  add:  Guide  center,  the  instant  the  about 
is  completed. 

To  Halt  the  Regiment, 

379.  1.  Battalions,  2,  halt. 

Alignments 

380.  Being  at  a halt,  to  give  a general  alignment,  the 
colonel  selects  a base  company,  posts  its  guides  at  the 
point  of  rest,  in  the  desired  direction  and  commands : 
1.  Guides  on  the  line,  2,  On  the  center  {right  or  left), 
3.  DRESS. 

At  the  first  command,  the  guides  of  each  company 


144 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


post  themselves  as  in  forming  the  battalion,  taking 
care  to  preserve  the  intervals. 

At  the  command  dress,  each  battalion  is  dressed  as 
in  Par.  280.  Each  major  commands : 1.  Guides,  2. 
POSTS,  as  soon  as  his  battalion  is  dressed. 

If  a battalion  be  at  a considerable  distance  from  or 
in  front  of  the  position  it  is  to  occupy,  its  major  will, 
at  Mie  first  command,  move  it  to  its  proper  position 
fo*faressing. 

Being  in  Line,  to  March  by  the  Flank. 

381.  1.  Fours  right  {oY  left),  2.  march. 

Being  in  Line  at  a Halt,  to  Break  into  Column  of  Fours  from 
the  Right  or  Left  to  March  to  the  Left  or  Right. 

382.  1.  Column  of  fours,  2.  Break  from  the  right 
(or  left)  to  march  to  the  left  (or  right),  3.  march. 

The  first  battalion  executes  the  movement  (Par. 
284)*  the  other  battalions  follow  successively  at  the 
commands  of  their  majors,  each  twenty-four  paces  in 
rear  of  the  one  preceding. 

383.  The  regiment,  in  column  of  fours,  forms  line  to  the 
right  or  left,  advances,  obliques,  changes  direction  and 
marches  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  the  battalion. 

381.  The  movements  from  column  of  fours  are  ex- 
plained for  execution  on  the  march,  but  may  be  exe- 
cuted from  a halt. 

Successii^e  Formations. 

385.  The  adjutant  or  sergeant  major  of  each  battalion 
precedes  it  on  the  line  to  indicate  the  point  of  rest. 

The  guides  of  the  leading  company  of  the  base  bat- 
talion are  first  established. 

The  guides  of  the  leading  companies  of  the  rear  bat- 
talions are  established  facing  the  point  of  rest  of  the 
general  line,  the  nearest  guide  being  twenty-four  paces 
from  the  flank  of  the  battalion  next  preceding. 

Distance,  when  forming  two  or  more  lines  or  column 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


145 


of  battalions,  is  the  front  of  the  battalion  in  line  and 
twenty-four  paces.  This  may  be  increased  or  diminished, 
the  colonel  adding  to  his  first  command  : At  (so  many) 
paces  distance;  or, the  colonel  may  send  orders  specifying 
the  distance  to  the  commanders  of  the  second  and  third 
lines,  or  send  a staff  officer  to  indicate  the  points  of  rest. 

When  in  two  lines,  the  second  line,  in  all  maneuvers, 
preserves  its  position  relative  to  the  first,  and  con- 
forms to  its  movements. 

Marching  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  in  Two  Lines  to  the 
Right  or  Left. 

386.  1.  In  two  lines,  2.  Fours  right  (or  left),  3. 
Third  (or  such)  battalion,  second  line,  4.  march. 


PI.  72,  Par.  386. 


The  first  and  second  battalions  form  line  to  the  right 
^nd  halt.  The  third  battalion  inclines  to  the  left  until 
it  gains  the  required  distance,  when  it  resumes  the 
original  direction,  and  is  formed  in  line  to  the  right 
and  halted  with  its  center  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the 
first  line. 

To  March  again  in  Column  of  Fours. 

387.  1.  Column  of  fours,  2.  First  line,  3.  Fours  right 
(or  left),  4.  MARCH. 


146 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


Tiie  battalion  commander  of  the  second  line  com- 
mands  ; 1.  Fours  right,  2.  march,  in  time  to  follovi' 
the  preceding  battalion  at  the  proper  distance.  The 
battalion  is  marched  by  the  shortest  line  to  its  place 
in  column. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left  into  Line. 

388.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line,  2.  march. 

Tiie  leading  battalion  executes  on  right  into  line  ; the 
other  battalions,  at  the  commands  of  their  majors,  suc- 
cessively execute  the  same  movement  when  their  lead- 
ing fours  have  passed  beyond  the  left  flank  of  the  bat- 
talion preceding. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  in  Two  Lines  on  Right  or 
Left 

389.  1.  In  two  lines,  2.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line,  3. 
Third  (or  such)  battalion,  second  line,  4.  march. 

The  first  and  second  battalions  execute  the  movement 
as  already  explained.  The  third  battalion  inclines  to  the 
left  until  it  gains  its  distance,  when  it  resumes  the  orig- 
inal direction,  and  forms  on  right  into  line  in  rear  of  the 
center  of  the  first  line. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line. 

390.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  2.  march. 

At  the  first  command,  the  majors  of  battalions  in  rear 
command  : Column  half  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  battalion  executes 
right  front  into  line. 

Each  of  the  other  majors  so  marches  his  battalion  that 
when  the  head  arrives  opposite  its  point  of  rest  it  will 
be  at  least  twice  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  line 
when  it  changes  direction  half  left,  and  on  arriving  at 
company  distance  from  the  line,  the  battalion  executes 
right  front  into  line. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


147 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line,  Faced  to  the 
Rear. 

391.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  first  battalion  executes  right  front  into  line,  faced 
to  the  rear  ; the  others  are  marched  toward  their  points 
of  rest  (Par.  390),  and  formed  right  front  into  line,  faced 
to  the  rear. 

392.  Front  into  line  and  front  into  line  faced  to  the 
rear  may  also  be  executed  on  the  rear  of  the  column  by 
first  wheeling  about  by  fours  and  then  using  the  means 
already  explained. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line,  on  the  Head 
of  a Rear  Battalion. 

393.  1.  On  second  (or  such)  battalion,  2.  Right  {or  left) 
front  into  line,  3.  march. 

At  the  second  command,  the  major  of  the  first  bat- 
talion adds  : Fours  left ; the  major  of  the  third  : Col- 
umn half  right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  second  and  third  bat- 
talions execute  right  front  into  line  as  previously  ex- 
plained. The  first  battalion  marches  twenty-four  paces 
to  the  left,  when  the  major  forms  column  of  fours  to  the 
left  and  immediately  after  commands  : 1.  Right  front 
into  line,  faced  to  the  rear,  2.  march. 

If  the  third  be  designated,  the  second  battalion  exe- 
cutes the  movements  just  prescribed  for  the  first,  the 
major  of  the  first  wheels  his  battalion  about  by  fours, 
changes  direction  half  right,  and  forms  his  battalion 
on  the  left  of  the  line  according  to  the  principles  laid 
down. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  in  Two  Lines. 

394.  1.  In  two  lines,  2.  Right  {ov  left)  front  into  line, 
8.  Third  (or  such)  battalion,  second  line,  4.  march. 

The  first  and  second  battalions  execute  right  front 


148 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


h y 


i 


i A A A J 

I /^ /f/^/ 


PI.  73,  Par.  394. 


into  line  as  already 
explained.  The  third 
battalion  inclines  to 
the  right,  and  forms 
right  front  into  line 
in  rear  of  the  center 
of  the  first  line. 

To  form  three 
lines,  the  third  in  close  col- 
umn of  companies  or  in 
line  of  platoon  columns,  the 
colonel  sends  special  in- 
structions to  the  major  of 
the  third  battalion  as  to  its 
formation,  and  gives  the 
commands  to  the  other  bat- 
talions for  forming  in  two 
lines. 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  by  Two  Move- 
ments. 


y 395.  The  column  of  fours  having  partly 

D changed  direction  to  the  right,  to  form  line  to 

the  left : 1.  Fours  left,  2.  Rear  battalions  left 
n front  into  line,  3.  march. 

The  battalions  that  have  changed  direction  to 


PI.  74,  Par.  396. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT, 


149 


right  form  line  to  the  left  and  halt ; the  battalions  in 
rear  execute  left  front  into  Une,  the  leading  fours  ad- 
vancing only  so  far  as  to  be  in  line  with  the  battalions 
that  formed  line  to  the  left. 

396.  To  form  line  to  the  right : 1.  Fours  right,  2.  Rear 
battalions  left  front  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear,d.  march, 


❖ 


The  battalions  \ 
that  have  changed  y 
direction  form  line 
to  the  right  and  halt;  \ 
the  battalions  in  rear  \ 

execute  left  front  into  line,  \ 
faced  to  the  rear.  \ 

The  column  having  partly  \ 
changed  directipn  to  the  \ 
left,  is  formed  to  the  right  \ 
and  right  front  into  line,  or  \ 

to  the  left  and  right  front 
into  line,  faced  to  the  rear,  by  simi- 
lar commands  and  means. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Right 
and  Left  Front  into  Line. 

397.  1.  Right  and  left  front  into 
line,  2.  march. 

The  first  battalion  executes  right 
front  into  line;  the  second  and  third 
are  marched  to  the  left;  the  second 


— 


PI.  75,  Par.  397. 


150 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


forms  left  front  into  line  on  the  left  of  the  first ; and  the 
third  forms  left  front  into  line  on  the  left  of  the  second. 

If  the  colonel  commands  left  and  right  front  into 
line,  the  first  battalion  forms  left  front  into  line,  the 
rear  battalions  form  right  front  into  line  on  the  right  of 
the  first. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Right  and  Left  Front  into 
Line  in  Two  Lines. 

' 398.  1.  In  two  lines,  2.  Right  and  left  front  into  line, 
3.  Third  (or  such)  battalion,  second  line,  4.  march. 

The  first  battalion  forms  right  front  into  line,  the  sec- 
ond forms  left  front  into  line  on  the  left  of  the  first ; 
the  third  forms  line  by  two  movements  (Pars.  293,  294, 
296),  and  is  established  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the  first 
line. 

If  the  second  command  of  the  colonel  be  left  and 
right  front  into  line,  the  first  battalion  forms  left  front 
into  line  and  the  second  forms  right  front  into  line  on 
its  right. 

399.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  line  of  companies  in 
columns  of  fours  is  formed  according  to  the  principles 
for  forming  line  from  column  of  fours. 

In  executing  front,  or  on  right  or  left  intg  line  of 
columns  of  fours,  each  major  marches  his  battalion  op- 
posite  its  point  of  rest,  on  the  principles  explained  for 
forming  the  regiment  front,  or  on  right  or  left  into  line, 
and  then  forms  into  line  of  columns  of  fours,  as  in  the 
School  of  the  Battalion. 

All  movements  in  line  of  columns  of  fours.  School  of 
the  Battalion,  may  be  executed  by  the  regiment  by 
similar  commands  and  means,  the  colonel  designating 
(such)  battalion  when  necessary. 

Route  Step  and  to  March  at  Ease. 

400.  To  march  in  route  step  and  at  ease  and  to  resume 
attention  are  executed  as  prescribed  for  the  battalion, 
substituting  battalions  for  battalion. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


151 


Column  at  Full  Distance. 

401.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  forms  column  of 
companies  or  platoons  to  the  right  or  left,  or  right  or 
left  of  companies  rear  into  column  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion 
(Par.  251). 

The  regiment  being  in  column  at  full  distance,  ad- 
vances, forms  line  to  the  right  or  left,  and  marches  1o 
the  rear  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Battalion. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Change  Direction. 

402.  Being  in  march:  1.  Column  right  (or  left),  2 

MARCH. 

The  leading  battalion  changes  direction  to  the  right ; 
the  other  battalions  move  forward,  and  each  at  the 
command  of  its  major  changes  direction  on  the  same 
ground  as  the  first. 

Being  at  a halt : 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  right  (or  left), 
3.  Column  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Face  the  Column  to  the 
Rear. 

403.  1.  Face  to  the  rear.  2.  Fours  right  (or  left)  about, 
3.  MARCH. 

The  majors  add  : 1.  Battalion,  2.  halt,  as  the  fours 
unite  in  line. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left  into 
Line. 

404.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line,  2.  march. 

The  first  battalion  executes  on  right  into  line;  the 
other  battalions  move  forward  and  execute  the  move- 
ment successively,  each  when  its  leading  company  is 
twenty-tour  paces  beyond  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion 
preceding. 

405.  Being  in  column  of  companies,  the  movements 
to  form  in  two  lines,  on  right  or  left,  are  executed  by 


152 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


the  same  commands  and  on  the  same  principles  as  from 
column  of  fours  (Par.  389). 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  Front  into  Line. 
406.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  2.  mai^ch. 

At  the  first  command  the  major  of  the  first  battalion 


commands : 1.  Right 
front  into  line;  the 
other  majors  com- 
mand: 1.  Fours  right, 
2.  Companies,  3.  Col- 


, , each  until  its  leading  guides  are  op- 

/ / posite  the  point  of  rest  of  the  battal- 

^ / ion  when  its  major  commands : 1. 

/ Companies,  2.  Column  half  right,  3. 

w P MARCH.  4.  Guide  left;  and  when  the 

PI.  76,  Par.  406.  company  is  oppo- 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


153 


site  the  point  of  rest,  commands:  1.  Fours  left,  2.  march, 
3.  Guide  left;  and  when  at  company  distance  from  the 
line,  forms  his  battalion  right  front  into  line  on  the 
right  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

To  Form  Front  into  Line  Faced  to  the  Rear. 

The  colonel  adds /aced  to  the  rear,  after  front  into 
line;  each  major,  when  his  battalion  approaches  the 
line,  executes  right  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

Right  and  left  front  into  line  is  executed  by  the  same 
commands  and  on  the  same  principles  as  from  colump 
of  fours  (Par.  397). 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  Front  into  Line, 
in  Two  Lines. 

407.  The  colonel  gives  the  same  commands  as  when 
in  column  of  fours,  and  the  movement  is  executed  ac. 
cording  to  the  same  principles. 

Being  in  Column  at  Full  Distance,  to  Form  Line  by  Two  Move^ 
ments. 

408.  The  column  at  full  distance  having  partly 
changed  direction  to  the  right  (or  left)  to  form  line  tc 
the  left  (or  right). 

1.  Companies  left  (or  right),  2.  Rear  battalions  left  (or 
right)  front  into  line,  3.  march. 

The  battalions  that  have  changed  direction  to  the 
right  form  line  to  the  left.  The  rear  battalions  exe- 
cute left  front  into  line. 

409.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  forms  line  of  com- 
panies or  platoons  in  columns  of  fours,  by  the  same 
commands  and  means  as  in  the' School  of  the  Battalion. 

The  guides  preserve  the  intervals  necessary  to  form 
front  into  line  with  twenty-four  paces  between  bat- 
talions. At  close  intervals  the  interval  between  bat- 
talions is  company  front. 


154 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


To  Ploy  into  Column  of  Masses. 

410.  In  column  of  masses  the  distance  of  each  bat- 
talion from  the  one  preceding  it  is  equal  to  the  front  of 
its  first  company. 

In  forming  column  of  masses  from  line,  the  desig- 
nated battalion  ploys  into  close  column;  the  others 
ploy  in  rear  of  the  one  designated,  the  battalion  nearest 
the  point  of  rest  taking  precedence  in  the  column.  The 
rear  battalions  are  dressed  to  the  same  flank  as  the 
designated  or  leading  battalion. 

411.  Column  of  companies  at  full  distance  is  closed  in 
mass  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  Par. 
835  ; each  battalion  in  rear  of  the  first  is  closed  in  mass 
when  at  company  distance  from  the  one  preceding. 

412.  Being  in  column  of  masses,  full  distance  is  taken 
by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  Par.  336  ; 
each  battalion  in  rear  of  the  first  takes  full  distance 
when  its  leading  company  has  company  distance  and 
twenty-four  paces. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Ploy  into  Column  of  Masses  on  the  First  Com- 
pany of  the  First  Battalion, 

418.  1.  Column  of  masses,  2.  On  first  company,  first 
battalion,  3.  march. 

The  first  battalion  ploys  on  its  first  company  (Par. 
338);  the  others  wheel  by  fours  to  the  right,  incline  to 
the  right,  and  each  marches  so  that  its  leading  com- 
pany may  enter  the  column  at  company  distance  and 
eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear  company  of  the  preceding 
battalion.  The  second  battalion  ploys  in  rear  of  the 
first  and  the  third  in  rear  of  the  second,  each  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Battalion  (Par.  341) ; the 
left  guides  cover  the  left  guides  of  the  preceding  bat- 
talion. 

The  regiment  is  ployed  on  the  fourth  company,  third 
battalion,  on  the  same  principles. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


155 


Being  in  Line  to  Ploy  into  Column  of  Masses  on  an  Jnterior 
Battalion. 

414.  1.  Column  of  masses,  2.  On  first  company,  second 
battalion,  3.  march. 

The  second  battalion  ploys  on  its  first  company. 

The  major  of  the  first  battalion  commands  : 1.  Fours 
left,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Companies,  4.  Column  left,  5.  march. 
6.  Guide  right,  and  when  his  leading  guides  are  oppo- 
site a point  company  distance  and  eight  paces  in  reai 


PI.  77,  Par.  414. 


of  the  second  battalion,  commands  : 1.  Comparcits. 
2.  Column  right,  3.  march,  and  ploys  his  battalion  in 
rear  of  the  second  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed in  Par.  341,  except  that  the  captains  pass  through 
the  column,  establish  their  left  guides  in  rear  of  the  left 
guides  of  the  second  battalion,  and  dress  their  com- 
panies to  the  left,  and  that  the  captain  of  the  first  com- 
pany announces  guide  left  as  his  company  forms  line. 

The  third  battalion  ploys  in  rear  of  the  first  on  the 
principles  explained  in  Par.  413. 

Should  the  command  of  the  colonel  be  : 

1.  Column  of  masses,  2.  On  fourth  company,  second 
oattalion,  3.  march,  the  movement  is  exex^uted  on  the 
same  principles.  The  third  battalion  ploys  in  rear  of 
the  second,  the  first  in  rear  of  the  third. 


156 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


Being  in  column  of  Fours,  to  Ploy  into  Column  of  Masses 
Faced  to  the  Front. 

415.  1.  Column  of  masses,  2.  First  company,  first 
battalion,  3.  Column  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  first  battalion  ploys  faced  to  the  front  (Par.  339); 
each  of  the  other  battalions  successively  executes  the 
same  movement  in  rear  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

Column  of  masses  may  be  formed  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion on  the  same  principles  by  substituting  the  com- 
mand : 3.  Column  half  right  (or  half  left) ; for  3. 
Column  right  (or  left). 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Ploy  imo  Column  of  Masses, 
Faced  to  the  Rear. 

416.  1.  Column  of  masses  faced  to  the  rear,  2.  First 
company,  first  battalion,  3.  Column  right  (or  left),  4. 

MARCH. 

The  first  battalion  ploys  faced  to  the  rear  (Par.  340) ; 
the  other  battalions  move  forward  and  successively  ex- 
ecute the  same  movement,  each  major  giving  his  com- 
mands so  that  his  first  company  may  enter  the  column 
at  a point  company  distance  beyond  the  point  wher« 
the  last  company  of  the  preceding  battalion  entered  it. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Ploy  into  Column  of  Masses  Faced 
to  the  Right  or  Left. 

417.  1.  Column  of  masses,  2.  First  company,  first  bat- 
talion, 3.  Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  first  battalion  plo^^s  faced  to  the  right  (Par.  341); 
the  other  battalions  incline  to  the  left  and  successively 
execute  the  same  movement,  each  major  giving  his 
commands  so  that  his  first  company  may  enter  the 
column  at  company  distance  and  eight  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  rear  company  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

Being  in  column  of  companies  or  fours,  column  of 
masses  is  formed  on  the  rearmost  company  by  fU’st 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT 


157 


wheeling  about  by  fours  and  then  executing  the  move- 
ment Rs  explained. 

The  column  of  masses  advances,  halts,  obliques, 
march£>^  by  the  flank,  resumes  the  march  in  column, 
faces  to  the  rear,  marches  to  the  rear,  and  changes  direc- 
tion on  the  march  by  the  same  commands  as  when  at 
full  distance. 


Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Change  Direction  by  the  Flank. 

418.  1.  Change  direction  by  the  righf  {or  left)  flank, 

2.  MARCH. 

The  first  battalion  changes 
direction  by  the  right  flank  (Par. 

344);  each  of  the  other  battalions 
wheels  by  fours  to  the  right,  and 
is  marched  with  the  guide  to  the 
left,  by  two  partial  changes  of 
direction  to  the  left,  to  its 
position  in  the  new  column,  ^ 
wheeled  by  fours  to  the  left,  and  ////' 
halted.  The  partial  changes  of 
direction  are  executed  in  double 
time.  PI.  78,  Par.  418. 


TO  DEPLOY  THE  COLUMN  OF  MASSES. 

Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Deploy  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

419.  1.  Deploy  column,  2.  Fours  right  (or  left),  3, 

MARCH. 

The  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  right  (Par.  346);  the 
second  is  marched  in  close  column  to  its  position  on  the 
line  to  the  right  of  the  first  and  then  deployed  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  first;  the  third,  in  a similar  man- 
ner, is  deployed  on  the  right  Of  the  second. 

The  second  and  third  battalions  may  be  marched  in 
column  of  fours  (Par.  342)  to  their  places  on  the  line. 

To  deploy  faced  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  adds  : Faced' 
to  the  rear,  after  deploy  column. 


158 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


420.  To  form  line  on  the  rear  of  the  column,  facing 
either  to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  first  faces 
the  column  to  the  rear,  and  then  executes  the  move- 
ment as  explained. 

Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Deploy  to  the  Right  and  Left, 

421.  Deploy  column,  2.  Fours  right  and  left,  3.  march. 
The  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  right ; the  second 

and  third  deploy  on  the  line ; the  second  to  the  left  of 
the  first ; the  third  to  the  left  of  the  second. 

If  the  colonel  commands  : 2.  Fours  left  and  right, 
the  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  left ; the  others  de- 
ploy on  the  line,  the  second  on  the  right  of  the  firsts 
the  third  on  the  right  of  the  second. 

Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Deploy  in  Two  Lines. 


422.  1.  In  two  lines,  2.  Deploy  column,  3.  Third  (or 
such)  battalion,  second  line,  4.  Fours  right  (or  left), 
5.  MARCH,  . 

The  first  battalion  deploys  to  the  right ; the  second 
deploys  on  the  line  of  the  first  and  to  its  right ; the 
third  moves  in  column  of  fours  and  forms, line  in  rear 
of  the  center  of  the  first  line. 

If  the  colonel  commands  : 4.  Foun  right  and  left,  the 

A first  battalion  de- 

» If  A *i  1 ploys  to  the  right; 

— u , ithe  second  (PL  79) 

deploys  on  the  line 
of  the  first  and  to 
its  left ; the  third 
deploys  to  the  left. 

If  the  colonel 
commands:  4. 
Fours  left  and 
right,  the  first  bat- 
talion deploys  to 


"u  » 

PI.  79,  Par.  422. 


the  left ; the  second  deploys  on  the  line  of  ohe  first  and 
to  its  right ; the  third  deploys  to  the  right. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


159 


Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Deploy  in  Three  Lines. 

423.  1.  Battalions,  2.  Deploy  column,  3.  Fours  right 
(or  left),  4.  MARCH. 

Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  March  to  the  Right  or  Left  in 
Line  of  Battalions  in  Columns  of  Fours. 

424.  1.  Battalions,  2.  Columns  of  fours,  3.  (Such) 
company,  4.  Fours  right  (or  left),  5.  march,  6.  (Such)  the 
base  battalion. 

Column  of  Battalions. 

425.  Being  in  line,  or  column  of  fours,  the  regiment 
ploys  into  column  of  battalions  by  approximating  the 
principles  for  forming  close  column,  School  of  the  Bat- 
talion ; except  that  the  leading  battalion  halts  upon 
forming  line. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Ploy  into  Column  of  Battalions. 

426.  1.  Column  of  battalions,  2.  On  first  (or  third) 
battalion,  3.  Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  first  battalion  stands  fast.  The  second  executes 
fours  right,  column  right,  marches  the  normal  or  specie 
tied  distance  (Par.  385)  to  the  rear,  changes  direction  to 
the  left,  and  forms  line  to  the  left,  in  rear  of  and  paral- 
lel to  the  first  battalion.  The  third  battalion  executes 
fours  right,  column  half  right,  and  forms  in  rear  of  the 
second,  as  explained  for  the  second. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Ploy  mto  Column  of  Battalion  on  Second 
Battalion. 

427.  1.  Column  of  battalions,  2.  On  second  battalion, 
o.  F ours  left  and  right,  4 march. 

The  second  battalion  stands  fast ; the  first  battalion 
^f^ft  and  forms  line  in  rear  of  the  second  ; 
the  third  battalion  executes /oi^rs  right  and  forms  line 
in  rear  of  the  first ; right  guides  cover. 


160 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Column  of  Battalions 
Faced  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

428.  1.  Column  of  battalions,  2.  First  battalion  3. 
Fours  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  first  battalion  forms  line  and  is  halted  ; the  others 
incline  to  the  left,  and  each  enters  the  column  parallel 
to  and  at  the  prescribed  distance  from  tbe  one  preced- 
ing, forms  line  as  prescribed  for  the  first ; right  guides 
cover. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Column  of  Battalions 
Faced  to  the  Rear. 

429.  1.  Column  of  battalions,  faced  to  the  rear,  2. 
First  battalion,  3.  Column  right  (or  left),  4.  march. 

The  first  battalion  changes  direction  to  the  right  and 
when  its  rear  has  cleared  the  flank  of  the  column  by 
twelve  paces,  forms  line  to  the  right  and  halts. 

The  battalions  in  rear  move  forward  and  each,  when 
it  has  passed  battalion  distance  and  twenty-four  paces 
beyond  the  preceding  battalion,  changes  direction  to 
the  right,  forms  line,  and  halts,  as  prescribed  for  the 
first ; right  guides  cover. 

Being  in  Column  of  Battalions,  to  Form  Front  into  Line. 

I i 

430.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line,  2.  march. 

The  first  battalion  stands  fast ; the  second  forms  line 
on  the  right  of  the  first  and  the  third  on  the  right  of 
the  second. 

The  colonel  may  direct  the  major  of  the  third  battal- 
ion to  form  it  on  the  left  (or  right)  of  the  first  (PI.  80). 

431.  To  form  line  faced  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  adds 
faced  to  the  rear  to  the  first  command.  The  first  bat- 
talion is  faced  to  the  rear  ; the  rear  battalions  form  on 
die  line  faced  to  the  rear. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  PEGIMENT. 


161 


A ^ i 4 


PL  80,  Par.  430. 
Line  of  Masses. 


432.  Each  major  takes  post  twelve  paces  in  front  o# 
the  center  of  his  first  company. 

In  all  formations  into  line  of  masses,  whether  by  a 
Bimultaneous  or  successive  movement,  the  adjutant  of 
sergeant  major  of  each  battalion  posts  the  guides  of 
its  leading  company. 


Being  in  line  of  Masses  to  Extend  or  Close  Intervals. 

433.  To  extend  intervals : 1.  On  (such)  battalionf 
2.  Take  deploying  intervals,  3.  march. 

The  designated  battalion  stands  fast ; the  other  bat- 
talions march  by  the  flank,  inclining  slightly  to  the  rear. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


1^2 


and  when  they  have  gained  the  inteiwal,  execute  fours 
right  (or  left)  and  are  halted  on  the  line. 

Intervals  are  closed  on  the  same  principles : 1.  On 
(such)  battalion,  2.  Close  intervals.  3.  march. 


Being  in  Line,  to  Form  Line  of  Masses  on  the  First  or  Third 
Battalion  ^ 


434.  Line  of  masses,  On  first  company,  first  bat- 
talion, Z.  MARCH. 

The  first  battalion  ploys  on  its  first  company  (Par. 
338) ; the  second  and  third  battalions  move  by  the 
right  and  each  ploys  (Par.  341)  with  twenty-four  paces 
interval  from  the  left  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

Line  of  masses  on  the  fourth  company,  third  battalion, 
is  formed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

435.  Line  of  masses  may  be  formed  on  an  interior 
battalion,  the  colonel  designating  the  first  or  fourth 
company. 


PI.  81,  Par.  435. 

The  designated  battalion  ploys  on  the  designated 
company ; the  other  battalions  ploy  on  the  company 
nearest  the  point  of  rest,  first  closing,  if  not  at  the 
proper  interval. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  of  Masses,  Faced  to 
the  Right  or  Left. 

436.  1.  To  the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  masses, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  first  battalion  ploys  faced  to  the  right  (Par.  341) ; 
the  others  execute  the  same  movement,  each  major 
commanding  march  when  the  head  of  his  column  is 
twenty-eight  paces  from  the  fiank  of  the  preceding 
comp.'jiny. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENf. 


163 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  on  Right  or 
Left  into  Line  of  Masses. 

437.  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  mass- 
es, 2.  MARCH. 

The  major  of  the  first  battalion  com- 
mands : 1.  Column  right.  The  first  battal- 
ion having  advanced  forty  paces  in  the  new 
direction,  the  major  commands  : 1.  Close 
column,  2.  First  company,  3.  Column  left, 
4.  MARCH  (Par.  339) ; each  of  the  others  pass- 
es beyond  the  preceding  battalion  and  exe- 
cutes the  same  movements  as  explained  for 
the  first,  so  as  to  have  the  interval  of  twen- 
ty-four paces  from  the  battalion  on  its  right. 


Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line 
of  Masses. 


438.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of 
masses,  2.  march. 

At  the  first  command,  the  major  of  the 
first  battalion  commands : 1.  Close  column, 
fl.  First  company,  3.  Column  right,  and  the 
other  majors  command : 1.  Column  half 
right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  battalion 
ploys  faced  to  the  front  (Par.  339) ; each  of 
the  others  is  marched  to  the  right  front  and 
executes  the  same  movement,  so  as  to  have 
the  interval  of  twenty-four  paces  between 
it  and  the  one  next  on  its  left.  _ 

Right  and  left  (or  left  and  right)  front  fj 
into  line  of  masses  is  executed  on  the  same  U 
principles.  [1 

The  first  battalion  ploys  into  close  column,  || 
as  in  executing  right  front  into  line  of  mass-  [1 
es;  the  second  and  third  battalions  ploy  as  U 
in  executing  left  front  into  line  of  masses:  pi.  82,  Par.  w. 


164 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


the  second  on  the  left  of  the  first  and  the  third  on 
the  left  of  the  second. 

Being  m Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  of  Masses, 
Faced  to  the  Rear. 

439.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into  line  of  masses,  faced  to 
the  rear,  2.  march. 

The  first  battalion  ploys  faced 
to  the  rear  (Par.  340) ; each  of  the 
other  battalions  is  marched  to  the 
right  front  and  executes  the  same 
movement  so  as  to  have  the  inter- 
J / val  of  twenty-four  paces  to  the 
! ^ left  of  the  battalion  on  its  right. 

/ To  Align  the  Line  of  Masses, 

j 440.  If  necessary  to  rectify  the  align- 
/ ment,  the  colonel  assures  the  guides  of 
/ the  first  company  of  one  of  the  baittalions 
/ in  the  desired  direction  an^  then  com- 
/ mands  : Guides  on  the  line. 

/ The  adjutant  or  sergeant  major  of  each 

f of  the  other  battalions  posts  the  guides 

of  its  leading  company  on  the  line  of 
those  established  by  the  colonel ; the 
majors  dress  their  battalions  toward  the 
point  of  rest. 

The  first  company  of  each  battalion  is  dressed 
up  to  the  guides ; each  of  the  other  companies 
is  dressed  at  close  distance. 

If  the  new  line  be  established  at  considerable 
distance  from  the  battalions,  each  major  will 
move  his  battalion  to  its  new  position  before 
dressing  it. 

Movements  of  Masses. 

PI.  83,  Par.  439.  441.  The  line  of  masses  advances,  halts. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


165 


faces  to  the  rear,  and  marches  to  the  rear  by  the  same 
commands  and  means  as  the  regiment  in  line. 

Being  in  Line  of  Masses,  to  Change  Front, 

442.  Being  in  march  : 1.  Change  front  on  first  (or 
third)  battalion,  2.  march. 

The  major  of  the  first  battalion  adds : Column 
right. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  battalion  changes 
direction  to  the  right,  and  when  the  first  company  has 
advanced  forty  paces  in  the  new  direction  the  major 
halts  the  battalion  ; the  other  battalions  change  direc- 
tion half  right  and  are  so  marched  that  by  another 
change  of  direction  half  right  each  may  arrive  on  the 
line  abreast  of  and  twenty-four  paces  to  the  left  of  the 
preceding  battalion. 

Being  in  Line  of  Masses,  to  March  by  the  Flank. 

443.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Guide  {right 
or  left). 

The  battalions*  preserve  the  distance  of  twenty -four 
paces. 

The  Line  of  Masses,  Marching  by  the  Flank  in  Quick  Time,  to 
Change  Direction. 

444. 1.  Change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left),  2.  march. 

The  leading  battalion  changes  direction  to  the  right 
in  double  time  (Par.  323);  the  others,  at  the  commands 
of  their  majors,  change  direction  similarly,  on  the  same 
ground  as  the  first. 

The  Line  of  Masses,  Marching  by  the  Flank,  to  Form  Line  of 
Masses  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

445.  1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2.  march,  3.  Battalions 
4.  HALT  ; or,  3.  (Such)  the  base  battalion. 


166 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


Being  in  Line  of  Masses,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours. 

446.  Being*  at  a halt:  1.  Column  of  fours,  2.  First 
company,  first  (or  third)  battalion,  3.  Right  (or  left) 
forward,  A:  Fours  right  {or  left),  b.  march. 

The  first  battalion  executes  the  movement ; each  of 
the  others  successively  executes  the  movement  and  in- 
clines to  the  right  or  left,  so  as  to  follow  the  battalion 
preceding  at  the  prescribed  distance. 

Or,  the  colonel  may  command  : 1.  Column  of  fours, 

2.  First  (or  fourth)  company,  first  battalion,  3.  Fours 
right;  or,  2.  First  {or  fourth)  company,  third  battalion, 

3.  Fours  left,  A.  march. 

The  battalion  designated  executes  the  movement;  each 
of  the  others  successively  executes  the  movement  in 
time  to  follow  the  battalion  preceding  at  the  prescribed 
distance. 

Being  in  Line  of  Masses,  to  Form  Column  of  Masses  to  the 
Right  or  Left. 

447.  1.  Battalions,  2.  Change  direction  by  the  left 

(or  right)  flank,  3.  march.  • 

Each  battalion  changes  direction  by  the  left  flank  (Par. 
344). 

Being  in  Line  of  Masses,  to  Form  Column  of  Masses,  F aeed  to 
the  Front. 

448.  1.  Column  of  masses  on  first  {or  sach)  battalion, 

2.  march. 

The  first  battalion  stands  fast  or  is  halted  ; the  second 
is  placed  in  close  column,  in  rear  of  the  first,  and  the 
third  in  rear  of  the  second. 

If  the  third  battalion  be  designated,  the  second  takes 
position  in  I’ear  of  the  third,  the  first  in  rear  of  the 
second. 

If  the  seco.id  battalion  be  designated,  the  first  takes 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


167 


^ ^ position  in  rear  of  the  second  (PL  84), 

= ■■■'■'  ■ g~~  • I and  the  third  in  rear  of  the  first. 

■ F--  { Each  major  may  maneuver  his 

j I t battalion  into  position  in  mass  or  in 

I r I j of  fours.  The  adjutant  or 

Y ZIIZ.^lZZZ2  sergeant  major  of  each  battalion 
1 moves  in  advance,  to  indicate  the 

r 1->-~  — — point  where  his  battalion  moves  by 

^ the  flank  or  changes  direction  to 

PL  84,  Par.  448.  enter  the  column. 

449.  Being  in  line  of  masses,  to  form  the  column  of 
masses  facing  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  first  causes  the 
battalions  to  wheel  about  by  fours,  and  then  gives  the 
same  commands  as  before. 


Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Form  Line  of  Masses  to  the 
Right  or  Left. 

450.  The  colonel  causes  the  battalions  to  change  db 
rection  by  the  left  or  right  flank  (Par.  344);  or  com- 
mands: 1.  Forward,  2.  Battalions,  S.  Column  right  (or 
left),  4.  MARCH,  5.  Battalions,  6.  halt;  or,  5.  (Such)  the 
base  battalion. 

Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Form  on  Right  or  Left  into 
Line  of  Masses. 

451.  Being  in  mardh:  1.  On  right  (or  left)  into  line  of 
masses,  2.  march. 

The  major  of  the  first  battalion  commands:  1. 
Column  right,  2.  Double  time. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  battalion  changes 
direction  to  the  right;  it  is  halted  when  the  first  com- 
pany has  advanced  forty  paces  in  the  new  direction; 
each  of  the  others  marches  twenty-four  paces  beyond 
the.  preceding  one,  changes  direction  to  the  right,  in 
double  time,  is  halted,  and  established  abreast  of  the 
first  battalion. 


168 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


Being  in  Column  of  Masses,  to  Form  Front  into  Line  of  M asset. 

452.  1.  Right  (or  left)  front  into 
line  of  masses,  2.  march. 

The  first  battalion  stands  fast  or  is 
halted ; the  second  and  third  bat- 
talions are  moved  in  masses  to  their 
places,  the  second  on  the  right  of  the 
first,  the  third  on  the  right  of  the 
second. 

The  colonel  may  direct  the  major 
of  the  third  battalion  to  form  on  the 
PI  85,  Par.  452.  left  (or  right)  of  the  first. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Change  Front. 

453.  To  change  front  on  a flank  battalion,  the  colonel 
forms  column  of  fours  to  the  right  or  left  and  then  ex- 
ecutes front  into  line  or  front  into  line,  faced  to  the 
rear  (Pars.  390  and  391). 

To  change  front  on  an  interior  battalion,  the  colonel 
forms  column  of  fours  to  the  right  or  left,  and  then  ex- 
ecutes front  into  line  on  the  head  of  the  designated  bat- 
talion (Par.  393). 

Movements  by  Platoons. 

454.  The  interval  between  battalions  in  line  of  pla- 
*00 n columns  is  platoon  front  and  twenty-four  paces 

455.  All  movements  (in  column  of  platoons  and  line 
of  platoon  columns.  School  of  the  Battalion,  may  be 
executed  by  the  regiment  by  similar  commands  and 
means;  the  colonel  designates  (Such)  battalion  when 
necessary. 

456.  In  forming  line,  or  line  of  platoon  columns,  each 
major  first  moves  his  battalion  into  position  on  the 
principles  for  forming  line  from  column  of  fours,  and  at 
the  proper  time  gives  the  commands  for  forming  line, 
or  line  of  platoon  columns. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


169 


Order  in  Echelon. 

457.  Being  in  line  at  a halt,  to  advance  in  echelon  : 
1.  Form  echelon  at  (so  many)  yards,  2.  (Such)  the  base 
battalion,  3.  march. 


PI.  86.  Par.  457. 

At  the  second  command  the  major  of  the  designated 
battalion  commands  : 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  center;  the 
other  majors  caution;  Stand  fast. 


PI.  87,  Par.  457. 


no 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 


At  the  command  march,  the  designated  battalion  ad- 
vances ; the  others  take  up  the  march,  each  when  it 
has  the  specified  distance  from  the  one  next  pre- 
ceding. 

A file  closer  from  each  rear  battalion  marches  at 
the  specified  distance  directly  in  rear  of  the  guide  on 
the  nearest  flank  of  the  preceding  battalion.  Each 
rear  battalion  marches  abreast  of  and  preserves  the  in- 
terval of  twenty-four  paces  from  the  file  closer  thus 
posted. 

458.  The  regiment  in  echelon  advances,  halts,  ob- 
liques, marches  to  the  rear  or  by  the  flank  by  the  same 
commands  as  when  in  line. 

Being  in  Echelon  of  Battalions,  to  Form  Line. 

459.  1.  Form  line  on  {sach)  battalion,  2,  march. 

The  designated  battalion  halts  or  stands  fast ; the 

others  form  on  the  line  of  the  one  designated  by  mov- 
ing to  the  front  or  rear. 

A general  alignment  is  given  if  necessary. 


THE  BRIGADE. 


171 


THE  BRIGADE. 

460.  The  brigade  consists  of  three  regiments,  but  the 
rules  prescribed  are  applicable  to  a less  or  greater  num- 
ber ; it  is  commanded  by  a brigadier-general. 

461.  Regiments  in  line  are  designated  right,  center, 
and  left;  or,  if  one  be  in  rear,  right,  left,  and  rear; 
in  column  they  are  designated  leading,  center,  and 
rear. 

Unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  general,  the  regi- 
ments are  posted  according  to  the  rank  of  the  colonels: 
in  line,  from  right  to  left,  the  senior  on  the  right ; in 
two  or  three  lines  by  regiments,  the  senior  in  the  first 
line,  the  junior  in  the  rear  line;  in  column,  from  head  to 
rear,  the  senior  at  the  head. 

462.  The  interval  between  regiments  is  forty-eight 
paces. 

463.  In  line,  the  general  takes  post  one  hundred  paces 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  brigade  ; in  column,  at  the 
head  of  the  brigade. 

The  general  is  attended  by  the  adjutant-general,  rid- 
ing on  his  left,  his  aids  six  paces  in  rear.  When  the  re- 
maining officers  of  his  staff  are  present,  they  ride  on  the 
left  or  in  rear  of  the  aids,  according  as  they  form  one  or 
more  ranks,  senior  on  the  right ; the  orderlies  thre( 
paces  in  rear  of  the  staff. 

464.  The  drill  exercises  should  be  limited  to  move- 
ments used  in  campaign. 

The  regulations  for  the  evolutions  of  the  regiment 
are  applicable  to  the  brigade. 

In  moving  into  position,  the  regiments  and  battalions 
are  habitually  marched  in  column  of  fours  and  by  the 
shortest  practicable  route. 

465.  When  the  orders  of  the  general  to  a regimental 
commander  are  communicated  through  staff  officers, 


172 


THE  BRIGADE. 


the  name  of  the  regimental  commander  or  the  perma- 
nent designation  of  the  regiment  will  be  mentioned. 

These  orders  should  be  explicit  and  should  cover  the 
following  points  : 

First.  The  maneuver  to  be  executed  by  the  brigade. 

Second.  The  particular  formation  the  regiment  is  to 
take  ; as,  in  tivo  lines,  line  of  masses,  etc.  When  the  for- 
jnation  is  not  specified,  the  regiment  forms  in  line. 

Third.  When  forming  the  brigade  in  two  or  more  lines 
by  regiment,  the  number  of  lines,  the  distance  between 
the  lines,  the  line  in  which  the  regiment  is  to  form,  and 
its  point  of  rest. 

When  necessary,  staff  officers  are  sent  to  indicate  the 
point  of  rest  for  each  line. 

Fourth.  Whether  the  right  or  left  of  the  regiment  is 
to  connect  with  the  left  or  right  of  another  regiment 
that  precedes  it  on  the  line. 

Fifth.  Whether  the  right  or  left  flank  of  the  regiment 
will  be  exposed. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Front  into  Line. 

466.  The  general  sends  orders  as  follows  : 

To  each  colonel : The  brigade  to  form  front  into  line  ; 
to  the  leading  regiment : Form  right  front  into  line  ; 
to  the  center  regiment  : Form  left  front  into  line,  your 
right  connecting  with  left  of  leading  regiment ; to  the 
rear  regiment : Form  right  front  into  line,  your  left 
connecting  with  right  of  leading  regiment,  right  flank 
exposed. 

The  colonel  of  the  leading  regiment  forms  it  right 
front  into  line  •,  the  colonel  of  the  center  regiment 
marches  it  forward  to  the  line,  to  the  left  of  the  leading 
regiment,  so  as  to  have  an  interval  of  forty-eight  paces, 
and  forms  it  left  front  into  line  ; the  colonel  of  the  rear 
regiment  marches  it  forward  to  the  line,  to  the  right  of 
the  leading  regiment,  and  forms  it  right  front  into  line. 


THE  BRIGADE. 


173 


On  the  same  principles  the  regiments  may  be  formed 
front  into  line,  in  any  order. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

467.  The  general  sends  orders  : Form  line  to  the  right 
(or  left). 

The  colonels  command : 1.  Fours  right  (or  left),  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Battalions,  4.  halt. 

468.  To  form  in  two  or  three  lines,  the  general  sends 
orders  : Form  in  two  (or  three)  lines  to  the  right  (or  left), 
or  adds  : At  (so  many)  paces  distance. 

The  colonel  of  the  leading  regiment  forms  his  regi- 
ment in  two  lines  to  the  right  and  halts  it ; the  colonels 
of  the  rear  regiments  give  the  commands  for  forming 
in  two  lines,  each  when  his  first  battalion  has  closed  to 
forty-eight  paces  from  the  right  flank  of  the  first  line 
of  the  regiment  preceding. 

469.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  on  right  or  left  into 
line,  is  executed  on  similar  principles,  each  regiment 
passing  beyond  the  one  preceding. 

When  regiments  are  formed  in  two  or  three  lines,  the 
first  line  advances  far  enough  to  allow  the  second  or 
third  line  to  clear  the  line  of  march. 

470.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  line  is  formed  to 
the  right  or  left,  to  the  front  and  on  right  or  left,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles. 

According  to  the  same  principles,  the  brigade  maybe 
formed  in  one,  two,  or  three  lines  of  platoon  columns, 
lines  of  masses  or  lines  of  columns  of  fours ; or  one 
or  two  regiments  may  be  given  a designated  forma- 
tion. 

To  March  in  Line. 

471.  The  general  sends  orders  : Advance  in  line  (or 
such  formation),  (such)  battalion,  (such)  regiment,  the 
base  battalion. 

The  orders  having  been  communicated,  and  the  proper 


174 


THE  BRIGADE. 


dispositions  having  been  made  in  each  regiment,  the 
general  causes  forward  to  be  sounded. 

When  in  two  or  three  lines,  the  second  and  third 
lines  preserve  their  positions  relative  to  the  first  line. 

To  Halt 

472.  The  general  causes  the  halt  to  be  sounded,  which 
is  repeated  and  each  regiment  is  halted. 

To  March  to  the  Rear. 

473.  The  general  sends  orders : March  to  the  reary 
(such)  hattcilion,  (such)  regiment,  the  base  battalion. 

Each  colonel  causes  his  regiment  to  face  to  the  rear 
and  gives  the  preparatory  commands  to  march  in  line. 

The  general  causes  the  forward  to  be  sounded. 

The  brigade  being  in  two  lines,  the  base  battalion 
will  be  in  the  late  second  line,  now  the  first.  The  desig- 
nation of  the  battalion  and  regiment  refers  to  its  posi- 
ti  on  ill  line  when  marching  to  the  rear. 

474.  The  line  of  platoon  columns,  line  of  masses, 
oi*  line  of  columns  of  fours  marches  according  to  the 
(game  principles  as  when  in  line. 

To  March  by  the  Flank. 

475.  Being  in  line  or  line  of  columns,  the  general 
sends  orders  : March  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank. 

Each  colonel  commands : 1.  Fours  right,  2.  march, 
3.  Battalions,  4.  halt.  The  general  then  causes  the 
forward  to  be  sounded. 

When  in  more  than  one  line,  the  lines  retain  their 
former  designations;  the  first  battalion  of  the  first  line 
is  the  base  battalion  ; the  other  line  or  lines  maintain 
the  same  relative  positions  as  at  the  beginning  of  the 
movement. 

476.  To  re-form  the  line  when  in  line  of  platoon 


THE  DIVISION. 


175 


columns,  line  of  masses,  or  line  of  columns  of  fours, 
the  general  sends  orders  : Re-form  line. 

Each  colonel  forms  line. 

477.  When  at  close  interval,  the  general  sends  orders: 
Re  form  line  (such)  hattalion^  (such)  regiment,  the  base 
battalion. 

The  colonel  of  the  designated  regiment  causes  it  to 
take  deploying  intervals  and  form  line  ; the  other  col- 
onels cause  their  regiments  to  move  by  the  flank  until 
opposite  their  positions,  take  deploying  intervals,  and 
form  line. 


Change  of  Front. 

478.  Changes  of  front  are  usually  executed  by  form-i 
ing  in  column  of  fours  and  then  forming  front  into  line, 
or  front  into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

If  in  two  or  three  lines,  the  simplest  means  are  used 
for  moving  the  second  and  third  lines  to  their  new  posi- 
tions. 


THE  DIVISION.: 

479.  The  division  consists  of  three  brigades  of  in- 
fantry and  two  or  more  batteries  of  artillery,  but  the 
rules  prescribed  are  applicable  to  a less  or  greater  n»im« 
Der  ; it  is  commanded  by  a major-general. 

The  principles  prescribed  for  the  evolutions  of  the 
brigade  apply  to  the  division. 

48C.  In  line,  the  division  commander  takes  post  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
division;  in  coluum,  at  the  head  of  the  division. 

481.  The  brigades  are  designated,  in \mQ, right,  center, 
and  left ; or,  if  one  be  in  rear,  right,  left,  and  rear  ; in 
column,  leading,  center  and  rear. 


176 


THE  CORPS. 


Unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  division  commander, 
the  brigades  are  posted  according  to  the  rank  of  brigade 
commanders  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  posting  regi- 
ments in  brigade. 

482.  The  division  is  formed  in  one,  two,  or  three  lines, 
by  brigade,  and  each  brigade  is  given  one  of  the  forma- 
tions prescribed  in  brigade  drill. 

The  interval  between  brigades  is  seventy  two  paces, 
which  is  increased  when  interval  is  left  for  artillery. 

488.  The  orders  of  the  division  commander  are  com  - 
municated through  staff  officers ; the  orders  should 
cover  the  following  points : The  particular  formation 
for  each  brigade  and  its  point  of  rest ; the  direction  in 
which  the  line  is  to  extend  ; the  distance  between  lines 
and  the  point  of  rest  for  each  line  ; the  name  of  the 
brigade  commander  or  the  permanent  number  of  the 
brigade  will  be  mentioned. 


THE  CORPS. 

484.  The  corps  consists  of  three  divisions,  one  or  more 
regiments  of  cavalry,  and  the  corps  artillery,  which 
is  in  addition  to  the  divisional  artillery. 

The  principles  prescribed  for  the  evolutions  of  the 
division  apply  to  the  corps  or  a larger  command. 


SALUTE  WITH  THE  HAND,  ETC. 


177 


SALUTE  WITH  THE  HAND. 

485.  The  salute  for  officers  is  the  same  as  in  Par.  29  ; 
the  left  hand  is  used  only  when  the  right  is  engaged. 
Officers  and  men,  when  saluting,  look  toward  the  person 
saluted.  Enlisted  men  salute  with  the  hand  farthest 
from  the  officer,  giving  the  salute  six  paces  before 
passing  the  officer  and  holding  the  hand  at  the  visor 
until  the  salute  is  acknowledged  or  the  officer  passed. 

The  rifle  salute  (Par.  95)  is  made  six  paces  before  pass- 
ing the  officer,  holding  the  hand  at  the  shoulder  until 
the  salute  is  acknowledged  or  the  officer  passed. 

Courtesy  among  mihtary  men  is  indispensable  to  dis- 
cipline ; respect  to  superiors  will  not . be  confined  to 
obedience  on  duty,  but  will  be  extended  on  all  occasions. 

ABOUT  FACE  FOR  OFFICERS. 

486.  At  the  command  about,  carry  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  rear  and  three 
inches  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel,  without  changing  the 
position  of  the  left  foot. 

At  the  command /ace,  turn  upon  the  left  heel  and 
right  toe,  face  to  the  rear,  and  replace  the  right  heel  by 
the  side  of  the  left. 

Enlisted  men  out  of  ranks  may  use  the  about  face 
prescribed  for  officers. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD. 

487.  1.  Draw,  2.  sword. 

At  the  command  draw,  unhook  the  sword  with  the 
thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  thumb  on 
the  end  of  the  hook,  fingers  lifting  the  upper  ring ; 
grasp  the  scabbard  with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper 


178 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD. 


band,  bring  the  hilt  a little  forward,  seize  the  gripe 
with  the  right  hand,  and  draw  the  blade  six  inches  out 
of  the  scabbard,  pressing  the  scabbard  against  the  thigh 
with  the  left  hand. 

At  the  command  sword,  draw  the  sword  quickly, 
raising  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  at  an  angle  of  about 
forty-five  degrees,  the  sword,  edge  down,  in  a straight 
line  with  the  arm,  and  make  a slight  pause ; hook  up 
the  scabbard  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of 
the  left  hand,  thumb  through  the  upper  ring,  fingers  sup- 
porting it,  and  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side  ; at  the 
same  time  drop  the  right  hand  to  the  side  and  bring  the 
back  of  the  blade  in  a vertical  position 
against  the  shoulder,  back  of  the  gripe  to 
the  rear,  the  arm  extended  without  con- 
straint, the  thumb  and  forefinger  embrac- 
ing the  gripe,  the  left  side  of  the  gripe  with 
the  thumb  against  the  thigh,  the  other 
fingers  extended  and  joined  in  rear  of  the 
gripe.  This  is  the  position  of  carry  sword. 

Officers  mounted  unhook  the  sword  be- 
fore mounting,  and,  in  the  first  motion  of 
draw  sword,  reach  with  the  right  hand  over 
the  bridle  hand,  and  without  the  aid  of  the 
bridle  hand  draw  the  sword  as  before  ; the 
right  hand  at  the  carry  rests  on  the  right 
thigh. 

488.  When  publishing  orders,  the  sword 
is  held  suspended  from  the  right  wrist  by 
the  sword  knot ; when  the  sword  knot  is 
used,  it  is  placed  on  the  wrist  before  draw- 
ing sword,  and  taken  off  after  returning  ' 
sword. 

489.  1.  Present,  2.  sword  (or  arms). 

At  the  command  present,  carry  the  sword 

to  the  fronl:,  base  of  the  hilt  as  high  as  the 
chin  and  six  inches  in  front  of  the  neck. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD. 


179 


edge  to  the  left,  point  six  inches 
further  to  the  front  than  the 
hilt,  thumb  extended  on  the  left 
of  the  gripe,  all  the  fingers 
grasping  the  gripe. 

At  the  command  sword,  lower 
the  sword,  point  to  the  front 
and  near  the  ground,  edge  to  the 
left,  hand  by  the  side,  thumb  on 
left  of  gripe,  arm  extended. 

1.  Carry,  2.  sword  (or  arms). 
Resume  the  carry. 

In  rendering  honors 
with  troops,  officers  exe- 
cute the  first  motion  of 
the  salute  at  the  command 
presen  i , t he  second  motion 
at  the  command  arms;  en- 


Pl.  89,  Par.  489. 

listed  men  with  the 
the  first  motion  at  the 
sword  is  returned  to 
command : 1.  Carry, 

490.  1.  Order,  2, 

Drop  the  point  of 

front,  point  on  or 
down,  thumb  on  back 

At  the  command  : 
(or  ARMS),  resume 

491.  When  arms 
der,  the  officers  and 
sword  drawn  execute 

492.  The  sword  is 
while  marching  at 
position ; swords  are 
when  arms  are 
or  right  shoulder. 


PI.  91,  Par.  490. 


PI.  90,  Par.  489. 
sword  drawn  execute 
command  arms.  The 
the  carry  at  the 
2.  ARMS. 

SWORD  (or  ARMS), 
the  sword  to  the 
near  the  ground,  edge 
of  the  gripe. 

1.  Carry,  2.  sword 
the  carry. 

are  brought  to  the  or- 
enlisted  men  with  the 
order  sword. 
held  at  the  carry 
attention  or  changing 
brought  to  the  carry 
brought  to  the  carry 


180 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD. 


493.  1.  Parade,  2.  rest. 

Being  at  the  order,  clasp  the  hands  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  body,  left  hand  uppermost,  point  of 
sword  on  or  near  the  ground  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body,  edge  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  attention  resume  the  order. 

494.  In  marching  in  double  time  the  sword  is  carried 
diagonally  across  the  breast,  edge  to  the  front ; the  left 
hand  steadies  the  scabbard. 

495.  Officers  on  all  duties  under  arms  draw  and  re- 
turn sword  without  waiting  for  any  command.  All 
commands  to  soldiers  under  arms  are  given  with  the 
sword  drawn. 

496.  1.  Return,  2.  sword. 

At  the  command  return,  carry  the  right  hand  oppo- 
site to  and  six  inches  from  the  left  shoulder,  sword 
vertical,  edge  to  the  left ; at  the  same  time  unhook  and 
lower  the  scabbard  with  the  left  hand,  and  grasp  it  at 
the  upper  band. 

At  the  command  sword,  lower  the  blade  and  pass  it 
across  and  along  the  left  arm,  point  to  the  rear  ; turn 
the  head  slightly  to  the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  on  the 
opening  of  the  scabbard,  and  return  the  blade ; free 
the  wrist  from  the  sword  knot  (if  inserted  in  it),  turn 
the  head  to  the  front,  and  drop  the  right  hand  by  the 
side  ; at  the  same  time  hook  up  the  sword  with  the  left 
hand,  and  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Officers  mounted  return  sword  without  using  the  left 
hand ; the  sword  is  hooked  up  on  dismounting. 

497.  At  inspection,  enlisted  men  with  the  sword 
drawn  execute  the  first  motion  of  present  sword.,  and 
turn  the  wrist  to  show  both  sides  of  the  blade,  resuming 
the  carry  when  the  inspector  has  passed. 


THE  COLOR. 


181 


THE  COLOR. 

Manual  of  the  Color. 

498.  At  a carry,  the  heel  of  the  pike  rests  in  the 
socket  of  the  sling  at  the  right  hip ; the  right  hand 
grasps  the  pike  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder. 

At  the  order,  the  heel  of  the  pike  rests  on  the  ground 
near  the  right  toe,  the  right  hand  holding  the  pike  in 
a vertical  position. 

At  parade  rest,  the  heel  of  the  pike  is  on  the  ground, 
as  at  the  order ; the  pike  is  held  with  both  hands  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  left  hand  uppermost. 

The  order  is  resumed  at  the  command  attention. 

The  left  hand  assists  the  right  when  necessary. 

The  carry  is  the  habitual  position  when  the  troops 
are  at  a carry,  right  shoulder,  or  trail. 

The  carry,  order,  and  parade  rest  are  executed  with 
the  troops. 

The  color  salute.  Being  at  the  Ccirry,  slip  the  right 
hand  up  the  pike  to  the  height  of  the  eye,  then  lower 
the  pike  by  straightening  the  arm  to  the  front. 

The- color  salutes  in  the  ceremony  jEJscor^  of  the  Color, 
and  when  saluting  an  officer  entitled  to  the  honor,  as 
prescribed  in  Pars.  422  to  427,  Army  Regulations,  1889, 
but  in  no  other  case. 

If  marching,  the  salute  is  executed  when  at  six  paces 
from  the  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  ; the  carry  is  re- 
sumed when  six  paces  beyond  him. 

At  a halt,  the  salute  is  executed  at  the  command  pre- 
sent arms,  the  carry  is  resumed  at  the  command  carry 
arms. 

Color  Guard. 

499.  In  each  regiment  there  is  a color  guard,  com- 


182 


THE  COLOR. 


posed  of  one  sergeant,  who  is  the  color  bearer,  and  two 
experienced  soldiers  selected  by  the  colonel. 

The  color  is  with  the  battalion  designated  by  the 
colonel,  usually  the  second,  or  the  first  if  there  be  but 
two  battalions. 

When  the  regimental  color  is  paraded  it  is  carried  by 
a sergeant  selected  by  the  colonel ; he  takes  his  place 
on  the  left  of  the  color  bearer  and  conforms  to  his 
movements,  remaining  on  his  left,  except  when  in 
column  of  fours  with  tlie  file  closers  on  the  left  flank, 
in  which  case  the  regimental  color  is  on  the  right. 

The  color,  kept  at  the  office  or  quarters  of  the  colonel, 
is  escorted  by  the  color  guard,  marching  in  one  rank, 
the  color  bearer  in  the  center,  to  the  color  company  on 
its  parade  ground  ; and  in  like  manner  back  to  its  place 
of  deposit. 

The  color  guard,  at  the  command  of  the  color  bearer, 
presents  arms  on  receiving  and  on  parting  with  the 
color ; in  the  latter  case,  the  color  guard  returns  to  the 
carry  at  the  command  of  the  senior  member  of  the 
guard. 


THE  BAND. 


183 


THE  BAND. 

500.  The  band  is  formed  in  two  or  more  ranks,  with 
sufficient  intervals  between  the  men  and  distances  be- 
tween the  ranks  to  permit  a free  use  of  the  instruments. 

The  field  music,  when  united,  forms  with  and  in  rear 
of  the  band  ; when  the  band  is  not  present,  the  posts, 
movements,  and  duties  of  the  field  music  are  the  same 
as  prescribed  for  the  band ; when  a musician  is  in 
charge,  his  post  is  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank. 
When  the  battalion  or  regiment  wheels  about  by  fours, 
the  band  executes  the  counter-march  ; when  the  bat- 
talion or  regiment  executes  right,  left  or  about  face, 
the  band  faces  in  the  same  manner. 

In  marching,  the  different  ranks  dress  to  the  right. 

In  executing  open  ranks,  each  rank  of  the  band  takes 
the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  rank  next  in  front; 
the  drum  major  verifies  the  alignment. 

The  field  music  sounds  the  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles, 
and  to  the  tolcr  at  the  signal  of  the  drum  major. 

instructions  for  the  Drum  Major, 

501.  The  drum  major  is  two  paces  in  front  of  the  cen- 
ter of  the  front  rank,  and  gives  the  signals  or  commands 
for  the  movements  of  the  band  as  for  a squad,  substi- 
tuting in  the  commands  band  for  squad. 

The  staff  is  held  in  the  right  hand,  hand  below  the 
chin,  back  to  the  front,  head  of  the  staff  near  the  hand, 
ferrule  pointing  upward  and  to  the  right.  After  eacji 
signal  the  staff  is  restored  to  this  position. 

Signals  of  the  Drum  Major. 

To  play — Face  toward  the  band  and  extend  the  right 
arm  to  its  full  length  in  the  direction  of  the  staff. 


184 


THE  BAND. 


To  cease  playing — Extend  the  right  arm  to  its  full 
length  in  the  direction  of  the  staff. 

To  march — Turn  the  wrist  and  bring  the  staff  to  the 
front,  the  ferrule  pointing  upward  and  to  the  front ; ex- 
tend the  arm  to  its  full  length  in  the  direction  of  the 
staff. 

To  halt — Reverse  the  staff  and  hold  it  horizontally 
above  the  head  with  both  hands,  the  arms  extended ; 
lower  the  staff  with  both  hands  to  a horizontal  position 
at  the  height  of  the  hips. 

To  counter -march — Face  toward  the  band  and  give 
the  signal  to  march.  The  counter-march  is  executed 
by  each  front  rank  man  to  the  right  of  the  drum  major 
turning  right  about,  each  to  the  left  turning  left  about, 
each  followed  by  the  men  covering  him.  The  drum 
major  passes  through  the  center.  ’ 

To  oblique — Bring  the  staff  to  a horizontal  position, 
the  head  of  the  staff  opposite  the  neck,  the  ferrule 
pointing  in  the  direction  the  oblique  is  to  be  made  ; ex- 
tend the  arm  to  its  full  length  in  the  direction  of  the 
staff.  ^ 

To  march  by  the  right  flank — Extend  the  arm  to  the 
right,  the  staff  vertical,  ferrule  upward,  back  of  the 
hand  to  the  rear. 

To  march  by  the  left  flank — Extend  the  arm  to  the 
left,  the  staff  vertical,  ferrule  upward,  back  of  the  hand 
to  the  front. 

To  diminish  front — Let  the  ferrule  fall  into  the  left 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  eyes,  right  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  hip. 

To  increase  front — Let  the  ferrule  fall  into  the  left 
4and  at  the  height  of  the  hip,  right  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  neck. 

The  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles — Bring  the  staff  to  a 
vertical  position,  hand  opposite  the  neck,  back  of  the 
hand  to  the  front,  ferrule  pointing  upward. 

The  assembly — Bring  the  staff  to  a horizontal  position, 


the  band. 


185 


hand  opposite  the  neck,  back  of  the  hand  down,  ferrule 
pointing  to  the  left. 

To  the  color — Bring  the  staff  to  a horizontal  position 
at  the  height  of  the  neck,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  rear, 
ferrule  pointing  to  the  left. 

In  marching,  the  drum  major  beats  the  time  with  his 
staff  and  supports  the  left  hand  at  the  hip,  fingers  in 
front,  thumb  to  the  rear. 

The  drum  major,  before  making  his  report  at  parade, 
salutes  by  bringing  his  staff  to  a vertical  position,  head 
of  the  staff  up  and  opposite  the  left  shoulder. 

The  drum  major,  marching  in  review,  passes  the  staff 
between  the  right  arm  and  the  body,  head  of  the  staff 
to  the  front,  and  then  salutes  with  the  left  hand. 


im 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 


EXTENDED  ORDER. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

509.  The  iquad  is  the  basis  of  extended  order. 

Men  will  Ije  taught  to  regard  the  squad  as  the  unit 
Crom  whiclt  they  ought  never  to  be  separated;  but  if 
the  squad  should  be  broken  up  or  the  men  beconie  sepa- 
rated, they  place  themselves  under  the  orders  of  the 
nearest  leader  and  remain  with  his  squad  as  if  it  were 
the  one  to  which  they  originally"  belonged. 

Officers  and  sergeants  will  give  their  attention  to  pre- 
serving the  integrity  of  the  squads  ; they  appoint  new 
leaders  to  replace  those  disabled,  organize  new  squads 
when  necessary,  and  see  that  every  man  is  placed  in  a 
squad. 

503.  This  instruction,  on  account  .of  its  importance, 
will  be  given  as  soon  as  the  recruits  have  had  a few 
drills  in  close  order.  The  mechanism  of  the  movements 
is  taught  on  the  drill  ground  (Pars.  115  and  116),  with 
every  attention  to  detail ; afterward  the  movements  are 
executed  on  varied  ground,  making  use  of  the  accidents 
of  the  surface  for  cover,  etc.,  and  observing  the  condi- 
tions of  battle. 

504.  In  all  instruction  in  extended  order,  the  move- 
ment must  be  made  with  reference  to  an  enemy  sup- 
posed to  be  in  an  indicated  dh’ection. 

505.  The  enemy  is  said  to  be  imaginary  when  his  posi- 
tion and  force  are  merely  assumed  ; outlined  when  his 
position  and  force  are  indicated  by  a few  men  only  ; 
and  represented  when  a body  of  troops  acting  as  such 
has  his  supposed  force  and  position. 

506.  Men  m extended  order  fix  their  attention  at  the 
first  word  of  command,  the  first  note  of  the  trumpet  or 


LEADING  THE  SQUAD. 


187 


the  first  motion  of  the  signal ; the  movement  com 
mences  immediately  upon  the  completion  of  the  com 
mand,  trumpet  call,  or  signal. 

507.  Extended  order  may  be  taken  from  any  forma, 
tion. 

508.  Upon  arriving  on  the  line  and  upon  halting, 
men  in  extended  order  face  to  the  front,  whether  in 
squads  or  as  individual  skirmishers. 

509.  No  commands  for  dressing  are  given  in  extended 
order ; the  general  alignment  is  taken  toward  the  base 
file  ; the  men  stand  and  march  at  ease  (see  Par.  246)  and 
pay  close  attention. 

510.  When  necessary  for  any  chief^to  leave  his  post, 
lie  will  return  to  it  as  soon  as  possible. 

Leading  the  Squad. 

511.  In  the  exercise  in  leading,  the  movements  are 
executed  at  signals  from  the  corporal,  and  as  far  as 
possible  without  commands  or  cautions  ; the  object  be- 
ing to  prepare  the  squad  for  the  battle  exercises  by 
training  the  men  to  cooperate  with  their  leader  and 
conform  instantly  to  his  wishes. 

512.  The  movements  are  executed  in  the  most  direct 
manner,  first  in  quick  time,  then  in  double  time,  and 
finally  at  a run ; they  should  not  succeed  each  other  so 
rapidly  as  to  produce  confusion. 

513.  The  corporal  is  posted  three  paces  in  front  of 
the  squad,  which  conforms  to  his  signals  and  move- 
ments. 

514.  The  squad  is  exercised  in  turning,  marching  to 
the  front,  rear,  and  by  the  flank,  obliquing,  halting, 
assembling,  etc. 

515.  The  man  in  front  of  whom  the  corporal  places 
himself  is  the  guide  of  the  squad,  and  follows  in  the 
trace  of  the  corporal  at  a distance  of  three  paces. 

516.  When  the  corporal  does  not  wish  the  squad  to 
follow  him,  he  commands : Guide  {right  or  left),  and 


188 


THE  SQUAD. 


indicates  the  point  of  direction  ; if  marching*  by  the 
flank,  he  indicates  the  direction. 

517.  When  the  squad  is  marched  to  the  rear,  the 
corporal  takes  position  in  front  of  the  squad. 

THE  SQUAD. 

General  Rules. 

518.  The  squad  is  deployed  forward  when  it  is  in  rear 
of  the  line  to  be  occupied,  and  by  the  flank  when  it  is 
already  on  that  line.  If  the  squad  be  at  a halt,  it  is 
placed  in  march  before  deploying*  forward.  If  the  squad 
be  in  march,  it  is  halted  before  deploying  by  the  flank. 

519.  The  normal  interval  between  skirmishers  is  two 
paces  ; when  a greater  or  less  interval  is  used  it  will  be 
stated  in  the  preparatory  command. 

520.  Before  giving  the  commands  for  marching,  de- 
ploying, or  assembling,  or  for  increasing  or  diminishing 
intervals,  the  corporal  indicates  the  file  which  is  to  be 
the  base  or  guide,  places  himself  three  paces  in  front  of 
it,  and  indicates  the  direction. 

On  halting,  the  corporal  places  himself  three  paces 
in  rear  of  his  squad. 

521.  The  deployment  as  skirmishers  is  made  on  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  second  file  from  the  right  (No.  2). 

The  rear  rank  men  place  themselves  on  the  alignment 
to  the  right  of  their  file  leaders,  each,  as  soon  as  there 
is  interval. 

522.  If  the  squad  is  to  kneel  or  lie  down  upon  halting, 
the  corporal  gives  the  cautionary  command  kneel  (or 
lie  dotcn)upon  halting,  before  giving  the  commands  for 
deploying.  The  squad  will  then  kneel  (or  lie  down)  at 
each  halt  until  otherwise  directed. 

To  Deploy  as  Skirmishers. 

523.  Forward: 

Marching  in  line  : 1.  As  skirmishers,  2.  march. 


THE  SQUAD 


189 


The  front  rank  man,  second  file  (Par.  521)  moves 
straight  to  the  front  or  in  the  direction  indicated  by 
the  corporal. 

The  other  men  oblique  to  the  right  or  left  according 
as  they  are  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  second  file,  in- 
creasing the  cadence,  each  resuming  the  direction  and 
cadence  of  the  guide  when  at  his  interval  (Par.  519)  and 
on  the  alignment.  The  rear  rank  men  follow  or  pre- 
cede their  file  leaders  on  the  line  according  as  they  gain 
intervals  to  the  right  or  left. 

When  the  squad  arrives  upon  the  line  to  be  occupied, 
the  corporal  halts  it  by  the  commands  : 1.  Squad,  2. 
HALT. 

524.  By  the  flank  : 

Being  in  line  at  a halt : 1.  As  skirmishers,  2.  march. 

The  base  (Par.  521)  stands  fast;  ^ ^ 

the  other  men  move  rapidly  to  5 ^ m 

the  right  or  left,  according  as  ^ 

they  are  on  his  right  or  left,  ^ 

each  man  halting  on  the  line 
when  he  has  gained  his  interval.  Pi.  92,  Par.  524. 

To  Increase  and  Diminish  Intervals. 

525.  Being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  to  increase  or 
diminish  intervals  \ 1.  To  (so  many)  paces,  extend  (or 
dose),  2.  MARCH. 

The  skirmishers  open  from  or  close  toward  the  guide. 

If  marching,  the  movement  is  executed  by  ob- 
liquing and  increasing  the  cadence  ; if  at  a halt,  the 
movement  is  executed  by  the  flank. 

Marchings. 

526.  Being  deployed  and  halted,  to  move  forward : 1. 
Forward,  2.  march. 

The  skirmishers  take  the  direct  ion  and  keep  their  in- 
tervals  from  the  side  toward  the  guide. 

527.  Being  deployed,  at  a halt  or  advancing,  to  march 
to  the  rear  : 1.  To  the  rear,  2.  march. 


190 


THE  SQUAD. 


The  men  face  about  and  march  to  the  rear,  conform- 
ing to  the  principles  of  the  march  to  the  front.  The 
corporal  moves  quickly  in  front  of  the  guide. 

To  march  again  to  the  front : 1.  Forward,  2.  march. 

528.  Tq  march  by  the  flank  : 1.  By  the  right  (or  left) 
dank,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  each  man  faces  to  the  right 
and  follows  the  man  in  his  front.  The  corporal  moves 
quickly  beside  the  leading  man  to  conduct  him  (see 
Par.  516). 

To  march  again  in  line  : 1.  By  the  left  (or  right)  flank, 
2.  MARCH. 

529.  The  squad  being  in  march,  to  the  front,  rear,  or 
by  the  flank,  is  halted  by  the  commands  : 1.  Squad, 

2.  HALT. 

530.  The  squad  being  deployed,  to  change  front  or 
direction,  the  corporal  indicates  the  direction  and  com- 
mands : 1.  Squad  right  {or  left),  2.  march;  ov,\.  Right 
(or  left)  turn,  2.  march,  according  as  the  squad  is  to 
halt  or  advance ; executed  as  in  Pars.  140  and  141,  th« 
skirmishers  maintaining  their  intervals. 

To  Rally. 

531.  The  rally  is  used  for  immediate  and  concentrated 
action  when  there  is  not  time  to  form  in  the  normal 
order.  The  rally  should  be  made  either  on  the  line  or 
in  advance  of  it. 

The  corporal  signals  or  commands  : RALLY, 

The  men  run  toward  the  corporal  and  group  them- 
selves in  single  or  double  rank,  in  line,  in  circle,  in  semi- 
circle, or  in  such  other  formation  as  he  directs,  and  fix 
bayonet. 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  form  in 
rear  of  him  in  single  or  double  rank  as  he  directs,  and 
follow  him,  fixing  bayonet. 

The  squad  being  rallied  may  advance  or  deploy  (Pars. 


FIRE  DISCIPLINE. 


191 


523  and  524);  in  deploying,  the  skirmishers  return  to  their 
former  places. 

The  Assembly. 

532.  Being  deployed  or  rallied,  the  corporal  signals  or 
commands:  1.  Assemble,  2.  march. 

The  men  move  toward  the  corporal  and  form  in  their 
proper  places. 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  move 
in  double  time,  form,  and  follow  him. 

Assembling  when  faced  or  marching  to  the  rear  will 
not  be  executed. 

533.  When  the  preceding  movements  are  well  under- 
stood, they  are  executed  at  signals. 

FIRE  DISCIPLINE. 

534.  The  instructor  will  impress  upon  the  men  the 
importance  of  the  following  : 

General  Rules. 

1.  Never  load  until  the  moment  for  firing. 

2.  Never  fire  except  when  ordered,  and  then  only  the 
number  of  cartridges  indicated. 

3.  Never  fire  after  the  command  or  signal  Cease 
firing. 

4.  Never  ^re  except  at  the  named  objective. 

5.  Never  fail  to  adjust  the  sight  at  the  range  named. 

6.  Always  aim  at  the  feet  of  the  enemy,  or,  if  he  is 
hidden  from  view,  at  the  lower  line  of  smoke. 

535.  Notwithstanding  these  rules,  it  is  allowable, 
especially  for  scouts,  to  fire  when  necessary — 

a.  To  give  the  alarm. 

b.  When  a good  opportunity  occurs  to  fire  upon  a 
leader  of  the  enemy. 

c.  In  self  defense. 


192 


FIRE  DISCIPLINE. 


536.  Individual  men  who  may  be  acting  beyond  the 
immediate  control  of  leaders  will  observe  the  follow- 
ing : 

They  will  not  fire  at  distances  over — 

400  yards  at  a man  lying  down. 

500  yards  at  a man  kneeling. 

600  yards  at  a man  standing. 

700  yards  at  a horseman. 

800  yards  at  a small  squad  of  men  or  a line  of  skir- 
mishers. 

Sharpshooters  may,  when  permitted  by  an  officer, 
fire  upon  the  enemy  at  greater  distances. 

537.  Volleys  by  squads  are  used  against  troops  in 
close  order  at  distances  not  exceeding — 

800  yards  at  a line  equal  to  the  front  of  a squad. 

1,000  yards  at  a line  equal  to  the  front  of  a platoon. 

1,200  yards  at  a line  equal  to  the  front  of  a com- 
pany. 

These  limits  are  not  invariable  ; they  may  be  ex- 
ceeded under  favorable  conditions  when  the  range  is 
accurately  known,  but  should  always  be  reduced  when 
the  men  are  tired  or  out  of  breath,  the  range  uncertain, 
the  enemy  under  cover,  or  the  conditions  of  wind  and 
light  unfavorable. 

When  the  supply  of  ammunition  is  ample  and  the 
enemy  is  in  large  bodies,  volleys  may  be  fired  at  extreme 
ranges. 

538.  The  fire  at  will  and  the  fire  with ' counted  car- 
tridges are  used  at  distances  ranging  from  800  to  400 
yards. 

539.  The  rapid  fire  is  used  at  short  ranges  at  the  de- 
cisive moment  of  the  action. 

540.  The  ranges  are  classified  as  follows  : 

0 to  300  yards,  short  range. 

300  to  600  yards,  mid  range. 

600  to  1,400  yards,  long  range. 

1,400  to  2,000  yards,  extreme  range. 


FIRINGS. 


193 


^^/rings. 

541.  The  instructor  will  give  the  closest  attention  to 
the  execution  of  the  firings,  and  always  exact  the  most 
rigid  fire  discipline. 

542.  The  firings  are  always  executed  at  a halt.  If 
the  squad  be  in  march,  it  halts  at  the  preparatory  com- 
mand for  firing  and  loads,  and  kneels  or  lies  down  if  so 
specified  in  the  command. 

543.  Volley  firing  is  executed,  the  squad  closed  or  de- 
ployed, by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  in 
close  order.  (Par.  146.) 

More  than  three  volleys  will  rarely  be  fired  without 
intermission ; this  to  allow  the  smoke  to  clear  away,  to 
steady  the  men,  and  to  prevent  waste  of  ammunition. 

544.  To  fire  at  will;  1.  Fire  at  will,  or,  1.  Fire  at 
will,  kneeling  (or  lying  doivn),  2.  At  (such  an  object),  3. 
At  (so  many)  yards,  4.  commence  firing. 

At  the  fourth  command,  those  skirmishers  who  can 
see  the'enemy  aim  deliberately,  fire,  load,  and  continue 
the  firing  until  the  command  or  signal : cease  firing. 

The  corporal  may  permit  a few  men  only,  usually  the 
best  shots,  to  fire;  for  this  purpose  he  calls  the  men  by 
name  and  then  gives  the  same  commands  as  before ; 
the  intensity  of  the  fire  is  thus  regulated  by  varying 
the  number  of  men  firing. 

545.  To  fire  as  skirmishers  with  counted  cartridges : 
1.  Fire  one  {two  or  three)  round,  2.  At  (such  an  ob- 
ject); 3.  At  (so  many)  yards,  4.  commence  firing. 

At  the  fourth  command  those  skirmishers  who  can 
see  the  enemy  open  fire.  Each  man,  after  firing 
the  number  of  cartridges  indicated,  executes  cease 
firing. 

To  fire  another  series;  fire  one  (two  or  three) 

ROUND. 

The  instructor  will  see  that  the  number  of  cartridges 
indicated  is  never  exceeded. 


194 


INSTRUCTION  ON  VARIED  GROUND. 


546.  In  the  rapid  fire,  the  mincer  of  cartridges  is  not 
limited  ; when  used  in  advanci^  to  the  attack,  the  in- 
structor orders  bayonets  fixed  and  sights  laid  down,  and 
then  commands  : 1.  Rapid  fire^  2.  commence  firing. 

The  men  fire  straight  to  the  front  at  the  feet  of  the 
enemy,  and  continue  to  fire  until  the  command  or 
signal : cease  firing. 

INSTRUCTION  ON  VARIED  GROUND. 

547.  The  instruction  at  first  will  be  individual ; the 
movements  will  afterward  be  executed  by  the  entire 
squad. 

548.  This  instruction  is  directed  by  the  company  offi- 
cers ; it  is  given  on  ground  which  has  been  previously 
selected  with  reference  to  the  movements  to  be 
executed.  The  location  should  be  frequently  changed 
to  accustom  the  men  to  new  situations,  and  care  will 
be  taken  never  to  order  movements  at  variance  with 
the  accidents  of  the  ground. 

549.  Having  conducted  the  squad  to  a point  over- 
looking the  vicinity,  the  instructor  will  call  attention  to 
the  form  of  the  ground  and  the  different  military  pur- 
poses to  which  its  features  are  adaptable,  using  and  ex- 
plaining the  military  terms  that  apply  ; he  will  require 
the  men  to  point  out  the  leading  features  of  the  coun- 
try in  sight  or  near  their  position,  with  all  that  con- 
cerns the  streams,  roads,  woods,  inhabited  places,  etc. 

550.  He  will  explain  how  to  determine  the  points  of 
the  compass,  the  points  of  sunrise  and  sunset,  the  posi- 
tion of  the  sun  at  different  hours  of  the  day,  and  the 
length  of  the  shadows  cast  by  objects,  persons,  etc. 

Use  of  Cover, 

551.  The  instructor  must  impress  upon  the  men  that 
they  must  take  positions  from  which  they  can  best  see 
and  fire  upon  the  enemy. 


INSTRUCTION  ON  VARIED  GROUND. 


195 


552.  The  best  kind  of  cover  is  that  which,  while  it 
masks  the  skirmishers  from  the  sight  and  fire  of  the 
enemy,  affords  favorable  conditions  for  firing  and  for 
readily  advancing  and  retiring. 

553.  In  order  to  obtain  a rest  for  the  rifle,  and  at  the 
same  time  expose  the  least  part  of  the  body  while 
aiming,  the  instructor  explains  the  following  meth* 
ods  : 

Take  post  preferably  behind  the  right  of  walls,  rocks, 
heaps  of  stone  or  earth,  and  in  the  windows  and  door- 
ways of  the  houses  on  the  left  side  of  a street ; behind 
a tree,  rest  the  rifle  on  a limb  to  the  right,  or  rest  the 
forearm  against  the  right  side  of  the  trunk. 

Behind  embankments  of  earth,  in  ditches  and  fur- 
rows, kneel  or  lie  down  and  rise  slightly  to  fire  ; lie 
down  in  rear  of  a crest  or  the  edge  of  a plateau,  keep- 
ing the  slope  toward  the  enemy  in  view. 

At  the  edge  of  a wood,  where  there  is  no  ditch  nor 
bank  of  earth,  remain  a little  back  from  the  edge,  un- 
der the  cover  of  the  first  trees. 

The  instructor  explains  how  to  prepare  the  crest  of  a 
wall,  and  how  to  pierce  loopholes  or  construct  plat- 
forms when  the  wall  is  too  high  to  fire  over. 

554.  The  instructor  explains  the  circumstances  under 
which  each  accident  of  the  ground  would  be  valuable  as 
cover,  and  how  to  use  it,  both  in  its  original  condition 
and  by  modifying  it,  against  an  enemy  supposed  to  be 
in  a certain  direction. 

The  recruits  are  then  required  to  post  themselves 
near  points  indicated,  so  as  to  be  under  cover  and  in 
position  to  fire  upon  a point  about  six  hundred  yards 
distant,  indicated  as  the  position  of  the  enemy  ; each 
man  selects  his  own  position  so  as  to  have  a good  view 
of  the  objective,  and  sets  his  sight  at  the  range  indi- 
cated. The  men  then  change  places. 

The  exercise  is  repeated  on  different  ground  and  with 
a different  objective. 


196 


INSTRUCTION  ON  VARIED  GROUND. 


555.  A well-instructed  soldier  or  non-commissioned 
officer  is  then  placed  in  the  position  of  the  enemy  and 
required  to  advance  upon  the  skirmishers;  the  latter 
will  carefully  observe  his  movements  and  aim  at  him 
whenever  he  exposes  himself,  adjusting  the  sight  to 
agree  with  the  distance  (Par.  536). 

556.  When  the  recruits  have  learned  to  post  them- 
selves at  points  indicated  by  the  instructor,  they  are 
exercised  in  selecting  their  own  points,  advancing  from 
cover  to  cover.  The  instructor  sends  a man  to  a point 
about  six  hundred  yards  distant  to  represent  the  enemy; 
a recruit  is  then  directed  to  advance  upon  him.  In  order 
to  keep  out  of  sight  of  tlie  enemy,  the  recruit  must 
make  the  best  use  of  cover,  but  must  not  deviate  too 
much  from  his  direction  ; he  must  stoop  and  even  creep 
or  crawl,  but,  if  possible,  never  lose  sightof  the  enemy ; 
open  ground  exposed  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy  should  be 
crossed  at  a run,  by  rushes  of  about  thirty  yards,  then 
taking  the  lying  position  and  raising  the  head  in  order 
to  see  the  enemy. 

The  rushes  should  not,  as  a rule,  exceed  fifty  yards, 
else  the  skirmishers  will  be  winded  and  unable  to  aim 
accurately. 

In  this  manner  ne  should  advance  to  about  200  yards 
from  the  enemy,  and  nearer  if  the  character  of  the 
ground  permit. 

The  man  representing  the  enemy  may  be  provided 
with  blank  cartridges  and  required  to  fire  upon  the 
skirmisher  whenever  he  exposes  himself  sufficiently  to 
afford  a target  (Par.  536). 

557.  When  the  recruits  are  well  instructed  in  the  use 
of  cover,  the  movements  are  executed  by  squad. 

The  instructor  points  out  the  position  of  the  enemy 
at  least  600  yards  distant,  and  states  clearly  the  object 
of  the  movement.  The  corporal,  as  squad  leader,  gives 
the  commands  necessary. 


INSTRUCTION  ON  VARIED  GROUND. 


197 


Battle  Exercises. 

558.  The  squad  executes  on  varied  ground  all  the 
movements  prescribed  for  close  and  extended  order, 
special  attention  being  given  to  the  exercises  in  leading. 

Those  skirmishers  v^ho  cannot  hear  or  see  the  cor^ 
poral  regulate  themselves  upon  the  nearest  men,  who 
may  transmit  the  commands  to  them  in  a low  tone. 

When  the  squad  is  proficient  in  the  movements  in  ex- 
tended order,  the  enemy  is  either  outlined  or  repre- 
sented. 

In  general  the  fire  is  simulated  ; but  it  is  important, 
in  these  exercises,  that  blank  cartridges  should  fre- 
quently be  used. 

Both  parties  cease  firing  when  within  fifty  yards  of 
each  other ; if  they  are  deployed  as  skirmishers  the  at- 
tacking party  may  be  ordered  to  charge ; the  men  in 
each  squad  pass  through  the  intervals  in  the  other,  each 
man  passing  to  the  right  of  the  man  directly  in  his 
front ; both  squads  halt  at  the  command  of  the  instruc- 
tor. The  exercise  may  then  be  continued,  the  squads 
exchanging  positions. 


11)8 


THE  PLATOON. 


THE  PLATOON. 

General  Rules. 

559.  The  chief  of  platoon  is  the  instructor. 

Before  forming  line  of  squads  or  deploying,  he  desig- 
nates the  center  squad  of  the  firing  line  and  indicates 
the  point  of  direction  to  the  leader  of  the  base  squad. 

In  forming  line  of  squads  or  skirmishers,  the  chiefs  of 
sections,  at  the  preparatory  command,  place  themselves 
in  rear  of  their  base  squads  in  line,  or  abreast  of  them 
in  column  ; they  see  that  the  base  squads  keep  the  line 
of  direction.  The  corporals  take  post  in  front  of  their 
squads  in  line  at  the  preparatory  command  for  forming 
line  of  squads  ; in  deploying  as  skirmishers  they  take  or 
keep  their  places  in  ranks,  retaining  supervision  of  their 
squads. 

One  section  may  form  the  firing  line,  the  other  the 
support ; or  the  entire  platoon  may  be  placed  in  the 
firing  line. 

The  post  of  the  chief  of  platoon  is  between  the  firing 
line  and  support. 

The  chief  of  a section  in  the  firing  line  is  posted  six 
paces  in  rear  of  the  center  of  his  section  ; he  must  be 
on  the  alert  for  signals  from  his  chief  of  platoon.  The 
chief  of  a section  in  support  places  himself  six  paces  in 
front  of  his  section. 

The  support  halts  until  the  firing  line  has  advanced 
about  150  yards,  or  if  the  deployment  be  made  by  the 
flank,  marches  that  distance  to  the  rear,  unless  cover 
be  found  nearer  the  support. 

If  halted,  the  support  stands,  kneels,  or  lies  down, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  cover  ; on  open  ground 
it  may  deploy. 

Marching  by  the  flank  under  fire  should  be  avoided. 


THE  PLATOON. 


im 


Line  of  Squads, 


I J5£C. 


-15  PACES 


560.  The 
normal 
g interval 
between 
squads  i s 
about  fif- 
teen paces ; when  a great- 
er or  less  interval  is  to 
be  taken,  it  will  be  stated 
in  the  commands. 

Marching  in  line,  to  form 
line  of  squads  °.  1.  Line  of 

squads,  2.  On  (such) 

squad,  3.  march. 

PI.  93,  Par.  560.  The  corporal  of  the  base 

squad  leads  it  (Pars.  515  and  516)  in  the  indicated  direction; 
the  corporals  to  the  right  of  the  base  move  their  squads 
obliquely  to  the  right,  those  to  the  left,  obliquel}’’  to 
G s ^coHPLs  the  left  ; 

each  moves 
to  the  front 
when  at  his 
interval 

c.c.0FStc.  from  the 

squad  next 

toward  the  base. 

When  the  base  squad  arrives  on 
the  line,  the  chief  of  platoon  com- 
mands: 1.  Platoon,  2.  halt. 

The  base  squad  halts  ; the  others 
are  halted  on  arriving  on  the  line. 
On  halting,  the  corporals  place 
themselves  three  paces  in  rear  of 
PI.  94,  Par.  560.  their  squads. 


X^C.^FSEC. 


200 


1HE  PLATOON. 


If  marching  in  double  time,  or  in  quick  time  and  the 
command  be  double  fime,  the  base  squad  advances  in 
quick  time ; the  others  move  in  double  time  and  take 
the  quick  time  on  arriving  on  the  line  ; the  corporals 
keep  their  places  in  front  of  their  squads. 

If  at  a halt,  the  base  squad  stands  fast ; the  others 
face  and  march  away  from  the  base  squad  ; each  cor- 
poral halts  his  squad  when  it  has  gained  its  interval. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  of  Squads. 


\c.Qf'PLATOOJf^' 


JBCiilLFS  OF  S£C. 


kCOSNX 


^ 561.  To  the  front:  1.  Right  (or 

» left)  front  into  line  of  squads,  2. 

g MARCH,  3.  Platoon,  4.  halt. 

At  T.  The  movement  is  executed  as  in 

P . 95,  Par.  561.  210  ; the  corporals  leading 

their  squads  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 


I ^ 


mdxfsec. 


•>co/fris 


y^JtC-OF  PLATOON  X I 


562.  On  right  or  left : 1.  On 
right  (or  left)  into  line  of  squads, 
2.  MARCH,  3.  Platoon,  4.  halt. 


PI  96,  Par.  562. 


THE  PLATOON. 


201 


Escecuted  as  in  Par.  208,  except  that  each  corporal 
leads  his  squad  to  its  proper  place  in  line  by  the  shortest 
route. 

To  Deploy  as  Skirmishers. 

563.  Being  in  line  of  squads  : 1.  -4s  skirmishers,  2,. 

. MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  squad  (Pars.  523  and  524.) 

These  commands  may  be  given  at  any  time  after  the 
commencement  of  the  movement  to  form  line  of  squads; 
the  squads  that  have  their  intervals  deploy  at  once,  the 
others  when  they  gain  their  intervals. 

564.  In  exceptional  cases,  the  platoon  may  be  deployed 
in  the  same  manner  as  a squad. 

Being  in  line  : 1.  As  skirmishers,  on  (such)  squad,  2. 
MARCH. 


PI.  97,  Par.  564. 

The  deployment  is  made  as  in  the  squad  (Pars.  523 
and  524),  number  two  front  rank  of  the  base  squad  be- 
ing the  base  skirmisher  ; all  the  men  of  the  line  deploy 
on  him ; the  squad  leaders  see  that  the  men  of  their 
squads  halt  or  march  to  the  front  as  they  individually 
gain  their  intervals. 

To  Increase  and  Diminish  Intervals. 

565.  Being  in  line  of  squads  : 1.  On  (such)  squad,  to 
(so  many)  j^aces,  extend  (or  close),  2.  march. 


202 


the  platoon. 


The  squads  open  from  or  close  toward  the  base  squad. 
If  marching,  the  movement  is  executed  obliquely ; if 
at  a halt,  by  the  flank. 

Being  deployed  as  skirmishers  : 1.  On  (such)  squad, 
to  (so  mixny)  paces,  extend  (or  close),  2.  march. 

The  skirmishers  to  tne  right  and  left  of  number  two 
front  rank  man  of  the  base  squad  extend  from  or  close 
toward  him  (Par.  525). 

The  Assembly. 

566.  The  chief  takes  post  where  his  platoon  is  to  form, 
and  signals  or  commands:  1.  Assemble,  2.  march. 

The  squads  move  promptly  toward  him  and  re-form 
the  platoon. 

To  assemble  by  squads  : 1,  Assemble  by  squads,  2. 
MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  squad  (Par.  532). 

567.  To  cause  one  or  more  squads  to  take  a certain 
formation,  the  chief  of  platoon  designates  the  squads 
and  gives  his  orders. 

Marchings. 

568.  Being  in  line  of  squads  or  skirmishers,  the  chief 
of  platoon  indicates  the  point  of  direction  to  the  leader 
of  the  base  squad  and  commands:  1.  Forward,  2.  Guide 
right  {left  ov  center),  3.  march. 

The  base  squad  marches  in  the  given  direction  ; the 
others  march  abreast  of  the  base,  keeping  their  intervals. 

569.  To  march  to  the  rear  : 1.  To  the  rear,  2.  march. 
3.  Guide  right  {left  or  center). 

The  chief  of  platoon  indicates  the  point  of  direction 
to  the  leader  of  the  base  squad  after  the  line  has  faced 
to  the  rear. 

570.  To  make  a slight  change  of  direction,  the  chief 
of  platoon  indicates  the  new  point  of  direction ; the 
squads  conform  promptly  to  the  movements  of  the  base. 

To  make  a considerable  change,  the  chief  of  platoon 
indicates  the  new  point  of  direction  and  commands; 
1.  Change  direction  to  the  right  {ov  left).  2.  march. 


THE  PLATOON. 


208 


The  right  squad,  which  is  the  base,  changes  direction 
as  if  alone  (Par.  530),  and  halts  ; the  others  conform  to 
the  new  alignment. 

571.  The  platoon  in  line  of  squads  or  skirmishers  is 
marched  by  the  flank  and  again  in  line  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  for  the  squad  (Par.  528). 

Firings. 

572.  The  platoon  and  section,  whether  closed  or  ex- 
tended, execute  the  firings  as  explained  for  the  squad. 

Volley  firing  may  be  used  when  the  front  is  of  such 
extent  as  to  be  controlled  by  the  voice. 

To  fire  by  section  or  squad,  the  chief  of  platoon  com- 
mands : 1.  Fire  by  section  (or  squad),  2.  (So  many) 
volleys,  indicates,  when  desirable,  the  objective  and 
range,  and  adds  : 3.  commence  firing. 

Each  section  or  squad  executes  the  firings  as  if  alone. 

The  corporals  take  part  in  the  firing  except  when  the 
fire  is  by  squad. 

The  chief  of  platoon  may  designate  one  or  more 
squads  to  fire. 

573.  A section  constituting  the  firing  line  executes  the 
preceding  movements  by  the  same  commands  and 
means,  under  the  orders  of  the  chief  of  section. 

Line  of  Sections. 

574.  The  normal  interval  between  sections  of  three 
squads  each  is  about  forty-five  paces;  between  sections 
of  two  squads  each,  about  thirty  paces. 

The  platoon  forms  line  of  sections,  marches  in  this 
formation,  and  increases  and  diminishes  intervals  be- 
tween sections  as  explained  for  squads,  substituting 
section  for  squad  in  the  commands  and  explanations. 

The  section  forms  line  of  squads  or  skirmishers,  ral- 
lies, assembles  and  executes  the  firings  and  all  other 
movements  in  extended  order  as  explained  for  the 
platoon. 


204 


THE  PLATOON. 


To  Reinforce  the  Firing  Line. 

575.  When  there  are  intervals  in  the  firing*  line,  either 
on  the  outer  flanks  or  between  the  groups,  the  reinforce- 
ment is  placed  in  these  intervals.  This  method,  called 
the  group  reinforcement,  will  be  used  when  practicable. 

Advancing  or  being  at  a halt  under  cover,  the 
firing  line  may  diminish  intervals  toward  one  flank,  the 
support  deploying  and  moving  up  into  the  space  made 
vacant. 

Under  a heavy  fire,  the  line  may  be  reinforced  by 
deploying  the  support  on  the  march,  the  men  of  the 
support  placing  themselves  on  the  line  between  the 
skirmishers ; officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
take  charge  of  their  proportionate  parts  of  the  front, 
and  the  action  progresses  as  if  no  mixing  had  taken 
place.  This  method  should  be  used  only  when  the 
emergency  demands  a prompt  reinforcement  above  all 
other  considerations. 

The  Rally. 

576.  The  chief  of  platoon  moves  rapidly  to  the  squad 
or  place  selected  as  a rallying  point,  and  signals  or 
commands  : RALLY. 

The  firing  line  rallies  as  explained  for  the  squad.  The 
support  approaches  and  selects  a position  from  which 
it  can  render  the  most  effective  assistance. 

To  rally  by  sections,  the  chief  of  platoon  commands  ; 
RALLY  BY  SECTIONS,  and  then  joins  one  of  the  sections. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  hasten  to  place  themselves  in  the 
center  of  their  sections,  signal,  and  repeat  the  command. 

To  rally  by  squads : rally  by  squads.  The  squad 
leaders  make  the  signal ; the  chiefs  of  sections  and 
platoons  join  the  nearest  squads. 

When,  as  a result  of  reinforcing,  sections  and  squads 
are  mixed,  each  group  rallies  on  the  chief  who  com- 
mands it  at  the  time. 

As  soon  after  rallying  as  practicable,  the  platoon  is 
assembled  or  again  deployed. 


THE  COMPANY. 


m 


THE  COMPANY. 

577.  In  battle  formation,  when  part  of  a battalion,  the 
company  is  in  two  echelons,  a firing  line  and  a sup- 
port. In  battalion,  the  fighting  front  of  a company  is 
usually  twice  its  front  in  close  order. 

Acting  alone,  the  company  is  in  three  echelons;  a 
firing  line,  a support,  and  a reserve. 

The  distances  between  these  echelons  vary  with  the 
nature  of  the  ground  and  the  effectiveness  of  the 
enemy’s  fire. 

578.  On  the  offensive,  the  company,  acting  alone,  may 
place  at  first  only  one  section  in  the  firing  line,  with 
one  in  support;  the  other  two  constitute  the  reserve. 

On  the  defensive,  two  sections  constitute  the  firing 
line,  one  the  support;  and  one  the  reserve. 

579.  As  a rule,  the  sections  to  be  designated  for  the 
firing  line  are  the  center  sections  in  line,  or  the  lead- 
ing sections  in  column  or  line  of  columns.  A platoon 
may  be  designated  for  the  firing  line. 

580.  The  company  forms  line  of  squads  or  sections, 
deploys  as  skirmishers,  increases  and  diminishes  inter- 
vals, assembles,  rallies,  and  executes  the  marchings 
and  firings  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
for  the  platoon. 

Positions  and  Duties  of  Officers. 

581.  The  captain  is  the  instructor.  He  takes  post  be- 
tween the  firing  line  and  the  support,  or,  if  the  for- 
mation be  in  three  echelons,  near  the  support.  He 
designates  the  sections  for  the  firing  line,  support,  and 
reserve,  directs  the  action  of  the  whole  company,  con- 
trols the  reinforcement  of  the  firing  line,  and  keeps  up 
the  supply  of  ammunition,  regulating  distribution  and 
expenditure.  His  orders,  given  by  word  of  command, 


206 


THE  COMPANY. 


signals,  or  delivered  by  orderlies,  are  directed  to  the 
commanders  of  the  firing  line,  support,  and  reserve.  A 
musician  remains  with  the  captain. 

The  first  lieutenant  commands  the  reserve,  if  there 
foe  one,  otherwise,  the  support. 

The  second  lieutenant  commands  the  firing  line 
when  it  consists  of  only  one  section,  or  of  one  section 
irorn  each  platoon. 

The  third  lieutenant,  if  there  be  one,  may  be  assigned 
by  the  captain  ; if  the  formation  be  in  three  echelons, 
he  usally  commands  the  support. 

The  first  sergeant,  if  not  in  command  of  a platoon  or 
echelon,  takes  post  near  the  captain. 

If  the  firing  line  consist  of  an  entire  platoon,  it  is 
commanded  by  its  own  lieutenant ; the  other  lieuten- 
ant commands  the  reserve  or  support. 

When  the  whole  company  is  in  the  firing  line,  each 
lieutenant  commands  his  own  platoon. 

The  commander  of  the  firing  line  is  ten  paces  in 
rear,  and  the  commanders  of  the  support  and  reserve 
ten  paces  in  front  of  the  centers  of  their  respective 
echelons. 

The  commander  of  the  reserve  maintains  communi- 
cation with  the  support  and  with  the  captain,  sending 
forward  men  to  act  as  messengers  and  repeat  signals. 

The  commanders  of  echelons  give  the  commands 
necessary  for  the  execution  of  the  orders  of  the  cap- 
tain ; they  give  their  special  attention  to  the  control 
and  direction  of  the  fire  and  to  maintain  cohesion  and 
concert  of  action. 

582.  Before  forming  for  attack  or  defense,  the  com- 
mander of  a force  acting  alone  makes  the  reconnois- 
sance  necessary  to  determine  the  best  disposition  to  be 
made. 

Commanders  of  companies  and  larger  units  forming 
part  of  larger  commands  throw  out  scouts  in  their  im- 
mediate vicinity.  The  number  of  scouts  depends  upon 


THE  COMPANY. 


207 


the  nature  of  their  duties  and  the  extent  ana  character 
of  the  front.  The  commander  will  give  them  such 
specific  instructions  as  circumstances  require. 

Scouts  sent  out  in  front  of  the  firing  line  convey  in- 
formation acquired,  by  means  of  signals  previously 
agreed  upon. 

These  rules  are  general. 


THE  OFFENSIVE. 

The  Company  in  Battalion. 

583.  When  first  coming  within  the  zone  of  artillery 
fire,  the  company  is  formed  in  line  and  advances  until 
the  artillery  fire  becomes  effective  (on  open  ground, 
about  twenty-five  hundred  yards  from  the  enemy). 

The  captain  then  orders  a few  scouts  sent  forward 
(usually  from  the  sections  to  be  in  support),  designates 
the  non-commissioned  officer  to  command  them,  indi- 
cating the  objective  to  him  a id  to  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons and  sections. 

The  scouts  must  advance  at  an  increased  gait,  unless 
the  company  be  halted. 

The  captain  then  designates  two  sections,  preferably 
the  second  and  third,  for  the  firing  line ; the  first  and 
fourth  for  supports  ; gives  the  necessary  instructions 
for  the  extension,  and  when  the  scouts  have  gained 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  to  the  front,  com- 
mands: 1.  Formforattacky2.  march. 

The  second  lieutenant  places  himself  in  rear  of  the 
center,  designates  the  center  squad  and  commands  : 
Guide  center. 

The  first  lieutenant  commands  : 1.  First  and  fourth 
sections y 2.  halt. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  designate  their  sections  and  re- 
peat the  cautions  necessary. 


208 


THE  COMPANY. 


The  second  and  third  sections  move  forward,  the 


SCOUTS  » 


1 

I 

§ 

g 


JO  PACES 
5*5  i I 


Z‘>LT 

CAPT 


MUS  }STS 

;*Tz.r 

ip  PACES 

4- 


Pl.  98,  Par.  583. 


corporal  of  the  base 
squad  advancing 
in  the  direction  in- 
dicated. 

When  the  firing 
line  has  advanced 
about  two  hundred 
yards,  the  first 
lieutenant  puts  the 
support  in  march ; 
each  chief  of  sec- 
tion in  the  support 
so  directs  his  base 
squad  as  to  keep  his 
section  in  rear  of 


th<'  outer  flank  of  the  firing  line. 

584.  At  about  fourteen  hundred  yards  the  firing  line 
forms  line  of  sections  and  continues  to  move  forward. 

At  about  twelve  hundred  yards,  it  forms  line  of  squads. 

At  about  nine  hun  dred  yards,  it  deploys  as  skirmishers. 

To  avoid  the  mixing  of  sections  and  squads,  each, 
while  seeking  cover,  should  keep  within  the  deploying 
limits  of  its  proper  front. 

585.  At  eight  hundred  yards  or  less,  the  scouts  may  find 
it  necessary  to  halt  and  await  the  arrival  of  the  firing  line. 

Firing  will  be  delayed  as  long  as  possible,  though  the 
captain  may  order  volleys  to  be  fired  upon  bodies 
of  the  enemy  that  expose  themselves,  or  individual 
sharpshooters  may  be  directed  to  fire.  When  the  ad- 
vance should  no  longer  continue  without  firing,  the 
captain  directs  the  number  of  volleys  to  be  fired  at  each 
halt  (see  Par.  543). 

586.  The  commander  of  the  firing  line  gives  the  com- 
mands for  the  volleys  ; he  must  never  exceed  the  num- 
ber directed  by  the  captain,  but  may  reduce  the  number, 
or  omit  the  firing,  to  avoid  a mere  waste  of  ammunition. 


THE  COMPANY. 


209 


587.  During  this  portion  of  the  advance,  the  firing 
line  will  close  upon  its  center,  in  order  to  make  space 
for  the  supports  to  come  up  on  the  outer  flanks. 

The  support  has  been  drawing  nearer  to  the  firing 
line  without  waiting  for  orders,  taking  the  formations 
most  favorable  for  reinforcing,  keeping  under  cover  as 
far  as  practicable. 

588.  The  firing  line  may  advance  from  cover  to  cover 
by  rushes  executed  by  the  whole  line  if  possible,  or  by 
alternate  sections. 

589.  The  arrival  of  supports  upon  the  line  should 
usually  be  the  signal  for  a rush  forward. 

590.  When  the  line  has  approached  within  about  five 
hundred  yards  of  the  enemy’s  position,  alternate  rushes 
will  probably  be  necessary ; the  lieutenant  gives  the  in- 
structions while  the  men  are  lying  down  or  behind  cover, 
and  then  commands  : 1.  Advance  by  rushes,  2.  Third 
(or  second)  section  fire  two  (or  three)  volleys,  3.  Second 
(or  third)  section  forward. 

The  chief  of  the  third  section  gives  vhe  commands 
for  the  volleys. 

The  instant  the  first  volley  is  fired  the  chief  of  the 
second  orders  his  section  forward  at  double  time  ; hav- 
ing advanced  about  fifteen  yards,  or  to  cover  if  there 
be  any,  he  halts  it  by  the  commands  : 1.  Fire  two  (or 
three)  volleys  {kneeling  or  lying  down),  and  completes 
the  commands  for  the  volleys. 

I The  instant  of  the  delivery  of  the  first  volley  by  the 
second  section,  the  third  moves  forward  at  double  time 
about  fifteen  yards  in  advance  of  the  line  occupied  by  the 
second.  The  third  section  then  fires  the  specified  num- 
ber of  volleys,  the  second  advances  about  fifteen  yards 
beyond  the  third,  and  so  on ; the  attack  is  thus  con- 
tinued, each  section  advancing  under  cover  of  the  fire 
and  smoke  of  the  other,  the  base  squad  keeping  the 
line  of  direction. 

591.  Volleys  will  be  used  to  the  last  practicable  mo- 


210 


THE  COMPANY. 


ment.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  squad  leaders 
assist  in  maintaining*  the  strictest  fire  discipline. 

592.  During  this  period  of  the  attack,  as  soon  as  it  be- 

comes necessary  to  increase  the  intensity  of  the  fire, 
the  captain  sends  forward  the  supports  to  reinforce  the 
firing  line.  • 

The  sections  of  the  support  reinforce  the  sections  of 
their  own  platoons,  advancing  under  cover  of  their  fire 
and  taking  position  so  as  to  join  in  the  next  rush. 

In  moving  forward  to  join  the  firing  line,  the  sup- 
ports move  rapidly  in  order  to  avoid  loss,  and  reinforce 
as  in  Par.  575. 

The  first  lieutenant  moves  forward  with  the  first 
section,  and  each  lieutenant  takes  command  of  his 
own  platoon  ; the  rushes  may  then  be  made  by  pla- 
toon. 

In  emergencies  the  commander  of  the  support  may 
reinforce  without  waiting  for  orders. 

593.  As  the  company  approaches  the  enemy’s  posi- 
tion the  captain  selects  favorable  ground  from  which 
to  make  the  assault,  and  having  attained  this  position 
commands:  Rapid  fire. 

Platoon  commanders  then  order  bayonets  fixed,  cau- 
tion the  men  to  lay  down  the  sights,  and  command  : 
1.  Rapid  fire,  kneeling,  2.  commence  firing. 

If  any  of  the  supports  have  not  been  brought  up,  they 
join  the  line  at  the  command  rapid  fire. 

To  charge,  the  captain  signals:  cease  firing,  and 
commands:  1.  To  the  charge,  2.  march. 

The  men  rise  and  advance  in  double  time. 

Having  arrived  at  about  thirty  yards  from  the  en- 
emy’s position,  the  captain  commands  : charge. 

The  men  charge  bayonet,  quicken  the  pace  and  ad- 
vance upon  the  enemy. 

Having  driven  the  enemy  from  his  position,  the  cap- 
tain selects  ground  in  front  favorable  for  firing  upon 
the  retreating  enemy,  or  for  resisting  a counter  attack. 


THE  COMPANY. 


211 


and  causes  the  assembly  to  be  sounded,  or  if  necessary, 
the  rally. 

In  case  of  repulse,  the  captain  at  once  prepares  to 
renew  the  attack. 

Relieving  the  Firing  Line. 

594.  In  the  exceptional  cases  in  which  the  firing  line 
must  be  relieved,  the  captain  notifies  the  firing  line  and 
gives  orders  to  the  support  which  is  to  replace  it. 

The  support  deploys  so  as  to  complete  the  movement 
in  rear  of  the  line  and  moves  up  into  the  intervals, 
or  passes  through  the  firing  line,  which  is  then  marched 
to  the  rear  and  assembled. 

If  the  line  is  marching  to  the  rear, the  captain  orders 
the  support  to  deploy ; the  firing  line  passes  through 
the  line  thus  formed,  is  assembled  and  becomes  the 
support  or  a part  of  it. 

The  Company  Acting  Alone. 

595.  The  captain  determines  upon  the  direction  and 
character  of  the  attack  and  indicates  the  rallying  point. 

The  attack  is  conducted  on  the  principles  explained 
for  the  company  in  battalion. 

The  firing  line  makes  the  front  attack ; the  support 
reconnoiters  and  protects  the  fianks,  and  supports  the 
front  attack ; the  reserve,  according  to  circumstances, 
makes  a flank  attack  or  participates  in  the  front  attack. 

When  the  support  is  absorbed  in  the  firing  line,  the 
reserve,  which  has  been  drawing  nearer  during  the 
advance,  should  be  about  150  yards  from  the  firing 
line. 

The  action  from  this  stage  is  conducted  as  for  the 
company  in  battalion  ; the  reserve  reinforcing  the  firing 
line  as  prescribed  for  the  support. 

Having  driven  the  enemy  from  position,  a part  or 
even  the  whole  of  the  company  should  be  used  to 


212 


THE  COMPANY. 


pursue  him  unless  pursuit  would  endanger  advan- 
tages already  gained. 

THE  DEFENSIVE. 

The  Company  in  Battalion. 

596.  When  the  captain  is  ordered  to  occupy  a defen- 
sive position,  he  conducts  his  company  to  the  point  se- 
lected and  sends  forward  scouts,  who  connect  with  those 
from  the  adjacent  companies. 

The  captain  indicates  to  each  subdivision  the  posi- 
tion it  is  to  occupy  and  the  defensive  works  to  be  con- 
structed, such  as  abatis,  shelter  trenches,  etc. 

The  division  and  formation  of  the  company  are,  in 
general,  the  same  as  on  the  offensive. 

To  secure  superiority  of  fire,  a company  may  have 
three  sections  in  the  firing  line  and  one  in  the  support 
from  the  beginning  of  the  action. 

The  first  resistance  of  the  scouts  should  be  for  the  pur- 
pose of  causing  the  enemy  to  deploy  and  disclose  his  in- 
tentions. The  captain  then  orders  the  battle  formation. 

Fire  is  opened  as  soon  as  it  can  be  made  effective. 

Certain  subdivisions  may  be  designated  to  fire  upon 
the  enemy’s  supports  and  reserves. 

The  firing  line  is  reinforced  as  in  Par.  575. 

When  the  enemy  arrives  at  about  500  yards  from  the 
position,  the  support  is  habitually  absorbed  in  the 
firing  line,  and  the  defense  is  continued  with  the  assist- 
ance of  the  battalion  reserve. 

If  the  enemy  be  repulsed,  the  company  takes  the 
offensive. 

If  the  enemy  succeed,  the  company  withdraws  and 
forms  at  the  rallying  point. 

The  Company  Acting  Alone. 

597.  Depending  upon  the  distance  of  the  enemy,  the 
company  arrives  at  the  position  in  battle  formation  or  in 
order  of  march. 


THE  COMPANY. 


213 


In  the  first  case,  the  firing  line  is  established  on  the 
position  to  be  defended ; the  support  and  reserve  are 
placed  under  cover ; patrols  are  sent  out  in  front  and 
upon  the  flanks  to  reconnoiter. 

In  the  second  case,  the  advance  guard  halts  at  the 
position  and  sends  scouts  and  small  patrols  out  in  front 
and  upon  the  flanks.  The  captain  makes  his  prelimi- 
nary dispositions  as  explained  for  the  company  in  bat- 
talion ; then  takes  the  battle  formation. 

The  captain  disposes  the  support  and  reserve  so  as  to 
protect  the  flanks  of  the  firing  line. 

The  supports,  either  wholly  or  in  part,  may  be  placed 
in  the  firing  line  from  the  very  beginning  of  the  en- 
gagement, in  order  to  secure  superiority  of  fire  and  a 
front  at  least  equal  to  that  of  the  attack. 

The  captain  keeps  a portion  of  his  reserve  in  hand,  to 
execute  a counter  attack  at  the  moment  the  enemy 
reaches  the  position,  or  to  cover  the  retreat. 

Advantage  should  be  taken  of  every  opportunity  to 
make  short  and  energetic  counter  attacks  upon  the 
weak  points  of  the  enemy’s  line.  When  the  enemy  is 
repulsed,  he  should  be  damaged  as  much  as  possible  by 
increased  energy  of  fire  and  should  be  pursued  un- 
less this  would  compromise  the  security  of  the  posi- 
tion. 

If  necessary  to  retreat,  the  captain  disposes  the  re- 
mainder of  his  reserve  in  such  position  as  to  most 
readily  hold  the  enemy  in  check,  near  one  of  the  flanks, 
if  possible ; the  firing  line  unmasks  the  reserve  and 
takes  position  in  rear  of  it,  the  reserve  protects  the  re- 
treat of  the  firing  line  and  retires  in  turn  under  its  pro- 
tection. 

The  company  thus  retires  from  position  to  position ; 
it  is  assembled  and  placed  in  column  of  route  when  out 
of  range  of  the  enemy. 

Unless  ordered  to  the  contrary,  a position  should  not 
be  abandoned  except  in  the  last  extremity. 


214 


THE  COMPANY. 


Action  Against  Cavalry. 

598.  As  a principle,  the  advance  or  attack  of  infantry 
should  not  be  checked  by  the  appearance  of  cavalry. 
The  latter  should  be  kept  at  a distance  by  means  of 
volleys  executed  by  subdivisions  designated  for  this 
purpose. 

If  in  line,  and  attacked  in  front,  the  company  should 
receive  the  charge  without  changing  its  formation.  If 
attacked  in  flank,  the  company,  or  a part  of  it  on  the 
threatened  dank,  changes  front  to  face  the  attack. 

If  in  battle  formation,  and  cavalry  attack  as  fora- 
gers or  in  mass,  it  is  better  to  receive  the  attack  at  a 
halt,  than  to  rally.  Only  such  dispositions  are  made 
as  will  quickly  develop  the  greatest  intensity  of  fire.  If 
attacked  in  front,  the  firing  line  opens  fire  ; the  sec- 
tions of  the  support  are  placed  in  rear  of  the  flanks  to 
guard  the  latter  and  fire  upon  the  horsemen  who  en- 
velop them.  If  attacked  in  flank,  the  sections  of  the 
support  and  reserve  face  so  as  to  find  themselves  ar- 
ranged in  echelon  ready  to  protect  the  threatened  flank 
by  their  fire.  If  attacked  by  echelon,  the  fire  will  not 
be  directed  upon  a fraction  already  repulsed,  but  upon 
the  one  following  it. 

In  a personal  encounter  the  foot  soldier  should  gain 
the  left  flank  of  the  horseman. 

Defense  and  Attack  of  Artillery. 

599.  Infantry  under  artillery  fire,  seeks  to  lessen  its 
effect  by  appropriate  formations  and  use  of  cover. 

Defense. 

600.  A commander  of  infantry  supports  the  batteries 
in  his  vicinity. 

Artillery  separated  from  the  other  arms  is  furnished 
with  a special  support. 


THE  COMPANY. 


215 


An  infantry  support  for  artillery  protects  the  flanks 
and  rear  of  the  batteries  and  opposes  the  enemy’s  in- 
fantry or  cavalry  acting  against  them ; it  is  usually 
posted  on  the  flanks. 

Attack. 

601.  The  company  is  disposed  as  for  the  attack  of  a 
position,  but  the  firing  line  m.ay  be  deplo3^ed  as  skir- 
mishers at  a greater  distance  and  the  front  may  be  more 
extended ; the  rear  echelons,  if  need  be,  are  also  de- 
ployed. 

When  artillery  is  in  motion,  the  fire  is  directed  pref- 
tirably  upon  the  horses. 


216 


THE  BATTALION. 


THE  BATTALION. 

602.  The  principles  of  instruction  for  the  squad, 
platoon  and  company  in  extended  order  apply. 

603.  The  battalion  is  formed  for  battle  in  three  eche- 
lons; a firing  line,  a line  of  supports  and  a reserve. 

In  battalion,  the  firing  line  and  supports  together  are 
designated  the  fighting  line;  it  may  be  composed  of 
one,  two  or  even  three  companies. 

Extension. 

604.  Whatever  be  the  formation  of  the  battalion,  the 
major  designates  the  company  or  companies  to  form 
the  fighting  line  and  those  for  the  reserve,  gives  in- 
structions for  forming  line  of  sections  or  squads,  or  de- 
ploying as  skirmishers,  indicates  the  point  of  direction 
and  the  object  of  the  movement,  and  commands  : 1. 
Form  for  attack,  2.  (Such)  the  base  company,  3.  march. 


? - 

130  ras 

4 


m SCOUTS 


2»S£a  JOSEC.  y>SEO, 

PAQE3'’*^^  eo  PACES 


^LT 


2^T 

200'YDS 


yPICHTIfiSUtiS 


OAfT 


% 

I 

1 


PRESERVE 


PI.  99,  Par.  604. 


THE  BATTALION. 


217 


The  captains  of  companies  for  the  fighting  line  desig- 
nate the  sections  for  supports,  and  cause  their  com- 
panies to  advance  in  the  given  direction  and  take  the 
battle  formation.  The  firing  line  extends  as  directed 
by  the  major  and  according  to  the  principles  explained 
for  the  company. 

The  extension  completed,  there  should  be  in  the  line 
of  skirmishers  an  interval  of  about  fifteen  paces  between 
the  companies,  which  they  should  presei've  during  the 
advance. 

The  reserve  is  held  about  300  yards  in  rear  of  the  line 
of  supports. 

The  fighting  front  of  a battalion  in  regiment  should 
not  exceed  one  and  one-half  times  the  front  of  the  bat- 
talion in  close  order. 

The  major  posts  himself  where  he  can  best  observe 
and  direct  the  progress  of  the  action,  which  is  usually 
between  the  line  of  supports  and  reserve  ; if  he  quits 
this  place,  he  leaves  a mpn  there  to  tell  where  he  may 
be  found. 

The  senior  officer  with  the  reserve  companies  takes 
command  of  them  when  they  are  united  in  close  order. 

Mounted  officers  dismount  when  the  battalion  opens 
fire ; the  horses  are  taken  back  to  the  reserve  of  the 
regiment. 

When  the  color  of  the  regiment  is  with  a battalion 
that  takes  the  battle  formation,  it  joins  the  regimental 
reserve,  whose  commander  either  directs  the  color  to 
join  a certain  company  or  detaches  a guard  to  remain 
with  it  during  the  action. 

Marchings. 

605.  The  oattalion  in  battle  formation  regulates  its 
march  as  explained  for  marching  in  line.  The  base 
squad  keeps  the  line  of  direction  independently  of  the 
movements  of  the  companies,  under  the  supervision  of 


218 


THE  BATTALION. 


the  squad  leader  and  the  chief  of  section  to  which  this 
squad  belongs  ; if  the  companies  for  any  reason  are 
obliged  to  give  way  they  regain  their  places  as  soon  as 
possible. 

The  supports  and  reserve  conform  to  the  movements 
of  the  firing  line. 

It  is  important  that  the  line  of  direction  should  be 
correctly  determined  before  taking  up  the  advance  ; if, 
however,  changes  of  direction  become  necessary  they 
are  made  gradually  by  slightly  changing  the  direction 
of  the  base  squad  from  time  to  time. 

Relieving  and  Reinforcing  the  Firing  Line. 

606.  These  movements  are  executed  on  the  principles 
explained  for  the  company,  either  as  ordered  by  the 
major,  or,  in  each  company,  by  its  captain.  Relieving 
skirmishers  is,  however,  an  exceptional  movement. 

Assembling  and  Rallying. 

607.  When  no  longei*  compelled  to  remain  in  ex- 
tended order,  the  major  assembles  the  battalion. 

The  major  may  order  one  or  more,  or  even  all  the 
companies  in  the  firing  line,  to  rally. 

The  reserve  approaches  and  selects  a favorable  posi- 
tion for  supporting  the  companies  that  have  rallied. 


THE  BATTALION. 


219 


THE  BATTALION  IN  ACTION. 

General  Rules. 

608.  The  major  regulates  the  progress  of  the  action, 
sees  that  the  firing  line  advances  upon  the  indicated 
objective,  hastens  or  delays  the  reinforcement  by  the 
supports,  and  disposes  the  reserve  so  as  to  guard 
against  surprise;  leaving  the  execution  of  details  to  his 
subordinates,  he  exercises  a general  contjoi,  and  en- 
deavors constantly  to  increase  the  energy  of  the 
action. 

When  necessary,  he  indicates  what  measures  are  to 
be  taken  to  assure  the  occupation  of  the  position,  but 
should  leave  to  each  commander  the  discretion  neces- 
sary to  enable  him  to  profit  by  all  circumstances. 

Each  captain  in  the  fighting  line  regulates  the  march 
of  the  line  within  the  limits  assigned  him,  determines 
the  distances  to  be  passed  over  in  rushes,  and  brings 
his  support  upon  the  firing  line,  pursuant  to  orders,  oi 
without  orders  if  the  necessities  of  the  moment  re- 
quire ; he  directs  the  fire  and  regulates  its  intensity. 

THE  OFFENSIVE. 

The  Battalion  in  Regiment. 

609.  When  the  major  receives  orders  to  attack,  ho 
gives  his  instructions  (Par.  604),  and  commands  : 1. 
Form  for  attach,  2.  (Such)  the  base  company,  3.  march. 

The  companies  in  the  fighting  line  conform  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  company.  (Pars.  583  to  594.) 

The  reserve  conforms  to  the  movements  of  the  fight- 
ing line,  and,  without  waiting  for  orders,  gradually 
draws  nearer,  so  as  to  be  ready  to  replace  the  supports- 
when  the  latter  have  been  absorbed,  the  reserve  com- 
panies taking  the  battle  formation. 


220 


THE  BATTALION. 


The  attack  is  made  as  prescribed  for  the  company. 
When  the  firing-  line  is  about  500  yards  from  the  ene- 
my’s position,  the  first  echelon  of  the  reserve  is  about 
100  yards  and  the  second  about  200  yards  in  rear  of  the 
firing  line. 

When  the  major  thinks  necessary  he  places  one  or 
more  platoons  of  the  reserve  in  the  firing  line.  At 
about  200  yards  from  the  enemy  bayonets  are  fixed  and 
the  rapid  fire  is  opened  ; the  last  of  the  reserve,  in  rear 
of  the  point  at  which  the  main  effort  is  to  be  made,  is 
held  in  readiness  to  reinforce  the  line. 

The  battalion  in  the  second  line  of  the  regiment 
draws  nearer  so  as  to  replace  the  battalion  reserve  if 
necessary,  and  take  part  in  the  charge. 

If  the  rapid  fire  does  not  shake  the  enemy,  the  re- 
mainder of  the  battalion  reserve  is  quickly  brought  up, 
and  another  rush  made,  followed  by  the  rapid  fire. 

During  this  fire  the  battalion  of  the  second  line  rein- 
forces the  firing  line  ; at  the  signal  from  the  colonel,  the 
field  music  sounds  the  charge  and  the  whole  line  rushes 
upon  the  enemy. 

As  soon  as  the  position  has  been  carried,  the  firing 
line  advances  until  it  has  found  a position  favorable  for 
firing  upon  the  enemy.  The  parts  of  the  reserve  not  in 
the  firing  line  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  pursue 
the  enemy  or  to  resist  a counter  attack. 

The  first  opportunity  is  taken  to  assemble  the  com- 
panies on  the  captured  position.  The  major  fornls  the 
battalion  and  disposes  his  troops  so  as  to  secure  the  po- 
sition, and  to  pursue  the  enemy,  if  ordered. 

If  repulsed,  the  line  rallies  under  the  protection  of 
the  reserve. 


The  Battalion  Acting  Alone. 

610.  The  action  is  conducted  on  the  general  principles 
explained  for  the  battalion  in  regiment ; the  front  may 
be  more  extended,  but  the  major  must  be  able  to  direct 


THE  BATTALION. 


221 


the  action  and  secure  the  increasing  power  of  the  suc- 
cessive efforts.  If  the  strength  of  his  command  war- 
rants it,  he  may  attack  both  in  front  and  flank.  He 
must  cover  his  flanks  and  secure  his  line  of  communi- 
cation. 

The  enemy  having  been  located,  the  major  makes  his 
dispositions  for  attack. 

If  the  attack  succeeds,  the  battalion  takes  position 
and  fires  upon  the  enemy,  as  explained  for  the  battalion 
in  regiment,  and,  if  opportunity  offers,  will  pursue  the 
enemy  (Par.  595). 

If  repulsed,  the  rally  is  protected  by  the  parts  of  the 
reserve  that  have  not  been  engaged. 

THE  DEFENSIVE. 

The  Battalion  in  Regiment. 

611.  The  reconnoissance  and  occupation  of  the  posi- 
tion are  made  on  the  principles  explained  for  the  com- 
pany acting  alone  under  the  protection  of  the  patrols 
commanded  by  one  or  more  offlcei  s ; these  patrols  not 
only  endeavor  to  discover  the  enemy’s  position  and 
direction  of  attack,  but  also  keep  his  scouts  and  recon- 
noitering  parties  at  a distance. 

As  a rule,  the  battle  formation  is  the  same  as  on  the 
offensive.  When  it  is  desirable  to  have  an  extended 
and  dense  firing  line  from  the  start,  the  two  companies 
in  the  fighting  line  may  be  directed  to  keep  but  one 
section  each  in  support.  The  same  result  is  obtained 
by  placing  three  companies  in  the  fighting  line,  each 
having  two  sections  in  support. 

The  line  of  defense  is  in  general  determined  by  th© 
configuration  of  the  ground  ; the  points  that  command 
a clear  field  of  fire  in  front  and  afford  cover  should 
usually  be  strongly  occupied.  The  different  parts  of 
the  front  should  be  able  to  assist  each  other,  and 
should  not  be  separated  by  impassable  obstacles. 


222 


THE  BATTALION. 


If  time  and  circumstances  permit,  tVie  position  is 
strengthened  by  hasty  entrenchments. 

The  strong  points  in  the  line,  such  as  woods,  fences, 
buildings,  rising  ground,  etc.,  are  placed  in  a state  of 
defense  or  strengthened  by  field  works  ; in  the  selection 
of  these  points  the  chief  consideration  is  a clear  field  of 
fire  toward  the  front  and  flanks. 

The  strong  points  are  connected  by  shelter  trenches, 
intervals  being  left  to  facilitate  counter  attacks  and 
for  passing  from  the  defensive  to  the  offensive. 

The  action  is  conducted  according  to  the  principles 
explained  (Par.  596). 

The  dispositions  of  the  rear  echelons  of  the  battalion 
depend  upon  the  movements  of  the  assailant ; the  de- 
fender uses  every  means  to  overwhelm  by  fire  such 
bodies  of  the  enemy  as  remain  in  close  order  ; the  sup- 
ports are  placed  in  the  firing  line  in  proportion  to  the 
necessities  of  the  case.  Troops  in  rear,  firing  over 
the  heads  of  those  in  front,  should  use  volleys 
only. 

When  all  the  supports  are  in  the  firing  line  and  the 
enemy  probably  within  500  yards  of  the  position,  a 
part  of  the  reserve  reinforces  the  line  ; the  other  part  is 
held  ready  either  to  add  the  effect  of  its  fire  to  that  of 
the  line  or  to  assist  in  the  counter  attack  when  the  of- 
fensive is  taken  up. 

In  the  last  stage  of  the  action,  the  firing  line  may,  if 
necessary,  be  reinforced  by  the  entire  reserve. 

If  retreat  becomes  necessary,  it  is  conducted  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  company.  When  all  the  battalion  re- 
serves have  been  absorbed  on  the  firing  line,  the  troops 
in  the  second  line  take  position  and  protect  the  bat- 
talion while  rallying,  or,  by  an  energetic  counter  attack, 
endeavor  to  gain  the  ascendency. 

When,  in  obedience  to  orders,  resistance  is  not  to  be 
carried  to  the  last  extremity , the  retreat  is  executed  by ^ 
echelons  from  position  to  position. 


the  battalion, 


223 


The  Battalion  Acting  Alone. 

612.  The  general  principles  stated  for  the  company 
acting  alone  apply  to  the  battalion. 

The  battalion  should  not  deploy  before  the  enemy’s 
position  is  known. 

The  battalion  takes  position  and  prepares  to  receive 
the  attack,  observing  the  following  conditions  : 

The  front  must  be  sufficiently  occupied  and  extended 
from  the  beginning  of  the  action  ; this  will  usually  re- 
quire two  companies  in  the  fighting  line  ; the  other  two 
companies  are  held  in  reserve,  in  rear  of  the  supports, 
covering  the  flanks  and  extending  beyond  them. 

When  the  supports  have  been  absorbed  in  the  firing 
line,  they  are  replaced  by  the  reserve  companies,  which 
are  disposed  so  as  to  protect  the  flanks. 

When  the  front  of  the  position  is  very  strong,  a rela- 
tively greater  part  of  the  command  may  be  placed  in 
the  reserve  to  insure  more  decisive  effect  in  counter 
pittacks. 

DISPOSITIONS  OF  A BATTALION. 

Operating  on  a Flank  of  a Line. 

613.  The  special  object  may  be  to  secure  the  flank, 
to  envelope  the  enemy’s  flank,  or  to  engage  the  enemy 
at  one  point,  while  the  regiment  or  brigade  prepares 
and  executes  the  principal  attack  at  another.  In  these 
different  cases  the  major  conforms  to  the  principles  laid 
down  for  the  offensive  or  defensive  action  of  the  bat- 
talion in  regiment,  as  the  case  may  require. 

As  Advance  Guard  of  a Regiment. 

614.  The  advance  guard  acts  offensively  or  defensive 
ly  according  to  circumstances.  Its  action  is  subordinat 
to  that  of  the  main  body  ; it  should  carefully  avoid  be- 
coming so  involved  as  to  compel  the  latter  to  depart 
from  its  original  purpose.  The  battalion  as  advance 


224 


THE  BATTALION. 


g’uard  acts  on  the  offensive  as  prescribed  for  the  bat- 
talion acting  alone ; on  the  defensive  it  may  take  the 
battle  formation  with  three  or  even  four  companies  at 
the  first  indication  of  the  presence  of  the  enemy  ; the 
strong  points  are  occupied  and  the  front  extended  as 
much  as  necessary  to  prevent  being  outflanked. 

If  the  enemy  without  attacking  shows  himself  in 
force  the  battalion  occupies  the  strong  points. 

As  Rear  Guard  of  a Regiment. 

615.  The  object  of  the  rear  guard  is  to  retard  the  en- 
emy so  as  to  enable  the  main  body  to  gain  time  or  dis- 
tance ; it  acts  chiefly  on  the  defensive. 

If  the  battalion  as  rear  guard  be  attacked,  it  will  not 
carry  resistance  so  far  as  to  be  cut  off  from  the  main 
body. 

Advantage  is  taken  of  any  want  of  precaution  on  the 
part  of  the  enemy  to  draw  him  into  ambush  or  to  make 
sudden,  short  and  energetic  offensive  returns. 

The  rear  guard  may  sometimes  take  the  offensive, 
for  example  : When  it  is  guarding  a defile  during  the 
passage  of  the  main  body,  or  when  opposing  the  egress 
of  the  enemy  at  the  outlet  of  a pass. 

The  rear  guard  should  not  fight  to  extremity  except 
to  secure  the  safety  of  the  main  body. 

Against  Cavalry. 

616.  The  principles  stated  for  the  company  apply  to 
the  battalion. 

If  there  be  time,  the  major  may  place  the  companies 
in  echelon. 

To  this  end  he  indicates  the  base  company,  the  in- 
terval and  distance  which  should  separate  the  echelons 
and  the  relative  positions  of  the  companies. 

The  base  company  stands  fast ; the  others  are  rapidly 
led  by  their  captains  to  the  places  they  are  to  occupy. 


THE  BATTALION. 


225 


The  echelons  are  formed  by  advancing  companies  on 
the  flank  farthest  from  the  enemy’s  artillery  ; they  are 
disposed  in  such  a manner  as  to  afford  the  heaviest 
possible  fire  without  risk  of  firing  into  one  another. 

DEFENSE  AND  ATTACK  OF  ARTILLERY. 

617.  The  principles  stated  for  the  company  apply  to 
the  battalion. 

Defense, 

618.  The  companies  are  posted  in  front  of  the  intervals 
between  groups  of  batteries  and  on  the  flanks,  so  as  not 
to  hinder  the  fire  of  the  artillery ; they  are  held  ready  to 
meet  the  attack. 

Attack. 

619.  The  battalion  is  disposed  as  for  the  attack  of 
a position ; the  parts  in  close  order  advance  in 
echelons  and  thin  lines  ; the  advance  is  led  on  as  rapidly 
as  possible  and  the  attack  precipitated  when  within  a 
short  distance  of  the  guns. 

The  action  is  conducted  according  to  the  general 
principles  explained  for  the  company,  and  the  attacks 
should  be  rnade  against  a flank  if  possible. 

If  the  artillery  be  supported  by  infantry,  the  major 
directs  against  the  latter  a sufficient  force  to  silence  its 
fire,  and  uses  the  remainder  of  his  battalion  against  the 
artillery. 

NIGHT  OPERATIONS.^ 

620.  To  be  successful,  a night  attack  should  be  a sur- 
prise ; it  should  be  prepared  secretly,  avoiding  indica^ 
tions  that  might  attract  the  attention  of  the  enemy. 

Once  engaged,  it  is  necessary  to  act  vigorously  and 
promptly. 

It  is  essential  to  operate  over  ground  known  in  ad- 
vance. 


226 


THE  BATTALION. 


It  is  equally  important  that  the  leaders  of  the  differ- 
enfunits  be  carefully  instructed  as  to  the  parts  they 
are  to  take,  the  field  assigned  them,  the  rallying  pointe 
and  the  line  of  retreat. 

On  the  offensive,  the  troops  usually  operate  in  com- 
pact formation,  so  as  to  be  kept  in  hand  and  to  prevent 
misunderstandings. 

Under  cover  of  darkness  the  assailant  a.pproaches,  in 
order  and  silence,  and  without  firing,  as  near  as  possible 
to  the  enemy’s  position ; he  then  assaults  resolutely, 
not  replying  to  the  fire,  and  comes  as  quickly  as  possi- 
ble to  the  encounter,  hand  to  hand. 

On  the  defensive,  when  a night  attack  is  expected, 
the  position  is  reinforced  by  troops  or  strengthened  by 
obstacles  or  hasty  entrenchments  ; the  positions  to  be 
occupied  by  the  different  units  are  indicated  and  under- 
stood beforehand. 

After  the  opening  of  the  action,  all  movements  which 
could  produce  disorder  or  confusion  are  avoided. 

The  fire  is  directed  particularly  upon  the  approaches 
to  the  position. 


THE  REGIMENT. 


227 


THE  REGIMENT. 

621.  The  principles  explained  for  the  battalion  apply. 

A battalion  in  battle  formation  is  said  to  be  in  the 
fighting  line  when  it  has  any  part  in  the  firing  line. 
This  rule  applies  to  larger  commands. 

The  regiment  is  formed  for  battle  in  two  or  three 
lines  depending  upon  the  extent  of  front  to  be  occupied; 
this  should  not  exceed  the  front  of  the  regiment  formed 
in  one  line  in  close  order  increased  by  one-half  the  in- 
terval between  it  and  the  adjacent  regiments. 

When  in  two  lines,  two  battalions  constitute  the 
fighting  line  ; the  other  is  posted  as  reserve  about  six 
hundred  yards  in  rear. 

When  in  three  lines,  one  battalion  forms  the  fighting 
line,  one  about  six  hundred  and  the  other  about  twelve 
hundred  yards  in  rear. 

The  reserve  may  be  posted  in  rear  of  the  center,  or 
in  rear  of  one  or  both  flanks. 

The  colonel  takes  post  near  the  center  of  the  line  of 
the  battalion  reserves  of  the  fighting  line  ; if  called 
elsewhere  he  indicates  his  position. 

He  superintends  the  action  and  directs  the  majors  of 
battalions  in  reserve  when  to  reinforce. 

Unless  he  specifies  the  formations  for  battalions  in 
reserve,  the  majors  adopt  the  formations  they  deem 
best  suited  to  the  ground  and  other  circumstances. 


228 


THE  BRIGADE  IN  BATTLE. 


THE  BRIGADE  IN  BATTLE. 

622.  The  formation  depends  upon  whether  the  bri- 
gade is  acting  alone  or  with  other  troops,  and  varies  in 
each  case  to  suit  the  extent  and  character  of  the  front 
to  be  occupied. 

623.  If  formed  in  one  line,  two  battalions  constitute 
the  fighting  line  of  each  regiment,  the  third  battalion  of 
each  regiment  being  held  as  a regimental  reserve.  In 
this  case  there  is  no  separate  brigade  reserve,  unless 
furnished  by  another  brigade. 

624.  In  two  lines,  the  two  leading  regiments  consti- 
tute the  fighting  line  of  the  brigade  and  are  formed  as 
above.  The  rear  regiment,  as  a second  line,  constitutes 
the  brigade  reserve  and  is  posted  about  six  hundred 
paces  in  rear  of  the  reserve  battalions  of  the  leading 
regiments ; it  will  be  given  the  battle  formation  if 
necessary. 

If  the  brigade  approaches  the  fiei  J of  battle  marching 
in  column  of  fours,  the  general  may  order  the  leading 
regiments  on  the  fighting  line,  without  regimental  re- 
serves, and  supply  a battalion  from  the  rear  regiment 
to  each  regiment  in  the  fighting  line  as  a reserve.  This 
formation  is  open  to  the  objection  of  speedily  disinte- 
grating the  rear  regiment,  and  will  be  resorted  to  only 
when  a rapid  extension  of  front  is  of  the  first  import- 
ance. 

625.  For  a more  powerful  attack,  the  regiments  may 
be  formed  side  by  side,  each  regiment  in  three  lines. 
The  colonels  will  avoid  calling  on  their  second  battalions 
prematurely ; the  third  battalion  should  not  enter  ac- 
tion without  orders  from  the  general. 

626.  The  general  will  make  such  changes  in  the  fore- 
going formations  as  are  rendered  necessary  by  the  char- 
acter of  the  action  and  the  nature  of  the  ground. 


THE  BRIGADE  IN  BATTLE. 


229 


627.  The  general  has  no  fixed  portion,  but  will  al- 
ways indicate  where  reports  will  be  received. 

628.  If  compelled  to  give  an  order  to  a battalion  com* 
mander,  the  general  should  so  inform  his  colonel  as 
soon  as  practicable. 

629.  The  general  may  direct  when  the  troops  compos- 
ing the  first  line  shall  pass  from  close  to  extended 
order,  or  this  may  be  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  regi- 
mental and  battalion  commanders  ; a reserve  need  not 
necessarily  be  posted  in  rear  of  the  line  ; frequently  it 
may  be  advantageously  formed  in  echelon  with  that 
line.  This  rule  is  general. 

To  Withdraw  the  Brigade, 

630.  The  general  sends  orders  to  the  colonels  : With, 
draw  and  form  in  one  (or  two)  lines  on  (such)  battalion, 
(such)  regiment ; or,  Withdi^aw  and  form  in  column  on 
(such)  battalion,  (such)  regiment. 

The  general  indicates  the  position  to  be  occupied  by 
the  designated  battalion  and  the  colonels  add  the  neces- 
sary commands.  The  battalions  form  in  the  same  order 
as  before  the  deployment,  or  the  general  mav  change 
this  order. 

631.  If  the  order  be  to  form  in  column,  column  of 
fours  will  be  understood,  unless  the  general  indicates 
another  formation. 


230 


THE  DIVISION  IN  BATTLE. 


THE  DIVISION  IN  BATTLE, 

632.  The  division  may  be  formed  with  one  or  two  bri- 
gades in  the  fighting  line  and  the  others  in  the  reserve, 
or  the  three  brigades  may  be  placed  in  the  fighting  line; 
in  either  case,  each  brigade  takes  one  of  the  formations 
prescribed  for  the  brigade  in  battle. 

The  artillery  takes  the  positions  assigned  by  the  divi- 
sion commander. 

Officers  in  command  of  the  reserves  will  adopt  such 
formations  as  will  not  unnecessarily  interfere  with 
the  maneuvers  of  the  other  arms. 

633.  The  division  commander  conducts  the  action  on 
the  principles  prescribed  for  smaller  commands. 

634.  The  officers  of  the  reserve  will  be  constantly  on 
the  alert  to  prevent  any  panic  that  may  arise  among  the 
troops  of  the  first  line  spreading  to  their  own. 

635.  The  reserve  is  not  necessarily  united ; the  regi- 
ments and  battalions  composing  it  may  be  posted  in  rear 
of  different  parts  of  the  first  line. 


ADVANCE  AND  REAR  GUARD. 


331 


ADVANCE  AND  REAR  GUARD. 

636.  An  advance  guard  is  a body  of  troops  thrown  out 
in  front  of  a marching  column  to  cover  its  movements, 
to  prevent  surprise  and  gain  information. 

637.  In  an  advance,  it  seizes  advantageous  positions 
and  holds  them  until  the  main  body  comes  up;  or  holds 
in  check  the  advancing  enemy  until  the  main  body  can 
deploy  and  take  up  a position  to  meet  him. 

638.  In  retreat,  it  prepares  the  way  for  the  main  body, 
guarding  and  repairing  roads,  bridges,  etc.;  sweeping 
away  any  partisans  or  guerrillas.  If  hostile  troops  have 
outmarched  the  column  and  are  in  front  of  it,  the  ad- 
vance guard  performs  duties  of  the  same  nature  as  in 
the  advance. 

639.  The  advance  guard  is  divided  into  two  nearly 
equal  parts,  the  vanguard  and  the  reserve. 

The  vanguard  is  subdivided  into  the  advance  party 
and  the  support.  The  advance  party  furnishes  the  lead- 
ing and  flanking  groups.  The  support  furnishes  its  own 
flankers. 

640.  A small  advance  guard,  consisting  of  a com- 
pany of  infantry  of  one  hundred  men,  may  be  disposed 
as  follows  : 

A point,  or  leading  group,  consisting  of  three  men 
under  a corporal;  a flanking  group  of  three  men  on  either 
hand,  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  distant  and  somewhat 
retired ; the  remainder  of  the  advance  party,  fourteen 
men,  under  a sergeant,  at  one  hundred  yards  in  rear  of 
the  point. 

The  support  follows  at  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  in 
rear  of  the  advance  party,  throwing  out,  if  necessary, 
two  flanking  groups  of  three  men  each,  slightly  in  ad- 
vance of  the  support,  and  somewhat  farther  out  than 


232 


advance  and  rear  guard. 


the  flankers  of  the  advance  party.  The  support,  includ- 
ing its  flankers,  numbers  twenty-five  men.  The  com- 
mander of  the  vanguard  is  with  the  support. 


PI.  100,  Par.  640. 


The  reserve^  one-half  of  the  advance  guard,  follows  at 
two  hundred  and  fifty  yards  in  rear  of  the  support ; the 
i^serve  may  throw  out  flanking  detachments  at  from 
two  hundred  to  four  hundred  yards,  on  either  or  both 
flanks,  and  somewhat  m advance  and  in  rear  of  its  posi- 
tion. 


ADVANCE  AND  REAR  GUARD. 


233 


The  commander  of  the  advance  guard  is  with  the  re- 
serve. 

The  main  column  follows  at  three  hundred  yards  in 
rear  of  the  reserve,  or  eight  hundred  yards  from  the 
point. 

When  necessary,  the  support  sends  out  one  or  two 
men  to  preserve  communication  with  the  advance 
party  ; the  reserve  may  send  out  men  to  preserve  com- 
munication with  the  vanguard  and  with  the  main 
body. 

641.  Rear  guards  Sive  corresponding  bodies  in  rear  of 
the  column.  In  a forward  movement  they  protect  the 
rear  of  the  column  from  raiding  parties  or  detachments, 
arrest  stragglers,  prevent  pillaging,  etc. 

642.  In  a retreat  they  cover  the  column,  checking  the 
enemy,  and  delaying  him  so  as  to  insure  the  safety  of 
the  column. 

643.  The  example  given  of  the  order  of  march  of 
a small  advance  guard  serves  equally  well  as  a type  for 
a rear  guard  of  the  same  strength,  if  it  be  considered  as 
faced  to  the  rear  throughout. 

644.  The  strength  of  the  advance  guard  in  a forward 
movement  varies  from  one-eighth  to  one-fourth  of  the 
whole  force ; in  a very  small  force,  one-eighth ; in  a 
very  large  force,  one-fourth  ; and  generally  one- 
sixth.  The  rear  guard  is  generally  one-half  the 
strength  of  the  advance  guard. 

In  retreat,  the  proportions  given  above  for  the  ad- 
vance guard  would  apply  to  the  rear  guard,  and  the 
advance  guard  would  be  half  the  strength  of  the  rear 
guard. 

It  should  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  these  pro- 
portions vary  according  to  circumstances,  and  must  de- 
pend upon  the  judgment  of  the  commander. 

645.  The  foregoing  rules  must  be  modified  to  suit  the 
varying  conditions  of  advance  and  retreat. 


234 


outposts. 


OUTPOSTS. 

646.  The  size  of  the  detachment  for  outpost  duty  de- 
pends upon  the  strength  of  the  main  command,  the 
proximity  of  the  enemy,  the  extent  of  front  to  be 
covered,  the  character  of  the  country,  etc.;  it  should 
not,  as  a rule,  exceed  one-sixth  of  the  whole  force. 

647.  The  object  is  to  guard  all  approaches,  to  obtain 
the  earliest  information  of  the  enemy’s  movements, 
and  to  obstruct  and  delay  his  advance. 

648.  The  outposts  should  cover  the  entire  front,  ex- 
tend well  beyond  the  flanks  and  toward  the  rear. 

Outposts  are  generally  disposed  as  follows : 

First : — A line  of  sentinels. 

Second: — A line  of  small  groups,  called  pickets. 

Third  : — A line  of  larger  groups,  called  supports. 

Fourth  : — The  reserve. 

The  reserve  is  sometimes  omitted,  when  the  supports 
hold  a strong  defensive  line. 

Posts  in  the  line  of  sentinels  are  from  one  hundred  to 
three  hundred  yards  apart,  and  one  or  two  men  are 
placed  on  each  post. 

The  sentinels  keep  themselves  concealed  and  watch 
the  ground  in  their  front  and  between  them  and  the 
posts  on  their  right  and  left ; at  least  one  man  on  each 
post  must  always  be  on  the  alert. 

The  picket  is  posted  about  four  hundred  yards  in  rear 
of  the  center  of  the  line  of  sentinels  for  which  it  fur- 
nishes reliefs.  The  picket,  when  necessary,  sends  out 
patrols. 

The  support  is  posted  about  six  hundred  yards  in  rear 
of  the  center  of  the  line  of  pickets. 

The  reserve  is  about  one  thousand  yards  in  rear  of 
the  line  of  supports,  and  about  two  thousand  yards  in 
front  of  the  main  body. 


OUTPOSTS. 


335 


tea*,- 


T’ 

'•/r~ 

i 


Q 


^INgOP^ 

PI.  101,  Par.  649. 


The  distances  given 
««  above  will  be  modified 
according  to  circum- 
stances by  the  com- 
mander of  the  outposts. 

649.  Plate  No.  101 
shows  an  outpost  com- 
posed of  an  infantry 
battalion  of  four  hun- 
dred men,  covering  a 
front  of  one  mile. 

650.  The  line  of 
sentinels  and  the  line  of 
pickets  may  be  replaced 
by  a single  line  of  posts 
of  four  men  each.  The 
posts  should  be  about  one 
hundred  yards  apart, 
and  one  man  at  each  post 
should  be  continually  on 
the  alert. 

The  line  of  small  posts 
should  not  be  more  tha». 
three  hundred  yards  in 
advance  of  the  supports. 
As  a rule,  this  formation 
should  be  adopted  only 
when  the  outpost  line  is: 
in  a close  country  and  oc- 
cupies a strong  position. 


236 


MARCHES. 


MARCHES. 

651.  Th^  average  march  for  infantry  is  from  fifteen  to 
twenty  miles  per  day. 

652.  When  troops  move  in  large  bodies,  and  particu- 
larly in  the  vicinity  of  the  enemy,  the  march  should  be 
conducted  in  several  columns,  in  order  to  diminish  the 
depth  of  the  columns  and  to  expedite  the  deployment 
into  line  of  battle. 

653.  The  order  of  march  should  state  the  time  for 
each  division  to  commence  its  movement,  and  the  points 
where  the  divison  or  its  elements  should  enter  the  main 
route,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  march  of  the 
division  preceding  or  following,  and  to  prevent  fatigue 
from  keeping'  men  longer  under  arms  than  is  necessary. 

654.  In  route  marches,  regiments  usually  alternate  in 
leading  the  brigade ; in  like  manner  brigades  alternate 
in  divisions,  and  divisions  in  corps. 

655.  In  large  commands,  the  roads,  if  possible,  are  left 
to  the  artillery  and  trains.  The  order  of  march  should 
state  whether  the  troops  or  t’^ains  should  have  the  right 
of  way. 

656.  Each  brigade  is  provided  with  a corps  of  pio- 
neers under  charge  of  a commissioned  officer.  The  pio- 
neers precede  the  column  for  the  purpose  of  removing 
obstacles  and  preparing  the  way  for  the  troops. 

Whenever  fences,  hedges,  walls,  ditches,  or  small 
streams  are  encountered,  a passageway  is  made  wide 
enough  for  the  column  to  march  without  obstruction. 
This  will  prevent  the  column  from  lengthening  out, 
and  also  prevent  the  fatigue  and  delay  of  regaining 
distances. 

Pioneers,  mounted  or  in  wagons  when  practicable, 
should  repair  the  roads  for  the  trains. 

657.  When  practicable,  marches  should  begin  in  the 
morning  after  the  men  have  had  their  breakfasts. 

After  marching  half  or  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  the 


MARCHES. 


237 


troops  are  halted  for  fifteen  minutes  to  allow  the  men 
to  relieve  themselves  and  to  adjust  their  clothing  and 
accouterments. 

After  the  first  rest  there  should  be  a halt  of  ten  min- 
utes every  hour. 

On  long  marches,  halts  of  half  or  three-quarters  of  an 
hour  should  be  made  for  meals.  The  halt,  if  practica- 
ble, should  be  made  in  the  vicinity  of  wood  and  water. 

When  long  distances  have  to  be  overcome  rapidly,  it 
is  done  by  changing  gaits  ; the  most  favorable  ground 
is  selected  for  the  double  time  ; special  care  should  be 
taken  not  to  exhaust  the  troops  immediately  before  en- , 
gaging  the  enemy. 

658.  No  man  will  be  permitted  to  leave  the  ranks 
without  permission  of  the  captain;  if  the  absence  be, 
for  a few  minutes  only,  the  man  will  leave  his  arms  and 
accouterments  with  the  company  till  he  rejoins  it ; if  he 
needs  medical  attendance,  the  captain  gives  him  a pass 
to  the  surgeon,  showing  his  name,  company,  and  regi- 
ment ; if  he  is  unable  to  return  to  his  company,  the  sur- 
geon admits  him  to  the  ambulance,  or  indorses  the  pass, 
stating  that  he  is  permitted  to  fall  rat  on  account  of 
sickness. 

The  provost  guard  of  the  brigade  marches  in  rear  of 
the  brigade. 

It  is  the  duty  of  all  officers  and  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers to  suppress  straggling.  Men  who  fall  out  of  ranks 
are  examined  by  the  provost  guard,  and  if  absent  without 
authority,  they  are  arrested  and  sent  to  their  regiments. 

659.  Whenever  delays  occur  in  front,  the  brigades 
may  fortn  in  column  of  battalions  and  stack  arms.  It  is 
the  duty  of  all  commanders,  within  their  commands,  to 
investigate,  personally  or  by  means  of  staff  officei^, 
every  cause  of  delay,  and  staff  officers  should  frequently 
be  sent  ahead  for  the  purpose  of  gaining  any  informa- 
tion that  may  shorten  the  march  and  lessen  the  fatigue 
of  the  troops. 


238 


CAMPING. 


CAMPING. 


660.  In  the  presence  of  the  enemy  the  troops  bivouac 
in  position  ; if  safety  permit,  tents  may  be  pitched  im- 
mediately in  rear  of  the  line  of  stacks  ; the  tents  of  the 
company  officers  in  rear  of  their  companies,  the  tents  of 
the  field  and  staff  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the  line  of 
company  officers. 

661.  When  not  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  each 
battalion  usually  camps  in  column  of  companies  at  con- 
venient distances.  The  tents  of  each  company  are  ar- 
ranged in  two  lines,  facing  each  other,  or  in  one  line, 
all  facing  in  the  same  direction  ; the  tents  of  the  com- 
pany officers  are  aranged  in  line  parallel  to  the  flank 
of  the  column  and  at  a convenient  distance,  facing  the 
company  street,  captain’s  tent  on  the  right,  his  lieuten- 
ants’ on  his  left.  The  first  sergeant’s  tent  is  on  the 
flank  of  the  company  toward  the  officers’  tents. 


Of 


DDQ 

a 


ti  a B D BBS  a SIMM 

a a a a bob  ucoup.itiTCifSMr 


OD  DO  po  Da  aa 

a a D a a 

□ aa 

a 

oa  □□  nneta  t rm. staff 
ff.d^AFF  %rCHEN 


00  □□  cncouFOFFicem 

■ o a KITCHENS 

D O a MAJORS  tBATT.  STAFF 
OHirOHEF' 


aOFFfOERS’ SINKS 


PI.  102,  Par.  661. 


The  tents  of  the  major  and  his  staff,  when  practica- 
ble, are  in  line  in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  those  of  the 


CAMPING. 


239 


company  officers ; the  major  opposite  the  center  of 
the  column ; the  adjutant  is  on  the  left  of  the 
major ; the  other  staff  officers  are  on  the  left  of  the 
adjutant. 

The  colonel  is  opposite  the  center  of  the  column  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  majors,  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  his 
right,  the  adjutant  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  the  other 
staff  officers  on  the  left  of  the  adjutant. 

The  tents  of  the  non-commissioned  staff  are  in  rear 
of  the  tents  of  the  staff ; they  may  be  assigned  to  tents 
in  the  companies. 

The  kitchens  of  the  men  are  in  line  on  the  flank  oppo- 
site the  company  officers  ; they  may  be  placed  at  the 
head  or  rear  of  the  column  ; the  sinks  for  the  men  are 
outside  of  the  line  of  kitchens. 

The  kitchens  of  the  officers  are  in  rear  of  their  tents  ; 
the  sinks  for  the  officers  are  in  rear  of  the  line  of  tents 
of  the  field  and  staff. 

The  positions  of  the  color  line,  guard  tents,  field  hos- 
pital, officers’  horses,  baggage  wagons,  etc.,  are  pre- 
scribed by  the  commanding  officer. 

The  width  of  the  company  streets  and  the  streets  in 
front  of  the  company  officers,  majors  and  staffs,  and 
colonel  and  staff,  varies  with  the  nature  of  the  ground 
and  the  strength  of  the  command. 

Ground  for  camping  should  be  succeptible  of  good 
drainage,  and  should  be  near  wood  and  water. 

When  time  will  permit,  all  the  streets  are  ditched ; 
a shallow  ditch  is  also  made  around  each  tent. 

When  straw,  leaves,  or  boughs  are  at  hand,  the  men 
should  be  required  to  raise  their  beds  above  the  ground; 
attention  to  this  rule,  to  cleanliness,  and  to  the  proper 
cooking  of  food  will  greatly  diminish  the  number  and 
frequency  of  camp  diseases. 

On  arriving  in  camp,  if  orders  are  not  communicated 
for  resuming  the  march  the  following  morning,  sinks 
should  at  once  be  dug.  The  sinks  should  be  concealed 


240 


HONORS  TO  BE  PAID  BY  TROOPS. 


by  bushes  or  tents,  and  should  be  covered  daily  with 
fresh  earth. 

In  winter  quarters,  tents  may  be  pitched  on  frames 
made  of  boards  or  split  logs,  the  bunks  of  the  men  be- 
ing arranged  one  above  another. 


HONORS  TO  BE  PAID  BY  TROOPS. 

662.  Honors,  salutes,  etc.,  to  be  paid  by  troops  are 
prescribed  in  Pars.  11,  422  to  441,  inclusive,  and  516  to 
%27,  inclusive,  A.R.,  1889.  [See  Appendix.] 


CEREMONIES* 


241 


CEREMONIES. 

General  Rules, 

663.  On  occasions  of  ceremonies,  except  funeral  es- 
cort, troops  are  arranged  from  right  to  left  in  line  and 
from  head  to  rear  in  column,  in  the  following  order : 
First,  infantry ; second,  light  artillery  ; third,  cavalry. 
Artillery  serving  as  infantry  is  posted  as  infantry.  Dis- 
mounted cavalry  and  marines  are  on  the  left  of  the  in- 
fantry. Engineer  troops  are  on  the  right  of  the  com- 
mand to  which  they  are  attached.  In  the  same  arm, 
regulars,  volunteers,  and  militia  are  posted  in  line  from 
right  to  left,  or  in  column  from  head  to  rear,  in  the 
order  named.  On  all  other  occasions  troops  of  all 
classes,  are  posted  at  the  discretion  of  the  general  or 
senior  commander. 

664.  When  forming  for  ceremonies,  the  companies  of 
the  battalion  are  posted  according  to  the  rank  of  the 
company  commanders  present,  as  shown  in  the  table  in 
Par.  253 ; the  battalions  of  the  regiment,  the  regiments 
of  the  brigade,  the  brigades  of  the  division,  and  the  divi- 
sions of  the  corps  are  posted  from  right  to  left  in  line, 
or  from  head  to  rear  in  column,  in  the  order  of  rank  of 
their  respective  commanders  present,  the  senior  on  the 
right  or  at  the  head. 

665.  At  parades  and  reviews,  the  field  and  staff  are 
habitually  mounted  ; they  are  dismounted  when  there- 
viewing  officer  is  dismounted. 

666.  A non-commissioned  officer  in  command  of  his 
company  retains  his  post  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide 
when  the  battalion  is  in  line ; he  has  the  post  of  the 
captain  when  the  battalion  is  in  column.  At  parade,  be- 
fore bringing  his  company  to  parade  rest,  he  steps  two 
paces  to  the  front  and  faces  to  the  left ; having  given 


242 


CEREMONIES. 


his  commands,  he  resumes  his  post  and  comes  to 
parade  rest.  At  inspection,  when  ranks  are  open,  his 
post  is  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide. 

In  exercises  in  the  manual,  non-commissioned  officers 
commanding  companies  or  platoons  execute  only  the 
order  and  parade  rest ; in  rendering  honors,  the  present 
and  carry  ; while  marching,  the  right  shoulder  and 
carry. 

GENERAL  RULES  FOR  REVIEWS. 

667.  The  adjutanjb  or  adjutant-general  posts  men  or 
otherwise  marks  the  points  where  the  column  changes 
direction,  in  such  manner  that  the  right  flank  in  passing 
shall  be  about  twelve  paces  from  the  reviewing  officer. 
He  also  marks  a point  about  fifty  paces  to  the  left  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  where  each  company  is  brought  to  the 
carry  at  the  command  of  its  captain  ; the  companies  suc- 
cessively resume  the  right  shoulder  about  fifty  paces 
beyond  the  reviewing  officer. 

668.  The  post  of  the  reviewing  officer,  usually  oppo- 
site the  center  of  the  line,  is  marked  by  a flag. 

The  reviewing  officer  should  be  at  the  flag  before  the 
head  of  the  column  reaches  that  point ; before  that  time 
he  may  take  any  position  to  observe  the  movements  of 
the  troops. 

669.  The  reviewing  officer,  his  staff,  and  others  ac- 
companying him  salute  the  color  by  uncovering,  wheth- 
er the  color  salutes  or  not ; the  reviewing  officer  alone 
returns  the  salutes  of  commanders  of  battalions,  bat- 
teries, and  squadrons,  and  all  higher  units. 

670.  The  staff  of  the  reviewing  officer  is  in  single 
rank,  six  paces  in  rear  of  him,  in  the  following  order 
from  right  to  left:  Chief  of  staff,  adjutant-general,  aids, 
then  the  other  members  of  the  staff  in  the  order  of  rank, 
the  senior  on  the  right ; the  flag  and  orderlies  place 
themselves  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  staff,  the  flag  on 
the  right. 


CEREMONIES. 


243 


671.  Officers  of  the  same  or  higher  grade  and  distin- 
guished personages  invited  to  accompany  the  reviewing 
officer  place  themselves  on  his  left;  their  staffs  and  order- 
lies place  themselves  on  the  left  of  the  staff  and  orderlies 
of  the  reviewing  officer;  all  others  who  accompany 
the  reviewing  officer  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  his 
staff,  their  orderlies  in  rear. 

672.  While  riding  around  the  troops,  the  review- 
ing officer  may  direct  his  staff,  flag,  and  orderlies  to 
remain  at  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer,  or  that 
onl^'  his  personal  staff  and  flag  shall  accompany 
him, 

673.  The  staff  officers,  in  passing  around  the  troops, 
or  ill  review,  ride  in  one  or  more  ranks,  according  to  the 
number. 

674.  Commanders  of  brigades  and  divisions  take  their 
places  in  the  column  in  time  to  allow  the  commanders 
in  front  of  them  to  take  their  places  when  at  one  hun- 
dred paces  from  the  reviewing  officer. 

675.  The  staff,  flag,  and  orderlies  of  brigade,  division, 
and  corps  commanders  place  themselves  in  the  order 
prescribed  for  the  staff,  flag,  and  orderlies  of  the  review- 
ing officer. 

676.  Commanders  of  brigades,  divisions  and  corps, 
and  their  staff  officers  draw  sword  when  they  take  their 
places  in  column  before  passing  in  review  ; they  return 
sword  immediately  after  placing  themselves  on  the 
right  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

677.  When  a commander  of  a corps,  division,  brig- 
ade, or  regiment  turns  out  of  the  column  to  place  him- 
self near  the  reviewing  officer,  his  post  is  on  the  right 
of  the  commanders  already  there ; his  staff  will 
arrange  themselves  in  single  rank  on  the  right  of  the 
staff  already  there  ; his  flag  and  orderlies  in  rear  of  his 
staff.  Each  commander,  when  his  rear  company  has 
passed,  salutes  the  reviewing  officer,  and  with  his  staff 
and  orderlies  rejoins  his  command. 


244 


CEREMONIES, 


678.  The  brigade  commander,  while  the  reviewing 
officer  is  not  in  front  or  in  rear  of  his  brigade,  may 
cause  it  to  stand  at  ease,  rest,  or  stack  arms,  and  fall 
out,  and  resume  attention  so  as  not  to  interfere  with 
the  ceremony. 

679.  The  colonels  repeat  the  commands  of  the  brig- 
ade commander. 

680.  Whenever  the  colonel  faces  the  line  to  give  com- 
mands the  majors  face  at  the  same  time ; they  resume 
their  front  after  seeing  the  movement  executed.  All 
such  commands  are  executed  when  they  have  been  re- 
peated by  the  majors.  When  the  command  repeated 
is  present  arms,  the  colonel’s  staff  salute  at  the  com- 
mand of  the  colonel ; the  colonel  and  majors  salute 
after  resuming  their  front.  The  same  rules  apply  to  the 
colonels  and  majors,  and  to  the  general’s  and  colonel’s 
staff  when  the  brigade  commander  gives  commands. 

681.  When  the  general  or  colonel  faces  the  line  to  give 
commands, the  staff  and  orderlies  do  not  change  position. 

682.  When  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles 
him  to  the  honor,  each  color  salutes  at  the  command 
present  arms,  given  or  repeated  by  the  major  of  the 
battalion  with  which  it  is  posted,  and  again  in  passing 
in  review. 

683.  The  band  of  each  regiment  plays  while  the  review- 
ing officer  is  passing  in  front  and  in  rear  of  the  regiment. 

Each  band,  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  turns 
out  of  the  column  and  takes  post  in  front  of  the  review- 
ing officer,  continues  to  play  until  its  regiment  has 
passed,  then  ceases  playing  and  follows  in  rear  of  its 
regiment ; the  band  of  the  next  following  regiment  then 
commences. 

While  marching  in  review,  but  one  band  in  each  brig- 
ade plays  at  a time,  and  but  one  band  at  a time  when 
within  one  hundred  paces  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

684.  When  the  color  salutes,  in  formations  for  re- 
view, the  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles  are  sounded  by 


CEREMONIES. 


245 


sj-U  the  field  music ; in  passing  in  review,  by  the  field 
music  with  the  band  that  is  halted  in  front  of  the  re- 
viewing officer. 

685.  The  formation  for  review  may  be  modified  to 
suit  the  ground,  and  the  present  in  line  and  the  ride 
around  the  line  by  the  reviewing  officer  may  be  dis- 
pensed with  ; the  troops  march  in  review  with  the 
guide  either  right  or  left,  according  as  the  post  of  the 
reviewing  officer  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  column  ; 
the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  who  have 
designated  places  on  a flank  of  the  column  when  the 
gnide  is  right  are  on  the  opposite  flank  when  the  guide 
is  left ; in  the  latter  case,  commanders  and  their  staffs 
turning  out  of  the  column  take  post  as  prescribed,  but 
to  the  left  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

686.  Except  in  the  review  of  a single  battalion,  the 
troops  pass  in  review  in  quick  time  only. 

687.  In  reviews  of  divisions  and  corps,  each  battalion, 
after  its  rear  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer  fift}^ 
paces,  takes  the  double  time  for  one  hundred  paces,  in 
order  not  to  interfere  with  the  march  of  the  column  in 
rear. 

688.  The  troops,  having  passed  the  reviewing  officer, 
return  to  their  camps  by  the  most  practicable  route, 
being  careful  not  to  delay  the  march  of  the  troops  in 
rear  of  them. 


246 


BATTALION  REVIEW. 


BATTALION  REVIEW. 

689.  The  reviewing  officer  takes  his  post. 

690.  The  battalion  being  in  line,  at  order  arms,  the 
major,  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center,  commands  i 
1.  Prepare  for  review,  2.  Open  ranks,  3.  march,  4. 
FRONT. 

Ranks  being  opened,  the  major  takes  post  facing  to 
the  front,  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  bat- 
talion. The  reviewing  officer  moves  a few  paces  toward 
the  major  and  halts,  when  the  major  turns  about  and 
commands:  1.  Carry,  2.  arms,  3.  Present,  4.  arms. 

Should  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitle  him 
to  the  honor,  the  color  salutes  as  arms  are  presented, 
and  the  band  or  field  music  sounds  the  march,  flour- 
ishes, or  ruffles  (Pars.  422  to  427,  A.  R.,  1889).  Arms 
having  been  presented,  the  major  turns  about  and 
•salutes. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute,  after  which 
the  major  turns  about  and  brings  the  battalion  to  order 
arms,  turns  again  to  the  front,  and  returns  sword.  The 
reviewing  officer  now  starts  for  the  right  of  the  line  ; 
the  major  joins  him,  salutes,  and,  taking  post  on  his 
right,  accompanies  him  around  the  battalion.  The  re- 
viewing officer  proceeds  to  the  right  of  the  band,  passes 
in  front  of  the  company  officers  to  the  left  of  the  line 
and  returns  to  the  right,  passing  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers. 

While  the  reviewing  officer  is  going  around  the  bat- 
talion, the  band  plays,  ceasing  when  he  leaves  the  right 
to  return  to  his  post.  On  leaving  the  right  of  the  line, 
the  major  takes  his  place  on  the  left  of  the  reviewing 
officer,  accompanies  him  a few  paces,  salutes,  moves 
directly  to  his  post  in  front  of  the  battalion,  faces  it, 
draws  sword,  and  commands  : 1.  Close  ranks,  2.  march, 
3.  Comjyanies  right,  4.  march. 

The  staff,  non-commissioned  staff,  and  band  take 
their  places  (Pars.  255  and  256). 


BATTALION  REVIEW. 


247 


691.  The  column  being  formed,  the  major  commands  : 

1,  Pass  in  review^  2.  Forward,  3.  Guide  right,  4.  march. 

The  column  moves  off,  the  band  playing ; the  column 

changes  direction,  without  command  from  the  major, 
at  the  points  indicated  ; the  major  takes  his  post,  six 
paces  in  front  of  the  staff,  immediately  after  the  second 
change  ; each  company  is  brought  to  the  carry  at  the 
point  indicated  ; the  band  having  passed  the  reviewing 
officer,  turns  to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  takes  post  in 
front  of  and  facing  the  reviewing  officer,  and  remains 
there  until  the  review  terminates. 

692.  The  major  and  staff,  except  the  adjutant,  salute 
together  when  the  major  is  at  six  paces  from  the  review- 
ing officer,  and  return  to  the  carry  together  when  the 
major  has  marched  six  paces  beyond  him  ; the  other 
officers,  the  non-commissioned  staff, the  drum  major,  and 
non-commissioned  officers  in  command  of  subdivisions, 
salute  and  return  to  the  carry  at  the  points  prescribed 
for  the  major  ; in  saluting,  they  turn  the  head  and  look 
toward  the  reviewing  officer.  Staff  and  non-commis- 
sioned staff  officers  without  swords  salute  with  the  hand. 
If  the  reviewing  officer  be  entitled  to  a salute  from  the 
color,  the  color  salutes  when  at  six  paces  from  him,  and 
is  raised  when  at  six  paces  beyond  him  ; as  the  color 
salutes,  the  field  mu^ic  sounds  the  march,  flourishes,  or 
ruffles,  the  band  continuing  to  play. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  only  the  salute  of  the 
major  and  the  color;  he  salutes  the  color  by  uncovering. 

693.  The  major,  having  saluted,  takes  post  on  the 
right  of  the  reviewing  officer,  remains  there  till  the  rear 
of  the  battalion  has  passed,  and  then  rejoins  his  battal- 
ion. The  band  ceases  to  play  when  the  column  has 
completed  its  first  change  of  direction  after  passing  the 
reviewing  officer. 

694.  When  the  battalion  arrives  at  its  original  posi- 
tion in  column,  the  major  commands  : 1.  Double  time„ 

2.  MARCH. 


248 


BATTALION  REVIEW. 


The  band  plays  in  double  time. 

The  battalion  passes  in  review  as  before,  except  that, 
in  double  time,  there  is  no  saluting  and  pieces  remain  at 
the  right  shoulder. 

The  review  terminates  when  the  rear  company  has 
passed  the  reviewing  officer  ; the  band  then  ceases  to 
play,  and,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  major,  re- 
turns to  the  position  it  occupied  before  marching  in  re- 
view, or  is  dismissed  ; the  major  rejoins  the  battalion 
and  may  order  quick  time.  The  battalion  then  executes 
such  movements  as  the  reviewing  officer  may  have  di- 
rected, or  is  marched  to  its  parade  ground  and  dismissed. 

695.  Marching  past  in  double  time  may,  in  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  reviewing  officer,  be  omitted ; the  review 
then  terminates  as  before. 

696.  When  desirable  that  a battalion  should  be  re- 
viewed before  an  inspector  junior  in  rank  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  the  commanding  officer  will  receive  the 
review,  and  will  be  accompanied  by  the  inspector. 


REGIMENTAL  REVIEW. 


249 


REGIMENTAL  REVIEW. 

697.  The  regiment  is  formed  in  line,  in  line  of  pla^ 
toon  columns  at  close  interval,  or  in  line  of  masses. 

In  Line. 

698.  The  regiment  having  been  formed  in  line,  the 
colonel  takes  his  post  facing  to  the  front;  the  adjutant, 
during  the  review,  is  on  the  right  of  the  staff. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  approaches  his  post,  the 
colonel  faces  the  regiment  and  commands:  1.  Prepare 
for  review,  2.  Open  ranks,  3.  march. 

Ranks  having  been  opened,  the  colonel  faces  to  the 
front. 

The  reviewing  officer,  accompanied  by  his  staff,  then 
approaches  the  colonel,  halting  at  thirty  paces  in  front 
of  him. 

The  colonel  then  faces  the  regiment,  and  commands: 
1.  Carry,  2.  arms,  3.  Present,  4.  arms,  faces  to  the  front 
and  salutes. 

The  staff  salute  and  return  to  the  carry  at  the  com- 
mand of  the  colonel. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  returned  the  salute,  the 
colonel  brings  the  regiment  to  order  arms  ; the  colonel 
and  his  staff  return  sword  ; the  colonel  joins  the  review- 
ing officer,  salutes  and  places  himself  on  his  right.  The 
colonel’s  staff  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  staff 
of  the  reviewing  officer,  unless  the  reviewing  officer  ad- 
vances alone,  in  which  case  the  colonel  alone  joins  and 
accompanies  him,  the  staffs  remaining  at  their  posts. 

The  reviewing  officer  then  goes  to  the  right  of  the  line, 
passes  in  rear  of  the  line  of  majors  to  the  left,  and  re- 
turns in  rear  of  the  fil-e  closers  to  the  right,  whence  he 
proceeds  to  his  post. 


250 


REGIMENTAL  REVIEW. 


While  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  around  the  reg- 
iment, the  band  plays. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  leaves  the  right  of  the 
line,  after  passing  around  the  regiment,  the  colonel  sa- 
lutes, returns  by  the  shortest  line  to  his  post  facing  the 
regiment,  and  draws  sword;  the  colonel’s  staff  take  post 
at  the  same  time,  in  rear  of  the  colonel,  and  draw  sword. 

The  colonel  commands:  1.  Close  ranks,  2.  march,  3. 
Companies  right,  4.  march. 

The  column  having  been  formed,  each  major  takes 
post  six  paces  in  front  of  his  staff ; the  lieutenant- 
colonel  six  paces  to  the  right  of  the  column,  abreast 
of  the  major  of  the  first  battalion. 

The  colonel  then  commands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  2. 
Forward,  3.  Guide  right,  4.  march. 

The  column  passes  in  review  in  quick  time,  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  battalion  review. 
When  the  head  of  the  column  has  made  its  second 
change  of  direction,  the  colonel  places  himself  twenty- 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  band. 

699.  The  colonel  having  saluted,  places  himself  on 
the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer.  The  majors  do  not 
turn  out  of  the  column  after  passing  the  reviewing  of- 
ficer. 

700.  The  rear  of  the  column  having  passed  the  re- 
viewing officer,  the  battalions,  unless  otherwise  directed, 
are  marched  to  their  parade  grounds  and  dismissed. 

In  Line  of  Platoon  Columns,  at  Close  Interval. 

701.  With  the  following  modifications,  the  rules  for 
the  review  of  the  regiment  in  line  apply  : — 

Ranks  are  not  opened.  The  colonel  commands  : Pre- 
parefor  review,  and  faces  to  the  front. 

When  the  reviewing  officer  has  passed  around  the 
regiment,  the  colonel  commands:  1.  Platoons  right, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  column  having  been  formed,  the  colonel  com- 


REGIMENTAL  REVIEW. 


251 


mands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  Take  full  distance,  3. 
Guide  right,  4.  march. 

The  leading  company  moves  off  at  the  command 
march,  followed  by  the  others  in  succession  when  at 
full  distance. 

Each  major  takes  post  six  paces  in  front  of  his  staff 
when  his  companies  have  full  distance. 

In  Line  of  Masses. 

702.  The  same  rules  apply  as  for  the  review  of  the 
regiment  in  line  of  platoon  columns  at  close  interval, 
except  that  to  form  column  for  passing  in  review, 
the  colonel  commands:  1.  Battalions,  2.  Change  direc- 
tion by  the  left  flank,  3.  march. 


^52 


BRIGADE  REVIEW. 


BRIGADE  REVIEW. 

703.  The  brigade  is  formed  in  line  of  masses,  with 
an  interval  of  sixty  paces  between  regiments.  The 
brigade  commander  takes  post  thirty  paces  in  front  of 
the  center  of  the  line  of  colonels. 

The  brigade  having  been  formed  and  the  reviewing 
officer  having  approached  within  thirty  paces,  the  brig- 
ade commander  faces  the  brigade  and  commands:  1. 
Carry,  2.  arms,  3.  PresentsA  arms,  then  faces  to  the 
front  and  salutes. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  returned  the  salute,  the 
brigade  commander  faces  the  brigade,  commands:  1. 
Carry,  2.  arms,  3.  Order,  4.  arms,  then  returns  sword 
and  joins  the  reviewing  officer. 

The  reviewing  officer,  accompanied  by  his  staff  and  the 
brigade  commander  and  his  staff,  then  proceeds  to  the 
right  of  the  brigade,  passing  in  front  of  the  colonel  of 
the  first  regiment,  to  the  right  of  the  line,  thence 
around  the  brigade,  passing  to  the  left  in  rear  of  the 
majors,  and  to  the  right  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

704.  The  colonels  remain  at  their  posts  facing  to  the 
front  while  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  around  the 
brigade.  When  the  reviewing  officer  leaves  the  right 
of  the  line,  the  brigade  commander  returns  by  the  short- 
est line  to  his  post,  faces  the  brigade  and  commands: 
1.  Battalions,  2.  Change  direction  hy  the  left  flank,  3. 

MARCH. 

The  column  having  been  formed,  the  brigade  con>- 
mander  commands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  2,  Take  full  dis^ 
tance,  3.  Guide  right,  4.  march. 

The  column  moves  off  as  in  regimental  review. 

705.  Each  colonel  takes  post  twenty-four  paces  in 
front  of  the  band  of  his  regiment  when  the  head  of  his 
regiment  has  made  its  second  change  of  direction. 


BRIGADE  REVIEW. 


253 


The  brigade  commander  takes  post  twenty-four  paces 
in  front  of  the  leading  colonel  when  at  one  hundred 
paces  from  tlie  reviewing  officer. 

The  brigade  commander  and  colonels,  when  they  have 
saluted  the  reviewing  officer,  turn  out  of  the  column 
and  take  post  on  his  right. 

The  review  terminates  when  the  last  battalion  has 
passed  the  reviewing  officer. 


254 


DIVISION  REVIEW. 


DIVISION  REVIEW. 

706.  The  division  is  formed  in  one,  two,  or  three  lines 
of  masses. 

Upon  the  arrival  of  the  reviewing  officer,  the  general 
commanding  the  division  joins  and  accompanies  him, 
and  causes  the  signal  attention  to  be  sounded,  which  is 
taken  up  in  the  right  brigade  of  the  first  line. 

In  One  Line. 

707.  The  reviewing  officer  receives  the  salute  of  each 
brigade  when  he  arrives  at  its  right,  except  when  he 
approaches  a brigade  from  its  left  or  front,  in  which 
case  he  receives  the  salute  as  prescribed  in  the  Brigade 
Keview. 

The  reviewing  officer  receives  the  salute  of  the  right 
brigade,  passes  along  its  front  from  right  to  left,  then 
receives  the  salute  of  the  next  brigade  and  so  on  to  the 
left  of  the  division,  thence  in  rear  of  the  division  to  the 
right,  and  back  to  his  post. 

Each  brigade  commander  salutes,  facing  to  the  front, 
then  faces  his  brigade  and  brings  it  to  order  arms,  and 
remains  at  his  post. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  passed  around  the  divis- 
ion, the  general  commanding  the  division  causes  the 
signal  attention  to  be  sounded. 

The  commander  of  the  right  brigade  then  forms  his 
brigade  in  column,  and,  when  the  signal  forward  is 
sounded,  gives  the  commands  for  passing  in  review  as 
in  the  Brigade  Review. 

Each  of  the  other  brigades  is  called  to  attention, 
formed  in  column  and  put  in  march  in  time  to  follow 
the  next  preceding  at  a distance  of  about  one  hundred 
paces. 

The  division  commander,  with  his  staff,  flag,  and  or* 


DjVISION  REVIEW. 


255 


derlies,  takes  post  twenty-four  paces  in  front  of  the 
commander  of  the  leading  brigade. 

The  review  terminates  as  prescribed  in  the  Brigade 
Review. 

In  Two  or  Three  Lines. 

708.  The  reviewing  officer  passes  around  each  line  in 
succession,  beginning  with  the  right  brigade  of  the  first 
line. 

With  this  exception,  the  rules  prescribed  for  the  sin- 
gle line  apply. 


CORPS  REVIEW 


CORPS  REVIEW. 

709.  The  corps  is  toi’med  in  one,  two,  or  three  lines, 
with  each  division  in  a single  line  of  masses. 

On  the  arrival  of  the  reviewing  officer,  the  corps  com- 
mander causes  the  attention  to  be  sounded,  which  is  re- 
peated by  the  trumpeter  of  the  commander  of  the  right 
division  of  the  first  line,  and  is  taken  up  in  the  right 
brigade  of  that  division. 

The  reviewing  officer  passes  in  front  of  the  first  line 
from  right  to  left,  receiving  the  salute  of  each  brigade 
as  prescribed  in  the  Division  Review,  passes  in  rear  of 
the  line  to  its  right,  thence  to  the  second  line,  passing 
around  it  in  like  manner,  and  so  on. 

Each  division  commander,  accompanied  by  his  staff, 
joins  the  reviewing  officer  and  corps  commander  as  they 
approach  his  division,  and  accompanies  them  while 
passing  in  fi^nt  and  in  rear  of  his  division  ; he  then  re- 
mains near  the  right  of  his  division. 

The  reviewing  officer  having  passed  around  the 
troops,  the  corps  commander  causes  the  attention  and 
forward  to  be  sounded ; the  march  in  review  is  con- 
ducted on  the  same  principles  as  for  the  review  of  a 
division. 

On  approaching  the  reviewing  officer,  the  general 
commanding  the  corps  places  himself  about  twenty- 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  general  of  the  first  division ; 
his  staff  place  themselves  six  paces  in  rear  of  him,  the 
flag  and  orderlies  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  staff. 

710.  The  artillery  of  the  corps  is  reviewed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  Drill  Regulations  for  Artillery. 

711.  The  review  of  a command  larger  than  a corpR  is 
conducted  on  the  same  principles,  or  the  troops  may  be 
marched  in  review  in  column  of  masses. 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


257 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 

712.  At  the  assembly  the  men  warned  for  duty  fall  in 
on  their  company  parade  grounds,  facing  to  the  front, 
non-commissioned  officers  and  supernumeraries  falling 
in  as  file  closers ; each  first  sergeant  then  verifies  his 
detail,  opens  ranks^  inspects  the  dress  and  general  ap- 
pearance, replaces  by  a supernumerary  any  man  unfit 
to  march  on  guard,  and  then  closes  ranks. 

The  band  takes  post  on  the  parade,  so  that  the  left 
of  its  front  rank  shall  be  twelve  paces  to  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  of  the  guard  when  the  latter  is  formed. 

713.  At  adjutant' s call,  the  adjutant,  dismounted,  pro- 
ceeds to  the  parade  ground  and  takes  post  so  as  to  be 
twelve  paces  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  oi  the 
guard  when  formed  ; the  sergeant  major  reports  to  the 
adjutant  and  takes  post  facing  to  the  left,  twelve  paces 
to  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  band  ; the  band 
plays  in  quick  or  double  time ; the  details  are  marched 
to  the  parade  ground  by  the  first  sergeants,  with  arms 
at  the  right  shoulder ; the  detail  that  arrives  first  is  so 
inarched  to  the  line  that,  upon  halting,  the  breast  of  the 
right  front  rank  man  shall  be  near  to  and  opposite  the 
left  arm  of  the  sergeant  major ; the  first  sergeant  brings 
his  piece  to  a carry,  halts  his  detail,  places  himself  in 
front  of  and  facing  the  sergeant  major,  at  a distance 
equal  to  or  a little  greater  than  the  front  of  his  detail ; he 
then  commands  : 1.  Right,  2.  dress.  The  detail  dresses 
up  to  the  line  of  the  sergeant  major  and  first  ser- 
geant, the  right  front  rank  man  placing  his  breast 
against  the  left  arm  of  the  sergeant  major ; the  non- 
commissioned officers  take  post  two  paces,  and  the 
supernumerary  nine  paces,  in  rear  of  the  rear  rank  of 
the  detail.  Seeing  the  detail  aligned,  the  first  sergeant 
commands;  front,  salutes,  and  then  reports:  Thede-' 


258 


GUARD  MOUNTING 


tail  is  correct  ; or,  (so  many)  sergeants,  corporals,  or 
privates  are  absent ; the  sergeant  major  or  acting 
sergeant  major  returns  the  salute  with  the  right  hand 
after  the  report  is  made;  the  first  sergeant  then  passes 
by  the  right  of  the  guard  and  takes  post  three  paces  in 
rear  of  his  supernumerary,  at  the  order. 

Each  of  the  other  details  is  formed  in  like  manner  on 
the  left  of  the  one  preceding;  the  men,  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  supernumerary,  and  first  sergeant  of 
each  detail  dress  on  those  of  the  preceding  details  in 
the  same  rank  or  line;  each  first  sergeant  closes  the  rear 
i^ank  to  the  right  and  fills  blank  files,  as  far  as  prac- 
ticable, with  men  from  his  front  rank. 

The  company  details  alternate  in  taking  the  right  of 
the  line. 

714.  When  the  last  detail  has  formed,  the  sergeant 
major  draws  sword,  verifies  the  detail,  causes  the  guard 
to  count  fours,  completing  the  left  four,  if  necessary,  as 
in  the  School  of  the  Company,  and  if  there  be  more  than 
three  fours,  divides  the  guard  into  two  platoons,  after 
which  he  commands : 1.  Open  ranks,  2.  march. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  steps  back  and 
halts  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank ; the  non- 
commissioned officers  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear 
rank  ; all  dress  to  the  right.  The  sergeant  major  veri- 
fies the  alignment  of  the  ranks,  file  closers,  super- 
numeraries, and  first  sergeants,  and  then  returns  to  the 
right  of  the  front  rank,  faces  to  the  left,  commands  : 3. 
FRONT,  passes  to  a point  midway  between  the  adjutant 
and  the  center  of  the  guard,  halts  facing  the  adjutant, 
salutes  and  reports  : Sir,  the  details  are  correct ; or.  Sir, 
(so  many)  sergeants,  corporals,  ov  privates  are  absent; 
the  adjutant  returns  the  salute,  directs  the  sergeant 
major  : Take  your  post,  and  then  draws  sword;  the 
sergeant  major  faces  about  and  takes  post  facing  to  the 
front,  three  paces  to  the  left  of  the  front  rank.  When 
the  sergeant  major  has  reported,  the  officer  of  the 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


259 


guard  tai^es  post,  facing  to  the  front,  three  paces  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  guard,  and  draws  sword. 

715.  The  adjutant  then  commands  : 1.  Officer  (or  of- 
ficers) and  non-commissioned  officers,  front  and  center, 

2.  MARCH. 

The  officer  advances  and  halts  three  paces  from  the 
adjutant ; the  non-commissioned  officers  carry  arms, 
pass  by  the  flanks,  and  moving  by  the  shortest  line 
form  in  the  order  of  rank,  from  right  to  left,  three 
paces  in  rear  of  the  officer ; the  adj  utant  then  assigns  the 
officer  and  non-commissioned  officers  according' to  rank, 
as  follows  : Commander  of  the  guard,  chief  of  first 
platoon,  chief  of  second  platoon,  right  guide  of  first 
platoon,  left  guide  of  second  platoon,  left  guide  of  first 
platoon,  right  guide  of  second  platoon  and  file  closers. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  : 1.  Non-commissioned 
officers  ; or,  1.  Officer  and  non-commissioned  officers, 
2.  POSTS,  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  all,  except  the  officer  com- 
manding the  guard,  face  about  and  take  the  posts 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Company  with  open 
ranks,  and  order  arms.  The  adjutant  then  directs  : In- 
spect your  guard,  sir;  at  which  the  officer  commanding 
the  guard  faces  about,  commands  : 1.  Inspection,  2. 
ARMS,  returns  sword  and  inspects  the  guard. 

716.  During  the  inspection  the  band  plays. 

The  adjutant,  during  the  inspection,  returns  sword, 
observes  the  general  condition  of  the  guard,  and  re- 
places by  the  supernumerary  an}^  man  who  does  not 
present  a creditable  appearance.  He  also,  when  so  di- 
rected, selects  an  orderly  for  the  commanding  officer, 
and  notifies  the  commander  of  the  guard  of  his  selec- 
tion. 

717.  If  there  be  a supernumerary  officer  of  the  guard, 
he  takes  post  facing  to  the  front,  three  paces  in  front  of 
the  center  of  the  first  platoon  ; in  going  to  the  front  and 
center  he  closes  on  the  senior  and  is  assigned  as  chief  of 


260 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


the  first  platoon  ; he  may  be  directed  by  the  commander 
of  the  guard  to  assist  in  inspecting  the  guard. 

718.  If  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard  the  adjutant 
inspects  the  guard.  The  non-commissioned  officer  com- 
manding the  guard  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  right 
guide,  when  the  guard  is  in  line ; and  takes  the  post  of 
the  officer  commanding  the  guard,  when  in  column  or 
passing  in  review. 

719.  The  inspection  ended,  the  adjutant  places  him- 
self about  thirty  paces  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center 
of  the  guard,  and  draws  sword  ; the  officers  of  the  day 
take  post  in  front  of  and  facing  the  guard,  about  thirty 
paces  from  the  adjutant ; the  old  officer  of  the  day  three 
paces  to  the  right  of  and  one  pace  to  the  rear  of  the  new 
officer  of  the  day  ; the  officer  commanding  the  guard 
takes  post  three  paces  in  front  of  its  center,  and  draws 
sword  ; thereafter  he  takes  the  same  relative  positions 
as  a captain  of  a company. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  : 1 Parade,  2.  rest, 

3.  SOUND  OFF. 

The  band,  playing,  passes  in  front  of  the  officer  of  the 
guard  to  the  left  of  the  line,  and  back  to  its  post  on  the 
right,  when  it  ceases  playing. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  : 1.  Guard,  2.  atten- 
tion, 3.  Carry,  4.  arms,  5 Close  ranks,  6.  march. 

The  ranks  are  closed  as  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

720.  The  adjutant  then  commands  : 1.  Present,  2. 
arms,  faces  toward  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salutes, 
and  then  reports  : Sir,  the  guard  is  formed.  The  new 
officer  of  the  day,  after  the  adjutant  has  reported,  re- 
turns the  salute  with  the  hand  and  directs  the  adju- 
tant : March  the  guard  in  review,  sir. 

The  adjutant  faces  about,  brings  the  guard  to  a carry, 
and  commands  : 1.  Platoons  right,  2.  march. 

The  platoons  execute  the  movement ; the  band  turns 
to  the  right  and  places  itself  twelve  paces  in  front  of 
the  first  platoon. 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


S61 


The  adjutant  places  himself  abreast  of  the  first  pla^ 
toon  and  six  paces  from  its  left  flank  ; the  sergeant  ma- 
jor, six  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  adjutant  then  brings  the  guard  to  the  right 
shoulder  and  commands  : 1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  For^ 
ivard,  3.  Guide  right,  4.  march. 

The  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  officer  of  the 
day,  according  to  the  principles  of  review,  and  is  brought 
to  the  carry  at  the  proper  time  by  the  commander  of  the 
guard;  the  adjutant,  commander  of  the  guard,  chiefs  of 
platoons,  sergeant  major,  and  drum  major  salute. 

The  band,  having  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  turns 
to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  places  itself  opposite  and 
facing  them,  and  ceases  to  play  when  the  rear  of  the  col- 
umn has  passed  ; the  field  music  detaches  itself  from 
the  band  when  the  latter  turns  out  of  the  column,  and, 
remaining  in  front  of  the  guard,  commences  to  play 
when  the  band  ceases.  In  the  absence  of  the  band,  the 
field  music  does  not  turn  out  of  the  column  but  con- 
tinues in  front  of  the  guard. 

The  guard  having  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  the 
adjutant  halts ; the  sergeant  major  halts  abreast  of  the 
adjutant  and  one  pace  to  his  left ; they  then  return 
sword  and  retire. 

721.  The  commander  of  the  guard  forms  it  into  col- 
umn of  fours,  without  halting,  and  marches  it  to  its  post. 

722.  The  officers  of  the  day  face  toward  each  other 
and  salute,  the  old  officer  of  the  day  turning  over  the 
orders  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off,  and  while  the  guard 
is  marching  in  review,  the  officers  of  the  day  stand  at 
parade  rest  with  arms  folded,  and  come  to  attention  be- 
fore the  guard  is  to  be  presented,  and  again  as  the 
head  of  the  column  approaches. 

The  new  officer  of  the  day  returns  only  the  salute  of 
the  commander  of  the  guard  and  the  adjutant,  making 
one  salute  with  the  hand. 


262 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


723.  The  first  sergeants  and  supernumeraries  come 
to  parade  rest  and  attention  with  the  guard  ; they  re- 
main at  order  arms  wliile  the  guard  is  being  presented 
and  formed  into  column.  The  senior  first  sergeant 
commands:  1.  Parade,  2.  rest,  at  the  command  march 
for  passing  in  review,  and  : 1.  Sujyernumeraries,  2.  at- 
tention, when  the  officers  of  the  day  come  to  attention. 

The  first  sergeants  come  to  parade  rest,  and  to  atten- 
tion with  the  supernumeraries.  The  rear  of  the  column 
having  passed  the  officers  of  the  day,  each  first  sergeant 
marches  his  supernumerary  to  the  company  parade  and 
dismisses  him. 

724.  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons,  the  ad- 
jutant commands:  1.  Guard  right,  2.  march,  and  it 
passes  in  review  as  above  ; the  commander  of  the  guard 
is  two  paces  in  front  of  its  center  ; ti  c;  adjutant  is  six 
paces  from  and  abreast  of  its  left  flank ; the  sergeant 
major  covers  the  adjutant  on  a line  with  the  file  closers. 

725.  The  officer  of  the  day  may  direct  the  adjutant: 
March  the  guard  to  its  post,  sir.  The  adjutant  faces 
about  and  commands:  1.  Guard  to  its  post,  2.  Fours 
right,  3.  march  ; or,  3.  Double  time,  4.  march. 

The  guard  wheels  by  fours  to  the  right;  the  field 
music  takes  post  in  front ; the  adjutant  and  sergeant 
major  return  sword  and  retire;  the  first  sergeants  march 
off  their  supernumeraries  ; the  officers  of  the  day  salute 
each  other,  and  the  band  retires. 

726.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  guard  house, 
the  old  guard  is  formed  in  line  at  the  carry,  with  its 
field  music  two  paces  to  its  right ; and,  when  the  field 
music  at  the  head  of  the  new  guard  arrives  opposite  its 
left,  the  commander  of  the  old  guard  commands  : 1. 
Present,  2.  arms;  and  commands:  1.  Carry,  2.  arms, 
when  the  new  guard  has  passed. 

The  new  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  old 
guard,  arms  at  a carry,  commanders  of  both  guards  sa- 
luting. 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


263 


The  field  music  having*  marched  three  paces  beyond 
the  field  music  of  the  old  guard,  changes  direction  to 
the  right,  and,  followed  by  the  guard,  changes  direc- 
tion to  the  left,  when  on  a line  with  the  old  guard  ; the 
changes  of  direction  are  without  command.  The  senior 
officer  of  the  guard  halts  on  the  line  of  the  front  rank 
of  the  old  guard,  allows  his  guard  to  march  past  him, 
and,  when  its  rear  approaches,  wheels  it  by  fours  to  the 
left,  halts  it,  estabiishes  the  left  guide  three  paces  to 
the  right  of  the  field  music. of  the  old  guard,  and  on  a 
line  with  the  front  rank,  and  then  dresses  his  guard  to  the 
left ; the  field  music  with  the  new  guard  is  two  paces  to 
the  right  of  its  front  rank. 

The  new  guard  being  dressed,  the  commander  of  each 
guard,  in  front  of  and  facing  its  center,  commands  : 1. 
Present,  2.  arms,  resumes  his  front  and  salutes. 

The  commanders  having  saluted,  face  their  guards  and 
command:  1.  Carry,  2.  arms,  3.  Order,  4.  arms. 

727.  Should  a guard  be  commanded  by  a non-com- 
missioned officer,  he  presents  arms  with  his  guard, 
standing  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  front  rank,  accord^ 
ing  as  he  commands  the  old  or  new  guard. 

728.  The  detachments  and  sentinels  of  the  old  guard 
are  relieved,  and,  as  they  come  in,  form  on  its  left;  both 
guards  are  brought  to  a carry;  the  commander  of  the  old 
guard  then  marches  it,  with  the  guide  right,  six  paces  to 
the  front,  when  he  commands:  1.  Fours  right,  2.  march. 

The  guard  wheels  by  fours  to  the  right,  the  field 
music  begins  to  play  and  the  guard  marches  in  quick 
time  past  the  new  guard,  whicn  stands  at  present  arms, 
commanders  of  both  guards  saluting. 

729.  On  arriving  on  the  regimental,  post,  or  camp 
parade,  the  commander  of  the  old  guard  forms  it  in 
line  and  halts  it,  opens  chamber  (Par.  83),  orders  suc- 
cessively the  company  details  two  paces  to  the  front, 
and  sends  each,  under  charge  of  a non-commissioned 
officer  or  private,  to  its  company. 


m 


GUARD  MOUNTING. 


730.  In  bad  weather,  at  night,  or  after  long  marches, 
the  music  may  be  dispensed  with,  or  the  field  music 
may  take  the  place  of  the  band  and  sound  off,  standing 
on  the  right  of  the  guard,  and  the  review  be  omitted. 

731.  When  dismounted  cavalry  and  infantry  are 
united  for  guard  mounting,  the  cavalry  details  retain 
their  single  rank  formation.  The  cavalry  non-commis- 
sioned officers  and  supernumaries  place  themselves  in 
line  with  those  of  the  infantry. 

732.  For  detailed  instructions  not  hei'ein  prescribed, 
•ee  Manual  of  Guard  Duty. 


BATTALION  PARADE 


2G5 


BATTALION  PARADE. 

733.  At  the  assembly,  the  companies  form  under  arms 
on  their  respective  parade  grounds,  and  are  inspected 
by  their  captains  ; the  inspection  being  completed,  adju- 
tanVs  call  is  sounded,  at  which  the  line  is  formed  on 
the  battalion  parade  ground. 

The  major  takes  post  at  a convenient  distance  in 
front  of  the  center,  facing  the  line. 

At  the  command  guides  posts,  the  sergeant  major 
takes  post  as  in  open  ranks. 

The  adjutant,  having  commanded : Guides  posts, 
directs  the  first  captain  to  bring  his  company  to  parade 
rest.  The  captains,  commencing  on  the  right,  succes- 
sively face  about  and  command  : 1.  (Such)  Company,  2. 
Parade,  3.  rest,  resume  their  front,  and  take  the  po- 
sition of  parade  rest ; the  adjutant  takes  post  three 
paces  to  the  right  of  the  battalion,  in  line  with  the  cap- 
tains, commands  : sound  off,  and.  if  dismounted,  takes 
the  position  of  parade  rest. 

The  band,  playing  in  quick  time,  passes  in  front  of 
the  captains,  to  the  left  of  the  line,  and  back  to  its  post 
on  the  right,  when  it  ceases  playing.  At  evening  parade., 
when  the  band  ceases  playing,  retreat  is  sounded  by  the 
field  music. 

The  major,  if  dismounted,  stands  at  parade  rest  with 
arms  folded  while  the  band  is  playing,  and  resumes 
attentiya  when  arms  are  about  to  be  presented.  When 
the  music  ceases,  the  adjutant  faces  to  the  left,  and 
commands:  1.  Battalion, 2.  attention,  3.  Open  ranks. 

He  aligns  the  guides  for  the  rear  rank,  returns  to  the 
line  of  captains,  faces  to  the  left,  and  commands:  4. 
MARCH. 

He  verifies  the  alignment  of  the  officers,  the  ranks 
and  the  file  closers,  returns  to  the  line  of  captains,  faces 


266 


BATTALION  PARADE. 


to  the  left,  commands  : front,  then  moves  at  a trot  or 
gallop  (if  dismounted,  in  quick  time)  by  the  shortest 
line  to  a point  midway  between  the  major  and  the 
center  of  the  battalion,  halts,  faces  the  battalion  and 
commands:  1.  Carry,  2.  arms,  3.  Present,  4.  arms. 
He  then  turns  about,  salutes  the  major,  and  reports  : 
Sir,  the  jmrade  is  formed.  The  major  returns  the 
salute  and  directs  the  adjutant:  Take  your  post,  sir. 
The  adjutant  moves  at  a trot  or  gallop  (if  dismounted, 
in  quick  time),  passes  by  the  major’s  right,  and  takes 
post  facing  the  battalion,  three  paces  to  the  left  of  the 
major  and  one  pace  less  advanced. 

The  adjutant  having  taken  his  post,  the  major  draws 
sword,  commands  : 1.  Carry,  2.  arms,  and  adds  such 
exercises  in  the  manual  of  arms  as  he  may  desire,  con- 
cluding with  order  arms.  The  officers  and  color  guard, 
having  once  executed  order  arms,  remain  in  that  posi- 
tion during  the  exercise  in  the  manual. 

The  major  then  directs  the  adjutant : Receive  the 
reports,  sir,  and  returns  sword.  The  adjutant,  passing 
by  the  major’s  left,  advances  at  a trot  or  gallop  (if  dis- 
mounted, in  quick  time)  toward  the  center  of  the  line, 
halts  midway  between  it  and  the  major,  and  commands  . 
1.  First  sergeants,  2.  Front  and  center,  3.  march  ; or, 

Double  time,  4.  march. 

At  the  first  command,  the  first  sergeants  carry  arms. 

At  the  second  command,  each  marches  two  paces  in 
front  of  and  opposite  the  right  of  his  company  and  facesj 
toward  the  center ; the  drum  major  at  the  same  time 
faces  to  the  left. 

At  the  command  march,  the  first  sergeants  and  drum 
major  march  to  the  center,  and  successively  face  to  the 
front ; the  adjutant  then  commands  : Report. 

The  drum  major  and  the  first  sergeants,  commencing 
on  the  right,  successively  salute  and  report : the  drum 
major,  band  and  field  music  present  or  accounted  for; 
or,  (so  many)  musicians  or  field  musicians  absent;  the 


BATTALION  PARADE. 


267 


first  sergeants,  Company  (“A,”  etc.)  present  or  ac- 
counted for;  or,  (so  many)  corporals,  ov  pri- 

vates absent. 

The  reports  having  been  made,  the  adjutant  com- 
mands : 1.  First  sergeants,  2.  Posts,  3.  march;  or,  3. 
Double  time,  4.  march. 

At  the  command  posts,  the  first  sergeants  and  drum 
major  face  outward.  ^ 

At  the  command  march,  they  resume  their  posts  and 
order  arms;  each  first  sergeant  passes  around  the  right 
flank  of  his  company. 

The  adjutant  l^en  turns  about,  salutes,  and  reports: 
Sir,  all  are  present  or  accounted  for ; or.  Sir,  (so  many) 
officers  or  enlisted  men  are  absent.  The  major  returns 
the  salute  and  directs:  Publish  the  orders,  sir. 

The  adjutant  turns  about  and  commands:  Attention 
to  orders;  he  then  reads  the  orders,  and  commands:  1. 
Officers,  2.  Center,  3.  march. 

At  the  command  officers,  all  the  officers  except  the 
adjutant  return  sword. 

At  the  command  center,  the  company  officers  face  to 
the  center. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  officers  close  to 
the  center  and  face  to  the  front;  the  adjutant  returns 
sword,  turns  about  and  takes  post  with  the  major  as 
previously  prescribed  ; the  staff  officers  ride  toward  the 
major  at  a trot  and  take  post  one  pace  to  the  left  of  the 
adjutant,  facing  the  battalion  one  pace  apart,  in  the 
order  of  rank  from  right  to  left,  senior  on  the  right ; if 
dismounted,  they  face  and  close  in  with  the  company 
officers. 

The  officers  having  closed  and  faced  to  the  front,  the 
senior  company  officer  commands:  1.  Forward,  2.  Guide 
center,  3.  march.  The  officers  advance,  the  band  play- 
ing; the  left  officer  of  the  right  wing  is  the  guide,  and 
marches  on  the  major;  at  six  paces  from  the  major  the 
senior  company  officer  commands  : 1.  Officers,  2.  halt* 


268 


BATTALION  PARADE. 


The  music  ceases;  the  officers  halt  and  salute,  keep  the 
hand  at  the  visor  till  the  salute  is  returned,  and  drop  it 
at  the  same  time  with  the  major.  The  major  then 
gives  such  instructions  as  he  may  deem  necessary,  and 
this  concludes  the  cei^emony. 

As  the  officers  disperse,  the  music  is  resumed  ; each 
first  sergeant  moves  in  front  of  his  company,  closes 
ranks,  marches  it  to  its  parade  ground  and  dismisses  it; 
the  band  plays  till  the  companies  leaves  the  parade 
ground. 

734.  The  commanding  officer  may  direct  that  the 
first  sergeants  march  their  companies,  in  line,  or  in  col- 
umn of  platoons,  around  the  parade  ground,  changing 
direction  and  saluting  as  in  passing  in  review;  after 
passing  the  major,  they  march  them  to  their  company 
parade  grounds  and  dismiss  them.  Or,  he  may  direct 
that  the  companies  move  off  in  echelon,  and  march  to 
their  parade  grounds.  In  these  cases  the  officers  remain 
with  the  major  until  all  the  companies  have  passed. 


REGIMENTAL  PARADE. 


269 


REGIMENTAL  PARADE. 

735.  The  regiment  is  formed  inline,  in  line  of  platoon 
columns  at  close  interval,  or  in  line  of  masses. 

In  Line. 

736.  At  the  assembly,  the  companies  are  formed  and 
inspected. 

At  adjutant’s  call,  each  battalion  is  formed  in  line  ; 
the  battalion  adjutant  having  taken  his  post  in  front  of 
the  center,  before  presenting  the  battalion  to  the 
major,  receives  the  reports  of  the  first  sergeants  as  pre- 
scribed in  battalion  parade. 

737.  When  the  battalions  are  formed,  adjutant’ s call 
is  again  sounded ; the  regiment  is  then  formed  in  line, 
each  major  opening  ranks  in  his  battalion  as  soon  as  it 
is  formed  on  the  line,  regulating  on  the  base  battalion. 

The  adjutant,  after  indicating  the  position  of  the 
point  of  rest,  takes  post  facing  to  the  left,  six  paces  to 
the  right  of  the  post  of  the  lieutenant-colonel  (Par. 
369) ; when  the  line  is  formed,  he  directs  the  first  major 
to  bring  his  battalion  to  parade  rest. 

The  majors,  in  succession,  bring  their  battalions  to 
parade  rest. 

The  adjutant  then  turns  to  his  left  and  commands  ; 
SOUND  OFF,  and  takes  post,  facing  to  the  front,  six  paces 
to  the  right  of  the  post  of  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

The  band,  playing  in  quick  time,  passes  in  front  of 
the  adjutant  and  field  officers,  to  the  left  of  the  regi- 
ment, and  back  to  its  post  on  the  right,  when  it  ceases 
playing. 

The  adjutant  then  moves  by  the  shortest  line,  at  a 
trot  or  gallop,  to  a point  midway  between  the  colonel 


270 


REGIMENTAL  PARADE, 


and  the  center  of  the  regiment,  faces  the  reginient,  and 
commands:  1.  Battalions,  2.  attention,  3.  Carry, 
4.  ARMS,  5.  Present,  6.  arms,  faces  the  colonel,  salutes, 
and  reports  : Sir,  the  j^ci'i^cide  is  formed. 

The  colonel  returns  the  salute  and  directs  the  ad- 
jutant: Take  yonr  jjost,  sir.  The  adjutant  takes  his 
post  three  paces  to  the  left  of  the  colonel  and  one  pace 
less  advanced,  passing  by  his  right  and  rear. 

The  colonel  and  staff  officers  draw  sword  ; the  colonel 
then  commands  : 1.  Carry,  2.  arms,  and  adds  such  ex- 
ercises in  the  manual  as  he  may  desire,  concluding  with 
order  arms. 

The  colonel  then  directs  the  adjutant  to  receive  the 
reports  and  returns  sword  ; his  staff  return  sword  at 
the  same  time. 

The  adjutant  advances  by  the  left  of  the  colonel 
toward  the  line,  halts  midway  between  the  colonel  and 
the  center  of  the  regiment,  and  commands  : 1.  Ad- 
jutants, 2.  Front  and  center,  3.  march;  or,  3.  Trot, 

4.  MARCH. 

Al  the  command  march,  the  battalion  adjutants  move 
six  paces  in  front  of  the  line  of  company  officers,  close 
to  the  center  and  face  to  the  front.  The  adjutant  then 
commands : Report,  when  the  battalion  adjutants, 
commencing  on  the  right,  salute  and  report : (Such) 
battalion  present  or  accounted  for ; or,  (Such)  battalion 
(so  many)  officers  and  enlisted  men  are  absent.  The 
adjutant  then  commands  : 1.  Adjutants,  2.  Post,  3. 
MARCH  ; or,  3.  Trot,  4.  march.  The  battalion  adjutants, 
moving  by  the  shortest  lines,  then  take  post  in  the  line 
of  field  officers,  each  three  paces  to  the  left  of  the 
major  of  his  battalion.  The  adjutant  then  faces  the 
colonel,  salutes  and  reports  : Sir,  all  are  present  or  ac- 
counted for;  or.  Sir,  (so  many)  officers  and  enlisted  men 
are  absent.  The  colonel  returns  the  salute  and  directs  : 
Publish  the  orders,  sir.  The  adjutant  faces  the  regi- 
ment, and,  after  publishing  the  orders,  commands  : 


REGIMENTAL  PARADE. 


271 


1.  Officers f 2,  Center,  3.  march,  returns  sword  and  takes 
post  on  the  left  of  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

At  the  command  officers,  all  the  officers,  except  the 
adjutant,  return  sword. 

At  the  command  center,  the  company  officers  face  to- 
ward the  center. 

At  the  command  march,  the  company  officers  close  to 
the  center  and  face  to  the  front. 

The  field  officers  and  adjutants  moving  to  the  right 
and  left,  on  their  own  line,  uncover  the  line  of  company 
officers  and  form  in  the  following  order  from  right  to 
left 

The  lieutenant-colonel,  adjutant,  major  of  the  fii’st 
battalion  and  his  adjutant,  six  paces  to  the  right  of  the 
line  of  company  officers ; the  major  of  the  second 
battalion,  his  adjutant,  the  major  of  the  third  battalion 
and  his  adjutant,  six  paces  to  the  left  of  the  company 
officers. 

The  company  officers  having  closed  and  faced  to  the 
front,  the  senior  captain  commands : 1.  Forward,  2. 
Guide  center,  3.  march. 

The  company  officers  advance,  the  band  playing ; the 
left  officer  of  the  right  wing  of  the  second  battalion,  or 
the  left  officer,  first  battalion,  if  there  be  but  two 
battalions,  is  the  guide  and  marches  on  the  colonel. 

When  the  company  officers  have  advanced  six  paces 
beyond  the  line  of  field  officers,  the  field  officers  and 
adjutants  advance,  thus  forming  in  echelon  on  the  right 
and  left  of  the  company  officers. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  commands : 1.  Officers,  2. 
HALT,  when  the  company  officers  are  six  paces  from  the 
colonel ; the  ceremony  concludes  as  in  the  battalion 
parade. 

The  lieutenant-colonel  and  adjutant  join  the  colonel ; 
all  the  other  officers  rejoin  their  battalions  ; the  battal- 
ions are  marched  to  their  parade  grounds  and  dis- 
missed. 


REGIMENTAL  PARADE. 


'ZTZ 


In  fjne  of  Platoon  Columns  or  in  Line  of  Masses. 

738.  The  line  is  formed  as  prescribed  in  the  Evolu- 
tions of  the  Regiment. 

Ranks  are  not  opened. 

After  publishing  the  orders  the  adjutant  commands  : 
1.  Field  officers,  2.  Center,  3.  march. 

The  field  officers  and  adjutants  return  swords,  close 
on  the  second  major,  face  to  the  front,  and  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  commands  : 1.  Forward,  2.  Guide  center, 
3.  MARCH. 

The  second  major  is  the  guide  and  marches  on  the 
colonel. 

The  company  officers  remain  at  their  posts  with  their 
companies. 

With  these  exceptions  the  same  rules  apply  as  in  the 
regimental  parade  in  line. 


BATTALION  INSPECTION. 


273 


BATTALION  INSPECTION. 

739.  If  there  be  both  inspection  and  review,  the  in- 
spection may  either  precede  or  follow  the  review. 

The  battalion  being  in  column  of  companies  at  full 
distance,  all  officers  dismounted,  the  major  commands  : 
1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  march. 

At  the  first  command,  each  captain  commands  : Open 
ranks. 

At  the  command  march,  the  ranks  are  opened  in  each 
company,  as  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

The  field  musicians  join  their  companies. 

The  drum  major  conducts  the  band,  if  not  already 
there,  to  its  position  in  rear  of  the  column,  and  opens 
ranks. 

The  staff  officers  form  a line  equal  to  the  front  of  the 
column,  fifteen  paces  in  front  of  the  leading  company, 
the  adjutant  on  the  right,  the  others  in  the  order  of  rank 
from  right  to  left,  the  senior  next  to  the  adjutant ; the 
non-commissioned  staff  form  in  a similar  manner,  three 
paces  in  rear  of  the  staff  officers,  the  sergeant  major  on 
the  right ; the  color  guard  in  one  rank  marches  to  the 
front  and  takes  post  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  center  of 
the  line  of  non-commissioned  staff. 

The  major  takes  post  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  col- 
umn, six  paces  in  front  of  the  staff. 

740.  Field  and  staff  officers  senior  in  rank  to  the  in- 
spector do  not  take  post  in  front  of  the  column,  but 
accompany  him. 

After  inspecting  the  major  and  staff  officers,  the  in- 
spector, accompanied  by  these  officers,  passes  down  the 
open  column,  looking  at  the  front  and  rear  of  each  rank. 
The  major  and  staff  return  sword  as  soon  as  inspected. 

The  major  now  commands:  rest. 


274 


BATTALION  INSPECTION. 


741.  The  inspector,  commencing  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  makes  a minute  inspection  of  the  non-commis- 
sioned staff,  color  guard,  and  the  arms,  accouterments, 
dress  and  ammunition  of  each  soldier  of  the  several 
companies  in  succession,  and  inspects  the  band. 

The  adjutant  gives  the  necessary  commands  for  the 
inspection  of  the  non-commissioned  staff,  color  guard 
and  band. 

The  non-commissioned  staff  and  color  guard  may  be 
dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected. 

742.  As  the  inspector  approaches  each  company,  its 
captain  commands  : 1.  Compani/,  2.  attention,  3.  In- 
spectioUf  4.  ARMS,  and  faces  to  the  front ; as  soon  as  in- 
spected, he  returns  sword  and  accompanies  the  in- 
spector. 

At  the  command  arnns,  the  lieutenants  carry  sword, 
and,  when  the  inspector  begms  the  inspection  of  the 
front  rank,  face  about  and  stand  at  ease,  swords  at  the 
order ; upon  the  completion  of  the  inspection  of  arms 
and  ammunition,  they  come  to  attention,  carry  sword, 
face  about  and  order  sword. 

The  company  then  closes  ranks  (the  captain  may 
direct  the  lieutenants  to  retain  their  places  in  front  of 
the  company),  stacks  arms  and  open  ranks. 

The  captain  then  commands  : 1.  Unsling,  2.  knapsack, 
3.  Open,  4.  knapsack. 

The  first  and  second  commands  are  executed  as  in 
Par.  98,  except  that  the  rear  rank  stands  fast  and  each 
man  places  his  knapsack  on  the  ground  at  his  feet. 

At  the  fourth  command  the  knapsacks  are  opened. 

The  inspection  completed,  the  captain  commands  : 
1.  Close,  2.  KNAPSACK,  3.  Sling,  4.  knapsack. 

At  the  second  command,  each  man  repacks  and  closes 
his  knapsack  and  then  stands  erect,  leaving  the  knap- 
sack on  the  ground. 

At  the  fourth  command,  knapsacks  are  slung  as  in 
Par.  98,  the  rear  rank  standing  fast. 


BATTALION  INSPECTION. 


275 


Ranks  are  closed,  arms  taken,  and,  on  intimation 
from  the  inspector,  the  captain  marches  the  company 
to  its  quarters  and  dismisses  it. 

In  a long  column,  some  of  the  rearmost  companies, 
after  the  inspection  of  dress  and  general  appearance, 
may  be  permitted  to  stack  arms  and  fall  out ; before  the 
inspector  approaches,  they  take  arms  and  resume  their 
positions. 

The  band  plays  during  the  inspection  of  the  com- 
panies. 

743.  When  the  inspector  approaches  the  band,  the 
adjutant  commands  : 1.  Inspection,  2.  instruments. 

Each  man  as  the  inspector  approaches  him  raises  his 
instrument  in  front  of  the  body,  reverses  it  so  as  to 
show  both  sides,  and  then  ^'eturns  it  to  its  former  posi- 
tion, 

744.  The  inspection  of  dress  and  general  appearance 
may  be  dispensed  with  on  intimation  of  the  inspector, 
the  battalion  being  brought  to  a rest  as  soon  as  the 
major  and  staff  have  been  inspected. 

745.  At  inspection  of  quarters,  the  inspector  is  ac- 
companied by  all  the  officers,  or  by  such  of  them  as  he 
may  designate  ; the  men,  without  accouterments,  stand 
uncovered  in  front  of  their  respective  bunks  ; in  camp, 
they  stand,  covered,  without  accouterments,  in  front 
of  their  tents  ; the  senior  non-commissioned  officer, 
upon  the  approach  of  the  inspector,  commands  : 1.  Com- 
pany {or  squad),  2.  attention. 

The  men  come  to  attention  and  do  not  salute  ; in 
camp,  the  non-commissioned  officer  salutes. 


276 


COMPANY  INSPECTION. 


COMPANY  INSPECTION. 

746.  Captains  inspecting  their  companies  on  their  own 
parade  grounds,  use  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed for  the  company  at  battalion  inspection. 

INSPECTION  OF  A COMPANY  ON  ITS  OWN  PA- 
RADE. 

747.  Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain, 
the  captain  opens  ranks,  takes  his  post  in  front  of  the 
right  of  the  company,  and,  when  the  inspector  ap- 
proaches, salutes. 

The  inspection  is  made  as  before  (Par.  742). 


REGIMENTAL  INSPECTION. 


277 


REGIMENTAL  INSPECTION. 

748.  The  commands  and  means  are  the  same  as  pre- 
scribed for  a battalion. 

The  staff  officers  of  the  colonel  form  a line  equal  to 
the  front  of  the  column,  fifteen  paces  in  front  of  the 
major  of  the  first  battalion,  the  adjutant  on  the  right, 
the  others  in  the  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left,  the 
senior  next  the  adjutant;  the  non-commissioned  staff 
form  in  a similar  manner  three  paces  in  rear  of  the 
staff  officers,  the  sergeant  major  on  the  right;  the  color 
guard  takes  post  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  center  of 
the  line  of  non-commissioned  staff. 

The  colonel  takes  post  opposite  the  center  of  the 
column,  six  paces  in  front  of  his  staff,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  four  paces  to  his  left.  The  colonel,  lieutenant- 
colonel,  and  staff  officers,  as  soon  as  inspected,  return 
sword  and  accompany  the  inspector,  who  inspects  the 
dress  and  general  appearance  of  the  regiment. 

The  adjutant  brings  the  non-commissioned  staff  and 
color  guard  to  rest  as  soon  as  the  inspector  passes 
them. 

749.  Each  major  remaining  at  his  post,  brings  his 
battalion  to  a rest  as  soon  as  the  inspector  leaves  it. 

The  inspector,  after  passing  to  the  rear  of  the  regi- 
ment, commences  again  at  the  head  of  the  column  and 
minutely  inspects  the  non-commissioned  staff,  the  color 
guard,  and  the  non-commissioned  staff  and  companies 
of  each  battalion. 

750.  Each  major,  with  his  staff  officers,  accompanies 
the  inspector  through  his  battalion,  after  which  lie 
marches  his  battalion  to  its  parade  ground  and  dis- 
misses it,  unless  otherwise  directed. 


378 


MUSTER. 


REGIMENTAL  OR  BATTALION  MUSTER. 

751.  Muster  is  preceded  by  an  inspection,  and,  when 
practicable,  by  a review. 

The  adjutant  is  provided  with  the  muster  roll  of  the 
field,  staff,  and  band,  the  surgeon  with  the  hospital  roll, 
and  each  captain  with  the  roll  of  his  company.  A list 
of  absentees,  alphabetically  arranged,  showing  cause 
I and  place  of  absence,  accompanies  each  roll. 

Being  in  column  of  companies  at  open  ranks,  each 
captain,  as  the  mustering  officer  approaches,  brings  his 
company  to  right  shoulder  arms,  and  commands:  At- 
tention  to  muster. 

The  mustering  officer  or  captain  then  calls  the  names 
on  the  roll;  each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  answers 
‘‘Here,”  and  brings  his  piece  to  order  arms. 

752.  After  muster,  the  mustering  officer,  accompanied 
by  the  company  commanders  and  such  other  officers  as 
he  may  designate,  verifies  the  presence  of  the  men  re- 
ported in  hospital,  on  guard,  etc. 

753.  A company  may  be  mustered  in  the  same  man- 
ner on  its  own  parade  ground,  the  muster  to  follow  the 
inspection  prescribed  in  Par.  747. 


ESCORT  TO  THE  COLOR. 


279 


ESCORT  OF  THE  COLOR. 

754.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  colonel  details  a 
company,  other  than  the  color  company,  to  receive  and 
escort  the  color  to  its  place  in  line. 

The  escort  is  formed  in  column  of  platoons,  the  band 
in  front,  the  color  bearer  between  the  platoons.  The 
escort  then  marches,  without  music,  to  the  colonel’s  of- 
fice or  quarters,  is  formed  in  line  facing  the  entrance 
and  halted,  the  band  on  the  right,  the  color  bearer  in 
the  line  of  file  closers.  ^ 

The  color  bearer,  preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant  and 
followed  by  a sergeant  of  the  escort,  then  goes  to  receive 
the  color. 

When  the  color  bearer  comes  out,  followed  by  the  lieu- 
tenant and  sergeant,  he  halts  before  the  entrance,  facing 
the  escort ; the  lieutenant  places  himself  on  the  right, 
the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  color  bearer ; the  escort 
presents  arms,  and  the  field  music  sounds  to  the  color. 

Arms  are  brought  to  the  carrjq  the  lieutenant  and 
sergeant  return  to  their  posts ; the  company  executes 
platoons  right,  the  band  taking  post  in  front  of  the  col- 
umn ; the  color  bearer  places  himself  between  the  pla- 
toons ; arms  are  then  brought  to  the  right  shoulder, 
and  the  escort  marches  in  quick  time,  with  guide  left, 
back  to  the  regiment,  the  band  playing  ; the  march  is 
so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at  fifty  paces 
in  front  of  the  right  of  the  regiment,  the  direction  of  the 
march  shall  be  parallel  to  its  front ; when  the  color  ar- 
rives opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  escort  is  formed  in 
line  to  the  left  and  halted  ; the  color  bearer,  passing  be- 
tween the  platoons,  advances  and  halts  twelve  paces  in 
front  of  the  colonel. 

The  color  bearer  having  halted,  the  colonel,  who  has 
taken  post  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  reg- 


280 


ESCORT  TO  THE  COLOR. 


iment,  faces  about,  commands : 1.  Carry,  2.  arms, 
3.  Present,  4.  arms,  resumes  his  front  and  salutes;  the 
field  music  sounds  to  the  color,  and  the  color  bearer  re- 
turns the  color  salute. 

The  colonel  then  faces  about,  brings  the  regiment  to 
a carry,  after  which  the  color  bearer  takes  his  post  with 
the  color  company ; the  regiment  is  then  brought  to 
order  arms. 

755.  The  escort  presents  and  carries  arms  with  the 
regiment,  at  the  command  of  the  colonel,  after  which 
the  captain  forms  it  again  in  column  of  platoons, 
and,  preceded  by  the  band,  marches  it  at  right  shoulder 
al’ms  to  its  place  in  line,  passing  around  the  left  flank 
of  the  regiment. 

756.  The  band  plays  until  the  escort  passes  the  left 
of  the  line,  when  it  ceases  playing  and  returns  to  its 
post  on  the  right,  passing  in  rear  of  the  regiment. 

The  regiment  may  be  brought  to  a rest  when  the  es- 
cort passes  the  left  of  the  line. 

757.  The  color  is  escorted  from  the  parade  ground  oi 
the  color  company  to  the  colonel’s  office  or  quarters  by 
the  color  guard. 


ESCORTS  OF  HONOR. 


281 


ESCORTS  OF  HONOR. 

758.  Escorts  of  honor  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of 
receiving*  and  escorting  personages  of  high  rank,  civil 
or  military.  The  troops  for  this  purpose  are  selected 
for  their  soldierly  appearance  and  superior  discipline. 

The  escort  forms  in  line,  opposite  the  place  where  the 
personage  presents  himself,  the  band  on  the  flank  of  the 
escort  toward  which  it  will  march.  On  the  appearance 
of  the  personage,  he  is  received  with  the  honors  due  to 
his  rank.  The  escort  is  formed  into  column  of  com- 
panies, platoons,  or  fours,  and  takes  up  the  march,  the 
personage  and  his  staff  or  retinue  taking  position  in 
rear  of  the  column.  On  leaving  the  escort,  line  is 
formed  and  the  same  honors  are  paid  as  before. 

When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a considerable 
distance  from  the  point  where  the  personage  is  to  be  re- 
ceived, as,  for  instance,  where  a courtyard  or  wharf  in- 
tervenes, a double  line  of  sentinels  is  posted  from  that 
point  to  the  escort,  facing  inward  ; the  sentinels  success 
sively  salute  as  he  passes,  a.nd  are  then  relieved  and 
join  the  escort. 

An  officer  is  appointed  to  attend  him,  to  bear  such 
communications  as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  escort. 


m 


FUNERAL  ESCORT. 


FUNERAL  ESCORT. 

75(f.  coinposition  and  strength  of  the  escort  are 
prescribed  iii  I'ars.  474,  475,  and  476,  A.  R.,  1889.  [See 
Appendix.] 

The  escort  is  formed  opposite  the  tent  or  quarters  of 
the  deceased  ; the  band  on  that  flank  of  the  escort  toward 
which  it  is  to  march. 

Upon  the  appearance  of  the  coffin  the  commander 
commands:  1. Carry, 2.  arms,  3.  Present,  4.  arms;  and 
the  band  plays  an  appropriate  air;  arms  are  then  carried, 
after  which  the  coffin  is  taken  to  the  flank  of  the  escort 
opposite  the  music. 

760.  The  escort  is  next  formed  into  column  of  com- 

Eanies,  platoons,  or  fours.  If  the  escort  be  small,  it  may 
e marcned  in  line.  The  procession  is  formed  in  the  fol- 
lowing order  : 1.  Music,  2.  Escort,  3.  Clergy,  4.  Coffin 
anri  pallbearers,  5.  Mourners,  6.  Members  of  the  for- 
mer command  of  the  deceased,  7.  Other  officers  and  enr 
listed  men,  8.  D istinguished  persons,  9.  Delegations,  10. 
Societies,  11.  Civilians.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  (Nos. 
6 and  7)  are  with  side  arms  in  the  order  of  rank,  seniors 
in  front. 

The  procession  being  formed,  the  commander  of  the 
escort  puts  it  in  march,  arms  at  the  right  shoulder. 

761.  The  escort  marches  slowly  to  solemn  music;  the 
column  having  arrived  opposite  the  grave,  line  is  formed 
facing  it. 

The  coffin  is  then  carried  along  the  front  of  the  escort 
to  the  grave,  arms  are  presented,  the  music  plays  an  ap- 
propriate air ; the  coffin  having  been  placed  over  the 
grave,  the  music  ceases  and  arms  are  brought  to  the 
order. 

762.  The  commander  next  commands : 1.  Parade, 
2.  REST.  The  escort  executes  parade  rest,  officers  and 
men  inclining  the  head  to  the  front. 


FUNERAL  ESCORT. 


283 


When  the  funeral  services  are  completed  and  the  cof- 
fin lowered  into  the  grave  the  commander  causes  the 
escort  to  resume  attention  and  fire  three  rounds  of  blank 
cartridges,  the  muzzles  of  the  pieces  being  elevated. 

A trumpeter  then  sounds  taps. 

The  escort  is  then  formed  into  column,  marched  in 
quick  time  to  the  point  where  it  was  assembled,  and  dis- 
missed. 

The  band  does  not  play  until  it  has  left  the  in- 
closure. 

763.  When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is 
considerable,  the  escort,  after  having  left  the  camp  or 
garrison,  may  march  at  ease  until  it  approaches  the 
burial  ground,  when  it  is  called  to  attention.  The  music 
does  not  play  while  at  ease. 

In  all  funeral  ceremonies,  six  pallbeartiS  may  be  se- 
lected from  the  grade  of  the  deceased,  or  the  grades 
next  above  or  below.  If  a commissioned  officer,  the  cof- 
fin is  borne  by  six  non-commissioned  officers  : if  a non- 
commissioned officer  or  private,  by  six  privates. 

764.  At  the  funeral  of  a general  officer,  the  comman- 
der of  the  escort,  in  forming  column,  gives  the  ap- 
propriate commands  for  the  cavalry,  artillery,  and  in- 
fantry, which  form  in  column,  from  front  to  rear,  in 
the  order  named.  The  field  music  sounds  the  march, 
flourishes,  or  ruffles,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  de- 
ceased, whenever  arms  are  presented,  after  which  the 
band  plays  an  appropriate  air.  In  marching  to  the 
cemetery,  the  trumpeters  of  the  artillery  and  cavalry 
may  alternate  in  playing  with  the  band  of  the  in- 
fantry. 

765.  At  the  funeral  of  a mounted  officer  or  en- 
listed man,  ‘his  horse,  in  mourning  caparison,  follovrs 
the  hearse. 

766.  Should  the  entrance  to  the  cemetery  prevent 
the  hearse  from  accompanying  the  escort  till  the  latter 
halts  at  the  grave,  the  column  is  halted  at  the  en- 


^4 


FUNERAL  ESCORT, 


trance  long  enough  to  take  the  coffin  from  the  hearse, 
when  the  column  is  again  put  in  march.  The  cav- 
alry and  artillery,  when  unable  to  enter  the  inclosure, 
wheel  out  of  the  column,  face  to  the  column,  and 
salute  the  remains  as  they  pass. 

767.  When  necessary  to  escort  the  remains  from  the 
quarters  of  the  deceased  to  the  church  before  the 
funeral  service,  arms  are  presented  upon  receiving  the 
remains  at  the  quarters,  and  also  as  they  are  borne  into 
the  church. 

768.  The  commander  of  the  escort,  previous  to  the 
funeral,  gives  the  clergyman  and  pallbearers  all  need- 
ful directions. 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


285 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 

WARNING  CALLS. 

769.  First  cally  guard  mounting,  full  dress,  overcoats, 
drill,  stable,  water,  and  hoots  and  saddles ; they  pre- 
cede the  assembly  by  such  interval  as  may  be  prescribed 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

Mess,  church,  and  fatigue,  classed  as  service  calls, 
may  also  be  used  as  warning  calls. 

First  call  is  the  first  signal  for  formation  for  roll  call 
and  for  all  ceremonies  except  guard  mounting. 

Guard  mounting  is  the  first  signal  for  guard  mount- 
ing. 

The  field  music  assemble  at  first  call  and  guard 
mounting. 

In  a mixed  command,  boots  and  saddles  is  the  signal 
to  mounted  troops  that  their  formation  is  to  be  mounted ; 
for  mounted  guard  mounting  or  mounted  drill  it  imme- 
diately follows  the  signal  guard  mounting  or  drill. 

When  full  dress  or  overcoats  are  to  be  worn,  the  full 
dress  or  overcoat  call  immediatelv  follows  first  call, 
guard  mounting,  or  boot>r  js.i.  saadles. 

FORMATION  CALLS. 

Assembly  : the  signal  for  the  companies  or  details  to 
form  on  their  company  parade  grounds. 

Adjutant's  call : the  signal  for  the  companies  or 
guard  details  to  assemble  on  the  camp  or  garrison 
parade  ground  ; it  follows  the  assembly  at  such  interval 
as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

ALARM  CALLS. 

Fire  call:  the  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  without 
arms,  to  extinguish  fire. 


286 


TRUMPET  CALLS.  ETC. 


To  arms:  the  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  under 
arms,  on  their  company  parade  grounds  as  quickly  as 
possible. 

To  horse  : the  signal  for  mounted  men  to  proceed  un- 
der arms  to  their  horses,  saddle,  mount,  and  assemble 
at  a designated  place  as  quickly  as  possible. 

SERVICE  CALLS. 

Taps,  mess,  sick,  church,  recall,  issu^,  officer^ s,  first 
sergeant' s,  fatigue,  school,  and  the  general. 

The  general  is  the  signal  for  striking  tents  and  load- 
ing wagons  preparatory  to  marching. 

Reveille  and  tattoo  precede  the  assembly  for  roll  call ; 
retreat  follows  the  assembly,  the  interval  between  being 
only  that  required  for  formation  and  roll  call,  except 
when  there  is  parade. 

Assembly,  reveille,  retreat,  adjutant's  call,  to  the  color, 
the  flourishes,  rufiles,  and  the  inarches  are  sounded  by 
all  the  field  music  united  ; the  other  calls,  as  a rule,  are 
sounded  by  the  trumpeter  of  the  guard  or  orderly 
trumpeter ; he  may  also  sound  the  assembly  when  the 
trumpeters  are  not  united. 

The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  reveille, 
or,  if  marches  be  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the 
commencement  of  the  first  march. 

The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

The  drill  signals  include  both  the  preparatory  com- 
mands and  the  commands  of  execution  ; the  last  note  is 
the  command  of  execution. 

When  a command  is  given  by  the  trumpet,  the  chiefs 
of  subdivisions  give  the  proper  commands  orally. 

The  memorizing  of  these  signals  will  be  facilitated  by 
observing  that  all  movements  to  the  right  are  on  the 
ascending  chord,  that  the  corresponding  movements  to 
the  left  are  corresponding  signals  on  the  descending 
chord ; and  that  the  changes  of  gait  are  all  upon  the 
same  note. 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  &c, 


i 


To  economise  space,  the  music  is  written  an  octave  higher  than  the 
trumpet  scale,  and  is  adjusted  to  the  scale  of  the  bugle. 


1.  First  Call. 

Quick.  3 


'^SSSr^ 


"=i: 


2.  Guard  Mounting. 


Quick. 


r 

m 

. ^ p?.  pp  « ^ 1 

-It  f 

^ F r 

# 

3 ■ ■ p , ' 

.JL._  r m 1 

1 

(t 

F F F F F 1 F 

-^— 1-4-1 

— ! — ^ 

— r-#H 

p T“ 

•j  ' — 

287 


Vt> 


288 


TRUMPET  CALUS  ETC. 


3.  Full  Dress. 


Quick, 


4.  Overcoats. 


i 


Quick. 


5.  Drill. 
■^—4^ 


=iE^P=p: 


— I — I- 


-#-^- 


-f-7- 


0-0-0-0-00- 


rrm 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC, 


28^ 


Juick, 

7.  Water 

0 0 

r 'J  ^ _m 

T-  P y P P 

■ 1 r 

# r 

r r T # r 

1 '^1 

Llli  TA  1.  J ^ 1 J (ill 

8.  Boots  and  Saddles. 


9.  Assembly. 

Moderate. 


r-G-  -1— 

_ ^ 

"i!fc  — \ ' T 

P-*  p * ^ ^ p * p 

-P-^-^P-^-^—^ ^-i-P-  - 

-i #-i 1 — ^ 1— J — 

:|i 

^ (\  0 - , 

<7\ 

f 1 I*  • - 1 i'  1 

r 

vW  1 I*  1 1 

P P * P P 1 ' 

"TSp  ^ 0-0 

:4:  LJ:_i 1 

1 0.  ADJUTANT'S  Call. 


290 


•RUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


11.  Fire. 


"r  "yT  |i 

r ^ /I  ^ [ •f  • -^  • 

1 1 I ^ ^ 

f?w  ^ ^ ^ * m 

bt= — 

— Ld^t 

0 -^  - r ^ 

W ? ^ ^ 

. (•  r p -1 

JL  ! H 1 

# • 1 i • • 1 

• • r r # 1 

fm — 7^  ^ ^ y 

^ 1 1 h— — »— 

r ^ 1 1 r J 

^ 

1 t ^ f 1 1 0'  * t 

Repeat  at  will. 

^ * !' 

r VL-  ^ • 1 1 • 1 - 1 

^ 1- 

h #-  --I — 1 1 #-■!-. — 

_i 0 — I ^_i_ 1. 

— ! — » — ! — -1 — ! — ■! — ! — -1 — 

I_1 ^ f ^ f L 

i 


Quick  ^ 


12.  To  Arms. 




-h- 


“I- 


-#H — I — #H — (- 


Repeat  at  will. 


i 


Presto. 


13.  To  Horse. 


— ^j»Ui-i  "h^ — 


4-+-P-#- 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


291 


1 5.  Retreat. 


292 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


R ET  R E AT — C onclud^ . 


M 1 

j 

r n 

r — ^ ■ 

ill 

^ ' 

m J 

^ -! 

'j  . 

r-- 

rr  —2~ 

hr  -J 

ir  - r i 

n # 

m 

# 

# 

m m \ 

m ] 

IP  T 

1 

m • m 

"W-  r • n 

I ^ 

ii  r 

T 

r _r~ 

~l  ^ 1 

rh  ■ 

'h  it  ^ 

V'  U 1 |J  ■IM  I ' 1 ■ 

1 1 1 J _l  J_  _ 1 

^ • m - 

^ I 

n 1 

1 1 

M 1 - - 

Pvi  1 ■ 

\m  J 

1 — I — ! — ! 

r 1 

^ J 

TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC- 


293 


16.  Tattoo. 


5 ^ 1 ^--r 

-fnr — 

'"^1 rTTZi — T“ 

iw'r*  p 1 -.  m. 

L L ■ 0 

t 

^ t 

• ^ » 0 0 — 

u.:  _ L ' 1 « # 

1 r 

r j _ j_ _ "j  _ r 

. p..  ^ 

J J*_J  - J 

1 1 ' 

J 

All  ~n  ! 

"T  1 

1*  i 1* 

1 1 ^ ' 

i 

f5T>  1.  y 1 

J J J L 

■■J  ’~J  - J J — d 

” K 

w w -j  r 

j ^ j — 

« J" 

« L # 

jLZ  # L . 1 \» 

^ . ■■  P ' <f  ■ 

• I-  ••  • j . ^ 

9 r r r ^ ' 

fe— 

-i # 

-# — # — h 

- r ^ 

1 -L_| 

r r 

-^-1 ^ 

_j # 

^ f ■ 

— — 1 — 1 — ^~T — 

\ 0 1 

F 

^ L- « r - 

0 • JIT  W 

• ! J*  • ! 1 i 

• 1 I « 1 

EK  l_  ^ t ^ „ 

r zj  ^ ^ri 

^ _ r r — 

r 

^liz  r-'-  r T~T-  ^ ^ r 

^ t-  1 1 - 1 . , 

-4 

^ r 

n r 

J , 1 

1 1 

■i — Ft 

0 ; 1 

r 

ETS  .1  Jr  •s 

_ 1 J 

J J J 

i r J 1 

^11.  ! • ! 

z ^ ~i  ^ 1 r'  T 

i r ^ z — r 

-#.  • -^‘ 

^ /tn  ^ ^ 

n 1 “T" 

r n— , 

- 

JEZ:  i^rSzn  -r; 

0 0*0  ^ 

T—  .^...n  •i 

--0  0.0  0 — h# 

grr\  ^ ^ 

^ F-  ^ 

1 J* J 

\V  1 ^ WWW  W ■ 

-I—  h- B,i 1— 

, i-wH  \-  0 

^ 1—  ^ r- 

n • ^ 



^iz  □ m _ n 

I**!® 

T -re 

1 — 1 n 

0 0*0  0 • 

f ' h 

T ^ J*J 

r • • 

. ^ .,_.  0 

n ^ 

”'2Z_n  "'•■“]'■  ■I"'"  I "“F",  - r 

1 M V*  1 “ 

0 0*0  0 0*0J 

H ^ M 

• 

■H'  n— ■ n r T^TJTj. 

^ F F“F  F F-| 

^ 1 / ^ ^ ^ 

--i— l.^-T 

294 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


T ATTOO — Continued. 


iMi- 


iqzzq_^j:q==^^q:  :f“ 


W-H^ 


:?iqz;q: 


q=5ii=5zi--S;: 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


295 


T ATTOO 

-? — * n-] 

— Concluded. 

m m 

^ ^ 

:=t  t—P  P : 

n ^ ^ 

li  ■ o m M m n 

1 1 J 

r - ^ - 1 

■■ — s—s — _— ,.  .p— —I 

fe  f f-i*  h-:  h-f  ; 

■T — ^ f“  f ' 

-e-  n n 

N 

' f—4 

■"#  r 1 ~t~' 

— =1: 

206 


TRUMPET  CALcS, 


H 

5?o«7. 

17. 

-^1 

Taps. 

;r.-  -r,. 

P^W' — H-r 

=^-- 

-F— 

.d_it^:duc£ 

#-5. 

^ — 

-I ^ — I 0^  4- 

r"^?“ — • 'w~ 

_ F n “"Tj" 

c\ 

■r 

r 0 n 

* T 

r I 1 J 

1 <*7  * 0 * J 

n — r 

t^_Jr — tad 

■ " r--  j Gr  w "W 

-1 

18.  Mess. 


*_=5: 


:a:q 


m 


-# 0-0-0- 


19.  Sick. 


Quick, 


trumpet  calls,  etc. 


21^ 


20.  Church. 


Slow. 

l-JiL-3- 

. rs-Fg-i 

^ •!} 

4I-L 

22.  Issue. 


298 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


23.  OFFICER’S  Call. 


Quick. 


24.  First  Sergeant’s  Call. 


25.  Fatigue. 


Quick. 


3 


3 


# — s ^ 


t jy- 

^ 

-1^— 

- - 

45--^ 

A 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


299 


26.  School. 


Quick, 


=!e=iS==P 


±j^i^ 


I 


-ful 


-0-0- 


Quick. 
3— 


27.  The  General. 


•I — I -I -I 


5-5- 


-L^i=^=Li:=t*; 


t— t 


f— 


ij- « ijuj-iijirj-j. 


I — #-i-( 


-I— #- 


300 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


DRILL  SIGNALS. 


28.  Attention. 
i^low. 


"1 ^ 

4 IP 

? — 

1 1 

29.  Forward. 


:“V  1 

r 1 

^ Y 

,4._r  4:  -I 

t 

30.  Halt. 


iH 

^ o r 

4 t 

31.  QuickTime. 
Slow.  /r\ 


rn 

T 

~ 

“ i 

L »S  # N»  N* 

^ • 

fi 

4 

r— 

• 

32.  Double  Time.  • 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC.  30^ 


34.  Guide  Right. 
Slow.  /-s 


36.  Guide  Center. 


rH 

t 2 1 

n 

L 

r 

u 

1 1 

n 

1 

[. 

L 

r j r 

\SJ7  ^ ^ 

4= — 

37.  Fours  Right,  or  By  the  Right  Flank. 


802  TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 

38.  Fours  Left,  or  By  the  Left  Flank. 

SlOW^" V Ov 


39.  Column  Right. 


i 


Slow. 


■0-0-S-a- 


-P-f 


Ph- 


<7\ 

-U- 


40.  Column  Left. 


Slow. 


41.  Right  Oblique. 


Slow. 


/CN 


m 


42.  Left  Oblique. 


Slow. 


1 


43.  Right  Front  into  Line. 

Moderate.  ^ 


-iz- 


3 


lPzti!= 


-0-^- 


3=a= 


-p=h- 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


303 


44.  Left  Front  into  Line. 


Moderate.  — n. 

/rs 

J \ m m \ m 

p*  0 1 

A 

li 

h-h-h-M— — 

-!L^  r i»  r i»~l 

1__  — — 0—0 

: “ 3=4 



^ — X 

45.  Face  to  the  Rear. 


Hi—  f « 3 —1 

— P 

P'  ( I P ^ . F 

' l r A L^J  i L 

-^kr' 

f— t 

46.  On  Right  into  Line. 


p-J 

Moderate,  ^ 

'i) 

Moderate, 


47.  On  Left  into  Line. 

/Ts 


304 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


49.  Company  Left  Turn. 


50.  Commence  Firing. 


i 


Quick. 


M 


51.  Cease  Firing. 

Quick.  ^ ^ 


m 


EEE 


^ — b-H — i — 0 


52.  As  Skirmishers. 


Quick. 


m 


— ^ ^ — I*— Fi 

— I- — f.  — j — 


^ — ^• 


#=3 ^ 


=ii=#=:p= 


^ 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC.  806 

53.  To  THE  Rear. 


r-g— ff- i 

m • m m •_ 

p.  \ 

f-m  1 

m m f m • 

j — I 

\ 

L_J 

”]  . 

L 1 

fm  w 1 I 1 1 

LJ  J 

1 

1 

~1 

-.zj  .1 

54.  Rally. 


55.  Lie  Down. 


S235 20 


306 


TRUMPET  CALLS.  ETC. 


MISCELLANEOUS  TRUMPET  CALLS. 


Quick  time. 


57.  PRESIDENT’S  MARCH. 

I 


TW^ 


T — ^ f f 

-| 3 

i» 

r'^ 

W 1 ! J i 

^ 1 

: 

bW — w-i 

--t--b,W  -H— H 1 

1 — #H — 1 

rr  - 

•/  ■ ' j 

LLXj 

i 

r — 

r f ' 

r “<5r- 

: ® -r  m 

—1 

-| 

i — ^-j — 1 

-1 

•-1-  i- 

L-!— M 

1— i- 

FFi*=^ 


S=t; 


-I 1 ■!  I^— hi — l-j — ►-J — 


i 


Quick  time. 


58.  GENERAL’S  March. 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


307 


GenERAL^S  UfKRCH^Concluded. 


59.  Flourishes  for  Review. 
Quick.  ^ 


60.  To  THE  Color. 


Quick 


-e-1 


^ , 

j -.1  1#  1 (•  - “"if 

.i  L.  1 r • r m • r 

1 t _i  I 1 Ilf 

-1—  H i-.ij  f-  r-r^ 

' US^j 

# blHi  l-iBj 0-0-f- 

H 

} ^ 1 

1-^  ^ ^ 

•J 

fc— » 1*--!-*-# ^-5-3 

1=^  l«  t=l 

r-(« 

|-t— ^ j 

3=|t 

~l — I — "i — I — 

308 


TRUMPET  CALLS.  ETC. 


To  THE  COLOR^Concluded. 


rf— r 

0 0 m 0 I 

rr-r-^f  fv 

— 1- 

ip-r  ^ 

0- 

“! ! — M — ! — ! — 

- 

I 

0 . 1# 

« «_ 

• L 

^000  ^ ^ 

-T  # r—r 

; 0 l:  : 

Ll  r 

\y ' 

rjizc H L ’ 

62.  Funeral  March. 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


806 

Funeral  UmkoH— Concluded. 


-(22 

F^— ^-r 

_i 1 

Fr=f^ 

-{  ■}  -{-^  ^ -|- 

1 # 



1 j — 

1 

(22  — . 

_j 

-(S  q — p 

-1 # — 1- 

J- 

w-^ ' 

n 

M 

Li 

-#■ 

V 

1* 

-g — J — 

“J ! 

-1 ^ 

L| 

1 

jzq  q— : 

0 *-0  0 • 0 •r 

K — 1 

1 J •(  J 1 rP 

n — 1 

V 

V 

■ 1 

1 • 

H 

"1 

1 » 

TO— 

— ^ 

: - 

p 


Repeat  at  will. 


TRUMPET  CALLS.  ETC 


8iO 


QUICKSTEPS. 


63.  Quickstep  No.  1. 


trumpet  calls,  etc. 


dll 


Quickstep  No.  \^Concluded. 


64.  Quickstep  No.  2, 


65.  Quickstep  No.  3. 


( F-y-a 

-r 

1 h- 

i  1 1 — 

H 0~0-0-\ 1 1 — I — #- 

1 

**  1 1— * 

l| 

\ 

L 

M 1 — ^ 

312 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


QUICKSTEP  No.  %^Conclude.d. 


^ ^ l-S—  -r 

t: -i- — 

r 

bg-Er=^^=^- 

Ld^ 

— 1 

tz i— : 

0 9i  »M ' 

LJ--1.  -gb 

66.  Quickstep  No.  4, 

F Trumpet: 


=^-\ 

1 

fife 

1 " 

-1 — #-l-4-rJ 

C( 

\J  i% 

I^rook: 

L^l 

E, 

TO-R— 

w 

— s-- 

fit-  ^ ■ 

-■v 

L^J 

*— tr 

^-.-g_L_M_ 

•f  s»  P'1  p 1*  A M 1 

1 — 

r r 

- 1 

hzr 

1 

^ r 

Ei  T^  E\  / tN 

-u= 

^ — ^-— — 1 

H l^H F-|^ 

t l^lul 

TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


319 


Quickstep  No.  A— Concluded. 
Second  time.  End. 


A) ^ 

1 « • 1 

fsl 

L , ^ ' 

\ m r .1 

■ r ^ • 

\»  •f  'l*  ..J  1 

P t 

T 

w • r 

If  Lj^ 

” K ^ 1 

Ml  1 

1 ' 1 

^ t 

I- 

tLT^ 

d f 1 j m M ; i 

i # ! i if  1 

i 

J 

' 

F Trumpet: 


f!  f 

-^— hj-l — 1 — P- 



r»]>  or  ^ 

^ C Crook: 

jJir-G- 

m ^ ^ 

r ly  • iy 

T 

-•-fcai— h-p-»-- 

_J 

T ^-p 

" -4 

End* 

i f'  /t  0C-4: 

^ t— •-v 

- 4 

314 


TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC. 


^ ^ ^ ^ L ^ ^ • 

ji 

L 

^ 1 — ^ — 1 

^■— j ■ H-f—l ^ 

« 

%.. 

%.... 

jii 

c 

L -H  kyd: 

Da  Capo, 


'y  P-*  f-*- 

r^— 

-U,  1 

C 1 



iL  1 r 

[_ 

h-^H 

,#.  ^ gg.-*  _ 

Z it— t 

1 

i_j 

h-p  •^  ” • - 

1 



U L 

__  L_L_#  _L 

-i-  u L_^ m 

— *1- 

*T^  1 .1 IL 

L 

DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


EXPLANATIONS. 

Ihe  Mset:!ibly,  repea*ted  several  times,  is  the  fire  alarm, 
roll  is  the  signal  to  arms. 

t indicates  tap ; f,  flam ; d,  drag ; r,  roll.  The  figures  under  tba 
rolls  indicate  the  niunber  of  strokes  in  each  roll.  Continuous 
foil, 


1,  The  General. 


80=rjffff  r fff  f 


— 

r 

T 

k — r — T'~f~ 

_(* ^ p ■ p p 

m If If I 

r — T — T r 

_ j LL  \j 

\j  1 

f f f f f 
r-6- 

4 

f r 

f f f f f 

f i).a 

« M m' m m’ 

_<t •} p_ 

_p p m p m 

- tt  •*  It-  - 

s . p-  i>  '\j  V 

r 7 — p- 

r — "—7“  - 

fi — j/ — 

..tr  : 

315 


316 


DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


Fife.  80  — J 


3.  To  THE  Color. 


i 


m 


rjzzt 


I r-^- 


f r- 


f f 


i 





— f — ^ 

-W — 


4.  The  Long  Roll,  or  To  Arms. 
r r r r 


— 1 

7 

1 

a 

^ 1 

I 

t ^ 

1 

^ Fife.  140  =r  J 


1: 


5.  Reveille. 

-n 


It 


Drum,  t r 


■^-e-  -F—F — 


7 7 


7 7 


DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


Sli 


R E VE I L L E‘—  Co  mtinued. 


i-6-|— !— nn — T" 

f f 

f*  * 

i ! 1 rr^ 

r_  -f-TZCC  r 

1 'Pv  • W J • 

L.  ' 

LT  T • 1 « rr^t 

w ^ L 

\^TZ  ^ ' Ll  L 

r r 

^ j“ 

r r 

r r 

r r 

r r 

P 

— r — r — 

f-5-r- 

^ L 

-4—  J—  1— 

Bfcirt:  t 

4- 

-1 — u 

-L  - U 

-U  L L 

# p fl  # 

-1 

|H— tn 

rq-  r 1 

^ 1 r 

J •f  p 

-# 

-1  1 

r Y 

^ ™ -hL  L 1 

# 7 r 

— # ^ 1 

r r 

-€ 

r r 

iP^ 

r r 

r r 

r r 

iW  P P 

P P 

1#  p 

p p 

n r 

r 7 p 

W — 1 w 

I 1 

4:  t ■ 

-tr  t— : 

n W ---5 

/ -tt  1 P 

r 

• 

1 

f ¥5  . . . . p r # • • 

J 7 . 

• 

f 

^ 1 

1 

I 

r r 

r 

r 

t 

1 

P *1 

h . ?zr  - 

« If  90t 

1 * ■-* 

r T 7 

W-  

^==-  1 

— 1 

>Sf?ow7  Scotch. 

, 

fe— 

-H  rj-H^- 

—O  O 0 1—  0 

#-*  

_ 

T — r r t 


±± 


9 


f— ^ 

pz p; 

9 


318 


ORUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALa 


\Ke\/^\LLE— Continued. 


140=  J Hessian, 


1# 

0 ^ ^ 0 

5-  " 9 P 

M i 

0 ^ ^ 

m ^ r 

^ ! 

1 _i  ^ 

W 1 

xnz  ^ 

1 * 

. . I H . 1 . H 

1 1^, 

^ Doub 



LE  Drag. 
d d 

d d 

1 

d d 

&c. 
d d 

W'  9 •f 

^ p 

f p 

— /*■  ■ ^ - 

— ; r 

r 1 - 

y 

p i 

t—Lt  ■ - 

— 1-  L 

L| — -1 — t 

Dkum 


i 


UrW. 


DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


819 


Reveille—  Concluded, 


160  — J Quich  Scotch. 


J 

# — 

or  1 

Im  IT  ^ « m \ m m 

1 p p 1^ 

r m r r^r  ^ r 

^ ^ — 

r r 

r r 

&c. 

iL  9 I*  • 

m L 1 

1 F-  F 

^ (= P 

tzzrizz — — 1 -- ZL, 

D,  C.  the  first  pari  of  the  Beveille. 


^20 


DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


T ROOP— Concluded. 


ir-ffT— i — 1 

« 1 

1 ^ ^ f : 

/L  ^ o JL#  . 

( 

-f--^ 

[_ 

L4-  ^ z 

m 1— 

i # 

It  z 

viz  o . 

. r t 

. L 

. r L 

1 t-  • .. 

^ ^ 

t ft  tfdtr 

7 *> 

r 

i w *1  ^ 

^ ^ 

\ P P P 

- ^ ^ ^ 

III 

P 7 p 

P ■»•  Lr  ; 

- U— i 

4i=4r  1 

U U- 

L_l^ ^ L 

7,  Retreat. 


-o-S  "" 

/W 

/W  /W 

p A — J-. 

*1  i*^  ’ ■ 

2 • 

P ^ # 1 

1“ 

■ t-  t h 1 

VU  1 

' I:  B T 

•j 

/TN 

Drum,  r 
n 

r 

r 

7--  1 

1 

1 

,2  • J 

t 2 • 

_z^zr  : ± 

^ iP«  ^ 

t ^ 

. 1 

110=  J 


tip  : 

#-r-- 

^ — TW^ 

A h fcj  -!■ 

-j j 1 

d t t 

« A « 

d t t 

m m m 

d t t 

-x  r- 

- -w- P P 

-‘-p  P P 

It — 1—4=^ 

DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


321 


Retreat — Continued. 


j 

h r-r 

— r — 

1-  1 •J 

- trf — 

.A  N.* 

V ] ^ 

Ilff5  Tl  ' ' 

1 <ii^!  1 

1 ^ 

i ^ --- 

d 1 

-6 

b t d t t d 

fc 

p p 

^ m a 

^ >• 

a 

IS z. 

r ■ r ^ - 

r 

r 

W — t — 1 

t 1 

= t 1=!=  : 

1 

1=  = 

DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


£22 


R ETR  E AT—  Concluded. 

AV  KM  AV 


- '1 

1 

1 

1 

Bn-  * 

^ • 

7^  . 1 

- - -\ 

1 ' 

32  25 J 

2 1 

L ^ 

I 


j.  Fife.  80  = J 



8.  Tattoo. 


tzziiti 


„Drum.  d f t (I 


I 


r f t 


t=t 


I 


I-— i 


zMut 


Ific 


Etid. 


Play  an  Air  in  Quick  time — after  it,  begin  the  Doubling. 
Then  an  Air  in  Common  time — after  it,  repeat  the  Doubling, 
Then  an  Air  in  Slow  time — and  repeat  the  Doubling. 

Finally  an  Air  in  Double  time,  followed  by  three  Rolls 


DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


323 


T ATTOO — Concluded. 


AV  -MA  M/  riV  /Tn 


After  the  three 
RoSIs  repeat 
Doubling 
to  the  end. 


9.  Recall. 


DRUM  AND  FIFE  SIGNALS. 


1 1 . First  Sergeant»s  Call. 


? ?=: 

3-S-1 

P— P 1- ■■  1 -i: — n 

12.  Cease  Firing. 

^ r r r r r 


APPEE'DIX. 


The  following  are  the  sections  of  the  ^‘Army  Regulations, 
1889,”  referred  to  in  the  text  of  the  Drill  Regulations. 

ARTICLE  III. 

RANK  AND  PRECEDENCE  OF  OFFICERS  [EXTRACT]. 

11.  The  relative  rank  between  officers  of  the  Navy  and  Army 
is  as  follows,  lineal  rank  only  being  considered  : 

Admiral  with  General  (when  office  exists). 

Vice-Admiral  with  Lieutenant-General  (when  office  exists). 

Rear  Admiral  with  Major-General. 

Commodore  with  Brigadier-General. 

Captain  with  Colonel. 

Commander  with  Lieutenant-Colonel. 

Lieutenant-Commander  with  Major. 

Lieutenant  with  Captain. 

Lieutenant  (junior  grade),  with  First  Lieutenant.  Ensign  with 
Second  Lieutenant.. 

ARTICLE  XLVII.  , 

HONORS,  SALUTES,  OFFICIAL  VISITS,  CEREMONIES. 

422.  The  following  officers  will  be  received  with  standards 
and  colors  dropping,  officers  and  troops  saluting,  and  the  bands 
and  field  music  playing  as  below  : 

The  President — The  band  playing  ^‘The  President’s  March.” 
The  General — The  band  playing  “ The  General’s  March.”  The 
Lieutenant-General  or  Major-General  commanding — Trumpets 
sounding  three  flourishes  or  drums  beating  three  ruffles.  A 
Major-General — Two  flourishes  and  two  ruffles.  A Brigadier- 
General — One  flourish  or  one  ruffle. 

423.  The  Vice-President,  the  members  of  the  Cabinee,  the 
Chief  Justice,  the  President  of  the  Senate,  the  Speaker  o.**  the 
House  of  Representatives,  and  Governors  within  their  respective 
States  and  Territories,  receive  the  same  honors  as  are  paid  to 
a General  Commanding-in -Chief. 

424.  American  or  foreign  envoys  or  ministers  are  received 
with  the  honors  due  to  a Lieutenant-General. 


ii 


APPENDIX. 


425.  Officers  of  the  Navy  arc  received  with  the  honors  due 
their  assimilated  rank. 

426.  Officers  of  Marines,  and  or  the  Volunteers  and  Militia, 
when  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  receive  the  honors  due 
to  like  grades  in  the  regular  service. 

427.  Officers  of  a foreign  service  are  received  with  the  honors 
due  to  their  rank. 

428.  The  national  or  regimental  colors  passing  guard  or 
other  armed  body,  will  be  saluted,  the  trumpets  sounding,  and 
the  drums  beating  a march. 

Officers  or  enlisted  men  passing  the  colors  will  give  the  pre- 
scribed salute  whether  with  or  without  arms. 

429.  No  honors  are  paid  by  troops  when  on  the  march  or  in 
trenches  and  no  salute  is  rendered  when  marching  in  double 
time,  or  at  the  trot  or  gallop. 

430.  The  commanding  officer  is  saluted  by  all  commissioned 
officers  in  command  of  troops  or  detachments.  If  troops  are 
armed,  arms  will  be  brought  to  a carry  ” before  the  salute  is 
tendered. 

431.  All  officers  salute  each  other  on  meeting,  and  in  making 
or  receiving  official  reports.  When  under  arms  the  salute  is 
made  with  the  sword  or  saber,  if  drawn  ; otherwise  with  the 
hand. 

A mounted  officer  dismounts  before  addressing  a superior  not 
mounted.  In  all  cases  the  junior  salutes  first. 

432.  On  official  occasions,  officers  when  indoors  and  under 
arms  do  not  uncover,  but  salute  with  the  sword,  if  drawn  ; 
otherwise  with  the  hand.  If  not  under  arms,  they  uncover  and 
stand  at  attention,  but  do  not-  salute. 

433.  When  an  enlisted  man  without  arms  passes  an  officer  he 
salutes  him,  using  the  hand  farthest  from  the  officer.  If 
mounted  he  salutes  with  the  right  hand. 

434.  An  enlisted  man  armed  with  the  saber,  when  out  of 
ranks,  salutes  all  officers  with  the  saber,  if  drawn  ; if  not  he 
salutes  with  the  hand.  If  on  foot,  and  armed  with  a rifle  or  car 
bine,  he  salutes  as  prescribed  for  a sergeant.  A mounted  soldier 
dismounts  before  addressing  an  officer^'not  mounted. 

435.  A non-commissioned  officer,  or  private  in  command  of  a 
detachment  without  arms,  salutes  all  officers  with  the  hand.  If 
the  detachment  be  on  foot,  and  armed  with  the  rifle  or  carbine, 
be  brings  his  piece  to  carry,  and  salutes  as  prescribed  for  a 
sergeant.  If  armed  with  a saber,  he  salutes  with  the  saber- 


APPENDIX. 


lU 


436.  An  enlisted  man  being  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of 
an  officer,  faces  towards  him  and  salutes.  If  standing  he  faces 
the  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the  parties  remain  in  the 
same  place,  or  on  the  same  ground,  such  compliments  need  not 
be  repeated.  Soldiers  actually  at  work  do  not  cease  it  to  salute 
an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

437.  An  enlisted  man  makes  the  prescribed  salute  with  the 
weapon  he  is  armed  with  ; or,  if  unarmed,  with  the  hand,  before 
addressing  an  officer.  He  also  makes  the  same  salute  after 
receiving  a reply. 

438.  Indoors,  a non-commissioned  officers  or  soldier,  when 
unarmed,  uncovers  and  stands  at  attention  upon  the  approach 
of  an  officer,  but  does  not  salute ; in  all  other  cases  he  salutes  as 
heretofore  prescribed,  without  uncovering. 

439.  When  an  officer  enters  the  room  where  there  are  soldiers, 
the  word  “ Attention  ” is  given  by  some  one  who  perceives  him, 
when  all  rise  and  remain  standing  in  the  position  of  a soldier 
until  the  officer  leaves  the  room.  Soldiers  at  meals  do  not  rise. 
Officers  in  citizens’  dress  are  saluted  in  the  same  manner  as  when 
in  uniform. 

440.  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  In  all  situations,  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy  and  Marines,  and 
to  officers  of  the  Volunteers  and  Militia  in  the  service  of  the 
United  States,  as  to  offieers  of  their  own  particular  regiments 
and  corps. 

441.  Officers  will  at  all  times,  acknowledge  the  courtesies  of 
enlisted  men  by  returning  salutes  given,  saluting  as  prescribed 
in  the  drill  regulations.  When  several  officers  in  company  are 
saluted,  all  who  are  entitled  to  salute  return  it. 

ARTICLE  XLVII. 

FUNERAL  HONORS  [EXTRACT]. 

474.  The  funeral  escort  of  the  Secretary  of  War  or  General-in- 
Chief  shall  consist  of  a regiment  of  infantry,  a battalion  of 
cavalry,  and  two  batteries  of  artillery  ; of  the  lieutenant-general 
or  the  major-general  commanding,  a regiment  of  infantry,  a 
battalion  of  cavalry,  and  a battery  of  artillery ; of  a major- 
general,  a regiment  of  infantry,  two  companies  of  cavalry,  and 
a battery  of  artillery ; of  a brigadier-general,  a regiment  of 
infantry,  a company  of  cavalry,  and  a platoon  of  artillery  ; of 
a colonel,  a regiment;  lieutenant-colonel,  six  companies;  a 
major,  four  companies ; a captain,  one  company  ; a subaltern, 
half  a company.  * 


Iv 


APPENDIX. 


475.  The  funeral  escort  of  an  officer  will  be  commanded  by  an 
officer  of  the  same  grade  as  the  deceased;  if  none  such  be  present, 
by  one  of  the  next  inferior  grade.  The  form  of  escorting  a 
corpse  to  the  grave  is  prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations  of  the 
several  arms  of  service. 

476.  The  funeral  escort  of  a non-commissioned  staff  officer 
shall  consist  of  sixteen  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a sergeant ; 
of  a sergeant,  of  fourteen  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a 
sergeant ; of  a corporal,  of  twelve  rank  and  file,  commanded  by 
a corporal ; and  of  a private,  of  e%ht  rank  and  file,  commanded 
by  a corporal. 

ARTICLE  XLVIII. 

COMPLIMENTS  FROM  GUARDS  AND  SENTINELS. 

516.  During  the  day,  the  guard  of  a camp  or  garrison  turns 
out  and  presents  arms  to  a general  officer,  the  commander  of 
the  post  or  camp,  and  the  officer  of  the  day. 

517.  Guards  will  turn  out  and  present  arms  to  officers  entitled 
to  the  compliment  as  often  as  they  pass.  The  personal  guards 
of  general  officers  will  turn  out  to  the  general  whose  guards 
they  are,  and  to  his  superiors  in  rank. 

518.  All  guards  will  turn  out  under  arms  when  armed  parties 
approach  their  posts ; to  parties  commanded  by  commissioned 
officers  they  will  present  arms,  officers  saluting. 

519.  The  National  or  regimental  colors  passing  a guard  will  be 
saluted,  the  trumpets  or  field  music  sounding  a march. 

520.  When  an  officer  entitled  to  a salute  passes  guards  in  the 
act  of  relieving,  both  will  salute  at  the  word  of  command  from 
the  senior  officer.  If  he  passes  in  rear  of  a guard  it  does  not 
salute,  but  stands  at  a carry.” 

521.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard,  on  the  approach  of 
a body  of  troops  or  officer  entitled  to  the  compliment,  will  cry, 

Turn  out  the  guard,”  and  announce  who  approaches. 

522.  Guards  do  not  turn  out  as  a matter  of  compliment  after 
sunset,  nor  will  any  compliments  be  paid  by  them  between 
retreat  and  reveille. 

523.  Between  reveille  and  retreat,  sentinels  will  salute  all 
officers  by  presenting  arms. 

524.  Mounted  sentinels,  armed  with  the  saber  and  with  sabers 
drawn,  will  salute  all  officers  by  presenting  saber;  if  armed 
with  the  carbine  only,  they  will,  on  the  approach  of  an  officer, 
take  the  position  of  advance  carbine.  In  challenging,  and 


APPENDIX. 


V 


folding  communications,  they  will  take  the  position  of  advance 
carbine,  raise  pistol,  or  guard,  accordingly  as  they  are  armed 
with  the  carbine,  pistol  or  saber. 

525.  A sentinel  in  a sentry  box,  upon  the  approach  of  an 
officer,  will  stand  at  a carry,  and,  if  armed  with  the  rifle  or  car- 
bine will  present  arms  as  the  officer  passes. 

526.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  except  when  challenging,  a 
sentinel  (not  in  a sentry  box)  will,  when  an  officer  approaches, 
face  outward,  and  stand  at  a carry  until  the  officer  has  passed. 

527.  All  guards  and  sentinels  will  pay  the  same  compliments 
to  civil  officers  of  the  Government ; to  officers  in  the  military  or 
civil  service  of  foi’eign  powers ; to  officers  of  the  Navy  and 
Marine  Corps,  and  to  officers  of  volunteers  and  militia  when  in 
the  service  of  the  United  States,  that  are  directed  to  be  paid  to^ 
officers  of  he  army  of  corresponding  rank. 


HISTORY  OF  THE  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

The  American  troops  were  drilled  by  the  English  Tactics  dur- 
ing the  eai  ly  part  of  the  war  of  the  Revolution.  In  1779  Con- 
gress adopted  Baron  de  Steuben’s  abridgement  of  the  Prussian 
Tactics.  These  were  used  by  the  United  States  Army  until  the 
commencement  of  the  war  of  1812  and  by  the  Militia  until  1820. 
In  1812  a very  imperfect  abridgement  of  the  French  Tactics  of 
1791,  by  General  Alexander  Smyth,  was  published  under  the 
sanction  of  the  War  Department  {Itegtement  Concer^iant  V Exercise 
€t  les  Mamxuvres  de  V Infanterie ; du  lerAout.,  1791).  In  1813 
Lieut,  Colonel  William  Duane  of  the  Rifles,  an  ex-editor,  pro- 
duced a handbook  of  instruction  for  the  squad  and  company, 
which  was  used  to  some  extent  in  the  army.  In  this  year  Con- 
gress requested  the  President  to  have  prepared  for  its  approval 
“a  military  S3^stem  of  discipline  for  the  Infantry  of  the  Army 
nnd  Militia  of  the  United  States.”  This  resolution  was  not  acted 
upon  owing  to  the  occupation  of  the  officers  with  fleld  service, 
and  during  the  war  of  1812  tactical  instruction  was  in  a state  of 
chaos,  every  officer  in  this  matter  being  a law  unto  himself. 
De  Lacroix  had  published  in  Boston  a bad  translation  by  Mac- 
donald of  the  French  tactics,  and  with  this  and  a copy  of  the 
original  French,  General  Scott  at  the  camp  in  Buffalo  in  1814 
personally  instructed  two  brigades  of  Brown’s  division.  This 
was  the  first  introduction  here  of  the  French  system  entire. 
With  some  modifications,  it  was  adopted  by  the  War  Depart- 
ment and  is  known  as  ‘‘the  system  of  1815.”  Its  use  by  the 
militia  was  made  compulsory  in  1820.  The  “ system  of  1825” 
was  adapted  from  the  French  by  a board  consisting  of  Scott, 
Brady,  Fenwick,  Thayer  and  Worth.  It  was  originally  taken  by 
the  French  from  the  Prussian  system  of  Frederick  the  Great  and 
was  used  throughout  the  Revolutionary  and  Napoleonic  wars  of 
France.  Under  authority  of  Congress,  General  Scott  in  1834 
prepared  the  adaptation  of  the  Prussian  system  known  by  his 
name.  The  improvement  in  firearms  finally  compelled  a change 
from  the  formal  movements  of  Scott,  and  Hardee’s  translation 
of  the  French  system  for  their  Chasseurs  d pied  was  adopted  as 
far  as  the  school  of  the  Battalion.  From  its  peculiar  double 
quick  step,  it  was  familiarly  known  as  the  “ Shanghai  Drill.” 
Casey’s  Revivdon  of  Hardee’s  system  was  authorized  during  the 
Civil  War  and  continued  in  use  until  superseded  August  1,  1867, 
by  Upton’s  Tactics,  which  now  in  their  turn  give  place  to  these 

Drill  Regulations.”  Editor  Army  and  Navy  Journal. 


Qiicj^tioiis  as  to  tlie  interpretation  of  tliese  Drill 
Regiilalions  will  be  answered  in  tlie  ^*Artny  and 
Navy  Journal  A ^ 


13Sr  DEX 


IJfFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Details  under  each  subject  are  arranged  alphabetically. 

An  Index  to  Intervals  and  Distances,  and  to  all  General 
Rules  and  Rules  of  General  Application  is  added. 


ORDER  OF 

Pars. 

Close  order 10-484 

School  of  the  soldier 10-178 

School  of  the  company.  179-248 
School  of  the  battalion.  249-367 
Evolutions  of  the  regi- 
ment  368-459 

The  brigade 460^78 

The  division 479-483 

The  corps 484 

Extended  order 502-635 

General  principles 502-510 

Leading  the  squad 511-517 

The  sqmad 518-558 

CLOSE 

SCHOOL  OF  1 

Adjustments  of  sight 91,  92 

Alignments 112,  121-126 

Aim 85,  88,  90-92 

At  ease 22,  59 

Attention 21 

Attention,  to  resume 23,  ^ 

Back  step 39,  40,  112 

Backward,  march 129 

Battle  exercises,  manual 

and  firings 113 

Bayonet  exercise 151-178 


SUBJECTS. 

Par». 


Extended  order  -Cont’d. 

The  platoon 559-576 

The  company 577-601 

The  battalion 602-620 

The  regiment 621 

The  brigade  in  battle . . . 622-631 
The  division  in  battle . . . 632-635 

Ceremonies 663-768 

Trumpet  calls,  etc 769 

Miscellaneous  subjects, 
pages  3-7  and 1-9, 


485-501, 

636-662 

ORDER. 

^HE  SOLDIER. 


Blows  with  butt 172-174 

By  the  numbers 48 

By  the  right  or  left  flank, 

march 131,  132 

Cadence  of  motions 47 

Cadence  of  steps 31,  34 

Carry,  from  charge  bayo- 
net  67 

Carry,  from  fix  bayonet. . 62 

Carry,  from  guard 158 

Carry,  from  order 5J 


325 


326 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-Continued. 


Pars. 

•Carry,  from  port 57 

Carry,  from  present 53 

Carry,  from  right  shoulder  55 

Carry,  from  uiiflx  bayonet.  63 

Carry,  position  of 50 

Cartridges,  when  used 93,  94 

Cease  bring 147  d 49 

Change  direction 133 

Change  step 41 

Charge  bayonet,  from  carry  67 

Charge  bayonet,  from  or- 
der   68 

Close  boxes 79,  96,  97 

Close  chamber 8^3 

Close  ranks,  at  order 112 

Column  of  bles 117,  131,  ^15 

Combination  of  parries, 

points,  etc 175-178 

Commence  bring 150 

Covering  and  marching  on 

points 42,  43 

Dismiss  the  squad 25,  61 

Distance  between  ranks 98,  118 

Distance  between  ranks 

before  lying  down 73 

Distance  in  column  of  bles.  131 
Distances  and  intervals, 

bayonet  exercise 152-156 

Double  time,  from  halt  or 
quick  time. 5,  34,  35,  112,  138,  139 

Draw  cartridge 84 

Eyes  right  or  left 26 

Facings 27,  28,  112 

Fall  in 19,  20,  45,  120 

Fall  out 22,  59 

Fire 86,  88 

Firings 142-150 

Fix  bayonet,  from  carry ...  62 

Fix  bayonet,  from  order. . . 63 

Fix  bayonet,  marching 66 

Fix  bayonet,  with  rod  bayo- 
net   65 

Forming  the  squad 120 

Forward,  march 127 

(General  rules : 

cease  bring 148 

firings 146 


Pars. 

General  rules— Continued, 
guide  in  oblique  march- 
ing   136 

hammer  at  safety 

notch 49,  70 

manual  of  arms 49 

manual  of  arms  in  bat- 
tle exercises 113 

^ :*nual  of  arms,  march- 

inp;  and  halting 112 

maiiual  of  arms,  when 
marchings,  etc.,  are 

understood 112 

open  chambers 46 

Guard 157 

Guide  in  oblique  marching, 

general  rules 136 

Halt 33,  112 

Hammer  at  safety  notch. . . 49,  70 
Individual  instruction  with 

arms 44-113 

Individual  instruction  with- 
out arms 18-43 

Inspection  of  cartridge  box- 
es and  arms 96,  97 

Instructors 13,  14,  111,  115 

Intervals  and  distances, 

bayonet  exercise 1 52-1 56 

Intervals  in  ranks 19,  122 

Knapsacks,  to  unsling  and 

sling 98 

Kneel  and  lie  down 69-76 

Kneel,  from  lying  down 76 

Kneel,  from  order 71 

Left  shoulder 108 

Length  of  steps. 31.,  34,  37-39 

Lie  down,  from  order  kneel- 
ing, and  order 73,  75 

Load  and  fire,  with  and 

without  cartridges 93,  94 

Load,  from  carry  or  order, 77,  112 

Load,  from  fire 87,  88 

Load,  knealing  or  lying 

down 78 

Manual  of  arms • 49-113 

Manual  of  arms,  marching 
and  halting 112 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER, 


327 


Marching  with  arms,  re- 
cruits  

Marchings 

Mark  time 

Oblique  march 

Open  boxes 

Open  chamber 

Open  ranks  at  order. 

Order,  from  carry. . . 

Order,  from  charge  bayo- 
net   

Order,  from  guard 

Order,  from  load  or  ready  . 

Order,  from  port 

Order,  from  right  shoul- 
der   

Order,  from  unfix  bayo- 
net   

Order,  kneeling 

Order,  on  halting 

Order,  position  of 50 

Parade  rest 24,  60 

Parries 165-169 

Points 170, 171 

Port,  from  right  shoulder. . 58 

Port,  from  carry  or  order. . 57 

Position  of  the  soldier 21 

Positions  of  piece  for  ex- 
tended order  and  route 

marches 106 

Present,  from  carry 53 

Quick  time 31-33,  139 

Ready 80,  81 

Recover  (from  aim) 89 

Rest 22,  .59 

Rests 22-24,  .59’  60 

Rifie  salute 95,  485 


Pars. 

Right  shoulder,  from  carry 

or  order 54 

Right  shoulder,  from  port . 58 

Right  shoulder,  when  taken  112 
Rise,  from  order  kneeling. . 72 

Rise,  from  position  lying 

down 74 

Route  marches,  positions 

of  piece 106 

Salute  with  hand 29,  485 

Salute  with  rifie 95,  485 

Secure 110 

Setting-up  exercises 30 

Short  step 37,  40,  135 

Side  step 38,  40,  112 

Sizing  and  forming  the 

squad 119,  120 

Sling  arms 109 

Squad  leader 115 

Stack  arms 99-105 

Step,  when  lost 128 

Steps 31-41 

Steps,  bayonet  exercise. . .157-164, 
171 

Take  arms 102,  104 

The  squad 114-150 

Thrusts 170,  171 

To  the  rear,  march 130 

Trail 107,  112 

Turnings 140,  141 

Unfix  bayonet,  from  carry.  63 

Unfix  bayonet,  from  order.  63 

Unfix  bayonet,  from  port. . 64 

Unfix  bayonet,  marching. . 66 

Unfix  bayonet  with  rod 

bayonet 65 

Volley  firing 145,  146 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-Continued. 
Pars. 

111 
127-141 

36,  40,  135 
134-137 
96 
46,  as 

112 
52 


68 

158 

82 

57 


56 


63 

71 

112 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


Alignments 189 

At  ease,  marching 246 

Attention,  to  resume.  .192,  245,  246 

Captain  in  column  of  fours, 
twos,  etc.,  general  rule.. . 197 

Captain  in  column  of  pla- 
toons   223 


Captain,  in  firings,  general 

rule 

Captain,  in  turn  and 

halt ... 

Captain,  guides,  etc.,  in  all 
wheels  by  fours,  general 
rule  


193 

192 

197 


328 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER. 


Change  of  direction  in  col- 
umn of  fours 

Change  of  direction,  slight. 
Change  of  flanks  and  center 

of  company 

Cliange  of  guides  to  line  of 
file  closers  and  reverse. . . 

Close  ranks 

Column  of  files  from  col- 
umn of  fours  or  twos 

Column  of  fours  or  twos, 
from  column  of  twos  or 

files 218,  219 

Column  of  fours,  to  the 

front,  from  column  of 

platoons 242 

Column  of  fours,  to  the 

front,  from  line 203 

Column  of  fours,  to  the 

right  or  left,  from  line. . .196,  198 
Column  of  fours,  to  the 

right  or  left,  from  line  of 
platoons  in  columns  of 

fours 241 

Column  of  fours,  twos,  or 
files,  faced  to  the  flank  or 

rear 217 

Column  of  platoons,  change 

direction 227-229 

Column  of  platoons,  face 
and  march  to  the  rear. . . 230 

Column  of  platoons,  halts, 

obliques,  m ai  ches 224 

Column  of  platoons,  to  the 
front,  from  columns  of 

fours 243 

Column  of  platoons,  to  the 

front,  from  line 235 

Column  of  platoons,  to  the 
right  or  left,  from  line  . .221,  226 
Column  of  platoons,  to  the 
right  or  left,  froiP  line  of 
platoons  in  columns  of 

fours 237 

Column  of  twos  or  files, 
from  column  of  fotirs  or 
twos 214,  215 


Part. 


Column  of  twos  or  files. 


Commands  of  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons, general  rule 220 

Company  movements  exe- 
cuted as  in  squad 192 

Count  fours 186 

Detachments,  details,  etc. . . 192 

Dismiss  the  company 194 

Distance  leading  four,  sub- 
division, etc.,  advances 
before  halting,  general 

rule 209 

Dress,  in  column  of  fours 

general  rule J99 

Enlisted  men  in  line  of  file 

closers,  general  rule 193 

Face  and  march  to  the  rear, 

from  line 211,  212 

Fall  in 19,  20,  120,  187,  188 

File  closers,  column  of 
fours,  twos,  etc.,  general 

rule 197 

File  closers,  duties  and  re- 
sponsibility of.  .page  4. . . 248 

File  closers,  in  loadings 

and  firings 193 

File  closers,  to  change 

flank 204 

First  sergeant,  position  of. . 247 

Forming  the  company 187,  188 

Forward  march  taken  upon 
completion  of  wheel  by 

fours 199 

Fours  right  or  left 196,  207,  237 

Fours  right  or  left  about, 

in  column  of  fours 206 

General  rules : 

announcement  of  guide 
in  changing  direc- 
tion  228 

captain,  in  alignments. . 189 

captain'  in  column  of 

fours,  twos,  etc 197 

captain  in  firings 193.  266 

captain  in  turn  and 
halt 192 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— Continued. 
Pars. 

200-202 
195 

247 

247 
191 

215 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER. 


329 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY-Continued. 


Pars. 

General  rules— Continued, 
captains,  guides,  etc., 
in  all  wheels  by  fours . 197 

chief  of  subdivision  in 
column,  alignments. . 189 

chief  of  subdivision  in 
column  takes  post, 

when 220 

commands  by  chiefs  of 

platoons 220 

distance  leading  four, 
subdivision,  etc., 
moves  to  front  before 

halting 209 

dress  in  column  of 

fours 199 

enlisted  men  in  line  of 

file  closers 193 

file  closers,  column  of 

fours,  twos,  etc 197 

guide  of  second  or  rear 

platoon  in  column 226 

guides,  in  column  of 

fours,  twos,  etc ^97 

guides,  manual  of  arms 

for 193 

guides  take  post,  when . 189 

march  taken  up  on  com- 
pletion of  wheel  by 

fours 199 

non-commissioned  offi- 
cer commanding  de- 
tachment, etc.,  posi- 
tion of  rifle 193 

pivot,  fixed  in  wheels 

by  fours 197 

Guide,  forming  line  from 

column  of  platoons 231 

Guide,  in  turn  and  halt * 192 

Guides  of  platoons 222 

Guides  take  post  at  com- 
mand “front’’ 189 

Instruction  of  officers,  etc. . 185 

Leading  four  or  subdivis- 
ion, when  halted 209 

Line,  from  column  of 
fours 207-210 


Pars. 

Line,  from  column  of  pla- 
toons  231-234,  236 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 
of  fours,  on  right  or  left, 

from  column  of  fours 2^10 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 
of  fours,  to  the  front,  from 

column  of  fours 239 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 
of  fours,  to  the  front,  from 

line 238 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 
of  fours,  to  the  right  or 
left,  from  column  of 

fours 244 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 
of  fours,  to  the  right  or 
left,  from  column  of  pla- 
toons   237 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  fours 208 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  platoons 234 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  fours 210 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  platoons 236 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  line 
of  platoons  in  columns  of 

fours 238 

Line,  to  the  right  or  left, 

from  column  of  fours 207 

Line,  to  the  right  or  left, 
from  column  of  pla- 
toons   231-233 

Manual  of  arms,  guides, 

etc.,  general  rule 193 

March  at  ease 246 

March  by  the  flank,  from 

column  of  platoons 2.37 

March  by  the  flank,  from 

line 196 

March  taken  upon  comple- 
. tion  of  wheel  by  fours, 

general  rule 199 

March  to  th^  rear,  from 
line 211,  212 


330 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— Contimied. 


Pars. 


Ma)-oh  to  the  rear  in  col- 

of  fours 206 

Movements  executed  as  in 

s^uad 192 

N on  - commissioned  officer 
commanding  detach- 
ment, etc.,  position  of 

rifle,  general  rule 193 

Oblique,  in  column  of 

fours 205 

Obstacles 213 

Officers  marching  at  ease 
or  route  step,  position  of 

sword 246 

Open  ranks 190 


Pars. 

Pivot,  fixed  and  mov- 
able  196,  197,  200 

Platoons 179-ia3, 192 

Platoons,  movements  by.,^J0-244 

Posts  of  officers,  etc 184 

Right  or  left  forward,  fours 

right  or  left 203 

Route  step,  and  at  ease  . . .245,  246 

Sections 179-183 

Sizing  the  company 186 

Squad  leader 180,  183 

Squads 179-ia3 

Subdivisions  of  company.  .179-183 

Swing  of  arms 192 

To  the  rear,  from  line 211,  212 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Adjutant  auv^  sergeant-ma- 
jor post  guides  for  close 

column 337 

Adjutant,  etc.,  when  guide 
is  changed,  general  rule. . 300 

Alignments 279,  280 

Arrangement  of  companies, 

table 253 

Arrangement  of  fractions 

of  different  regiments 253 

Attention,  resuming 269 

Band  and  field  music,  post 

of 256 

Band  takes  its  position  in 

line,  when 260 

Captains  required  to  drill 

battalion 252 

diange  direction  by  the 

flank  in  close  column 344 

Change  front 315-318 

Change  of  direction  in  col- 
umn of  companies.  .305,  308,  309 
Change  of  direction  in  line, 

slight 273 

Changing  file  closers  to  op- 
posite flank 285 

Close  column 334-347 

Close  column,  change  direc- 
tion by  the  flank 344 


Close  column,  deployments 

of 346,  347 

Close  column,  designated 

company  in  front 337 

Close  column,  faced  to  the 
front,  from  column  of 

fours 339 

Close  column,  faced  to  the 
rear,  from  column  of 

fours 346 

Close  column,  faced  to  the 
right  or  left,  from  column 

of  fours 341 

Close  column,  from  col- 
umn of  companies 335 

Close  column,  from  line 338 

Close  column,  in  oblique 

direction 339 

Close  column,  movements 

of 343,  345 

Close  ranks 264 

Color  and  guard.  .254,  265,  498,  499 
Column  of  companies  face 
and  march  to  the  rear . . . 307 

Column  of  companies  from 

close  column 336 

Column  of  companies  from 
right  or  left  to  march  to 
left  or  right 304 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER 


331 


Column  of  companies, 

from  street  column 

Column  of  companies,  halt. 
Colunm  of  companies,  suc- 
cessively, from  column  of 

fours 

Column  of  companies,  to 
the  front,  from  column 

of  fours 

Column  of  companies,  to 
the  front,  from  column  of 

platoons 

C)lumn  of  companies,  to 

the  rear,  from  line 

Column  of  companies,  to 
the  right  or  left,  from 

line 298,  299 

Column  of  companies,  to 
the  right  or  left,  from  line 

of  columns  of  fours 327 

Column  of  companies,  to 
the  right  or  left,  from  line 

of  platoon  columns 359 

Column  of  fours,  from  close 

column 342 

Column  of  fours,  from  col- 
umn of  companies 330 

Column  of  fours,  from  col- 
umn of  platoons 348 

Column  of  fours  from  right 
or  left,  to  march  to  left  or 

right 284 

Column  of  fours,  from 

line 282,  284 

Column  of  fours,  from 

street  column 367 

Column  of  fours,  movement 

same  as  in  company 286 

Column  of  fours,  succes- 
sively, from  column  of 

companies 303 

Column  of  platoons,  from 

column  of  companies 349 

Column  of  platoons,  from 

column  of  fours 348 

Column  of  platoons,  from 
line 348 


Pars. 

Column  of  platoons, 
from  line  of  platoon  col- 
umns  361 

Column  of  platoons,  take 

and  close  distances 351 

Command  of  major  after 

firings,  general  rule 266 

Commands  repeated  or 

given  by  captains 250 

Deployments  of  close  col- 
umn  346,  347 

Designations  of  companies 

and  wings 253 

Dismiss  the  battalion 270 

Distance  between  com- 
panies in  column  of 

fours 282 

Distance  in  close  column, 

general  rule 334 

Distance  in  column  of  sub- 
divisions  298 

Equalizing  companies  and 

the  battalion 253,  262 

Face  and  march  to  the  rear 

m line 276,  277 

Field  and  staff,  posts  of 255 

File  closers  in  close  col- 
umn, general  rule 334 

File  closers,  to  change 285 

Fire  at  will 268 

Fire  by  battalion 268 

Fire  by  company 267 

Formation,  advancing  con- 
siderable distances 275 

Formation  of  battalion 253 

Forming  the  battalion 257-261 

Fractions  of  different  regi- 
ments. positions  of 253 

Full  distance,  from  close 

column 336 

General  rules : 

ad j utant,  etc. , when 

guide  is  changed 300 

captain  at  command 

guide  center 272 

captain  dressing  com- 
Dany 258* 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— Continued. 
Pai  s. 

367 
306 


302 


330 

350 

301 


332 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— Continued. 


Pars. 

General  rules— Continued, 
captain  in  loadings  and 

firings 193,  266 

command  of  major 

after  firings 266 

distance  in  close  col- 
umn  a34 

file  closers  in  close  col- 
umn  334 

guides  of  subdivisions 

in  column 300 

successive  formations. . 288 

Guide,  announcement  of . . . 251 

Guides,  cover 311 

Guides  marching  at  route 

step  and  at  ease 319 

Habitual  formation  ad- 
vancing considerable  dis- 
tances  275 

In  mass 334-347 

Instruction  of  officers 252 

Intervals  in  line 257 

Intervals  in  line  of  columns 

of  fours 325,  332.  333 

Intervals  in  line  of  platoon 

columns 354 

Line  by  two  movemtrts, 
from  column  of  fours  . . .^3-297 
Line,  from  close  column.  .346,  347 
Line  from  column  of  com- 
panies  310,  312-314 

Line  from  line  of  Compa- 
nies in  columns  of  fours  . 

Line  from  line  of  platoon 

columns 

Line  of  columns  of  fours, 
movements  like  battal- 
ion in  line 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours  at  close  in- 
tervals   

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  change 

direction  . .*. 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  close  and 
extend  intervals 332,  333 


324 
358 

321 

325 
323 


Pars. 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  from  col- 
umn of  companies 32& 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  from  line 
of  platoon  columns 
marching  by  the  flank  ...  365 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  gain 
ground  toward  flank  and 

front 322 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  on  right  or 
left,  from  column  of  fours  326 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  to  the 
front,  from  column  of 

fours 325 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  tothefront, 

from  line 320 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  to  the  * 
right  or  left,  from  col- 
umn of  fours 329 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
close  and  extend  intervals  355 

Line  of  platoon  columns. 

formations. 356,  360,  362,  363,  366 
Line  of  platoon  columns, 

intervals 354 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 

march  by  the  flank 364 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
movements  same  as  in 
line  of  columns  of  fours. . 357 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
on  right  or  left,  from  col- 
umn of  platoons 362 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 

to  the  front,  from  line 356 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
to  the  front,  from  column 

of  fours 366 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
to  the  front,  from  column 
of  platoons 363 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER 


333 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— Continued. 


Pars. 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
to  the  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  companies 360 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 
to  the  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  platoons 361 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  companies 312 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  fours 289 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  platoons 352 

Line,  to  or  on  right  or  left, 

from  close  column 336 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  companies 313,  314 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  fours 290,  291 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  platoons 353 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  line 

of  columns  of  fours 324 

Line,  to  the  front,  from  line 

of  platoon  columns 358 

Line,  to  the  right  or  left, 
from  column  of  compa- 
nies  310 

Line,  to  the  right  or  left, 

from  column  of  fours 287 

Line,  to  the  right  or  left, 
from  column  of  platoons.  348 

Loadings  and  firings 265,  266 

Losing  step 274 

Manual  of  arms 265 

March  at  ease,  and  route 

step 319 

March  by  the  flank 282,  283 

EVOLUTIONS  OF 

Advance  in  line,  line  of  col- 
umns or  line  of  masses. . . 376 

Alignments 380. 440 

Band,  posts  of 369 

Battalions  awaiting  com 
pletio'-i  of  mo’^’ement , . . . 370 

Change  front,  line 453 


Pars. 


March  in  line 271 

March,  and  face  to  the 

rear 276,  277 

Mounted  officers 255 

Movements  by  pla- 


Movements  in  close  col- 
umn   343-345 

Movements  in  line  of  col- 
umns of  fours 321 

N on  - commissioned  officer 
commanding  company, 

post  of 259 

Oblique  by  heads  of  col- 
umns   322 

Oblique  change  of  front 318 

Oblique  in  line 278 

Obstacles 281 

Open  ranks 263 

Platoon  column,  defined. . . 354 

Ployments  in  close  col- 


Post  of  band  and  field  music  256 

Post  of  non-commissioned 
officer  commanding  com- 
pany   259 

Posts  of  field  and  staff 255,  319 

Rests 269 

Route  marches 319 

Simultaneous  movements 

by  companies,  etc 251 

Square  from  street  column  367 

Stack  and  take  arms 269 

Staff  and  non-commissioned 

staff  take  post,  when 260 

Street  column,  formation 
and  movements  of 367 

THE  REGIMENT. 

Change  front,  line  of 

masses 442 

Color  and  color  guard 254,  265, 

498,  499 

Column  at  full  distance 401 

Column  at  full  distance, 
change  direction 402 


334 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER, 


Column  at  full  distance, 

face  to  the  rear 

Column  at  full  distance, 
from  column  of  masses  . . 
Column  at  full  distance, 
movements  same  as  in 

battalion 

Column  of  battalions, 
from  line  of  column  of 

fours 425-4?^> 

Column  of  battalions,  on 
flank  and  interior  battal- 
ion from  line 4“^^,  427 

Column  of  companies  or 

platoons  from  line 401 

Column  of  fours,  from  line 

of  masses 446 

Column  of  fours  from  right 
or  left  to  march  to  left  or 

right 382 

Column  of  fours  from  two 

lines 387 

Column  of  fours,  move- 
ments explained  from 

march 384 

Column  of  fours,  move- 
ments same  as  in  battal- 
ion   383 

Column  of  masses,  change 

direction  by  the  flank 418 

Column  of  masses,  dis- 
tances   410 

Column  of  masses  faced  to 
the  front,  from  column 

of  fours 415 

Column  of  masses  faced  to 
the  front,  from  line  of 

masses 448 

Column  of  masses  faced  to 
the  rear,  from  column  of 

fours 416 

Column  of  masses  faced  to 
the  rear,  from  line  of 

masses 449 

Column  of  masses  faced  to 
the  right  or  left,  from 
column  of  fours 417 


Para. 

Column  of  masses  from 
column  at  full  d i s - 

tance 411 

Column  of  masses  from 
line,  etc.,  duties  of  adju- 
tant  448 

Column  of  masses,  from 
line,  rule  for  ployment ...  410 

Column  of  masses  in  ob- 
lique direction,  from  col- 
umn of  fours 415 

Column  of  masses,  move- 
ments same  as  at  full  dis- 
tance   ’. . 417 

Column  of  masses  on  flank 
and  interior  battalion  from 

line 413,  414 

Column  of  masses,  princi- 
ples for  forming 410 

Column  of  masses  to  the 
right  or  left,  from  line  of 

masses ; 447 

Column  of  platoons  from 

line 401 

Commands,  general  rules. . . 370 

Deployments  of  column  of 

masses 419-423 

Designation  of  battalions. . . 371 

Dismiss  the  regiment 375 

Distance,  column  of  battal- 
ions  385 

Distance,  column  of  fours, 

between  battalions 382 

Distance,  column  of  masses  410 

Distance,  in  two  or  more 

lines 385 

Distances,  column  of  subdi- 
visions  298 

Distances,  in  echelon 457 

Echelon 457-459 

Echelon,  movements  same 

as  in  line 4.58 

Face  to  the  rear,  line 377 

Firings 373 

Forming  the  regiment 371 

General  rules  for  com- 
mands   370 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT-Continned. 
Pars. 

403 
412 

401 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER, 


885 


Halt 

Intervals  in  line 

Intervals,  line  of  companies 
or  platoons  in  columns  of 

fours 

Intervals,  line  of  masses 

Intervals,  line  of  platoon 

columns 

In  two  lines,  on  right  or  left, 
from  column  at  full  dis- 
tance   

In  two  lines,  on  right  or  left, 

from  column  of  fours 

In  two  lines,  position  and 
movements  of  second 

line 

In  two  lines  to  the  front, 
from  column  at  full  dis- 
tance   

In  two  lines  to  the  front, 
from  column  of  fours . . . 394,  398 
In  two  lines  to  the  right 
or  left,  from  column  of 

fours 386 

Tn  two  or  three  lines,  from 

column  of  masses 422,  423 

\.ine  by  two  movements, 
from  column  at  full  dis- 
tance   408 

Line  by  two  movements, 
from  column  of  fours. . .395,  396 
Line,  from  echelon  of  bat- 
talions   459 

Line,  from  line  of  col- 
umns   376 

Line  of  battalions  in  col- 
umns of  fours,  from  col- 
umn of  masses 424 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours  from  col- 
umn of  fours 399 

Line  of  companies  in  col- 
umns of  fours  from  line. . 409 

Line  of  masses 432-452 

Line  of  masses,  adjutant 

and  sergeant-major 432 

Line  of  masses,  alignment . 440 


Pars. 


Line  of  masses,  change 

front 442 

Line  of  masses,  extend  and 

close  intervals 433 

Line  of  masses  faced  to  the 
right  or  left,  from  column 

of  fours 436 

Line  of  masses,  from  line 
of  masses  marching  by 

the  flank 445 

Line  of  masses,  major 432 

Line  of  masses,  march  by 

the  flank 443 

Line  of  masses  marching 
by  the  flank,  change  di- 
rection  444 

Line  of  masses,  movements 

same  as  in  line 441 

Line  of  masses  on  flank 
and  interior  battalion, 

from  line 434,  435 

Line  of  masses,  on  right 
or  left,  from  column  of 

fours 437 

Line  of  masses,  on  right 
or  left,  from  column  of 

masses 451 

Line  of  masses,  posting 

guides 432 

Line  of  masses,  to  the  front 


from  column  of  fours. . .438,  439 
Line  of  masses,  to  the 
front  from  column  of 

masses 452 

Line  of  masses  to  the  right 
or  left,  from  column  of 

masses 450 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 

of  fours  from  line 409 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 
column  at  full  distance. . . 404 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  fours 388 

Line  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn at  full  distance 406 

Line  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  battalions 430,  431 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  REGIMENT— Continued. 
Pars. 

379 
371 

409 
371 

454 

405 
389 

385 

407 


336 


INDEX-CLOSE  ORDER. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE 
Pars. 

Line  to  the  front,  from  col- 
umn of  fours 390-393,  397 

Line,  to  the  right  and 
left,  from  column  of 

masses 419-421 

Line,  to  the  right  or  left, 

from  column  of  fours 383 

March  to  the  rear,  line 378 

March  by  the  flank,  from 

line 381 

Movements  by  battalions, 
simultaneous  and  sepa- 
rate  370 

Movements  by  platoons  . . .454-456 

Movements  in  echelon 458,  459 

Movements  in  line  of  col- 
umns of  fours 399 


THE  BI 

Change  of  front 478 

Composition  of  the  brigade . 460 

Distances  between  lines 465 

Designated  formation  for 

each  regiment 470 

Designations  of  regiments. . 461 

Drill  exercises 464 

Habitual  formation  moving 

into  position 464 

Halt 472 

Interval  between  r e g i - 

ments 462 

In  two  or  more  lines,  from 

column  of  fours 468 

Line,  from  column  of 

fours 467-469 

Line,  from  column  of  pla- 
toons   470 

Line,  from  line  of  columns 

of  fours 476,  477 

Line,  from  line  of  masses. 476,  477 
Line,  from  line  of  platoon 

columns 476,  477 

Line,  march  to  the  rear 473 

Line  of  columns  of  fours, 
marchings 474 


REGIMENT— Continued. 

Pars. 


Movements  of  column  ot 

masses 417 

Movements  of  masses 441-452 

Open  and  close  ranks 372 

Orderlies  and  tinimpeters, 

mounted .369 

Ployrnents  into  column  of 

masses 410-417 

Posts  of  fleld,  staff,  and 

band ,369 

Regiment,  composition .368 

Rests ,374 

Route  marches 1^9 

Route  step  and  at  ease 400 

Successive  formations 385 

Trumpeters  and  orderlies 
mounted 369 


Line  of  masses,  marchings.  474 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 

marchings 474 

Line,  on  right  or  left,  from 

column  of  fours 469 

Lines  of  columns  of  fours. . 470 

Lines  of  masses 470 

Lines  of  platoon  columns  . . 470 

Line  to  the  front,  from  col-  . 

umn  of  fours 466 

Line  to  the  right  or  left, 

from  column  of  fours 467 

March  by  the  flank 475 

March  in  line 471 

March  to  the  rear,  line 473 

Movements  of  regiments 

and  battalions 464 

Orders  of  brigade  com- 
mander  465 

Posts  of  brigade  command- 
ers, staff,  etc 463 

Posts  of  regiments 461 

Re-form  line  from  line  of 
columns  of  fours,  line  of 
masses,  or  line  of  platoon 


columns 476,  477 


INDEX-EXTENDED  ORDER. 


337 


THE  DIVISION. 


Pars. 


Composition 479 

Designations  of  brigades. . . 481 

Distances  between  lines 483 

Evolutions 479 

Interval  between  brigades. . 482 

Number  of  lines  and  forma- 
tion of  each 482 


THE  CORPS. 


Pars. 

Orders  of  division  com- 


mander  483 

Post  of  division  command- 
er  480 

Posts  of  brigades 481 


484 


EXTENDED  ORDER. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 


Alignments 509 

Attention  fixed,  signal 506 

Basis 502 

Chief,  leaving  post 510 

Commencement  of  instruc- 
tion  503 

Dressing,  without  c o m - 

mand 509 

Duties  of  officers  and  ser- 
geants   502 

Enemy,  imaginary,  out- 
lined or  represented,  defi- 
nition  505 

Extended  order  from  any 
formation 507 


Face  to  the  front  on  halttng  508 

Instruction,  when  com 

menced 503 

Maintenance  of  squad 502 

March  and  stand  at  ease  . . . 509 

Movement  commenced,  sig- 
nal  506 

Movements  always  made 
with  reference  to  an  en- 
emy   504 

Position  of  piece 106,  113 

Post  of  chief 510 

Signals,  application 506 

Squad,  when  broken  up 502 

Stand  and  march  at  ease. . . 509 


LEADING  THE  SQUAD. 

Corporal,  posts  of 510,  513,  517  | Execution  of  movements. 

Execution  of  movements  manner 5K 

at  signa’  i 511  Exercises  of  squad 514 

I Guide 515,  516 


THE  SQUAD. 


Advance,  from  rally 531 

Assembly 532 

As  skirmishers,  forward 523 

Base  file  or  skirmisher  . . .515,  516. 

520 

Battle  exercises 558 

Change  direction  or  front . . 530 

Corporal,  pos*^«  of 510,  513,  517, 


Departures  from  general 

rules  of  fire  discipline .535 

Deploy  as  skirmishers,  for- 
ward and  bj:  the  fiank.  .523,  524 

Deploy  from  rally 531 

Deployment  as  skirmishers, 

general  rule 521 

Deployments  forward  and 
by  the  fiank,  general  ruK  518 


338 


INDEX-EXTENDED  ORDER. 


THE  SQUAiD-Continued. 


Pars. 

Execution  of  movements  at 

signals 533 

Fire  as  skirmishers  with 

counted  cartridges 538,  545 

Fire  at  will,  and  with  count- 
ed cartridges 538,  544 

Fire  discipline 534-540 

Firings 541-546 

General  rules : 

base  file,  skirmisher  or 

guide 515,  516,  520,  521 

deployment  as  skirmish- 
ers  521 

deployment  forward 

and  by  the  flank 518 

interval  between  skir- 
mishers  519 

kneel  or  lie  down 522 

of  fire  discipline 534 

of  fire  discipline,  de- 
partures from 535 

posts  of  squad  leader. . . 510 

513,  517,  520,  527,  528 
Instruction  on  varied 
ground 547-557 


Pars. 

Intensity  of  fire,  how  regu- 
lated  544 

Interval  between  skirmish- 
ers, general  rule 519 

Intervals,  increase  and  di- 
minish  525 

Kneel  or  lie  down,  general 

rule 522 

Line  of  skirmishers,  from 

line 523,  524 

Marchings 526-530 

Number  of  cartridges  to  be 

fired 545 

Rally 531 

Ranges,  classification 540 

Rapid  fire . 539,  546 

Regulating  intensity  of  fire.  544 

Rushes 556 

Scouts,  to  fire 535 

Sharpshooters,  and  individ- 
ual men,  firing 536 

Signals,  use  of page  7. . . 533 

Skirmishers,  assemble 532 

Use  of  cover 551.  557 

Volley  firing 537,  543 


Assemble. 

Change  direction  or  front. . 

Chief  of  platoon,  post  and 

duties,  general  rule .559 

Corporal,  posts.. 510,  513,  517,  520, 
527,  528,  559,  572 
Deploy  skirmishers,  from 
line  and  line  of  squads.  .563,  564 
Deploy  platoon  as  skir- 
mishers   564 

Designation  of  center 
squad  and  point  of  direc- 
tion   559 

Different  formations  for 

squads 567 

Firing  line,  composition, 

general  rule 559 

Firings 572,  '573 


General  rules : 

composition  of  firing- 

line  559 

designation  of  center 

squad 559 

designation  of  point  of 

direction 559 

marching  by  flank  un- 
der fire 559 

movements  of  support. . 559 

posts  and  duties  of  chief 

of  platoon 559 

posts  and  duties  of 

chiefs  of  sections 559 

posts  and  duties  of  cor- 
porals. 510,  513,  517,  520,  527, 
528,  559,  572 
support 559 


THE  PLATOON. 

.566,  576 
570 


INDEX-EXTENDED  ORDER. 


339 


THE  PLATOON-Continued. 


Pars. 


Intervals,  increase  and  di- 
minish   565 

Intervals  in  line  of  sections  574 

Intervals  in  line  of  squads. . 560 

Line  of  sections,  move- 
ments same  as  line  of 

squads 574 

Line  of  skirmishers,  from 

line  of  squads 563 

Line  of  skirmishers,  from 

platoons  in  line 564 

Line  of  squads,  from  line. . 560 


Line  of  squads,  on  rig^ht  or 
left,  from  column  of  fours  562 


Pars. 

Line  of  squads,  to  the  front, 

from  column  of  fours 561 

Marchings ,568-571 

Rally 576 

Re-enforcement  of  firing 

line 575 

Section  constituting  firing 

line 573 

Section,  movements  of,  like 

platoon 574 

Signals  for  execution  of 

movements page  7 . 533 

Support,  general  rule 559 


THE  COMPANY. 


Advance  2,500  yards  to 
enemy’s  position,  offen- 
sive  583-593 

Arrival  at  position,  defen- 
sive   597 

Arrival  of  supports  on  firing 

line,  offensive 589 

Artillery,  defense  and  at- 
tack of 599-601 

Assembly 580 

Attack 583-593,  595 

Battalion  reserve,  defen- 
sive   

Battle  formation 

Battle  formation  defen- 
sive  

Cavalry,  action  against 

Charge 

Closing  of  firing  line,  offen- 
sive   

Commanders  of  compa- 
nies, duties  of,  respect- 
ing use  of  scouts 

Company  alone,  defen- 
sive  578,  597 

Company  alone,  offen- 
sive  f.578,  595 

Company  in  battalion,  de- 
fensive  .596 


596 

577 

596 

598 

593 

587 


582 


Company  in  battalion. 


Composition  of  firing  line, 

defensive 596 

Counter  attacks,  defensive.  597 

Defensive  dispositions 596,  597 

Deployment 580 

Designation  of  sections  for 
firing  line  and  support, 

offensive 583 

Echelons 577 

Extension,  offensive 583 

Fighting  front,  company 

in  battalion 577 

Fire  discipline,  how  main- 
tained   591 

Firing  line,  sections  for 579 

Firings 580 

First  volleys,  offensive 585 

Form  for  attack,  offensive  . 583 

General  rule : 

reconnoissances  and  use 

of  scouts 582 

Infantry  under  artillery 

fire 599 

Intervals,  increase  and  di- 
minish   580 

Line  of  squads  or  sections. . .580 

Marchings 580 


840 


INDEX-EXTENDED  ORDER. 


THE  COMPANY— Continued. 
Pars. 


Movements  following 

charge,  offensive 59.3 

Movements  same  as  pla- 
toon   .580 

Offensive 583-595 

Positions  and  duties  of  offi- 
cers, etc 581 

Pursuit 595 

Rally 580 

Rapid  fire,  offensive 593 

Recon  noissances,  general 

rule 582 

Re-enforcing  firing  line,  de- 
fensive and  offensive. . . .592,  596 


Pars. 

Relieving  the  firing  line,  of- 
fensive  594 

Retiring  from  position,  de- 
fensive  597 

Rushes 556,  588,  590,  692 

Scouts,  use  and  duties  of.. 582,  583, 
.585,  596,  .597 

Sections  for  firing  line 579 

Sections  for  firing  line  and 

support,  offensive 583 

Supports  all  in  firing  line, 

offensive 593 

Volleys,  offensive 586-591 


Advance  guard  of  a regi 

ment 

Against  cavalry 

Assembling  and  rallying  . . 
Artillery,  defense  and  at 

tack  of 

Battalion  alone,  defensive. 
Battalion  alone,  offensive. . . 
Battalion  in  action,  general 

rules 

Battalion  in  regiment,  de- 
fensive  

Battalion  in  regiment,  of- 
fensive  

Color,  in  action 

Defensive 

Designation  of  companies, 
etc.,  for  fighting  line  and 

reserve  

Direction  of  advance 

Discretion  of  commanders. . 
Dispositions  after  assault, 

offensive 609 

Dispositions  of  a battal- 
ion   613—620 


Echelons 603 

Extension 604 

Fighting  front 604 

Fighting  line 603 

Firing  line 603 

Formation  for  attack 604,  609 

General  rulec 608 

Intervals  between  c o m - 
panies  in  line  of  skirmish- 
ers   604 

Intrenchments 611 

Marchings 605 

Mounted  officers 604 

Night  operations 620 

Offensive 609,  610 

Operating  on  flank 613 

Patrols,  defensive 611 

Position  of  reserve 604 

Post  of  major 604 

Principles  of  instruction 602 

Rallying 607 

Rear  guard  of  a regi- 
ment.  615 

Relieving  and  re  enforcing 
firing  line 606 


621 


THE  BATTALION. 


614 
616 

607 

617-619 
612 
610 

608 

611 

609 
604 
611,  612 


604 

605 
608 


THE  REGIMENT 


INDEX-CEREMONIES. 


341 


THE  BRIGADE  IN  BATTLE. 


Pars. 

Discretion  of  commanders . 626, 629 
Fighting  line,  without  regi- 


mental reserves 624 

Formations 622-626 

One  line 623 

Order  from  brigade  to  bat- 
talion commander 628 


Passing  from  close  to  ex- 
tended order,  general  rule.  629 

THE  DIVISION  IN  BATTLE... 


Pars. 

Place  of  reserve,  general 

rule 629 

Position  of  brigade  com- 
mander  627 

Reserve  formed  in  eche- 
lon   629 

Two  or  three  lines 624,  625 

Withdrawing  the  bri- 
gade  630-631 

632-635 


CEREMONIES. 


(Battalion  inspection 739-745 

Battalion  parade 733,734 

Battalion  review 689-696 

Brigade  review 703-705 

Company  inspection 746 

Corps  review 709,710 

Division  review 706-708 

Details,  at  guard  mounting, 

alternate  in  position 713 

Escort  of  the  color 754r-757 

Escorts  of  honor 758 

Field  and  staff  senior  to  in- 
specting officer 740 

Funeral  escort 759-768 

General  rules  for  ceremo- 
nies   663-666 

arrangement  of  troops 

of  different  arms 663 

field  and  staff,  when 

mounted 665 

non-commissioned  offi- 
cer commanding  com- 
pany or  platoon 666 

posting  of  companies, 

battalions,  etc 664 

General  rules  for  reviews.. 667-688 
after  passing  reviewing 

officer 687,  688 

bands,  play,  turn  out  of 

column,  etc 683 

brigades  at  ease,  etc 678 

changing  direction,  pass- 
ing in  review 667 


General  rules  for  reviews— 
Continued. 

colonels  and  majors  fac- 
ing line  to  give  com- 
mands   680 

colonels  and  majors  sa- 
lute after  resuming 

front 680 

color  salutes 498,  682 

column  passing  review- 
ing officer,  distance  . . 667 

commanders  draw  and 
return  sword,  when  . . 676 

commanders  take  post 

in  column,  when 674 

commanders  turning 

out  of  column 677 

commands  given  or  re- 
peated by  colonels  and 

majors 679,  680 

companies  brought  to 
carry  and  right  shoul- 
der   667 

execution  of  commands 
repeated  by  majors  . . 680 

field  music  sounds 
march,  flourishes,  or 

ruffles 684 

flag  and  orderlies  of  re- 
viewing officer 670 

marking  points  where 
column  changes  di- 
rection, etc 667 


342 


INDEX-CEREMONIES. 


CEREMONIES-Continued. 


Pars. 

Qeneral  rules  for  reviews— 
Continued. 

modifications  of  forma- 
tion for  review 685 

officers  and  others  ac- 
companying review- 
ing officer 669,  671 

orderlies  of  reviewing 

officer 670 

pass  in  review  in  quick 

time 6®^ 

points  where  companies 
execute  carr}"  and 

right  shoulder 667 

repetition  of  commands 

by  colonels 679 

review  by  inspector 
junior  to  command- 
ing officer 696 

reviewing  officer,  post 

of 668 

reviewing  officer  riding 
around  troops,  who 

accompany 672 

reviewing  officer,  sa- 
lutes  669 

review  of  command 

larger  than  corps 711 

salute  by  color 498,  682 

salute  to  color 669 

salutes  returned  by  re- 
viewing officer 669 

sounding  march,  flour- 
ishes, ruffles 684 

staff  and  orderlies  when 
commander  faces  line 

to  give  commands 681 

staff,  etc.,  of  command- 
ers  675 

staff,  etc.,  of  command- 
ers turning  out  of  col- 
umn   677 

staff,  etc.,  of  reviewing 

officer 669,  670 

staff,  etc.,  passing 
around  troops 673 


Pars. 

General  rules  for  reviews — 
Continued. 

staff  officers  draw  and 
return  sw'ord,  when  . . 676 

staff  salute  at  command  680 

Guard  mounting 712-732 

Guard  mounting,  cavalry 

and  infantry  united 731 

Guard  mounting,  in  bad 

weather,  etc 730 

Guard  mounting,  interval 
between  old  and  new 

guard 726 

Guard  mounting,  without 

review 725 

Inspection,  band 743 

Inspection,  battalion 739-745 

Inspection,  enlisted  men 

with  sword  drawm 497 

Inspection  of  a company. 742,  746, 
747 

Inspection,  regimental 748-750 

Muster 751-753 

Non-commissioned  officer 

commanding  guard 718,  727 

Officer  of  the  guard,  super- 
numerary   717 

Officers  of  the  day 722 

Parade,  battalion 733,  734 

Parade,  regimental 735-738 

Points  where  companies 
execute  carry  and  right 

shoulder 667 

Regimental  inspection 748-750 

Regimental  parade 735-738 

Regimental  review 697-702 

Review,  battalion 689-696 

Review,  brigade 703-705 

Review  by  inspector  junior 
to  commanding  officer  . . . 696 

Review,  corps 709,  710 

Review,  division 70^708 

Review  of  command  larger 
than  corps 711 


INDEX-MISCELLANEOUS.  343 

TRUMPET  CALLS,  ETC.,  pages  285-324,  par.  769. 

MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS,  pages  3-7  and  pars.  1-9,  485-501, 
63&-662. 

Pars. 


Pars. 

About  face  for  officers 486 

Adyance  guard 614,  636-640, 

644,  645 

Definition page  5 . . 636 

Modifications  of  rules. . . 645 

Strength 644 

Band 256,  260,  369,  500,  501 

Drum  major,  instruc- 
tions for 501 

Field  music,  posts  and 

duties 256,  500 

Formation 500 

Inspection 743 

Marches,  fiourishes,  ruf 
fles,  and  to  the  coloi 
sounded  by  field  mu- 
sic, when 50u,  o84 

Movements  of  band. . .500,  683 

Open  ranks 500 

Posts  of 256,  369 

Takes  post,  when 260 

Camping 660,  661 

Color  and  color  guard. . .254,  265, 
498,  499,  604 
Color,  escorted  to  and 
from  color  company  . 499 

Color  guard 499 

Color  guard,  manual  of 

arms 265 

Color  in  action 604 

Color,  regimental,  post 

of  bearer 499 

Color,  with  battalion 
designated  by  colonel  499 

Manual  of  the  color 498 

Regimental  color-bear- 
er, post  of 499 

Salute  of  color,  when 

rendered 498,  682 

Courtesy  among  military  men  485 

Definitions pages  3-6. 

Drill  signals page  7. 

Drum  major,  instructions  for  501 


Enlisted  men  using  about 

face  for  officers 486 

Field  music,  posts  and  duties 


General  principles.  Infantry 

Drill  Regulations 1-9 

Commands 6,  7 

Formation  for  infant- 
ry  1 

Guide  (right  or  left) 3 

Movements  from  halt 

or  marching 4 

Movements  in  double 

time 5 

Movements  toward 
either  flank,  how  ex- 
plained   2 

Posts  of  officers  and  in- 
structors  9 

Signals  and  trumpet 
calls,  use  of,  in  in- 
struction  8 

Honors  to  be  paid  by  troops  662 


Carry  sword,  when 

used 492 

Enlisted  men  with 
sword  drawn,  at  in- 
spection   497 

Enlisted  men  with 
sword  drawn,  carry 
sword  (or  arms),  from 

present 489 

Enlisted  men  with 
sword  drawn,  order 
sword  (or  arms),  from 

carry 491 

Enlisted  men  with 
sword  drawn,  present 

sword  (or  arms) 489 

Officers  draw  and  re- 
turn sword  without 
command 495 


344 


INDEX-DISTANCES. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SUBJECTS— Continued. 
Pars. 


Manual  of  sword— Cont’d. 

Officers  mounted,  draw' 
and  return  sword  . . .487,  496 


Order  sword,  when  exe- 
cuted   491 

Position  of  sword  at 

double  time 494 

Position  of  sword 
marching  at  ease  and 

at  route  step 246 

Position  of  sw'ord  w'hile 

marching,  etc 492 

Sword,  while  publishing 
orders 488 


Pars. 

Marches 

Outposts 64H-65() 

Hear  guard 616,  641-646 

Defined page  5..  641 

Modifications  of  rules 64r) 

Strength 644 

Respect  to  superiors 486 

Rifle  salute 96,  48.5 

Salute  with  hand 29,  48» 

Signals  for  drill  inove- 

nients page  7. . 

Use  hy  enlisted  men  of  about 
face  for  oflicers 486 


DISTANCES. 


Definition page  3. 

Band,  between  ranks. 500 

Band  in  column 256,  369 

Band,  open  ranks 263,  .500 

Classification  of  ranges ^ 

Close  column ' 

Column,  band 

Column  of  battalions 385 

Column  of  companies,  full 

distance 298 

Column  of  files 131,  215 

Column  of  fours,  between 

battalions 382 

Column  of  fours,  between 

companies 282 

Column  of  fours,  between 

ranks 196 

Column  of  masses,  between 

battalions 410 

Column  of  platoons,  be- 
tween platoons 226 

Column  of  subdivisions 298 

Column  of  twos 214 

Company  in  extended  or- 
der, betw'een  echelons 577 

Corporal  in  front  and  rear, 

extended  order 520 

Drum  major  in  front  of 
band 501 


Echelon,  betw'een  battal- 
ions  4.57 

Firings 536-539 

Forming  line,  between 

guides 257 

Guides,  posting  of,  succes- 
sive formations 288 

In  mass 3.34 

File  closers pago  4. . .3.34 

Open  ranks 190,  26.3 

Platoon,  between  firing  line 

and  support 5.59 

Ranges,  classification 540 

Reserve  in  rear  of  supports, 

battalion 604 

Route  step,  between  ranks.  245 

Saluting  distance 485 

Successive  formations, 
guides  from  fiank  or  head 

of  column 288 

Two  or  more  lines,  be- 
tween lines,  brigade 465 

Two  or  more  lines,  be- 
tween lines,  division 483 

Two  or  more  lines,  be- 
tween lines,  regiment 385 

Unsling  and  sling  knap- 
sacks  98 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC.  345 


INTERYALS. 


Pars. 

Definition page  5. 

Band,  battalion  in  line 256 

Band,  between  files 500 

Band,  regiment  in  line 369 

Bayonet  exercise 152-156 

Column  of  fours,  twos,  or 

files,  file  closers 197 

Color  bearer,  from  flank  of 

color  company 254 

Guard  mounting,  between 

old  and  new  guard 726 

In  ranks 19,  122,  189 

Line,  band 256,  369 

Line,  between  battalions  ...  371 

Line,  between  brigades 482 

Line,  between  companies  . . 257 

Line,  between  regiments . . . 462 

Line  of  columns,  band 256 

Line  of  columns  of  fours,  be- 
tween companies 320 


Pars. 

Line  of  companies  or  pla- 
toons in  columns  of  fours.  409 
Line  of  masses,  between 


battalions 371 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 

between  battalions 454 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 

close  and  full 354 

Line  of  platoons  in  columns 
of  fours,  between  pla- 
toons   237 

Line  of  sections,  between 

sections 574 

Line  of  skirmishers,  be- 
tween companies 604 

Line  of  skirmishers,  be- 
tween skirmishers 519 

Line  of  squads,  between 
squads 560 


GENERAL  RULES  AND  RULES  OF  GENERAL  AF- 
PLICATION. 


About  face  for  officers,  use 

of,  by  enlisted  men 486 

Adjust  sight,  before  aim- 
ing  534 

Adjutant  and  sergeant- 
major  assure  guides  for 

close  column 337 

Adjutant  and  sergeant- 
major,  when  guide  in 

column  is  changed 300 

Advance  guard 614,  636-640, 

644,  645 

After  passing  reviewing 

officer 667,  687,  688 

Aim 534 

Alignments 112,  122,  189,  279, 

280,  380,  509 

Alignments  in  extended  or- 
der   509 

Announcement  of  guide, 
changing  direction,  col- 
umn of  subdivisions 228 


Arrangement  of  troops  of 

different  arms,  etc 663 

“As you  were” 17 

Attention,  in  extended  or- 
der   506 

Back  step  from  order 112 

Band  and  field  music,  posts 

of 256,  260,  369 

Bands  play,  turn  out  of  col- 
umn, etc.,  at  review 683 

Band  takes  post  in  line, 

when 260 

Base  company,  extended 

order 604,  609 

Base  file,  skirmisher,  or 
guide,  extended  order.  .515,  516, 
520,  521 

Base  squad,  extended  or- 
der  559.  583 

Basis  of  extended  order  ....  502 

Battalion  awaiting  comple- 
tion of  movement 370 


346 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 

GENERAL  RULES,  ETC.— Continued. 


Pars. 

Battalion  in  action. . . .602,  603,  608 


Battalion  in  fighting  line  ...  621 

Battle  exercises 113,  558 

Blank  cartridges  in  battle 

exercises 558 

Boxes  closed  after  execut- 
ing order  or  order  kneel- 
ing  79 

Brigades  at  ease  at  review  . 678 

By  the  numbers 48 

Cadence  of  motions  in 

manual 47 

Captain,  at  command 

“ guide  center  ” 272 

Captain,  dressing  company 

in  line 258 

Captain,  in  alignments 189 

Captain,  in  column  of  fours, 

twos,  or  files 197 

Captain,  in  loadings  and 


Captain,  in  turn  and  halt. . . 192 

Cartridges,  use  of 94 

“ Cease  firing,  load,”  use  of.  149 

Cease  firing,  when  com- 
mand may  be  given 148 

Center  of  company  changed 

to  flanks 247 

Ceremonies  (see  general 
rules,  under  c e r e m o - 

nies) 663-66b 

Change  of  guides  to  line  of 
file  closers  and  reverse . . . 247 

Changing  direction,  passing 

in  review 667 

Chief  leaving  post  in  ex- 
tended order 510 

Chief  of  platoon  in  ex- 
tended order 559 

Chief  of  sections,  forming 
line  of  squads  or  skir- 
mishers  559 

Chief  of  subdivision  in  col- 
umn, alignments 189 

Chief  of  subdivision  in  col- 
umn, takes  post  when. . . . 220 


Pars. 

Close  column,  deploy- 

ments 346,  347 

Close  column,  distance  be- 
tween companies 334 

Close  column,  file  closers. . ^4 

Close  column,  leading  or 
designated  company  in 

front 337 

Close  column,  movements 
same  as  in  column  at  full 

distance 343,  345 

Close  column,  ployments. . . 337 

Close  ranks  from  order 112 

Colonels  and  majors,  facing 
line  to  give  commands  at 

review 680 

Colonels  and  majors  salute 

at  review,  when 680 

Color  escorted  to  and  from 

color  company 499 

Color  guard  in  loadings  and 

firings 265 

Color,  in  extended  order  . . . 604 

Color  salutes,  w^hen 498,  682 

Column  of  battalions,  dis- 
tance   385 

Column  of  files 117, 131,  215 

Column  of  fours  in  regi- 
ment, movements  ex- 
plained from  march 384 

Column  of  masses,  distances 

and  ployment 410 

Column  of  subdivisions,  full 

distance 298 

Commanders  draw  and  re- 
turn sword  at  review . 676 

Commanders,  in  extended 

order,  use  of  scouts 582 

Commanders  take  places 
in  column  at  reviews, 

when 674 

Commanders  turning  out  of 

column  at  review 677 

Command  “fire,”  when 

given 146 

Commands .6,  250,  370 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES.  ETC. 


'm 


Commands,  by  chiefs  of 

platoons 

Commands  for  firings 

Commands  given  by  trum- 
pet repeated  orally 

Commands,  intervals  be- 
tween, in  firings 

Commands  repeated  at 

reviews 679,  680 

Commencement  of  instruc- 
tion, extended  order 503 

Commencement  of  instruc- 
tion with  arms 44 

Companies  brought  to 
carry  and  right  shoulder 

at  review 667 

Company,  extended  or- 
der,   577-580 

Composition  of  firing  line, 

extended  order 559 

Corporal,  as  squad  leader . . 115 

Corporal,  in  extended  or- 
der  115,  510,  513,  515-517, 

520,  522,  527,  528,  559,  572 

Correction  of  errors 17 

Courtesy  among  military 

men 485 

Departures  from  general 
rules  for  fire  discipline  . . . 535 

Deployment  as  skirmish- 
ers  521 

Deployments  forward  and 
by  the  flank,  extended 

order 518 

Deployments  of  close  col- 
umn  346, 347 

Deployments  of  column  of 

masses 419-423 

Designation  of  base  com- 
pany, extended  order 604 

Designation  of  center 
squad  and  point  of  direc- 
tion  559,  583 

Detachments, . details,  etc., 

movements  of 192 

Discretion  of  command- 
ers   608,  621,  629 


P^rrk 

Disengaged  hand  at  double 

time ....  11^ 

Distance  between  ranks.73,  98.  110 
Distance  leading  four,  sub- 
division, etc.,  advances 

before  halting 209 

Distances  in  close  column. . 334 

Distances  in  column  of  sub- 
divisions  298 

Double  rank,  habitual  for- 
mation, for  infantry 1 

Double  time  taken  by  bat- 
. talion,  after  passing  re- 
viewing officer 687 

Dress,  in  column  of  fours  . . 199 

Dressing  in  extended  or- 
der   509 

Echelon,  definition  and  use 

of  term page  4.  .577,  603 

Enemy  imaginary,  outlined, 

represented 505 

Enlisted  men  in  line  of  file- 
closers,  manual  of  arms. . 193 

Evening  gun page  286. . 769 

Execution  of  movements  at 
signals,  extended  order. 511,  512 
Exercise  of  squad,  in  ex- 
tended order 514 

Explanations  made  for 

double  rank 114 

Extended  order  from  any 

formation 507 

Extended  order,  positions 

of  piece 106 

Face  to  the  front  in  ex- 
tended order,  when 508 

Facings,  from  order 112 

Fall  in 19,  20,  120,  187 

Field  and  staff  at  cere- 
monies, when  mounted, 

etc 665 

Field  and  staff  officers, 

mounted 255 

Field  music  sounds  march, 
flourishes,  ruffles,  and  to 

the  color 500,  684 

Fighting  line 603,  62i 


GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. -Continued. 
Pars. 

220 
143 

769 

146 


348 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 


File  closers,  duties  and  re- 
sponsibility  page  4.. 

File  closers,  in  close  col- 
umn   

File  closers,  in  column  of 

fours,  etc 

File  closers,  manual  of 

arms 

Fire,  at  objective 

Fire  at  will 

Fire  discipline. 

Fire  discipline,  how  main- 
tained in  extended  order. 

Fire,  when 

Fire  with  counted  car- 
tridges  

Firing  line 

Firing,  pending  comple- 
tion of  successive  forma- 
tion  288  (m) 

Firings 142-144,  146,641-546 

Firings  by  battalion,  etc 268 

Firings,  executed  at  halt. . . 542 

Firings,  extended  order, 

duties  of  instructor 541 

Firings,  extended  order, 

volleys 543 

Firings,  in  regiment 373 

First  sergeant,  position  of. . 247 

Flag  and  orderlies  of  re- 
viewing ofidcer 670 

Flanks  of  company  changed 

to  center 247 

Formation,  advancing  con- 
siderable distances 275 

Forming  line  by  two 
movements,  command 

“march” 293 

Forward  march,  on  com- 
pletion of  wheel  by  fours.  199 

Four 180,  181 

Fours  wheel  about  toward 
point  of  rest,  forming  line 

faced  to  the  rear 292 

Full  distance,  column  of 
subdivisions 298 


.'ars. 

General  principles,  extend- 
ed order 502-510 

General  principles.  Infantry 

Drill  Regulations 1-9 

Grouping  of  company  into 

squads 179 

Grouping  of  recruits 16,  115 

Guard  mounting 712-732 

Guard  mounting,  cavalry 

and  infantry  united 731 

Guard  mounting  in  bad 

weather,  etc 730 

Guard  mounting,  interval 
between  old  and  new 

guard 726 

Guard  mounting,  open 

ranks 714 

Guard  mounting,  supernu- 
meraries  71^ 

Guard  mounting,  without 

review 725 

Guide,  announcement 

of 136,  228,  251 

Guide,  forming  line  from 

column  of  platoons 231 

Guide,  in  oblique  marching  130 

Guide,  in  turn  and  halt 192 

Guide  of  second  or  rear 

platoon  in  column 220 

Guide  of  squad,  in  extended 

order .515,  510 

Guides  and  enlisted  men  in 
line  of  file  closers,  manual 

of  arms 193 

Guides,  in  alignments 189 

Guides,  in  column  of  fours, 

twos,  or  files 197 

Guides,  in  column  of  subdi- 
visions, duties  of 3(X> 

Guides,  in  forming  close 

column,  how  assured 337 

Guides  in  front  marking 

line 193 

Guides,  in  successive  for- 
mations, when  firing  is  to 
coram^^nce .288(m) 


GENERAL  RULES,  ETC.-Continued. 
Pars. 

248 

3;34 

197 

193 
534 
538 
534,  535 


591 

534 


538 

559 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 


349 


Guides,  manual  of  arms 

Guides  marching  at  route 

step  and  at  ease 

Guides  of  platoons  or  sub- 
divisions, at  command 

“ front  ” 

Guides  of  rear  companies, 
forming  line  by  two  move- 
ments  

Guides  of  subdivisions  in 

column 

Guides,  position  of  piece  . . . 
Guides,  posting  of,  by  them- 
selves   

Guides,  posting  of,  dis- 
tance   

Guides,  posting  of,  forma- 
tions front  into  line 

Guides,  posting  of,  forma- 
tions into  line 

Guides,  posting  of,  forma- 
tions into  line  faced  to  the 

rear 

Guides,  posting  of,  forma- 
tions on  right  or  left  into 

line 

Guides,  posting  of,  in 

changes  of  front 

Guides,  posting  of,  in  de- 
ployments   

Guides,  posting  of,  in  form- 
ing line  of  masses 

Guides,  posting  of,  prolong- 
ing line 

Guides,  posting  of,  succes- 
sive formations  of  regi- 
ment  385 

Guides,  posting  of,  time  of . 288(b) 

Guides,  recovering  direc- 
tion   300 

Guides  take  post 189 

Habitual  formation  ad- 
vancing considerable  dis- 
tances   275 

Habitual  formation  for  in- 
fantry   1 


Pars, 


iments  and  battalions 

moving  into  position 4f;4 

Halting  leading  subdivision 
at  less  than  prescribed  dis- 
tance   209 

Hammer  at  safety  notch 49,  70 

Honors  to  be  paid  by  troops  662 

Indication  of  objective  and 

range 146 

Individual  men  and  sharp- 
shooters, ranges 536 

Inspection,  band 743 

Inspection  of  quarters 745 

Instruction  in  extended 
order,  to  commence, 

when 503 

Instruction  of  officers,  etc.  185,  252 
Intensity  of  fire,  how  regu- 
lated   544 

Interval  and  distance,  in 


Interval  in  line,  how 

taught 19,  122 

Intervals  between  battal- 
ions  371 

Intervals  between  battal- 

xons,  full  and  close 409 

Intervals  between  brigades . 482 

Intervals  between  compa- 
nies in  battalion 257 

Intervals  between  compa- 
nies in  line  of  skirmish- 
ers  604 

Intervals  between  regiments 

in  brigade 462 

Intervals  between  skirmish- 
ers  519 

Intervals  in  line  of  platoon 


Intervals  in  line  of  sec- 
tions  574 

Intervals  in  line  of  squads. . 560 

In  two  lines,  position  and 
movements  of  second 
line 385 


GENERAL  RULES,  ETC.-Continued. 
Pars. 

193, 

319 
189 

293 

189,  300 
193 

288(k) 

288(g) 

288(d) 

288(a) 

288(i) 

288(c) 

288(f) 

288(e) 

432 
288(h) 


350 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 


GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. -Continued. 


Pars. 

Kneel  or  lie  down,  extended 

order 522 

Leading  four  or  subdivision, 

where  halted 209 

Length  of  drills 11 

Length  of  steps 31,  34,  37-39 

Line  of  masses 432 

Line  of  platoon  columns, 

movements 355,  357,  364 

Load,  when 534 

Loose  pieces 100 

Maintenance  of  squad,  ex- 
tended order 502 

Major  commands  “guides 
posts”  on  completion  of 
successive  formations  into 

line 288(1) 

Majors,  forming  line  of  col- 
umns of  fours,  in  regi- 
ment  399 

Major,  in  loadings  and  fir- 
ings   265,  266 

Manual  of  arms  : 

battle  exercises 113 

color  guard 265 

guides  and  enlisted  men 
in  line  of  file  clos- 
ers  193 

hammer  at  safety  notch  49,  70 
marching  and  halting. . 112 

open  chambers 46 

piece  in  front  of  body  . . 49 

position  of  thumb 49 

resume  carry,  last  mo- 
tion   49 

when  marchings,  etc., 

are  understood 112 

March  and  stand  at  ease.  .246,  509 
March  at  ease  and  route 

step 246,  319 

Marching,  by  the  fiank  un- 
der fire 559 

Marching  with  arms,  re- 
cruits  Ill 

March  in  review  at  quick 
time  only,  except  for  sin- 
gle battalion 686 


Pars. 

March  taken  up  on  com- 


pletion of  wheel  by 

fours 199 

Marking  points  where  col- 
umn changes  direction, 
etc.,  in  reviews 667 


Measuring  distances  and 
intervals,  pages  3 and  5. . . 
Memorizing  drill  signals, 

page  286,  769 

Modifications  of  formation 

for  review 685 

Morning  gun page  286,  769 

Mounted  officers,  about 255 

Mounted  officers,  draw  and 

return  sword 487,  496 

Mounted  officers,  in  extend- 
ed order 604 

Mounted  trumpeters  and  or- 
derlies  369,  463 

Movements  by  battalions, 
simultaneous  and  sepa- 
rate  370 

Movements  by  companies 
or  platoons,  simultane- 
ous   251 

Movements  by  platoons  in 

battalion 348,  351 

Movements  by  platoons  in 

regiment 454-456 

Movements  by  platoons 

same  as  by  companies 331 

Movements  executed  at  sig- 
nals, extended  order 511 

Movements  executed  by 
company  as  in  School  of 

the  Soldier 192 

Movements  executed  by  pla- 
toons, etc.,  as  in  School  of 

the  Soldier 192 

Movements  executed  from 

halt  or  marching 4 

Movements  in  double  time. . 5 

Movements  in  extended  or- 
der, commence  when 506 

Movements  in  extended  or- 
der, first  instruction. 503 


351 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 

GENERAL  RULES,  ETC.— Continued. 


Movements  in  extended  or- 
der made  with  reference 

to  enemy 

Movements  in  line  of  col- 
umns of  fours  in  regi- 
ment  

Movements  in  single  rank 

for  instruction 

Movements  in  which  guide 
may  be  either  right  or 

left 3 

Movements  of  battalion  like 

company 269-286 

Movements  of  brigade  on 
same  principles  as  regi- 
ment  464 

Mo\ements  of  column  of 
masses  like  column  at 

full  distance 417 

Movements  of  column  of 

platoons 224 

Movements  of  company  like 

squad 

Movements  of  division  on 
same  principles  as  bri- 


gade  479 

Movements  of  line  of  pla- 
toon columns 357 

Movements  of  line  of 
sections  like  line  of 

squads 574 

Movements  of  masses  like 

regiment  in  line 441 

Movements  of  regiment  in 
column  of  fours  explained 

from  march 384 

Movements  of  regiment  in 
column  of  fours  like  bat- 
talion   383 

Movements  of  regiment  like 


Movements  of  second  line 

in  regiment 385 

Movements  of  support,  ex- 
tended order 559 

Movements  toward  either 
flank 2 


Pars. 

Non  - commissioned  officer 
commanding  company  at 

ceremonies 666 

Non  - commissioned  officer 
commanding  detachment, 

etc.,  position  of  rifle 193 

Non  - commissioned  officer 
commanding  company, 

post  of 259 

Non  - commissioned  officer, 

commanding  guard 718,  727 

Objective,  firings 142,  146 

Object  of  bayonet  exer- 
cise   151 

Officer  of  the  guard,  super- 
numerary  717 

Officers  and  others  accom- 
pany reviewing  officer  . .669,  671 

Officers  of  the  day 722 

Open  chambers 46 

Open  ranks,  at  order 112 

Order  from  brigade  to  bat- 
talion commander 628 

Orderlies  and  trumpeters 

mounted 369,  463 

Orderlies  of  reviewing  offi- 
cer  670 

Order  of  arrangement  of 

troops 663 

Order  of  instruction.  School 

of  the  Soldier 15 

Orders  of  brigade  com- 
mander  465 

Orders  of  division  com- 
mander  483 

Order,  upon  halting 112 

Passing  from  close  to  ex- 
tended order,  the  brigade  629 
Pass  in  review  in  quick 

time 686 

Piece  in  front  of  body 49 

Pivot,  fixed  and  movable . 196,  197, 
200 

Place  of  captain  dressing 

company 258 

Place  of  reserve 629 

Platoons 179-183,  192 


Pars. 

504 

399 
114 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 


352 

GENERAL  RULES, 
Pars. 

Platoon  column 354 

Platoon  column,  full  and 

close  intervals 354,  355 

Platoon,  extended  order 559 

Ployment  of  column  of 

masses 410 

Ployments  of  close  col- 
umn   334-341 

Points  where  companies 
execute,  carry  and  right- 

shoulder,  at  review 667  i 

Position  of  the  soldier 21 

Position  of  thumb,  manual 

of  arms 49 

Positions  of  piece  for  ex- 
tended Older  and  route 

marches 106,  113 

Positions  of  piece,  re- 
cruits  Ill 

Posting  of  companies,  bat- 
talions, etc.,  for  ceremo- 
nies  664 

Posts  of  officers,  etc.,  as  in- 
structors  9 

Practice  in  giving  com- 
mands  7 

Precedence  of  troops 663 

Principles  of  extended  or- 
der   502-510 

Ranges,  classified 540 

Rapid  fire 539,  546 

Rear  guard 615,  641-645 

Rear  rank  close,  loading  and 

firing 77,  144 

Reconnoissances  and  use  of 

scouts 582,  611 

Regulation  of  progress  of 

action 608 

Re-enforcement  of  firing 

line 575,  592,  596,  609 

Relieving  the  firing  line 594 

Repetition  of  commands  . . . 250 

Repetition  of  commands 
given  by  trumpet,  page  286,  769 

Reserve,  posting  of 629 

Respect  to  superiors 485 


ETC.— Continued. 

Pars, 

Review  by  inspector  junior 
to  commanding  officer  . . . 696 

Reviewing  officer,  post  of  . . 668 

Reviewing  officer,  riding 
around  troops,  who  ac- 
company   672 

Review  of  command  larger 

than  corps 711 

Reviews  (see  general  rules 
for  reviews,  under  cere- 
monies)  667-688 

Rifle  salute 95,  485 

Right  shoulder,  at  com- 
mand ‘ • double  time  ” 112 

Riding  around  troops,  staff, 
etc.,  of  reviewing  offi- 
cer   672,  673 

Route  marches,  positions  of 

piece 106 

Rushes .556,  .588-590,  .592 

Salute  by  color 498,  682 

I Salute  color  by  uncovering.  669 

i Salutes  returned  by  review- 
ing officer 669 

Salute  to  the  color,  in  re- 
views   669 

Salute  with  hand 29,  485 

Salute  with  rifle 95,  485 

School  of  the  soldier : 

correction  of  errors 17 

grouping  of  recruits 16 

instructors 12,  14 

length  of  drills 11 

object 10 

order  of  instruction 15 

Scouts,  use  and  duties 

of 582,  583,  585,  596 

Sections 179-183 

Section  constituting  firing 

line,  extended  order 573 

Sharpshooters,  firing  in  ex- 
tended order 536 

Side  step  from  order 112 

Signals  and  trumpet  calls, 

practice 8 

Signals,  use  of page  7.  .506,  533 


INDEX-GENERAL  RULES,  ETC. 


353 


GENERAL  RULES,  ETC.-Continued. 
Pars. 


Simultaneous  movements 

by  battalions 370 

Simultaneous  movements 
by  companies  or  platoons  251 
Single  rank,  used  in  first  in- 
struction  114 

Sounding  calls page  286,  769 

Sounding  of  march,  fiour- 
ishes  or  ruffles  at  review. . 684 


Squad,  extended  order 518-522 

Squad  leader.  115,  510,  513,  515-517 
520,  522,  527,  528,  559,  572 
Squad  leaders,  how  re- 
placed  502 

Squads,  when  broken  up. . . 502 

Stacks  to  be  made  with 

stacking  swivel 99 

Staff,  etc.,  of  commanders, 

at  review 675 

Staff,  etc.,  of  commanders 
turning  out  of  column  at 

review 677 

Staff,  etc.,  of  reviewing  offi- 
cer   669,  670 

Staff,  etc.,  riding  around 

troops  at  review 673 

Staff,  etc.,  when  command- 
er faces  line 681 


Pars. 

Staff  of  colonel,  brigade 
commander,  etc.,  salute 

at  review,  when 680 

Staff  officers  draw  and  re- 
turn sword,  when 676 

Staff  officers  of  brigade 

commander 463 

Staff  officers  of  colonel 369 

Staff  salute  at  command  . . . 680 

Stand  and  march  at  ease,  in 

extended  order 509 

Successive  formations 288,  385 

Support,  extended  order 559 

Swing  of  arms 192 

Sword,  position  of,  march- 
ing, etc 492 

Sword,  position  of,  at  double 

time 494 

Sword,  when  drawn  and  re- 
turned by  officers 495 

Sword,  while  publishing  or- 
ders  488 

Troops  return  to  camp,  etc., 

after  review 667,  687,  688 

Two  or  more  lines,  in  regi- 
ment, distance 385 

Volleys,  use  of 537,  543,  591 

Wheels  by  fours  on  fixed 
pivot 197 


V 


? ( rj;i 


t JUi/T 

...1  ii  . Un" : ;i{ 

I V '■  \i-  in'.O'i  . ,y 

. . ■•  •'  '•  < ■ • . hr  .'  'DU  , - I v7 
' I . ‘r, ' !D  X ' . . 

.-A,. 


V 


'•  •*•■■  i J'  ' ‘ , I 

:..C.  K ■ / - . T . 


To  this  edition  of  the  urill  Regulations  have  been 
added  the  sections  of  **  Official  Regulations  for  the  Army 
of  tne  United  States,  1889,”  referred  to  in  the  text. 
With  this  exception  this  is  an  exact  reproduction  of  the 
edition  of  the  Regulations  printed  for  the  War  Depart- 
ment at  the  Government  Printing  Office.  Heretofore, 
on  the  adoption  of  new  tactics,  numerous  questions  as 
to  their  interpretation  have  arisen.  Those  relating  to 
the  interpretation  of  Casey’s  Tactics  were  answered 
through  the  Army  and  Navy  Journal  by  General 
Casey,  on  whose  staff  the  Editor  of  the  Journal  served 
during  the  War  of  the  Rebellion.  When  Upton’s  Tao 
tics  were  adopted  questions  concerning  them  were 
answered  through  the  Journal  by  General  Upton 
during  his  lifetime.  Since  his  death  such  questions 
have,  when  necessary,  been  referred  by  the  Editor  of 
the  Journal  to  the  proper  authorities  for  official 
determination.  This  practice  will  be  continued  by  the 
Army  and  Navy  Journal  in  the  case  of  such  questions 
concerning  the  interpretation  of  these  Drill  Regulations 
as  appear  to  require  official  interpretation  to  settle 
disputes. 


f 


^Y.(p.‘jyifiib;i*.>-«,,*;/,,^rv 

. *,'>:*>  1 'iJt  .••)  r>,i.i1^i 

' '•»  ..  M W .■.»••  ^ r.  ; V . 

'.'t'/,  '.tl  ’!,{  I , 


■ .t''  ’i-.J  iOi\>';  I *.  .*•  ...  ) . ■ , : ■ 

.'  ..  J:-’  .»ii:/n*>ri 

. - fa  ..ianfHM'r. - :S  ..  •'  1 r ■•■■* 
/Ni)i .t  ^ M,..  • . 

• •-  10.4 

■ ’ 

---V  .7 

’it.i  noi 

,-rj  , ■.  . 

' .. 

'•|^X>’i;i^a  a/ y.y.  .:‘jf.  • ir  J ; •;,,* 

fr,  :vv  .a,;,-;] 

J-  1 

iVi/.  mri 

itto  LO, 


' ''■  ■ ' ■ • 'ul  • .-  v,' ! ' ; 


' 'r'"  r:  i” 

■/"Oltff,,  ., 

(.0  '!<  > w ;■'"  I ' I I i f ; 5 • < 'XHfcyf  - a f ji! , 

.V  y I n,;  ,^;v.  ' 

' r«'.‘vn^v  'iv-;  '*>?{>■  a 

> 


f, 

i 


-T  HE- 


1 

ARMY  AND  NAVY  JOURNAL 


Publishes  weekly  official  orders  and  other  information  of  immediate 
interest  as  well  as  of  historical  value  concerning  the  military  services 
which  can  be  found  nowhere  else,  including  a professional  account  of 
the  movements  of  our  own  and  foreign  armies  and  navies,  and  a 
description  of  the  experiments  and  discoveries  illustrative  of  military 
and  naval  science. 

To  this  edition  of  the  Drill  Regulations  have  been  added  the  sections 
of  “Official  Regulations  for  the  Army  of  the  United  States,  1889,” 
referred  to  in  the  text.  With  this  exception  this  is  an  exact  reproduc- 
tion of  the  edition  of  the  Regulations  printed  for  the  War  Department 
at  the  Government  Printing  Office.  Heretofore,  on  the  adoption  of  new 
tactics,  numerous  questions  as  to  their  interpretation  have  arisen. 
Those  relating  to  the  interpretation  of  Casey’s  Tactics  were  answered 
through  the  Army  and  Navy  J ournal  by  General  Casey,  on  whose 
staff  the  Editor  of  the  Journal  served  daring  the  War  of  the  Rebellion. 
When  Upton’s  Tactics  were  adopted  questions  concerning  them  were 
answered  through  the  Journal  by  General  Upton  during  his  lifetime. 
Since  his  death  such  questions  have,  when  necessary,  been  referred  by 
the  Editor  of  the  Journal  to  the  proper  authorities  for  official  deter- 
mination. This  practice  will  be  continued  by  the  Army  and  Navy 
Journal  in  the  case  of  such  questions  concerning  the  interpretation  of 
these  Drill  Regulations  as  appear  to  require  official  interpretation  to 
settle  disputes. 

The  list  of  contributors  to  the  Journal,  past  and  present,  contains 
the  names  of  such  distinguished  soldiers  and  sailors  as  Gtenerals 
Sherman,  Sheridan,  McClellan,  Hancock,  Gilmore,  Terry,  Upton,  Barry, 
Hazen,  Hunt,  Casey;  Admirals  Porter,  Ammen,  Almy, Walker,  Jenkins, 
and  Lord  Wolseley  and  Lord  Alcester  of  the  British  service,  besides  a 
host  of  others,  scarcely  less  well  known. 

For  sale  by  newsdealers,  or  can  be  ordered  from 

VI.  C.  & F.  P.  CHURCH,  Publishers. 

New  York. 


Subscriptions:  60  cents  a month;  $3.00  six  months;  $6.00  a year* 
lAUral  termi  to  club$. 


NEW  I 

The  War  Deparl 
Arms  for  the 


UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS-URBANA 


3 0112  000839479 


It  has  oeen  puoiisnea  ujf  ' 


ARMY  AND  NAVY  JOURNAL 


In  a small  pamphlet,  uniform  with  the  Drill  Regu- 
lations. It  will  be  sent  by  mail,  prepaid  for  10c. 


NEW  ARMY  REGULATIONS, 

GOVERNMENT  EDITION. 

Sent  Postage  Prepaid  on  Beceipt  of  Price,  $1.(111. 


ARMY  AND  NAVY  JOURNAL 

Bennett  Building,  93-101  Nassau  St.,  New  York. 


